Century Class ST and Coronado Driver's Manual

Foreword
Introduction dination, or Fleetpack assistance. Our people are

knowledgeable, professional, and committed to fol-
This manual provides information needed to operate lowing through to help you keep your truck moving.
and understand the vehicle and its components.
More detailed information is contained in the Owner’s
Warranty Information for North America booklet, and
Reporting Safety Defects
in the vehicle’s workshop and maintenance manuals. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
Custom-built Freightliner vehicles are equipped with
death, you should immediately inform the National
various chassis and cab components. Not all of the
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
information contained in this manual applies to every
vehicle. For details about components in your ve- addition to notifying Daimler Trucks North America
hicle, refer to the chassis specification pages in- LLC.
cluded in all new vehicles and to the vehicle specifi- If the NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
cation decal, located inside the vehicle. open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
For your reference, keep this manual in the vehicle defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
at all times. recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
IMPORTANT: Descriptions and specifications in this between you, your dealer, or Daimler Trucks North
manual were in effect at the time of printing. Freight-
America LLC.
liner Trucks reserves the right to discontinue models
and to change specifications or design at any time To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
without notice and without incurring obligation. De- Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
scriptions and specifications contained in this publi- 1-800-424-9153); go to www.safercar.gov; or
cation provide no warranty, expressed or implied, write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
and are subject to revisions and editions without no- Avenue, SE, Washington, DC 20590. You can also
tice. obtain other information about motor vehicle safety
from www.safercar.gov.
Environmental Concerns and
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-
Recommendations related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investi-
Whenever you see instructions in this manual to dis- gations and Recalls, may telephone the toll-free
card materials, you should first attempt to reclaim hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contact Transport
and recycle them. To preserve our environment, fol- Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD,
low appropriate environmental rules and regulations Place de Ville Tower C, 330 Sparks Street, On-
when disposing of materials. tario, Canada K1A 0N5.
For additional road safety information, please visit
Event Data Recorder the Road Safety website at: www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices
that record specific vehicle data. The type and
amount of data recorded varies depending on how
the vehicle is equipped (such as the brand of engine,
if an air bag is installed, or if the vehicle features a
collision avoidance system, etc.).
Customer Assistance Center

Having trouble finding service? Call the Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-385-4357 or 1-800-FTL-
HELP. Call night or day, weekdays or weekends, for
dealer referral, vehicle information, breakdown coor-
STI-411-2 (10/11)
A24-01036-000
Printed in U.S.A.
Foreword
© 1996–2011 Daimler Trucks North America LLC. All rights reserved. Daimler Trucks North America LLC is a Daimler
company.
No part of this publication, in whole or part, may be translated, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted
in any form by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written per-
mission of Daimler Trucks North America LLC. For additional information, please contact Daimler Trucks North
America LLC, Service Systems and Documentation, P.O. Box 3849, Portland OR 97208–3849 U.S.A. or refer to
www.Daimler-TrucksNorthAmerica.com and www.FreightlinerTrucks.com.
Contents
Chapter Page
Introduction, Environmental Concerns and Recommendations,
Event Data Recorder, Customer Assistance Center, Reporting
Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword
1 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
2 Instruments and Controls Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
3 Vehicle Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
4 Heater and Air Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
5 Seats and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
6 Steering and Brake Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
7 Engines and Clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
8 Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
9 Rear Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
10 Fifth Wheels and Trailer Couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
11 Pretrip and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
12 Cab Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
13 In an Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.1
1
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Specification Decal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS) Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Tire and Rim Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
EPA Emission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Vehicle Specification Decal 1 2 3

The vehicle specification decal lists the vehicle
model, identification number, and major component
models. It also recaps the major assemblies and in-
stallations shown on the chassis specification sheet.
11/21/96 f080053
One copy of the specification decal is attached to the
driver’s side sunvisor; another copy is inside the rear 1. Date of Manufacture: by month and year
cover of the Owner’s Warranty Information for North 2. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating: developed by taking
the sum of all the vehicle’s gross axle ratings
America booklet. An illustration of the decal is shown
3. Gross Axle Weight Ratings: developed by
in Fig. 1.1. considering each component in an axle system -
including suspension, axle, wheels, and tires - and
using the lowest component capacity as the value
COMPONENT INFORMATION for the system
MANUFACTURED BY USE VEHICLE ID NO.
WHEN ORDERING PARTS Fig. 1.2, Certification Label, U.S.
MODEL
VEHICLE ID NO.
WHEELBASE
DATE OF MFR
ENGINE MODEL
ENGINE NO.
TRANS NO.
1 2 3
TRANS MODEL MAIN FRT AXLE NO. GAWR TIRES RIMS PSI COLD
FRONT AXLE MODEL REAR AXLE NO.
REAR AXLE MODEL REAR AXLE NO.
VEHICLE ID NO.
DATE OF MFR
FRONT AXLE
FIRST INTERMEDIATE AXLE
GVWR SECOND INTERMEDIATE AXLE
RATIO THIRD INTERMEDIATE AXLE
IMRON PAINT−CAB REAR AXLE
PAINT MFR CAB COLOR A: WHITE (4775) FOR COMPLETE PAINT INFORMATION TIRES AND RIMS LISTED ARE NOT NECESSARILY THOSE INSTALLED ON THE VEHICLE. 24−00273−040
PAINT NO. CAB COLOR B: BROWN (3295) SEE VEHICLE SPECIFICATION SHEET
CAB COLOR C: BROWN (29607)
CAB COLOR D: DARK BROWN (7444) 10/31/95 f080054
PART NO. 24−00273−010
1. Date of Manufacture: by month and year

11/21/96 f080021 2. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating: developed by taking
the sum of all the vehicle’s gross axle ratings
Fig. 1.1, Vehicle Specification Decal, U.S.-Built Vehicle 3. Gross Axle Weight Ratings: developed by
Shown considering each component in an axle system -
including suspension, axle, wheels, and tires - and
NOTE: Labels shown in this chapter are ex- using the lowest component capacity as the value
amples only. Actual specifications may vary from for the system
vehicle to vehicle.
Fig. 1.3, Tire and Rim Label
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety that the vehicle conforms to all applicable FMVSS
regulations in effect on the date of completion.
Standard (FMVSS) Labels
NOTE: Due to the variety of FMVSS certification Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
requirements, not all of the labels shown will
apply to your vehicle. Standard (CMVSS) Labels
Tractors with or without fifth wheels purchased in the In Canada, tractors with fifth wheels are certified by
U.S. are certified by means of a certification label means of a "Statement of Compliance" label and the
(Fig. 1.2) and the tire and rim labels (Fig. 1.3). Canadian National Safety Mark (Fig. 1.6), which are
These labels are attached to the left rear door post, attached to the left rear door post. In addition, tire
as shown in Fig. 1.4. and rim labels (Fig. 1.3) are also attached to the left
rear door post.
If purchased for service in the U.S., trucks built with-
out a cargo body have a certification label (Fig. 1.5) If purchased for service in Canada, trucks built with-
attached to the left rear door post. See Fig. 1.4. In out a cargo body and tractors built without a fifth
addition, after completion of the vehicle, a certifica- wheel are certified by a "Statement of Compliance"
tion label similar to that shown in Fig. 1.2 must be label, similar to Fig. 1.2. This label must be attached
attached by the final-stage manufacturer. This label by the final-stage manufacturer after completion of
will be located on the left rear door post and certifies the vehicle. The label is located on the left rear door
1.1
Tire and Rim Labels

Tire and rim labels certify suitable tire and rim combi-
nations that can be installed on the vehicle, for the
given gross axle weight rating. Tires and rims in-
1
stalled on the vehicle at the time of manufacture may
have a higher load capacity than that certified by the
tire and rim label. If the tires and rims currently on
the vehicle have a lower load capacity than that
shown on the tire and rim label, then the tires and
rims determine the load limitations on each of the
axles. See Fig. 1.3.
2 EPA Emission Control

Vehicle Noise Emission Control Label
A vehicle noise emission control label (Fig. 1.7) is
attached either to the left side of the dashboard or to
the top-right surface of the frontwall between the
dash and the windshield.
11/01/95 f601086 VEHICLE NOISE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

FREIGHTLINER CORPORATION DATE OF MANUFACTURE 01/96
1. Tire and Rim Labels 2. Certification Label THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA REGULATIONS FOR NOISE EMISSION
APPLICABLE TO MEDIUM AND HEAVY TRUCKS.
THE FOLLOWING ACTS OR THE CAUSING THEREOF BY ANY PERSON ARE PROHIBITED BY
THE NOISE CONTROL ACT OF 1972:
A. THE REMOVAL OR RENDERING INOPERATIVE, OTHER THAN FOR PURPOSES OF
Fig. 1.4, Labels Location MAINTENANCE, REPAIR, OR REPLACEMENT, OF ANY NOISE CONTROL DEVICE OR
ELEMENT OF DESIGN (LISTED IN THE OWNER’S MANUAL) INCORPORATED INTO THIS
VEHICLE IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE NOISE CONTROL ACT.
B. THE USE THIS VEHICLE AFTER SUCH DEVICE OR ELEMENT OF DESIGN HAS
BEEN REMOVED OR RENDERED INOPERATIVE. 24−00273−020
10/06/98 f080026
Fig. 1.7, Vehicle Noise Emission Control Label

09/28/98 f080023
IMPORTANT: Certain Freightliner incomplete
Fig. 1.5, Incomplete Vehicle Certification Label, U.S. vehicles may be produced with incomplete noise
control hardware. Such vehicles will not have a
vehicle noise emission control information label.
For such vehicles, it is the final-stage manufac-
turer’s responsibility to complete the vehicle in
conformity to U.S. EPA regulations (40 CFR Part
205) and label it for compliance.
EPA07 Exhaust Emissions

10/10/2006 f080024 Regulations
Fig. 1.6, Canadian National Safety Mark To meet January 2007 emissions regulations, en-
gines manufactured after January 1, 2007, are
post, and certifies that the vehicle conforms to all equipped with an emission aftertreatment device.
applicable CMVSS regulations in effect on the date There is a warning label on the driver’s sunvisor, ex-
of completion. plaining important new warning indicators in the driv-
er’s message display, that pertain to the aftertreat-
ment system. See Fig. 1.8.
1.2
EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM INFORMATION

INDICATOR WARNING
CHECK CHECK STOP
LAMP(S)
(Solid) (Flashing) (Flashing) (Flashing)
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Indicator Lamp Filter Regeneration Filter Regeneration Parked Regeneration Parked Regeneration Required − HEST (High Exhaust
Message(s) Recommended Necessary Required − Engine Engine Shut Down System Temperature)
Derate
Diesel Particulate Filter is reaching Filter is now Filter has reached Filter has exceeded Flashing
Filter Condition capacity. reaching maximum maximum capacity. maximum capacity. A regeneration is in
Switch.
capacity. progress.
Required Action Bring vehicle to To avoid engine Vehicle must be Vehicle must be parked and a
highway speeds to derate bring vehicle parked and a Parked Parked Regeneration or Service Solid
allow for an Automatic to highway speeds Regeneration must Regeneration must be performed. Exhaust Components
Regeneration or to allow for an be performed − Check engine operator’s manual and exhaust gas are
perform a Parked Automatic engine will begin for details −engine will shut down. at high temperature.
Regeneration. Regeneration or derate. When stationary, keep
perform a Parked away from people and
Regeneration as flammable materials
soon as possible. or vapors.
For a driver performed Parked Regeneration, vehicle must be equipped with a dash mounted Regeneration Switch.
See Engine Operator’s Manual for complete Regeneration Instructions.

24−01583−000B
06/29/2009 f080147
Fig. 1.8, Sunvisor Warning Label
It is a violation of federal law to alter exhaust plumb-

ing or aftertreatment in any way that would bring the
engine out of compliance with certification require-
ments. (Ref: 42 U.S.C. S7522(a) (3).) It is the own-
er’s responsibility to maintain the vehicle so that it
conforms to EPA regulations.
1.3
2
Instruments and Controls
Identification
Instrument and Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Instrumentation Control Unit 4M (ICU4M and ICU4M-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Instrumentation Control Unit 3 (ICU3/ICU3 ‘07), Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
Instrumentation Control Unit, Level III (ICU2M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
Instrumentation Control Unit, Level II, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39
Roll Stability Advisor and Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54
Exterior Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57
Meritor WABCO Antilock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57
Collision Warning System (CWS), Eaton VORAD EVT–300 (Stand Alone), Optional . . . . . . . . . . . 2.58
Collision Warning System (CWS), Eaton VORAD EVT–300 (with ICU-Integrated display),
Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.62
Lane Guidance System, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.68
Instruments and Controls Identification
Instrument and Control Panel 2. The engine ECU begins to reduce the maximum
engine torque and speed.
Figure 2.1 and Fig. 2.2 represent a portion of a typi- 3. If the condition does not improve, the engine will
cal Freightliner left-hand-drive (LH DR) dash. Figure
shut down within 30 seconds.
2.3 and Fig. 2.4 represent a portion of a typical
Freightliner right-hand-drive (RH DR) dash. The left- The driver must safely bring the vehicle to a stop on
hand-drive and right-hand-drive dashes are shown the side of the road and shut down the engine as
equipped with all of the standard and many of the soon as the red light is seen. If the engine shuts
optional instruments and accessories. Most standard down while the vehicle is in a hazardous location, the
and optional instrument gauges and switches can be engine can be restarted after turning the key to the
mounted in either of these dashes. OFF position for a few seconds.
The instrumentation control unit (ICU) houses most NOTE: Some engines can be programmed to
warning and indicator lights, most gauges, and a derate rather than shut down.
message display screen. Warning messages and
diagnostic fault codes will appear in the message Instrumentation Control Unit
display screen. The dash light bars have warning
and indicator lights that may be lettering or icons. Up 4M (ICU4M and ICU4M-2)
until December 31, 2006 the warning and indicator
lights are a mixture of ISO icons, and lettering. Since General Information
January 2007, ISO icons are used for all standard The ICU4M is used on vehicles with engines manu-
warning and indicator lights on the dash light bar. For factured up until December 31, 2006, and the
more information, see the appropriate heading in this ICU4M-2 is used on vehicles with engines manufac-
chapter, depending on the type of ICU installed in the tured January 1, 2007 or later, that are EPA07 com-
vehicle. pliant. They can be differentiated by the ISO icons on
See the descriptions of the standard warning and the ICU4M-2 dash message center. See Fig. 2.5 and
indicator lights used on the lightbars in this chapter. Fig. 2.6.
The ICU4M/ICU4M-2 instrument cluster is an
Warning and Shutdown Process indivicual-gauge cluster, with an intelligent lightbar
and integrated warning and indicator lights. See
WARNING Fig. 2.7. Some main features of the ICU4M/ICU4M-2
are:
When the red STOP engine or engine protection • gauges sweep 270 degrees and have pointers
light illuminates, most engines are programmed lit by an LED (light-emitting diode)
to shut down automatically within 30 seconds.
The driver must immediately move the vehicle to • service intervals are programmable from the
a safe location at the side of the road to prevent keypad
causing a hazardous situation that could cause
• a warning chime and alert message display
bodily injury, property damage, or severe damage
warns the driver if the door is opened without
to the engine.
first setting the parking brake
If the engine coolant temperature, the coolant level,
• if low oil pressure or high coolant temperature
the engine oil pressure, or the diesel particulate filter
for the exhaust aftertreatment system (on some en- is detected, a red warning light at the bottom of
gines, the engine oil temperature or the intake air the gauge illuminates, a warning buzzer
temperature also) reach preset levels, the engine will sounds, and a flashing alert message appears
begin a warning and shutdown process. on the display, along with a text message giv-
ing additional information
1. The red stop engine light, or engine protection
light, comes on to indicate that the engine pro-
tection system has been activated.
2.1
1 4 10 13
0 0
2 5 7 11 14
12 15
8 9
3 6 18
19 22
16
20
17 23
21
04/08/96 f541099
NOTE: Instruments and controls, and their locations, may vary from those shown.
1. Oil Pressure Gauge 13. Secondary Air Pressure Gauge
2. Engine Oil Temperature Gauge (optional) 14. Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge (optional)
3. Turbocharger Boost Pressure Gauge (optional) 15. Rear Axle Oil Temperature Gauge (optional)
4. Coolant Temperature Gauge 16. Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls
5. Voltmeter 17. 10-Key Keypad
6. Pyrometer (optional) 18. Controlled Traction Differential Control Valve Switch
7. Dash Message Center or Driver Message Center (optional)
8. Tachometer 19. Fifth Wheel Air Slide Control Valve Switch (optional)
9. Speedometer 20. Interaxle Differential Lockout Control Switch (optional)
10. Primary Air Pressure Gauge 21. Air Suspension Dump Valve (optional)
11. Fuel Gauge 22. Trailer Air Supply Valve
12. Forward Axle Oil Temperature Gauge (optional) 23. Parking Brake Control Valve
Fig. 2.1, Instrument and Control Panel Layout (upper LH DR dash shown)
2
1
3
02/09/96 f541100
1. Ignition Switch 3. AM/FM Stereo Radio/Cassette-Player/Clock
2. Heater/Air Conditioner Controls
Fig. 2.2, Instrument and Control Panel Layout (lower LH DR dash shown)
2.2
9 12 18 21
10 13 15
19 22
20 23
16 17
3 14
11
1 4
8
5
2
7
03/02/99
6 f610264
1. Trailer Air Supply Valve 12. Coolant Temperature Gauge
2. Parking Brake Control Valve 13. Voltmeter
3. Controlled Traction Differential Control Valve Switch 14. Pyrometer (optional)
(optional) 15. Dash Message Center or Driver Message Center
4. Fifth Wheel Air Slide Control Valve Switch (optional) 16. Tachometer
5. Interaxle Differential Lockout Control Switch (optional) 17. Speedometer
6. Air Suspension Dump Valve (optional) 18. Primary Air Pressure Gauge
7. 10-Key Keypad 19. Fuel Gauge
8. Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls 20. Forward Axle Oil Temperature Gauge (optional)
9. Oil Pressure Gauge 21. Secondary Air Pressure Gauge
10. Engine Oil Temperature Gauge (optional) 22. Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge (optional)
11. Turbocharger Boost Pressure Gauge (optional) 23. Rear Axle Oil Temperature Gauge (optional)
Fig. 2.3, Instrument and Control Panel Layout (upper RH DR dash shown)
2 1
03/01/99 3 f610263
1. Ignition Switch 3. AM/FM Stereo Radio/Cassette-Player/Clock
2. Heater/Air Conditioner Controls
Fig. 2.4, Instrument and Control Panel Layout (lower RH DR dash shown)
2.3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
FASTEN SEATBELTS 14
2
0000432 MILES
1 15
21 20 19 18 17 16
f610707a
12/01/2004
1. Left Turn Signal 12. Wheel Spin Indicator
2. Check Engine Indicator 13. Check Transmission Indicator
3. Optional Indicator 14. Optimized Idle Indicator
4. Engine Protection Warning 15. Right Turn Signal
5. Intake Heater Indicator 16. Low Air System Pressure Warning
6. Air Filter Indicator 17. High Beam Indicator
7. Water in Fuel Indicator 18. Parking/Emergency Brake Warning
8. Message Display Screen 19. Fasten Seat Belt Warning
9. Tractor ABS Indicator 20. No Charge Indicator (alternator)
10. Message Indicator 21. Low Vehicle Battery Voltage
11. Trailer ABS Indicator
Fig. 2.5, ICU4M Dash Message Center (typical) Pre-2007
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
CHECK STOP
FASTEN SEATBELTS ABS ABS
OPT 10
0000432 MILES IDLE
2
!
BRAKE 11
1
17 16 15 14 13 12
f610845
09/27/2006
1. Left Turn Signal 10. Optimized Idle Indicator
2. Check Engine Indicator 11. Right Turn Signal
3. Stop Engine Warning 12. Low Air System Pressure Warning
4. High Exhaust System Temperature (HEST) Warning 13. High Beam Indicator
5. Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Status Lamp 14. Parking/Emergency Brake Warning
6. Message Display Screen 15. Fasten Seat Belt Warning
7. Tractor ABS Indicator 16. Malfunction Indicater Lamp (MIL)
8. Trailer ABS Indicator 17. Low Vehicle Battery Voltage
9. Check Transmission Indicator
Fig. 2.6, ICU4M-2 Dash Message Center (typical) EPA07 Compliant
2.4
8 8
7
40 60 100 60 100
150 200 FASTEN SEATBELTS
PSI F 0000432 MILES PSI P PSI S
0 100 100 250 0 160 0 160

OIL WATER AIR AIR
1 2 11 12
15 45 55
200 12 35 1/2
10 RPM 20 190 270
F X 100 25 50
70
90 65 F
100 8 E F 110 350

300 16 110 FUEL TRANS
OIL VOLTS 30
5 25 15 75
3 4 10
130
13 14
5 85
0 30 200 200
40 90 MPH km/h
F F
PSI F
10
100 100
0
TURBO
80 30
PYRO
150
9 10 AXLE
300
AXLE
300
5 6 15 16
12/01/2004 f610706a
1. Engine Oil Pressure Gauge 9. Tachometer
2. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge 10. Speedometer
3. Engine Oil Temperature Gauge 11. Primary Air Pressure Gauge
4. Battery Voltage Gauge 12. Secondary Air Pressure Gauge
5. Turbo Boost Air Pressure Gauge 13. Fuel Level Gauge
6. Pyrometer 14. Transmission Fluid Temperature Gauge
7. Dash Message Center 15. Tandem Rear Axle Temperature Gauge, Forward
8. Warning and Indicator Lights 16. Tandem Rear Axle Temperature Gauge, Rear
Fig. 2.7, ICU4M/ICU4M-2 Instrument Cluster (typical)
Warning and Indicator Lights

Indicates an undesirable engine condition is detected or
recorded. The vehicle can still be driven. If the condition gets
CHECK Check Engine Lamp (amber)
worse, the stop engine or engine protection light will
illuminate.
Indicates a serious fault which requires the engine shut down
immediately. The engine ECU will reduce the maximum
engine torque and speed and, if the condition does not
improve, will shut down the engine within 30 seconds of the
STOP
Stop Engine or Engine Protect light illuminating. The driver must safely bring the vehicle to
Lamp (red) a stop on the side of the road and shut down the engine as
soon as the red light is seen. If the engine shuts down while
the vehicle is in a hazardous location, the engine can be
restarted after turning the key to the OFF position for a few
seconds.
2.5

Slow (10-second) flash, indicates a regeneration is in
progress, and the driver is not controlling the engine idle
speed.
High Exhaust System Temperature Solid illumination indicates a regeneration is in progress, with
(HEST) Lamp (amber) high exhaust temperatures at the outlet of the tail pipe, if the
speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h). It does not signify the need
for service; it only alerts the vehicle operator of high exhaust
temperatures. See the engine operation manual for details.
Solid illuminated indicates a regeneration is required.
Change to a more challenging duty cycle, such as highway
driving, to raise exhaust temperatures for at least 20
minutes, or perform a parked regeneration. See the engine
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) operation manual for details.
Lamp (amber)
Blinking indicates that a parked regeneration is required
immediately. An engine derate and shutdown will occur. See
the engine operation manual for details on how to perform a
stationary regeneration.
Indicates an engine emissions-related fault, including, but not
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
limited to the aftertreatment system. See the engine
(amber)
operation manual for details.
Indicates a problem with the ABS is detected. Repair the

Tractor ABS (amber) tractor ABS immediately to ensure full antilock braking
capability.
Trailer ABS lamp (amber) Indicates a fault is detected with the trailer ABS.
Flashes on and off whenever the outside turn signal lights

Left-Turn Signal (green)
are flashing.
Flashes on and off whenever the outside turn signal lights

Right-Turn Signal (green)
are flashing.
High-Beam Indicator (blue) Indicates the headlights are on high beam.
Activates with a buzzer when air pressure in the primary or

Low Air Pressure Warning (red) secondary air reservoir falls below 64 to 76 psi (440 to 525
kPa).
Activates with a buzzer when the coolant temperature goes

High Coolant Temperature Warning
above a maximum level specified by the engine
(red)
manufacturer (see the engine manual).
Activates with a buzzer when engine oil pressure goes below

Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning
a minimum level specified by the engine manufacturer (see
(red)
the engine manual).
2.6

Indicates the parking brake is engaged, or hydraulic brake
Parking/Emergency Brake
fluid pressure is low. A buzzer activates when the vehicle is
BRAKE (BRAKE!) (Red)
moving over 2 mph (3 km/h) with the parking brake set.
Illuminates for 15 seconds when the ignition key is turned to

Fasten Seat Belt (red)
the ON position.
Intake Heater (amber) Indicates the intake air heater is active.
Water in Fuel (amber) Indicates that the fuel could contain water.
Low Battery Voltage (red) Indicates battery voltage is 11.9 volts or less.
NO
CHARGE No Charge (amber) Indicates an alternator charge output failure.
The dash message center is the heart of the ICU4M/ • tachometer

ICU4M-2. See Fig. 2.5 and Fig. 2.6. It has three
• engine oil temperature
parts:
• transmission fluid temperature
• a set of 24 warning and indicator lights;
• rear axle temperature; on vehicles with tandem
• a 10-key keypad on the auxiliary instrument
axles, forward-rear, and rear-rear
panel;
• ammeter
• a message display screen in the center.
The message display screen is a two-line by twenty- • system air pressure; primary, secondary, appli-
character liquid crystal display (LCD). cation, and suspension
• pyrometer
Gauges • turbo boost air pressure
There can be up to 14 removable gauges on the Some gauges have a red warning light integrated
driver’s instrument panel. The ICU4M/ICU4M-2 can into the gauge. These are listed below, with an indi-
also drive gauges located on the auxiliary instrument cation of how the warning light is activated:
panel. Gauges cannot be removed from the front of
the panel. • engine coolant temperature (high)
The standard gauges are: • engine oil pressure (low)
• speedometer • fuel level (low)
• engine coolant temperature • transmission fluid temperature (high)
• engine oil pressure
Keypad
• battery voltmeter
The ICU4M/ICU4M-2 is controlled by a keypad lo-
• fuel level cated on the auxiliary dash panel. See Fig. 2.8. This
Other available gauges include:
2.7
Ignition Sequence
When the ignition key is turned on, the ICU4M/
ICU4M-2 begins a self-test. During the first half of
this process, the following events occur. Observing
Dedicated Keys General Keys Control Keys these events is a good way to make sure the ICU4M/
10/17/2006 f601009a ICU4M-2 is functioning properly.
Fig. 2.8, 10-Key Keypad • All gauges controlled by the cluster sweep to
full scale and return,
keypad, which has 10 keys, can be used to do the • All display segments of the message center
following tasks:
turn on and then turn off,
• Call up information onto direct access screens
• The buzzer sounds for three seconds,
while the vehicle is moving, using the dedi-
cated keys (temp, fuel, trip, and leg). • The battery voltage, low air pressure, and
parking brake warning lights come on and then
• Move from screen to screen while the vehicle
go off,
is stationary using the general keys (left, right,
and down arrow keys). • The fasten seat belt warning light illuminates
for 15 seconds.
• Program on-screen service intervals, screen
brightness, language, units of measurement, In the second half of the self-test, the software revi-
and other display functions, using the set func- sion level of the ICU4M/ICU4M-2 displays on the
tion of the set/reset key. message center, followed by the active faults, if any.
• Clear unused or obsolete data, using the reset When the self-test is complete, the fasten seat belt
function of the set/reset key. screen displays if the engine is not running. If the
engine is running, the idle hours screen displays.
• Record significant data using the event key See Fig. 2.9 for the idle hours screen (odometer
(optional—if a data logging unit is installed). display).
• Acknowledge (diamond button), cancels roll
stability alarm (RSA).
IDLE HOURS 1234:56
Buzzer and Chime
The buzzer sounds for three seconds during the self- 12.3 GAL 123456.7 MI −−−
test at start-up, and when the following conditions
exist: 12/17/2004 f610754
• low air pressure NOTE: On vehicles with automated manual transmis-

sion, the three digits on the lower right are reserved for
• low oil pressure current gear information.
• high coolant temperature Fig. 2.9, Idle Hours Screen
• the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is
moving at a speed of at least 2 mph (3 km/h) Alert Screens
• VORAD failures (e.g., WARNING HEADWAY Alert screens come on whenever the condition oc-
FAILURE) curs. They appear when the vehicle is moving; they
override the regular screen display. They are warn-
• Some roll stability (RSA) messages ings, cautions, or other messages that require the
A friendly chime sounds when the parking brake is driver’s attention, but not all of them are critical to the
off and the door is open, or when the headlights are operation of the vehicle. Warning messages always
on and the door is open. display at full brightness.
2.8
More important messages take priority over less im-

portant messages. The order of importance, or prior-
ity, is:
1. Eaton VORAD and RSA warnings (if so
WARNING
equipped) PARK BRAKE ON
2. Parking brake on (with the vehicle moving) 06/21/2007 f601414
3. Park brake off (with door open)
Fig. 2.10, Parking Brake On Screen
4. Low oil pressure, high coolant temperature
above the message "Low Oil Pressure." To dismiss
5. Hard brake warnings (if equipped with RSA) the message, press any key on the keypad.
6. Low voltage NOTE: If there is more than one alert message
7. Turn Signal On to display, pressing any key takes you to the
8. Incoming instant or Qualcomm messages
next message and so on until all the messages
have been received.
9. Service warnings
If low oil pressure is detected during the ignition se-
10. No Datalink activity quence, it displays as an active fault and the alert
screen does not appear.
"Incoming Message" Screen
After 30 seconds, this message displays again and
On vehicles with an onboard communications system can be dismissed as before by pressing any key.
like Truckweb or Qualcomm, this screen activates
whenever a message is received. "Incoming Mes- "High Coolant Temp" Screen
sage" appears on the message display screen.
This message and an alarm tone come on whenever
NOTE: The "Incoming Message" screen also the engine coolant temperature exceeds a preset
displays during the ignition sequence if a mes- point specified by the engine manufacturer (see the
sage is available. engine manual for this temperature). The word
"Warning" flashes on the message display screen
This message displays for a preset time period and above the message "High Coolant Temp."
then disappears. It returns after the preset interval
until it is dismissed by pressing any key on the key- This message follows the same rules of dismissal
pad. and display as "Low Oil Pressure."
"Parking Brake On" Screen "Low Voltage" Screen

This warning message and an alarm tone come on On some vehicles, this message and an alarm tone
whenever the parking brake is applied and the ve- come on whenever a low voltage condition is de-
hicle is moving faster than 2.5 miles per hour or the tected by the instrumentation control unit. The word
clutch has been depressed. The word "Warning" "Warning" flashes on the message display screen
flashes on the message display screen above the above the message "Low Voltage."
message "Parking Brake On." The screen and alarm
tone go away only when the parking brake is re- "Turn Signal On" Screen
leased. See Fig. 2.10. This warning message (the alarm tone is optional)
comes on whenever the turn signal remains on be-
"Low Oil Pressure" Screen yond a preset time or distance traveled. The word
This warning message and an alarm tone come on "Warning" flashes on the display screen above the
whenever the oil pressure falls below the minimum message "Turn Signal On."
oil pressure specified by the engine manufacturer, To dismiss this message, either turn off the turn sig-
whether the vehicle is idling or in motion. The word nal or press any key on the keypad.
2.9
Service Warnings • Press the LEG key for the "Leg miles and Leg
Hours" screen, and "Roll and Hard Brake"
Service warning screens display during the ignition Screen.
sequence and indicate that a service interval has
been reached or exceeded and maintenance is re- Data for each of the above screens can be reset
quired. The messages may indicate the number of (cleared). To reset, display the screen and push the
miles or hours until the next service or, once passed, Set/Reset key twice within six seconds (a confirma-
the number of miles or hours ago that maintenance tion screen will display after you press the key once).
should have been performed. The messages read "X NOTE: Resetting "Trip Miles and Hours" also
Miles To Next Service," "X Hours To Next Service," resets "Leg Miles and Hours" and "Roll Counts".
"Service Was Due X Mi Ago," and "Service Was Due
X Hr Ago." The letter X represents the number of Press the TEMP key to display the outside air tem-
miles or hours programmed. The ICU4M/ICU4M-2 perature.
can be programmed using ServiceLink to generate
service warnings in either miles or hours, but not Stationary Access Screens
both.
The stationary access screens provide a wealth of
"No Datalink Activity" Screen information. Using the general keys (arrow keys) to
scroll up, down, and to the left or right, you control
The "No Datalink Activity" screen comes on when- the following functions.
ever the datalink is not receiving data.
• Trip information including trip miles and hours,
If the condition persists, take the vehicle in for ser- idle hours and average speed, and leg miles
vice as soon as possible to discover the cause of the and hours.
problem.
• Fuel information including fuel used, fuel
Automated Manual Transmissions economy, and idle and PTO fuel usage.
• Engine information including engine miles and
The ICU4M/ICU4M-2 can display current gear infor-
hours, engine and PTO gallons, and oil level
mation for vehicles with automated manual transmis-
(on some Mercedes engines, if equipped and
sions (AMT). The last three digits at the far right on
enabled).
the lower line are reserved for this information. On
the diagrams for the stationary access screens, this • Diagnostic information including complete
is indicated by the legend "AMT." J1587 fault codes.
If there is a need to shift, one digit displays an arrow, • Service information including mileage or time
either up or down depending on the shift direction. to next service.
The other two digits display the current gear.
• Setup information of various kinds.
On vehicles with conventional manual or automatic
transmissions, these three digits do not display. For • Vehicle information including datalink status,
more information about specific models of automated ICU serial number, and software version.
manual transmissions, see Chapter 8. Many features of the ICU4M/ICU4M-2 are user-
programmable. The set function of the set/reset key
Direct Access Screens can be used to program the display. In addition, the
reset function of the set/reset key can be used to
The driver can also override the regular screen dis- reset the counters for trip and fuel information, and to
play at any time by pressing the keypad to display reset fault code screens after the faults have been
one of the direct access screens. cleared. See Fig. 2.11 for information on how to use
• Press the TRIP key for the "Trip miles and Trip the set/reset key.
Hours" screen, and "Roll Count and Hard With the parking brake released, only the odometer
Brake Count" screen. and alert screens can be displayed. Park the vehicle
• Press the FUEL key for the "Fuel Used and and set the parking brake to display additional
Average MPG" screen. screen functions.
2.10
S Push Once When in Setup, this brings up a screen where a

SET/ selection can be made.
RESET
PUSH RESET AGAIN
R Push Once
TO CONFIRM CLEAR
to get this screen
R Push Again This resets the value on the screen.
12/17/2004 f040707
AMT= Current gear information for automated manual transmissions.
Fig. 2.11, Set/Reset Key Functions
Trip Information From here, press the right arrow key again to return
to the trip information screen. From any trip informa-
Trip information allows you to view trip mileage and tion screen, press the left arrow key to return to the
time, time spent idling, average miles per hour, leg previous screen in the sequence. Press the down
mileage and time, and roll count if the vehicle has arrow key to go on to fuel information.
roll stability option. See Fig. 2.12.
When the odometer is displayed, press the right Fuel Information
arrow key to display the trip information screen. Fuel information allows you to view total fuel usage
Press the right arrow key again to display trip miles, since the last reset, fuel mileage, and fuel consumed
average miles per hour, and leg miles, in that order. while idling or running the PTO. See Fig. 2.13.
This sequence completes the trip information
screens. From the trip information screen, press the down
arrow key to display the fuel information screen.
Press the right arrow key to display fuel used and
average miles per gallon, and again to display idle
FASTEN SEATBELTS
123456.7 MILES AMT
Engine Idling Press Right Arrow Key and Set the Parking Brake
(100 RPM or more)
IDLE HOURS 1234:56

12.3GAL123456.7MI AMT
TRIP TRIP MILES 123456.7 IDLE HOURS 1234:56 LEG MILES 123456.7
INFORMATION AMT TRIP HR 1234:56 AMT AVG MPH 12.3 AMT LEG HR 1234:56 AMT
R R R
12/01/2004 Go to Fuel Information Screens f040699

NOTE: Metric unit screens are similar.
Fig. 2.12, Trip Information Screens
2.11
Return to
Idle Hours From Trip
Screen Information
FUEL FUEL USED 12345.6 IDLE GALLONS 12.3

INFORMATION AMT AVG MPG 12.34 AMT PTO GAL 12345.6 AMT
R R
Go to Engine Information Screens

12/17/2004 f040700
Fig. 2.13, Fuel Information Screens
gallons and PTO gallons. This sequence completes Diagnostic Information

the fuel information screens.
Diagnostic information allows you to view any J1587
From here, press the right arrow again to return to fault codes transmitted on the vehicle datalink. The
the fuel information screen. From any fuel informa- complete fault code is displayed both as a text mes-
tion screen, press the left arrow key to return to the sage and in numbers. Specific fault code information
previous screen in the sequence. Press the down can be displayed only with the vehicle stopped and
arrow key to go on to engine information. the parking brake set.
Engine Information During vehicle start-up, with the parking brake set,
the ICU4M/ICU4M-2 displays active fault codes, if
Engine information allows you to view total engine any, until the parking brake is released. With an ac-
mileage and hours, fuel consumption for the engine tive fault code on display, push the left arrow key to
and PTO, and engine oil level (where installed). See go to the active faults screen (gives the total number
Fig. 2.14. of active faults), and again to go to the diagnostic
NOTE: Engine oil level is an optional function information screen. From here, any of the diagnostic
information can be obtained, including information
available on vehicles with Mercedes-Benz en-
about any fault, active or historical.
gines.
NOTE: Historical faults are dash faults only.
From the fuel information screen, press the down
arrow key to display the engine information screen. Diagnostic information can also be obtained at any
Press the right arrow key to display, in order, engine time. From the odometer screen, press the right
miles/hours, engine/PTO gallons of fuel used, and, arrow key once and the down arrow key three times
when installed, engine oil level. This sequence com- to display the diagnostic information screen. See
pletes the engine information screens. Fig. 2.15.
From here, press the right arrow key again to return Active Faults
to the engine information screen. From any engine
information screen, press the left arrow key to return Active faults are current problems that require atten-
to the previous screen in the sequence. Press the tion. If active fault codes display during start-up or at
down arrow key to go on to diagnostic information. any other time, make a note of the fault code and
2.12
Return to
Idle Hours From Fuel
Screen Information
ENGINE ENG MILES 123456.7 ENG GALLONS 123456.7 ENG OIL LEVEL
INFORMATION AMT ENG HOUR1234:78AMT PTO GAL 12345.6 AMT LO −1 QTS AMT
ENG OIL LEVEL

If Oil Level Low
LO −1 QTS AMT
ENG OIL LEVEL

Go to Diagnostic Information Screens If Oil Level OK
OK AMT
ENG OIL LEVEL

If Oil Level High
HI 1 QTS AMT
12/01/2004 f040701
Fig. 2.14, Engine Information Screens
text message. Then call an authorized Freightliner mation screen. Press the right arrow key again to
service facility for assistance. display each individual historical fault, in order, until
the end of the list is reached. From any historical
From the diagnostic information screen, press the fault screen, press the down arrow key to scroll
right arrow key to display the number of active faults, through the occurrence data for each fault. This se-
then each individual fault, in order, until the end of quence completes the historical fault diagnostic
the list is reached. This sequence completes the ac- screens.
tive fault diagnostic screens.
It is possible to clear historical fault data from the
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to clear active ICU4M/ICU4M-2’s memory when the information is
faults. Bring the vehicle to an authorized no longer needed. When there are less than 254
Freightliner service facility as soon as possible. miles on the odometer, clearing historical faults also
From here, press the right arrow again to return to clears the memory of the electronic unit reporting the
the diagnostic information screen. From any active fault.
fault diagnostic screen, press the left arrow key to IMPORTANT: Do not reset historical faults un-
return to the previous screen in the sequence. Press less you are sure that the data will not be
the down arrow key to go on to historical fault infor- needed in the future. It is not possible to clear
mation.
particular historical faults: either all the data are
Historical Faults cleared, or none.
Historical faults (dash faults only) are kept in the To clear historical faults, press the set/reset key.
ICU4M/ICU4M-2’s memory after the active fault has When the message "all faults cleared" appears, all
been cleared. The data are useful for situations the historical fault data have been cleared. From this
where the same fault recurs over time, to indicate an message, press the left arrow key to return to the
underlying problem that may otherwise escape atten- diagnostic information screen, the right arrow key to
tion. return to the historical faults information screen, or
the down arrow key to go on to service information.
From the diagnostic information screen, press the
down arrow key to display the historical faults infor-
2.13
Return to
Idle Hours From Engine
Screen Information
Fault # 1 Fault # n
DIAGNOSTIC ACTIVE FAULTS MID(text) PID/SID(text) MID(text) PID/SID(text)
INFORMATION AMT 12 or NONE AMT FMI(text) MID#sPID#FMI#AMT FMI(text) MID#sPID#FMI#AMT
Hist Fault # 1 Hist Fault # n

12 HIST DASH FAULTS MID(text) PID/SID(text) MID(text) PID/SID(text)
LAST CLR 123456.7AMT FMI(text) MID#sPID#FMI#AMT FMI(text) MID#sPID#FMI#AMT
LAST OCCUR 123456.7 LAST OCCUR 123456.7

1234 TIMES AMT 1234 TIMES AMT
FIRST OCCUR 123456.7 FIRST OCCUR 123456.7

1234 TIMES AMT 1234 TIMES AMT
2 PUSH RESET TO
CLEAR DASH FAULTS AMT
R
ALL FAULTS
CLEARED AMT
12/17/2004 Go to Service Information Screens f040702

NOTE: With less than 254 miles on the odometer, clearing historical faults also clears the memory of the electronic unit
reporting the fault.
Fig. 2.15, Diagnostic Information Screens
Service Information NOTE: If the vehicle has gone past the service
interval, the "miles/hours remaining" screen is
Service information allows you to view the next re-
curring service interval. Service intervals can be ex-
replaced by the "service was due" screen, fol-
pressed in either miles or hours. They can also be lowed by the number of miles/hours since the
inactivated, so they do not display at all. For pro- service fell due.
gramming service intervals, look under the heading From here, press the right arrow key again to return
"Setup Information." to the service information screen. From any service
From the diagnostic information screen, press the information screen, press the left arrow key to return
down arrow key to display the service information to the previous screen in the sequence. Press the
screen, if activated. See Fig. 2.16. down arrow key to go on to setup information.
NOTE: If the service information screen is not Setup Information

activated, the ICU4M/ICU4M-2 will instead dis-
Setup information allows you to program various fea-
play the setup information screen, which can be tures of the ICU4M/ICU4M-2 environment. Some of
used to activate service information. the features which can be programmed include:
From the service information screen, press the right • Service intervals
arrow key to display, in order, the service interval
screen and the miles/time remaining before the next • Target miles per gallon
service interval. This sequence completes the service • LCD lighting
information screens.
• Display brightness
2.14
Return to
Idle Hours From Diagnostic
Screen Information
Distance prior to reaching the Distance traveled beyond the

set Service Interval set Service Interval
SERVICE INTERVAL IS SET TO 12345 MILES SERVICE WAS DUE
INFORMATION AMT XXXXX MILES AMT TO NEXT SERVICE AMT OR 12345 MILES AGO AMT
R R
Go to Set−up Information Screens

Time prior to reaching the Time accumulated beyond the
set Service Interval set Service Interval
SERVICE INTERVAL IS SET TO 1234 HOURS SERVICE WAS DUE
INFORMATION AMT XXXX HOURS AMT TO NEXT SERVICE AMT OR 1234 HOURS AGO AMT
R R
Go to Setup Information Screens

12/17/2004 f040703

NOTE: Service information screens only appear if the service interval is set to MILES or HOURS in Setup Information.
Metric unit screens are similar.
Fig. 2.16, Service Information Screens
• Language press the set/reset key to display a decision screen

for setting service interval units (the choices are
• Units of measurement
miles, hours, or off).
• Parameters
If you select miles or hours on this decision screen,
From the service information screen, press the down press the down arrow key to go to a second decision
arrow key to display the setup information screen. screen. This decision screen allows you to select the
See Fig. 2.17. Press the right arrow key to display length of the interval in the units you have chosen
the setup screen for changing the service interval (either miles or hours). Once you have selected the
feature. Press the down arrow key to scroll among interval length, press the down arrow key again to go
the various setup feature screens. This sequence to the next setup feature screen (target mpg).
completes the setup feature screens. If, on the other hand, you select "off" at the selection
From any setup feature screen, press the left arrow screen for service interval units (meaning you have
key to return to the setup information screen. turned off service interval information), you go di-
rectly to the next setup feature screen (target mpg).
To set any feature, press the set/reset key when
prompted. A decision screen appears, displaying the Vehicle Information
decision choices with the current selection flashing.
To change the selection, move the left or right arrow Vehicle information allows you to view datalink activ-
key as many times as required until the desired se- ity in a dynamic graph format, datalink usage and
lection is flashing. Then press the down arrow key to error rate (datalink status), and ICU4M/ICU4M-2
leave the decision screen and go to the next setup data, including ICU4M/ICU4M-2 serial number and
feature screen. See Fig. 2.18. software revision level. See Fig. 2.19.
From the setup information screen, press the down
Service Interval Programming arrow key to display the vehicle information screen.
For service intervals only, there is an extra program- Press the right arrow key to display, in order, datalink
ming step. From the service interval feature screen, activity, datalink status, and ICU4M/ICU4M-2 data.
2.15
PUSH SET KEY TO SERVICE INTERVAL

S
CHANGE SERVICE AMT OFF/ MILES/HOURS AMT
Return to
Idle Hours From Service
Screen Information If Service Interval is set to MILES
PUSH SET KEY TO INTERVAL XXXXX MILES
S
CHANGE SERVICE MI AMT <−−LESS MORE−−> AMT
SETUP
INFORMATION AMT
OR
SERVICE INTERVAL
S
OFF/ MILES /HOURS AMT
If Service Interval is set to HOURS
Go to Vehicle Information Screens PUSH SET KEY TO INTERVAL XXXX HOURS

S
CHANGE SERVICE HR AMT <−−LESS MORE−−> AMT
To more Setup Information

12/17/2004 f040704
The current selection flashes. Press the left and/or right arrow key(s) to change the selection. To store the changes and
exit the screen, press the down arrow key.
Fig. 2.17, Setup Information Screens (for service intervals)
Go to Setup Information Screens This sequence completes the vehicle information

12.3
screens.
PUSH SET KEY TO TARGET MPG:
S <−−LESS MORE−−>AMT
CHANGE TARGET MPG AMT
From here, press the right arrow key again to return
to the vehicle information screen. From any vehicle
PUSH SET KEY TO
S
LCD LAMP information screen, press the left arrow key to return
CHANGE LCD LAMP AMT <−−OFF ON −−> AMT
to the previous screen in the sequence. Press the
down arrow key to return to trip information.
PUSH SET KEY TO DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS
S
CHANGE BRIGHTNESS AMT <−−DARK LIGHT−−>AMT
Instrumentation Control Unit 3
PUSH SET KEY TO
S
LANGUAGE: ENGLISH
(ICU3/ICU3 ‘07), Optional
CHANGE LANGUAGE AMT FRENCH/SPANISH AMT
Figure 2.20 shows the gauge portion of the dash for
Century Class vehicles equipped with the ICU3 or
PUSH SET KEY TO
CHANGE UNITS AMT S
UNITS
ENGLISH / METRIC AMT
ICU3 ‘07.
The ICU3/ICU3 ‘07 electronic dashboard can accept
PUSH SET KEY TO RESET PARAMETERS
information from the various sensors installed on the
CHANGE PARAMETERS AMT S <−− YES NO−−> AMT vehicle and feed it to electronic gauges. Only air
gauges operate mechanically.
12/17/2004
Go to Vehicle Information Screens
f040705
There can be up to eight gauges on the driver’s in-
strument panel (six electronic and two mechanical).
The current selection flashes. Press the left and/or right
The ICU3/ICU3 ‘07 can not drive gauges located on
arrow key(s) to change the selection. To store the
changes and exit the screen, press the down arrow key. the auxiliary instrument panel.
Fig. 2.18, Other Setup Information
2.16
Return to
Idle Hours From Setup
Screen Information
VEHICLE DATALINK ACTIVE DATA LINK STATUS DASH# XXX−XXXXX−XXX

INFORMATION AMT AMT USAGE 12% ERR1%AMT SW# P1.2.3 AMT
Return to Trip Information Screens

01/11/2005 f040706

Fig. 2.19, Vehicle Information Screens
lights similar to those found on a conventional light-

bar, and a dash driver display screen. The dash
3 50 1/2
5 driver display screen is a one-line by seven-character
PSI
0 100 4 E F
liquid crystal display (LCD) that normally shows
OIL FUEL
odometer readings.
2 150 200
45 50 100
6
20 25 55
35
F°
100
WATER
250
10
15
30 25 50
70
90
110
65
PSI
0
AIR
150
7 Warning and Indicator Lights
30
15 75
1 225
5 10
130
85
50 100 There can be up to 26 warning and indicator lights
5
F°
0 RPM 10 km/h 9 PSI

8 installed in the ICU3 or ICU3 ‘07. See Fig. 2.21 and
100 350 X100 MPH 0 150
TRANS AIR
Fig. 2.22.
There are four rows of lights in the dash message
center. Lights installed in the top row are optional
and their positions may vary. The lights in the bottom
06/02/99 f610205b three rows are installed in fixed positions on all ve-
1. Transmission Temperature Gauge hicles. Most are standard, but a few are optional.
2. Water Temperature Gauge
3. Engine Oil Pressure Gauge ICU Ignition Sequence
4. Dash Message Center
5. Fuel Gauge If the headlights are turned on, the screen displays
6. Primary Air Pressure Gauge the odometer and waits for the ignition to be turned
7. Optional Mode/Reset Push Button on.
8. Secondary Air Pressure Gauge
9. Speedometer When the ignition is turned on, all the electronic
10. Tachometer gauges complete a full sweep of their dials, the
warning and indicator lights light up, and the buzzer
Fig. 2.20, ICU3/ICU3 ‘07 Gauge Layout (typical) sounds for three seconds.
The ICU3 is on vehicles with engines manufactured NOTE: The air gauges do not sweep.
up until December 31, 2006, and the ICU3 ‘07 is on
vehicles with engines manufactured January 1, 2007,
or later. They can be differentiated by the ISO icons
used on the ICU3 ‘07.
The dash message center is the heart of the ICU3/
ICU3 ‘07. It has a set of 26 warning and indicator
2.17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21
11/10/2006 22 23 24 25 26 27 f610231a
1. Stop Engine Warning 11. Engine Protection Warning 19. Parking Brake On Warning
2. Engine Fan On Indicator (optional) (optional) 20. Recirculated Air Indicator
3. Do Not Shift Indicator (optional) 12. No Charge Indicator (optional) (optional)
4. ECAS Failure Warning (optional) 13. Tractor ABS Warning 21. Air Restriction Indicator (optional)
5. ECAS Transfer Indicator (optional) 14. Transmission Temperature 22. Left-Turn Signal
6. Low Washer Fluid Indicator Warning (optional) 23. Low Battery Voltage Warning
(optional) 15. Trailer ABS Warning 24. Dash Driver Display Screen
7. Wheel Spin Indicator (optional) 16. Low Oil Pressure Warning 25. High Beams Indicator
8. EBS Warning (optional) 17. High Coolant Temperature 26. Low Air Pressure Warning
9. Water In Fuel Indicator (optional) Warning 27. Right-Turn Signal
10. Check Engine Indicator 18. Fasten Seat Belt Warning
Fig. 2.21, ICU3 Dash Message Center, Pre-2007
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
ABS ABS
BRAKE
8 9 10 11 12 13
08/31/2006 14 15 16 17 18 19 f610836
1. Optional Indicator 9. High Coolant Temperature 14. Left-Turn Signal Indicator

2. Check Engine Indicator Warning 15. Low Battery Voltage Warning
3. Stop Engine Indicator 10. Fasten Seat Belt Warning 16. Driver Display Screen
4. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) 11. Parking Brake On Warning 17. High Beam Indicator
5. Tractor ABS Indicator 12. Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) 18. Low Air Pressure Warning
6. Transmission Temperature Status Indicator 19. Right-Turn Signal Indicator
Indicator 13. High Exhaust System
7. Trailer ABS Indicator Temperature (HEST) Warning
8. Low Oil Pressure Warning
Fig. 2.22, ICU3 ‘07 Dash Message Center, EPA07 Compliant
2.18
The following lights illuminate during the ignition se- units installed on the vehicle and feed it to electronic
quence: gauges. Only air gauges operate mechanically.
• fasten seat belt warning There can be up to 14 removable gauges on the
driver’s instrument panel (11 electronic, one electro-
• low battery voltage warning
mechanical, and two mechanical).
• high coolant temperature warning
The Driver Message Center is the heart of the level
• low engine oil pressure warning III ICU. It has three parts:
• low air pressure warning • a set of 18 warning and indicator lights similar
to those found on a conventional lightbar
• parking brake on indicator
• a 10-key keypad on the auxiliary instrument
• all engine warning lights, including engine pro- panel
tection, check engine, and stop engine (Cum-
mins only) • a message display screen
• all ABS warning lights, including wheel spin, The message display screen is a 2-line by 20-
tractor ABS, and trailer ABS (if installed) character vacuum fluorescent display that provides a
wide range of information to the driver.
NOTE: Although the engine and ABS warning
lights illuminate during the ignition sequence, Some of the information that can be provided by the
they are not controlled by the ICU but by their message center includes:
own system ECU (electronic control unit). • odometer readings
When the ignition switch has been turned on, the • outside air temperature
ICU performs a self-test, looking for active faults.
During the first half of the self-test, all segments of • messages from remote locations such as com-
the display illuminate as follows: "888888.8." The pany docks and offices, shipper’s terminals,
ICU voltmeter display also illuminates, but with the etc. (if equipped with a communications sys-
value "18.8." During the second half of the self-test, tem, such as Truckweb or Qualcomm®)
the software revision level is displayed. • trip information, such as trip miles and hours,
If there are no active faults, the ICU displays the idle hours, average mph, and leg miles and
odometer. However, if the ICU has received active hours
fault codes from other devices, it displays them one • fuel information, such as fuel used and miles
after the other until the parking brake is released or per gallon, fuel used idling, and PTO fuel used
the ignition switch is turned off. Once the parking
brake is released, the ICU displays the odometer • engine information, such as miles, hours, gal-
again. lons of fuel used, and PTO fuel used
See Fig. 2.23 for the ICU3/ICU3 ‘07 ignition se- • diagnostic information, such as listings of ac-
quence. tive faults and troubleshooting information
• vehicle information, such as datalink operation
Instrumentation Control Unit, and use data, dash part number, and software
Level III (ICU2M) number
NOTE: The ICU2M is not available on vehicles Some of the advanced features supported by the
level III ICU are: Truckweb with instant messages,
built after January 1, 2007. It is replaced with
AMT display, Fuel Use Efficiency Level (FUEL) sys-
the ICU4M. tem display, target miles per gallon (MPG), and
brightness control.
The level III instrumentation control unit (ICU2M) is a
programmable electronic dashboard. It can accept
information from the sensors and electronic control
2.19
HEADLIGHTS ON POWER ON
IGNITION ON
888888.8
MI
ICU INITIALIZES
ODOMETER ELECTRONIC GAUGE NEEDLES
SCREEN SWEEP, WARNING/INDICATOR
LIGHTS COME ON, BUZZER SOUNDS
IF NO FAULTS IF FAULT DETECTED
WERE DETECTED
ABS 136
123456.7
MI
FAULT CODE
12.3 VOLTS
SCREEN
PARK BRAKE
RELEASED − MOVING
123456.7 RELEASE PARK BRAKE

MI
12.3 VOLTS
02/14/2003 f040420a
Fig. 2.23, ICU3/ICU3 ’07 Ignition Sequence
Truckweb instant messages from memory. Bring the ve-

hicle safely to a stop out of the flow of traffic
With Truckweb and the necessary hardware to sup- and set the parking brake before sending mes-
port it, specific vehicle information can be transmitted sages or retrieving them from memory.
wirelessly over the Internet. Transmitted information
includes: Receiving Messages
• Global Positioning System (GPS) coordinates
Incoming messages are displayed as they are re-
• instant messages ceived and will be interrupted only by higher priority
messages. If interrupted, the instant message being
• vehicle mileage received will display after the higher-priority message
• diagnostics in the form of active fault codes is dismissed. Instant messages are stored in memory
after being received and dismissed. Up to three mes-
Transmitted information is viewed by going to the sages can be stored in memory at any one time. If a
vehicle’s web page using an Internet browser. With new message arrives and three messages are al-
the exception of instant messages, all of the informa- ready in memory the newest message replaces the
tion mentioned above is transmitted to the web page oldest message.
without any action required of the vehicle operator.
The size of each incoming message is limited to the
Instant Messages total characters that can be displayed on three
screens, or 111 total characters. Press the down
The Level III ICU is capable of transmitting and re- arrow key on the 10-key keypad, located on the
ceiving instant messages to and from the vehicle’s B-panel, to scroll through a message if necessary.
web page for vehicles equipped with Truckweb.
IMPORTANT: The parking brake must be set in
order to send instant messages or to retrieve
2.20
To acknowledge to the sender that an incoming mes- • "Destination Confirmed"

sage has been received, press the "Set/Reset" but-
• "Please Provide Return Load"
ton. The message then goes into memory, replacing
the oldest message there. • "Please Provide Directions"
To recall a message from memory: • "Send Help"
1. Safely stop the vehicle and set the parking 7. Once the correct message appears, press the
brake. "Set/Reset" key to send it. When the message
2. has been sent, the display will revert to the
With the parking brake set, press the right arrow
"Send Message Information" screen.
key on the 10-key keypad to display the "Trip
Information" screen. 8. To return to the default screen, press the left
3. arrow key as necessary.
Press the down arrow key until the "Message
Information" screen appears.
AMT Display
4. Press the right arrow key until "Read Message"
appears. The level III Instrumentation Control Unit (ICU2M)
replaces the gauge display on vehicles built with
5. Press the down arrow key until the first message Eaton AutoShift or Meritor SureShift transmissions
is displayed. and Freightliner SmartShift column-mounted shifter.
6. Press the down arrow key to continue scrolling The ICU receives information from the Transmission
through incoming messages stored in memory. Control Unit (TCU) and displays it in the last three
positions in the bottom right corner of the ICU.
7. To return to the default screen press the left
The two right-hand positions are dedicated to alpha/
arrow key as necessary after reading messages.
numeric characters, N for neutral, R for Reverse, and
Sending Messages 1 through 10 or 18 depending on the transmission
configuration. The left-hand position is for the up/
Up to 10 different messages can be stored for send- down arrow.
ing; five are fixed and five are programmable using When a solid (nonblinking) indication is present in
ServiceLink. the right position(s), it indicates which gear the ve-
To send a message: hicle is operating in. When a flashing (blinking) indi-
cation is present in the right position(s), it indicates
1. Safely stop the vehicle and set the parking which gear the transmission is attempting to reach.
brake. The arrow indication will also be flashing with either
2. With the parking brake on, press the right arrow an up or down arrow, indicating the need to increase
key on the 10-key keypad until the "Trip Informa- or decrease input shaft speed.
tion" screen appears.
3.
Fuel Use Efficiency Level (FUEL)
Press the down arrow key until the "Message
Information" screen appears. If equipped, the FUEL system continuously monitors
fuel usage efficiency and instantly transmits action
4. Press the right arrow key until the "Send Mes- messages through the Driver Message Center to
sage Information" screen appears. help the driver get better mileage. The system may
5. Press the down arrow key until the first choice suggest a different speed, gear, or throttle position,
message appears. and will calculate and transmit estimated fuel savings
based on the suggested action. It also calculates and
6. Press the down arrow key again to scroll through displays a bar graph that shows a fuel efficiency
the choices. The five programmable messages score as a percentage of optimum efficiency.
appear first; the next five messages are the fixed
messages. The fixed messages are: The messages this system displays are:
• "Message Received" • "Drive 60 MPH, Gain X MPG"
• "Shift to Next Gear, Gain X MPG"
2.21
• "End Idling, Save X Gal/Hr" Brightness Control

• "Drive Steady Speed, Gain X MPG" The panel light dimmer switch normally controls the
• "Move Throttle Slower, Gain X MPG" brightness of all panel and gauge lights, including the
level III ICU message display screen. With the park-
In each example, the X value in the statement is ing brake set, the ICU keypad can control the bright-
variable. The system will estimate and display a nu- ness of the message display screen independently of
merical savings gain in place of the X. the other lights. If the panel lights are set to maxi-
NOTE: The information provided by the FUEL mum brightness, the message display screen cannot
efficiency system is different than and should be brightened any further.
not be confused with the information available NOTE: Use the LEFT ARROW key to dim the
by pressing the FUEL key on the 10-key key- message display screen, and the RIGHT
pad. The keypad and its direct access keys are ARROW key to brighten it. For more information
described in more detail later in this chapter. on how to set the brightness of the message
display screen, see "Setup Information" later in
Target MPG this chapter.
The target MPG feature allows quick and easy When the parking brake is released, the arrow keys
checking of fuel economy through the "MPG Graph/ no longer work to change the brightness of the mes-
Target MPG..Odometer" screen. See Fig. 2.24. sage display screen, but the settings stay in effect
unless the headlights are turned on. With the head-
lights on, the message display screen dims slightly to
adjust to nighttime conditions.
− 0%II +
12.3MPG 9012.0MI R Warning and Indicator Lights
There can be up to 18 warning and indicator lights
10/31/2000 f601412b installed in the level III ICU. See Fig. 2.25.
• The green right- and left-turn signal lights flash
Fig. 2.24, MPG Graph/Target MPG..Odometer Screen
on and off whenever the outside turn signal
NOTE: Use the LEFT ARROW key to lower the lights are flashing.
target MPG, and the RIGHT ARROW key to • The blue high-beam indicator light comes on
raise it. For more information on how to set tar- when the headlights are on high beam.
get MPG, adjust screen display brightness, • The yellow "Check Engine" (CHK ENG) light
change languages, or switch between USC and comes on to indicate an engine condition such
metric units of measure, see "Setup Information" as low coolant level, high coolant temperature,
later in this chapter. or low oil pressure. It also comes on when a
The "Target MPG" area is on the second line of the fault is detected or recorded.
display, to the left of the odometer. It shows the ac- • The red "Engine Protection" (ENG PROT) light
tual target miles per gallon (MPG). comes on to warn that the protection system
Example: A reading of "12.3 MPG" indicates that the available on the engine has been activated.
target MPG is 12.3 miles per gallon. • Installed on Cummins engines only, the red
The "MPG Graph" on the first line of the display "Stop Engine" (STOP ENG) light comes on to
gives the same information in dynamic form. The warn that the engine is not functioning nor-
"0%" mark in the center of the line gives the target mally. The vehicle should be pulled over to the
MPG. Bars showing to the right of the display indi- side of the road and the engine shut down
cate that short term fuel economy is above the tar- immediately.
get; bars showing to the left of the display indicate
that short term fuel economy is below the target.
2.22
1 2 3 6 7 8 9
FASTEN SEATBELTS 10
0000432 MILES Dedicated Keys General Keys Control Keys
11 10/17/2006 f601009a
4 Fig. 2.26, 10-Key Keypad

5 5 12
04/02/96 f600996a • Move about from screen to screen while the
Typical installation shown. Location and function of vehicle is stationary.
optional lights may vary.
1. Left-Turn Indicator
• Set up the display.
2. Engine Protection Warning Lamp Indicator • Set a target MPG to monitor fuel economy
3. Check Engine Indicator while driving. Press the LEFT ARROW key to
4. Stop Engine Warning
lower the target MPG and the RIGHT ARROW
5. Optional Indicator
6. Message Display Screen key to raise it.
7. High-Beam Indicator • Set the brightness of the message display
8. Low Air Warning screen independently of the panel dimmer
9. Right-Turn Indicator
switch. Use the LEFT ARROW key to dim the
10. Air Bag Warning (optional)
11. Tractor ABS Warning display and the RIGHT ARROW key to
12. Wheel Spin Indicator brighten it.
Fig. 2.25, Driver Message Center, Level III ICU

• Record significant data using the EVENT key
(optional—if a data logging unit is installed).
• The red low air pressure (LOW AIR) warning
NOTE: One key is blank and is not usable at
light and buzzer come on whenever air pres-
sure in the primary or secondary air reservoir
this time.
falls below 64 to 76 psi (440 to 525 kPa).
Level III ICU Ignition Sequence
• Depending on options installed, other warning
and indicator lights can be installed in the If the headlights are turned on, the screen displays
spaces marked "OPT." Available optional indi- the odometer and waits for the ignition to be turned
cator lights include: air bag warning, alternator on.
no charge warning, automatic transmission When the ignition is first turned on, all the electronic
overheat warning, trailer ABS warning, ECAS gauges complete a full sweep of their dials, the
(electronic suspension) transfer indicator, and warning and indicator lights light up for five seconds,
ECAS failure warning. and the buzzer sounds for two seconds. See
NOTE: The functions of the ABS warning lights Fig. 2.27.
are explained under "Meritor WABCO Antilock NOTE: The air gauges and voltmeter do not
Braking System (ABS)" later in this chapter. sweep.
Once the ignition has been turned on, the screen
Keypad displays the "Freightliner" message. At the same
The level III ICU is controlled by a keypad located on time, the level III ICU conducts a roll call of all the
the auxiliary dash panel. See Fig. 2.26. This keypad, electronic control units (ECUs) installed on the ve-
which has 10 keys, can be used to: hicle, looking for active faults.
• Read and send instant messages on vehicles If there are no active faults, the screen displays the
equipped with Truckweb. "Fasten Seat Belts/Odometer" screen.
• Call up information onto direct access screens.
2.23
0%
12.3 TMPG 123456.7 MI
03/18/98 f040415
Fig. 2.27, Ignition Sequence, Level III ICU
If, however, the level III ICU has received active fault With the engine idling (the vehicle not moving), the
codes or an electronic control unit (ECU) fails to re- ignition sequence cycles on, and displays the "Idle
spond to the roll call, it shows the "Active Faults" Hours/Idle Gallons..Odometer" screen. See
screen and displays the number of active faults up to Fig. 2.28.
a total of eight. If desired, press RIGHT ARROW to
see the active fault codes. See Fig. 2.26. Continuing
to press the right arrow key will display all additional
fault codes (if any).
NOTE: A list of fault codes and definitions can
be found in Section 54.03 of the Century Class
Trucks Workshop Manual.
To go on, press LEFT ARROW, or if the engine is on,
release the parking brake to go on to the "Fasten
Seat Belts/Odometer" screen.
Unless the engine is running, the ignition sequence
ends with the "Fasten Seat Belts/Odometer" screen.
IMPORTANT: At this point, if the vehicle has a 07/29/97 f601415
communications system and an incoming mes-
sage is available, it will be displayed. To dismiss Fig. 2.28, Level III ICU At the End of the Ignition
the incoming message, press any key on the Sequence
keypad.
2.24
The Message Display Screen quest, the datalink is communicating with that ECU
and no fault code is displayed.
To understand the information displayed on the mes-
sage display screen, here is an example of screen NOTE: Each ICU is configured to receive re-
layout. On the "Idle Hours/Idle Gallons..Odometer" sponses from a list of selected ECUs as in-
screen, idle hours are displayed on the top line with stalled on that particular vehicle.
the words "Idle Hours" on the left side of the screen If the ECU does not respond to this request, the level
and the number of hours on the right. On the bottom III ICU displays an active fault code that indicates the
line, the number of idle gallons is on the left and the datalink is not communicating with that ECU. For a
odometer miles are on the right with a space in be- sample fault code and message of this type, see
tween. See Fig. 2.29. Fig. 2.30. For a list of roll call faults, see Section
54.03 of the Century Class Trucks Workshop
Manual.
07/29/97 f601411
Fig. 2.29, Idle Hours/Idle Gallons..Odometer Screen

07/29/97 f601413
Once the parking brake is released (whether the ve-
Fig. 2.30, Level III ICU Roll Call Fault Code and
hicle is moving or not), the regular message screen
Message
display is the "MPG Graph/Target MPG..Odometer"
screen. The MPG graph is a dynamic display graph
demonstrating how the actions of the driver affect
Level III ICU Odometer
fuel economy. The graph moves to the right as fuel The level III ICU odometer is a seven-digit display
economy improves. See Fig. 2.24. with one decimal point after the sixth digit allowing it
NOTE: Press the LEFT ARROW key to lower to display tenths of miles (or kilometers).
the target MPG and the RIGHT ARROW key to When first installed, the odometer starts at 0.0 miles
raise it. For more information on how to set the (or kilometers). When replaced, the odometer does
target MPG, see "Setup Information" later in this not start with the engine miles but starts again from
chapter. 0.0 and cannot be changed up or down.
IMPORTANT: Although the odometer uses data
Level III ICU Roll Call supplied by the engine ECM to update its count,
Each time the ignition switch is turned on, the level it keeps its own mileage starting from the zero
III ICU roll call function requests data from each ECU point, which marks where it was first installed.
on the datalink. If the ECU does respond to this re-
2.25
Alert Screens "Parking Brake On" Screen

Alert screens come on whenever the condition oc- This warning message and alarm tone come on
curs. They appear when the vehicle is moving; they whenever the parking brake is applied and the ve-
override the regular screen display. They are warn- hicle is moving faster than 2.5 miles per hour or the
ings, cautions, or other messages that require the clutch has been depressed. The word "Warning"
driver’s attention, but not all of them are critical to the flashes on the message display screen above the
operation of the vehicle. Warning messages always message "Parking Brake On." The screen and alarm
display at full brightness. tone go away only when the parking brake is re-
leased. See Fig. 2.31.
More important messages take priority over less im-
portant messages. The order of importance, or prior-
ity, is:
1. Eaton VORAD warnings (if so equipped) WARNING
2. Parking Brake On (with the vehicle moving) PARK BRAKE ON
3. Low Oil Pressure, High Coolant Temperature,
Low Coolant Level, and Low Voltage 06/21/2007 f601414
4. Alternate Speedometer Fig. 2.31, Parking Brake On Screen

5. Recirc Mode Engaged, and Provide Fresh Air The "Parking Brake On" screen overrides any other
6. Low Fuel Level screen message.
7. Turn Signal On "Low Oil Pressure" Screen
8. Incoming instant or Qualcomm messages This warning message and alarm tone come on
9. Service warnings whenever the oil pressure falls below the minimum
oil pressure specified by the engine manufacturer,
10. No Datalink Activity whether the vehicle is idling or in motion. The word
Eaton VORAD Screens above the message "Low Oil Pressure." To dismiss
The Eaton VORAD EVT-300 collision warning system the message, press any key on the keypad.
with ICU-integrated display is explained in detail later NOTE: If there is more than one alert message
in this chapter. See for a complete description of the to display, pressing any key takes you to the
warning messages this system displays with the inte-
next message and so on until all the messages
grated ICU.
have been received.
"Incoming Message" Screen If low oil pressure is detected during the ignition se-
On vehicles with an onboard communications system quence, it displays as an active fault and the alert
like Truckweb or Qualcomm, this screen activates screen does not appear.
whenever a message is received. "Incoming Mes- After 30 seconds, this message displays again and
sage" appears on the message display screen. can be dismissed as before by pressing any key.
NOTE: The "Incoming Message" screen also
"Low Coolant Level" Screen
displays during the ignition sequence if a mes-
sage is available. This warning message and alarm tone activate
whenever the coolant level falls below a preset point.
This message displays for a preset time period and The word "Warning" flashes on the message display
then disappears. It returns after the preset interval screen above the message "Low Coolant Level."
until it is dismissed by pressing any key on the key-
pad. This message follows the same rules of dismissal
and display as "Low Oil Pressure."
2.26
"High Coolant Temp" Screen "Warning" flashes on the message display screen
above the message "Low Fuel Level."
This message and alarm tone come on whenever the
engine coolant temperature exceeds a preset point "Turn Signal On" Screen
specified by the engine manufacturer (see the engine
manual for this temperature). The word "Warning" This warning message (the alarm tone is optional)
flashes on the message display screen above the comes on whenever the turn signal remains on be-
message "High Coolant Temp." yond a preset time or distance traveled. The word
"Warning" flashes on the display screen above the
This message follows the same rules of dismissal message "Turn Signal On."
and display as "Low Oil Pressure."
To dismiss this message, either turn off the turn sig-
"Low Voltage" Screen nal or press any key on the keypad.
On some vehicles, this message and alarm tone Service Warnings
come on whenever a low voltage condition is de-
tected by the instrumentation control unit. The word Service warning screens display during the ignition
"Warning" flashes on the message display screen sequence and indicate that a service interval has
above the message "Low Voltage." been reached or exceeded and maintenance is re-
quired. The messages may indicate the number of
This message follows the same rules of dismissal miles or hours until the next service or, once passed,
and display as "Low Oil Pressure." the number of miles or hours ago that maintenance
should have been performed. The messages read "X
"Faulty Speedo Gauge" Screen Miles To Next Service," "X Hours To Next Service,"
This message is displayed when the system detects "Service Was Due X Mi Ago," and "Service Was Due
a faulty speedometer. This becomes the default X Hr Ago." The letter X represents the number of
screen and vehicle speed is displayed as a digital miles or hours programmed. The ICU2M can be pro-
readout at the bottom left of the screen. All other grammed using ServiceLink to generate service
screens and functions operate normally. warnings in either miles or hours, but not both.
"Recirc Mode Engaged" and "Provide "No Datalink Activity" Screen

Fresh Air" Screens The "No Datalink Activity" screen comes on when-
ever the datalink is not receiving data.
The "Recirc Mode Engaged" screen comes on when-
ever recirculated air is selected on the fresh/air recir- If the condition persists, take the vehicle in for ser-
culation switch or the air circulation switch is rotated vice as soon as possible to discover the cause of the
to the maximum air conditioning position. It displays problem.
one time only for seven seconds. It notifies the driver
that recirculated air is being used and that fresh air Direct Access Screens
needs to be provided after 20 minutes.
The driver can also override the regular screen dis-
If fresh air is not provided after 20 minutes, the "Pro- play at any time by pressing the keypad to display
vide Fresh Air" message is displayed. It displays for one of the direct access screens.
seven seconds every 254 seconds (about every four
minutes) until the driver switches to fresh air either • Press the TRIP key for the "Trip Miles and Trip
by selecting fresh air on the fresh/air recirculation Hours" screen.
switch or by rotating the air circulation switch away • Press the FUEL key for the "Fuel Used and
from maximum air conditioning and to one of the Average MPG" screen.
other positions. See Chapter 4 for detailed operating
instructions for the heater/air conditioner. • Press the LEG key for the "Leg Miles and Leg
Hours" screen.
"Low Fuel Level" Screen Data for each of the above screens can be reset
Fuel level is continuously monitored by the ICU. (cleared). To reset, display the screen and push the
When the fuel level drops to 1/8th full the word
2.27
Set/Reset key twice within six seconds (a confirma- "Idle Hours and Average MPH" displays the hours
tion screen will display after you press the key once). spent idling and the average miles per hour.
NOTE: Resetting "Trip Miles and Hours" also "Leg Miles and Hours" records the number of miles
resets "Leg Miles and Hours." and hours driven since the start of the leg. At the
start of a new leg, press RESET to set leg miles and
Press the TEMP key to display the outside air tem- hours back to zero.
perature.
NOTE: Resetting "Trip Miles and Hours" also
If the vehicle has a data logging unit, press the
EVENT key to record data about a significant driving resets "Leg Miles and Hours."
event (engine problem, driving problem, unusual ve-
hicle operation, etc.). Normally, the screen displays Fuel Information
"Data Being Recorded." Fuel information provides two data screens: "Fuel
NOTE: If the memory in the data logger is full, Used and Average MPG" and "Idle Gallons and PTO
Gallons." See Fig. 2.32.
the screen instead displays "Memory Full/Data
Not Recorded." If the data logger is not con- "Fuel Used and Average MPG" displays the gallons
nected or not responding, the screen displays of fuel used since the last reset. At the start of a trip,
"Data Recorder/Not Responding." If the EVENT after refueling, or whenever desired, press RESET
key was pressed recently (within the last two (SET/RESET twice) to set fuel used and average
minutes), the screen displays "Still Recording/ miles per gallon back to zero.
Last Event." NOTE: Resetting "Trip Miles and Hours" does
not also reset "Fuel Used and Average MPG" or
Stationary Access Screens—Used "Idle Gallons and PTO Gallons." Fuel Informa-
With Parking Brake Applied tion must be reset separately.
The stationary access screens are a series of infor- "Idle Gallons and PTO Gallons" displays the gallons
mational displays that give trip, fuel, engine, diagnos- of fuel used idling and to operate the Power Take Off
tic, setup, and vehicle information. unit (if installed). At the start of a trip or whenever
desired, press RESET to set idle gallons and PTO
For reasons of safety, stationary access screens can gallons back to zero.
be seen only when the vehicle is not moving and the
parking brake is applied. Engine Information
Each set of stationary access screens has a title Engine information provides two data screens: "En-
screen followed by one or more data screens. To gine Miles and Hours," and "Engine Gallons and
move forward and backward through these screens, PTO Gallons." See Fig. 2.32 or Fig. 2.33.
use the three arrow keys as shown in Fig. 2.32,
Fig. 2.33, and Fig. 2.34. "Engine Miles and Hours" displays the total miles
and hours logged by the engine since installation.
Trip Information
NOTE: Engine information is supplied by the
Trip information provides three data screens: "Trip engine Electronic Control Module (ECM). It can
Miles and Hours," "Idle Hours and Average MPH," be reset using engine diagnostic tools. For more
and "Leg Miles and Hours." See Fig. 2.32. information, see the engine manufacturer’s
"Trip Miles and Hours" displays the number of miles manuals.
and hours driven since the start of the trip. At the
"Engine Gallons and PTO Gallons" displays the gal-
start of a trip, press RESET (SET/RESET twice) to lons of fuel used by the engine and PTO since instal-
set trip miles and hours back to zero.
lation.
NOTE: Resetting "Trip Miles and Hours" also
resets "Idle Hours and Average MPH."
2.28
IDLE HOURS 1234:56

12.3 GAL 1234567 MI
FASTEN SEATBELTS
1234567 MILES
IGNITION
ON ONLY
IDLING TRIP TRIP MILES 123456.7 IDLE HOURS 1234:56 LEG MILES 123456.7
INFORMATION TRIP HOURS 1234:56 AVERAGE MPH 12.3 LEG HOURS 1234:56
R R R
FUEL FUEL USED 12345.6 IDLE GALLONS 12345.6

INFORMATION AVERAGE MPG 12.34 PTO GALLONS 12345.6
R R
ENGINE ENG MILES 1234567.8 ENG GALLONS 123456.7

INFORMATION ENG HOURS 123456:78 PTO GALLONS 123456.7
R =RESET (PUSH RESET/SET KEY TWICE)

S =SET (PUSH RESET/SET KEY ONCE)
01/28/98 See applicable figure f040324a
Fig. 2.32, Trip Information, Fuel Information, and Engine Information
Diagnostic Information will be blinking. Use the arrow keys (LEFT, RIGHT,
and DOWN) until the display shows the desired
Diagnostic information provides two sets of data setup. Press SET again when finished to save the
screens: "Active Faults," followed by a separate new settings. See Fig. 2.34.
screen for each fault until all have been shown and
"Historical Dash Faults," also followed by a separate Vehicle Information
screen for each fault until all have been shown. See
Fig. 2.33. Vehicle information displays important information,
including datalink activity and status, ICU part num-
"Active Faults" cannot be reset. Active faults can be ber, and software identification number.
cleared only by correcting the fault.
The "Datalink Active" screen is a dynamic display
"Historical Dash Faults" displays all dash faults since that shows if the datalink unit is active at the given
the last reset. The second line of the display shows time. If all the arrows are pointing down, the level III
the mileage the last time faults were cleared. ICU has not received any information on the datalink
since the last time the ignition switch was turned on.
Setup Information
The "Datalink Status" screen is also dynamic, show-
Setup information allows the user to change the tar- ing current datalink use and error rate. The other
get MPG, the brightness of the screen display, the screen, which shows the ICU part number and the
language of the display (English, French, or Span- software identification number, is informational only.
ish), and the units of measurement (English/US con- See Fig. 2.34.
ventional or metric).
When prompted by the screen, press SET (push the
SET/RESET key once). The units that are setable
2.29
IDLE HOURS 1234.56

12.3 GAL 1234567 MI
FASTEN SEATBELTS
1234567 MILES See applicable Figure for trip and fuel information.
IGNITION
ON ONLY
IDLING ENGINE ENG MILES 1234567.8 ENG GALLONS 123456.7
INFORMATION ENG HOURS 123456:78 PTO GALLONS 123456.7
For each fault, display fault codes and description.

DIAGNOSTIC ACTIVE FAULTS
1234 or NONE FIRST SECOND LAST
INFORMATION
For each fault, display fault codes and description.

123 HIST DASH FAULTS PUSH RESET TO
FIRST LAST
LAST CLEAR 1234567 CLEAR DASH FAULTS
R
LAST OCCR LAST OCCR
FIRST OCCR FIRST OCCR
02/13/96 See applicable Figure. S =SET (PUSH RESET/SET KEY ONCE) f040325
Fig. 2.33, Engine Information and Diagnostic Information
After vehicle information, pressing the DOWN sage display screen is a one-line by six-character
ARROW takes you back to trip information and so vacuum fluorescent display.
on.
Instrumentation Control Unit, There can be up to 18 warning and indicator lights
Level II, Optional installed in the level II ICU. See Fig. 2.35.
The instrumentation control unit, level II (level II ICU) • The green right- and left-turn signal lights flash
is a basic electronic dashboard. It can accept infor- on and off whenever the outside turn signal
mation from the various sensors installed on the ve- lights are flashing.
hicle and feed it to electronic gauges. Only air • The blue high-beam indicator light comes on
gauges operate mechanically. when the headlights are on high beam.
There can be up to 14 removable gauges on the • The yellow "Check Engine" (ENG CHK) light
driver’s instrument panel (11 electronic, one electro- comes on if an engine condition exists such as
mechanical, and two mechanical). The level II ICU low coolant level, high coolant temperature, or
can not drive gauges located on the auxiliary instru- low oil pressure. It also comes on when a fault
ment panel. is detected or recorded.
The dash message center is the heart of the level II • The red "Engine Protection" (ENG PROT) light
ICU. It has two parts, a set of 18 warning and indica- comes on to indicate that the protection system
tor lights similar to those found on a conventional available on the engine has been activated.
lightbar, and a message display screen. The mes-
2.30
See
applicable SETUP PUSH SET KEY TO
S
TARGET MPG 7.0
Figure. INFORMATION CHANGE TARGET MPG <−−LESS MORE−−>
S
PUSH SET KEY TO DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS

S
CHANGE BRIGHTNESS <−−LIGHT DARK−−>
S
CURRENT LANGUAGE
IS FLASHING
PUSH SET KEY TO LANGUAGE ENGLISH

S FRENCH SPANISH
CHANGE LANGUAGE
S
CURRENT UNITS
IS FLASHING
PUSH SET KEY TO UNITS

S ENGLISH METRIC
CHANGE UNITS
S
VEHICLE DATA LINK ACTIVE DATA LINK STATUS DASH # A06−XXXXX−XXX

INFORMATION USAGE 40% ERROR 6% SW# 7.3.9

To trip information
S =SET (PUSH RESET/SET KEY ONCE)
01/29/98 See applicable Figure. f040326a
Fig. 2.34, Setup Information and Vehicle Information
• Installed on Cummins engines only, the red • The parking brake on (PARK BRAKE) warning
"Stop Engine" (STOP ENG) light comes on to light activates whenever the parking brake is
warn that the engine is not functioning nor- engaged.
mally. The vehicle should be pulled over to the
• The recirculated air (RECIRC AIR) warning
side of the road and the engine shut down im-
light activates whenever the ventilating system
mediately.
is switched to recirculated air.
• The red low air pressure (LOW AIR) warning
• Depending on options installed, other warning
light and buzzer activate whenever air pressure
and indicator lights can be installed in the
in the primary or secondary air reservoir falls
spaces marked "OPT." The optional indicator
below 64 to 76 psi (440 to 525 kPa).
lights that are available include: low voltage
• The red high coolant temperature (thermom- warning, alternator no charge warning, auto-
eter symbol) warning light and buzzer activate matic transmission overheat warning, trailer
whenever the coolant temperature goes above ABS warning, ECAS (electronic suspension)
a maximum level specified by the engine transfer indicator, and ECAS failure warning.
manufacturer (see the engine manual).
NOTE: The functions of the ABS warning lights
• The red low oil pressure (oil can symbol) warn- are explained under "Meritor WABCO Antilock
ing light and buzzer activate whenever the en- Braking System (ABS)" later in this chapter.
gine oil pressure goes below a minimum level
specified by the engine manufacturer (see the
engine manual).
2.31
• All engine warning lights, including Engine Pro-

1 2 3 10 11 12 13 tection, Check Engine, and Stop Engine (Cum-
mins only)
5
6
• All ABS warning lights, including Wheel Spin,
14
Tractor ABS, and Trailer ABS (if installed)
15 NOTE: While the engine and ABS warning lights
go on during the ignition sequence, they are not
4 7 8 9 17 18 19 16 controlled by the level II ICU, but by their own
06/26/98 f601458 system ECU (electronic control unit).
Typical installation shown. Location and function of Once the ignition switch has been turned on, the
optional lights may vary. level II ICU performs a self-test looking for active
1. Left-Turn Indicator 11. High-Beam Indicator faults. During the first half of the self-test, all seg-
2. Engine Protection 12. Low Air Warning ments of the display illuminate. During the second
Warning Lamp 13. Right-Turn Indicator half of the self-test, the software revision level is dis-
Indicator 14. Trailer ABS Warning played.
3. Check Eng. Indicator (optional)
4. Stop Engine Warning 15. Tractor ABS Warning If there are no active faults, the screen displays the
5. High Coolant Temp. 16. Wheel Spin Warning odometer. However, if the level II ICU has received
Warning (optional) 17. Park Brake On active fault codes from other devices, it displays
6. Low Oil Pressure Indicator them one after the other until the parking brake is
Warning (optional) 18. Recirc Air Warning released or the ignition switch is turned off.
7. Optional Indicator 3 (optional)
8. Optional Indicator 2 19. Optional Indicator 4 A list of fault codes and definitions can be found in
9. Optional Indicator 1 Section 54.14 of the Century Class Trucks Work-
10. Message Display shop Manual. Once the parking brake is released,
Screen the level II ICU displays the odometer again.
Fig. 2.35, Dash Message Center, Level II ICU
Setting the Units for the Odometer
Level II ICU Ignition Sequence The level II ICU odometer is a six-digit display with-
If the headlights are turned on, the screen displays out a decimal point. It can display the distance the
the odometer and waits for the ignition to be turned vehicle has traveled in either miles or kilometers, but
on. See Fig. 2.36. it cannot display tenths of miles (or kilometers). The
choice of units is selectable using the cruise control
When the ignition is turned on, all the electronic switches.
gauges complete a full sweep of their dials, the
warning and indicator lights light up, and the buzzer To change the display, shut down the engine and set
sounds for three seconds. the parking brake. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position. Turn the cruise control on (cruise control
NOTE: The air gauges and voltmeter do not on/off switch). See Fig. 2.37.
sweep. With the cruise control on, press and hold down the
The following lights go on during the ignition se- cruise control set switch until the odometer display
quence: begins to blink. After about five seconds, the MI dis-
play at the bottom of the screen will change to KM
• High Coolant Temperature Warning (or KM will change to MI, depending on what units
• Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning were previously set). See Fig. 2.35.
• Low Air Pressure Warning Alert Screen
• Park Brake On Indicator
The NODATA screen comes on whenever the
datalink is not receiving data. It appears when the
2.32
HEADLIGHTS ON POWER ON
IGNITION ON
123456
MI
ODOMETER ICU PERFORMS SELFTEST:
SCREEN ELECTRONIC GAUGE NEEDLES
SWEEP, WARNING/INDICATOR
LIGHTS COME ON, BUZZER SOUNDS
IF NO FAULTS IF FAULT DETECTED

WERE DETECTED
A/C 190
FAULT CODE
123456 SCREEN
MI
PARK BRAKE
RELEASED − MOVING
RELEASE PARK BRAKE
123456
MI
10/03/97 f040395
Fig. 2.36, Level II ICU Ignition Sequence
1 2 vehicle is moving and overrides the regular screen

display.
If the condition persists, take the vehicle in for ser-
vice as soon as possible to discover the cause of the
problem.
Instruments
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm) and serves as a guide for shifting
07/29/98 f541126
the transmission and keeping the engine in the ap-
To switch from miles to kilometers, turn the cruise control propriate rpm range. See Fig. 2.38. For low idle and
on. Then press and hold down the set switch until the MI rated rpm, see the engine identification plate. The
display starts to blink. green color band on the tachometer indicates the
1. On/Off Switch 2. Set Switch best fuel economy range. The yellow band indicates
lower fuel economy, the orange band indicates much
Fig. 2.37, Cruise Control Switches
lower fuel economy, and the red band indicates poor
fuel economy.
2.33
1 2
3 4
1
2
09/25/95 f600993 02/12/96 5 6 f601126
1. Tachometer 2. Speedometer 1. Engine Oil Pressure Gauge

2. Coolant Temperature Gauge
Fig. 2.38, Instrument Panel (center) 3. Engine Oil Temperature Gauge (optional)
4. Voltmeter
Speedometer 5. Turbocharger Boost Pressure Gauge (optional)
6. Pyrometer (optional)
The speedometer registers speed in both miles per
hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). See Fig. 2.39, Instrument Panel Gauges (left side)
Fig. 2.38.
CAUTION
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
A sudden decrease or absence of oil pressure
The oil pressure gauge should read as shown in
may indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle
Table 2.1. See Fig. 2.39.
to a safe stop and investigate the cause to pre-
vent further damage. Do not operate the engine
Oil Pressure*
until the cause has been determined and cor-
At Idle Speed: At Rated RPM: rected.
Engine Model
psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
Caterpillar C–10 10–20 (69–138) 30–45 (207–310) Coolant Temperature Gauge
Caterpillar C–12 10–20 (69–138) 30–45 (207–310)
Caterpillar 3406E 15 (100) min. 40 (275) min. During normal engine operation, the coolant tem-
Cummins M11 10 (69) min. 35–45 (241–310) perature gauge should read 175 to 195°F (79 to
Cummins N14† 10 (69) min. 35–45 (241–310)
91°C). See Fig. 2.39. If the temperature remains
below 160°F (71°C) or exceeds the maximum tem-
Detroit Diesel S60 12 (83) 50 (345) min.
perature shown in Table 2.2, inspect the cooling sys-
MBE4000 7 (50) 36 (250) min. tem to determine the cause. See the Century Class
* Oil pressures are given with the engine at operating temperature. With
Trucks Workshop Manual for troubleshooting and
the engine cold, oil pressure may be higher.
† Individual engines may vary from the listed pressures; observe and repair procedures.
record pressures when the engine is new to create a guide for checking
engine condition. Maximum Coolant Temperature
Table 2.1, Oil Pressure Engine Make Temperature: °F (°C)
Caterpillar 215 (101)
Cummins 220 (104)
Detroit Diesel 215 (101)
2.34
Maximum Coolant Temperature started or when electrical devices in the vehicle are
being used.
Engine Make Temperature: °F (°C)
Mercedes-Benz 221 (105) If the voltmeter shows an undercharged or over-
charged condition for an extended period, have the
Table 2.2, Maximum Coolant Temperature
charging system and batteries checked at a repair
facility.
Engine Oil Temperature Gauge, On a vehicle equipped with a battery isolator system,
Optional the voltmeter measures the average voltage of all the
batteries when the engine is running. When the en-
During normal operation, the engine oil temperature gine is stopped, the voltmeter shows only the gel cell
gauge should read: battery voltage and does not indicate the voltage of
the engine-starting batteries.
• 180 to 225°F (82 to 107°C) for Cummins en-
gines;
CAUTION
• 190 to 220°F (88 to 104°C) for Caterpillar en-
gines; Gel cell batteries can be damaged if the battery
• 200 to 230°F (93 to 110°C) for Detroit Diesel voltage is allowed to drop below 12.0 volts or if
engines; the charging voltage is more than 14.1 volts.
Start the engine to recharge the gel cell before
• 185 to 240°F (85 to 115°C) for Mercedes-Benz the battery becomes fully discharged. If an exter-
engines. nal charger is needed, disconnect the gel cell
Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep battery and use only an external battery charger
grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil tem- that has been approved for gel cell batteries.
perature range for a short period are not unusual.
See Fig. 2.39. Turbocharger Boost Pressure Gauge,
Optional
CAUTION A turbocharger boost pressure gauge measures the
pressure in the intake manifold, in excess of atmos-
A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not pheric pressure, being created by the turbocharger.
caused by a load increase may indicate mechani- See Fig. 2.39.
cal failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and
investigate the cause to prevent further damage.
Do not operate the engine until the cause has
Pyrometer, Optional
been determined and corrected. A pyrometer registers the exhaust temperature near
the turbocharger. See Fig. 2.39. Normal exhaust
Voltmeter temperatures are listed in Table 2.3.
The voltmeter indicates the vehicle charging system
Exhaust Temperature
voltage when the engine is running and the battery
voltage when the engine is stopped. By monitoring Exhaust Temperature:
Engine Model
the voltmeter, the driver can be aware of potential °F (°C)
charging system problems and have them fixed be- Caterpillar C–10, C–12 935–1290 (500–700)
fore the batteries discharge enough to create starting Caterpillar 3406E 900–1100 (480–595)
difficulties. See Fig. 2.39. Cummins M11 800–1000 (430–540)
Cummins N14 750–950 (400–510)
The voltmeter will normally show approximately 13.7
to 14.1 volts when the engine is running. The voltage Detroit Diesel 700–950 (370–510)
of a fully charged battery is 12.7 to 12.8 volts when MBE4000 750–1022 (400–550)
the engine is stopped. A completely discharged bat- Table 2.3, Exhaust Temperature
tery will produce only about 12.0 volts. The voltmeter
will indicate lower voltage as the vehicle is being
2.35
Variations in engine load can cause exhaust tem- Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge,
peratures to vary. If the pyrometer reading shows
that exhaust temperature exceeds normal, reduce Optional
fuel to the engine until the exhaust temperature is During normal operation, the transmission oil tem-
reduced. Shift to a lower gear if the engine is over- perature gauge reading should not exceed 250°F
loaded. (121°C) for Fuller transmissions. See Fig. 2.40.
Primary and Secondary Air Pressure CAUTION
Gauges
A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not
Air pressure gauges register the pressure in the pri-
caused by a load increase may indicate mechani-
mary and secondary air systems. See Fig. 2.40. Nor-
mal pressure, with the engine running, is 100 to 120
psi (689 to 827 kPa) in both systems. A low-air-
Do not operate the engine until the cause has
pressure warning light and buzzer, connected to both
been determined and corrected.
the primary and secondary systems activate when air
pressure in either system drops below a minimum
pressure of 64 to 76 psi (441 to 524 kPa). When the Forward and Rear Axle Oil
engine is started, the warning light and buzzer re- Temperature Gauges, Optional
main on until air pressure in both systems exceeds
minimum pressure. During normal operation, forward and rear axle oil
temperature gauges should read between:
• 160 to 220°F (71 to 104°C) for Meritor™ drive
axles;
• 180 to 200°F (82 to 93°C) for Eaton drive
axles.
1 Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep
2 grades, temperatures up to a maximum of 250°F
(121°C) are not unusual. See Fig. 2.40.
CAUTION
3
4 A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not
caused by a load increase may indicate mechani-
5
02/12/96 6 f601127 Do not operate the engine until the cause has
1. Primary Air Pressure Gauge been determined and corrected.
2. Secondary Air Pressure Gauge
3. Fuel Gauge Application Air Pressure Gauge,
4. Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge (optional) Optional
5. Forward Axle Oil Temperature Gauge (optional)
6. Rear Axle Oil Temperature Gauge (optional) An application air pressure gauge registers the air
Fig. 2.40, Instrument Panel Gauges (right side) pressure being used to apply the brakes and should
be used for reference only. The gauge will not regis-
Fuel Gauge ter air pressure until the foot brake pedal is de-
pressed or the trailer hand brake is applied.
The fuel gauge indicates the level of fuel in the fuel
tank(s). See Fig. 2.40. If equipped with a second
(optional) fuel gauge, each fuel tank level is indicated
on a separate gauge.
2.36
Intake-Air Restriction Gauge, Optional Ammeter, Optional

An intake-air restriction gauge measures the vacuum An ammeter measures current flowing to and from
on the engine side of the air cleaner at the air the battery. When the batteries are charging, the
cleaner outlet. Vacuum is measured in inH2O (inches meter needle moves to the plus side of the gauge;
of water). When the vacuum reading in normal op- when the batteries are being discharged, the needle
eration equals the applicable level shown under "Ser- moves to the minus side. A consistent negative read-
vice" in Table 2.4, the air cleaner needs to be ser- ing when the engine is running indicates a possible
viced. problem with the charging system.
NOTE: Rain or snow can wet the filter and Borg Indak Analog Clock
cause a higher than normal reading temporarily.
The analog clock features electronic setting. Do not
Intake-Air Restriction pull the set knob. The time can be set either forward
Engine Type* Initial inH2O Service inH2O (turn knob to the right) or backward (turn the knob to
Cummins 12 25 the left). A slight turn of the knob either right or left
Detroit Diesel 12 20 will change the setting of the clock one minute at a
time. Holding the knob to either the right or the left
Caterpillar 15 25
will allow accelerated sweeping of the hands for set-
Mercedes-Benz 10 22
ting the hour.
* Turbocharged engines must be checked at full load and governed en-
gine speed.
Table 2.4, Intake-Air Restriction
Pana-Pacific Digital Clock, Optional
A Pana-Pacific clock has black characters on a con-
stantly backlighted green display, with a brightness
Intake-Air Restriction Indicator that automatically adjusts for day or night. The clock
An intake-air restriction indicator measures the has a 24-hour alarm with a three-minute snooze fea-
vacuum on the engine side of the air cleaner at the ture.
air cleaner outlet. See Fig. 2.41. If the yellow signal 1. To set the time of day:
stays locked at or above the values shown in
Table 2.4, after the engine is shut down, the air 1.1 Push the Run/Set (lower) switch to the
cleaner needs to be serviced. The indicator then right (TIME-SET position).
needs to be reset by pressing the yellow button. NOTE: When the hour setting is for a time
between noon and midnight, the small letters
PM will appear in the lower left corner of the
display; no PM indicates an A.M. setting.
1.2 Advance the hour setting to the correct
number by pushing and releasing the hour
button as many times as needed. Or if the
button is pressed and held in for longer
than two seconds, the numbers will con-
tinue to advance until the button is re-
leased.
1.3 Advance the minute setting by repeatedly
01/18/95 f600148a pushing, or pushing and holding the
minute button as needed.
Fig. 2.41, Intake-Air Restriction Indicator
1.4 Push the Run/Set switch to the middle
NOTE: Rain or snow can wet the filter and (RUN) position.
cause a higher than normal reading temporarily. 2. To set the alarm time:
2.37
2.1 Push the Run/Set switch to the left NOTE: A small illuminated red dot in the
(ALARM-SET position). upper left side of the clock (above PM) indi-
2.2 Set the alarm time by using the same pro- cates P.M. No dot indicates A.M.
cedure that you used to set the time of 1.2 Advance to the correct time by pushing
day. Remember to set the hour for A.M. either the "Fast" or "Slow" push button.
(no letters in the corner of the display) or
P.M., as desired. 2. To set the alarm:
2.3 Return the Run/Set switch to the middle 2.1 Depress the alarm "Set" push button; ob-
(RUN) position; the readout will return to serve that a red lamp above the word
the time-of-day setting. "Alarm" illuminates.
3. To operate the alarm: 2.2 Set the alarm time by using the same pro-
cedure that you used to set the time of
3.1 With the alarm time set, push the alarm day. Remember to select either A.M. (no
(upper) switch to the left. An alarm "wave" red dot) or P.M. (red dot illuminates) when
symbol and the letters AL will appear in setting the alarm time.
the upper left corner of the display when
the alarm is on. 2.3 After the desired alarm time appears, de-
press the alarm "Set" push button again.
3.2 When the displayed time of day coincides The readout will return to the time of day
with the alarm time, the alarm will sound. and the red lamp will go out.
If the "snooz" button is not pushed or the
alarm switch is not moved, the alarm will 2.4 To set the alarm, depress the alarm "On"
automatically stop sounding after one push button. Observe that a red dot on
minute and will not sound again for 24 the right side of the time-of-day readout is
hours. illuminated. The alarm is now set and
when the displayed time of day coincides
3.3 If desired, press the "snooz" button while with the alarm time, the alarm will sound.
the alarm is sounding to shut the alarm off
for three minutes. The alarm symbol will 2.5 To cancel or shut off the alarm, depress
flash in the display when the button is the alarm "On" push button again. The red
pushed and will continue to flash until the dot on the face of the clock will go out.
alarm switch is moved or the alarm has
sounded for one minute. The snooze pro- Air-Weigh On-Board Scale
cedure can be done as many times as
The Air-Weigh on-board scale is an aftermarket op-
desired.
tion for all truck models with air suspensions. The
3.4 Move the alarm switch to the right when in-dash LCD scale provides digital weights to within
you wish to shut off or cancel the alarm; 300 lb (135 kg) of a DOT scale. It is calibrated to the
the alarm symbol will disappear. vehicle suspension and weight. See Fig. 2.42.
1. ESC—press ESC to go to the menu system
Kysor Digital Clock, Optional when displaying weights, or go to the previous
A Kysor digital clock has a constant red display, menu selection when within the menu system.
which automatically adjusts the brightness for day or Pressing ESC before pressing ENTER during
night. The clock features a 24-hour alarm. data entry will make the scale revert to its previ-
ous entry like an Undo function. Pressing ESC a
1. To set the time of day: second time will return to the previous menu se-
1.1 Depress both of the time "Set" push but- lection.
tons, labelled "Fast" and "Slow"; 12:00
A.M. will appear as the readout.
2.38
In the off position, the key slot is vertical; the key can
be inserted and removed only in this position. The
low beam headlights, taillights, brake lights, road
lights, dome lights, clearance lights, turn signals,
hazard warning lights, utility and baggage lights,
spotlights, horn, CB radio, power mirrors, cigarette
Air Weigh lighter, clock, refrigerator, fuel heater, electric oil pan
heater, and electric or diesel-fired engine-coolant pre-
STEER 11860 heaters can be operated in the off position (regard-
less of whether the key is inserted).
DRIVE 33760 In the accessory position, the key is turned counter-
TRLR 33680 clockwise. The auxiliary (bunk) fan, windshield fan(s),
radio or stereo system, mirror heat, ether start sys-
tem, air dryer, backup lights, and all of the electrical
ESC ENTER
systems that are operable in the off position are op-
erable in the accessory position.
In the on position, the key is turned clockwise. All
electrical systems are operable. Low air- and oil-
pressure warning lights (or messages) and buzzer
operate until the engine is started and pressure is
05/18/2005 f610768 built up. The engine can be started and operated
only when the ignition switch is on.
Fig. 2.42, Air Weigh Gauge
Switching on the ignition and releasing the parking
2. ARROW UP—press ARROW UP to select a brakes automatically activates the daytime running
menu option immediately above the flashing se- lights. The daytime running lights will operate until
lection and to scroll the display to a higher num- the parking brakes are applied, then they will switch
ber. Holding the ARROW UP increases the off. The vehicle must not be driven unless the day-
scrolling rate when entering numbers. time running lights are activated.
3. ARROW DOWN—press ARROW DOWN to se-
lect a menu option immediately below the flash- Cruise Control
ing selection and to scroll the display to a lower IMPORTANT: On vehicles with Eaton VORAD
number. Holding ARROW DOWN increases the Collision Warning System (CWS) with Smart-
scrolling rate when entering numbers. Cruise, see the Collision Warning System head-
4. ENTER—pressing ENTER selects the flashing ings in this chapter before operating cruise con-
menu item. It is also used to enter weights dur- trol.
ing calibration. The cruise control is activated by the SPD CNTL (on/
For complete calibration and operation instruc- off) and RSM/ACC–SET/CST switches on the dash
tions, contact Air-Weigh at www.air-weigh.com (Fig. 2.37) or by optional PAUSE, RESUME, and
or 1-888-459-3444. SET buttons on the transmission shift knob
(Fig. 2.43). The minimum speed at which cruise con-
Controls trol can be used is 30 mph (48 km/h). The minimum
and maximum speed cruise control set limits can be
Ignition Switch and Key programmed, by authorized personnel, into the en-
gine electronics.
The ignition switch has four positions: accessory, off,
on, and start. The ignition key locks and unlocks the
cab doors, baggage door(s) and if equipped, the
bunk door(s).
2.39
2.1 Depress the brake pedal or clutch pedal,

or
2.2 Press the lower half of the SPD CNTL
rocker switch on the instrument control
panel or push the PAUSE button on the
transmission shift knob.
3. To resume a preselected cruise speed:
3.1 If the SPD CNTL rocker switch on the in-
strument control panel is off, turn it on.
3.2 Momentarily flip the RSM/ACC–SET/CST
paddle switch on the instrument control
panel to RSM/ACC or push the RESUME
05/23/95 f260316 button on the transmission shift knob.
Cruise will return to the last speed se-
Fig. 2.43, Cruise Control, Transmission Shift Knob lected.
Buttons
NOTE: The resume vehicle speed memory is
not maintained if the ignition is shut off.
WARNING
4. To adjust cruise speed up or down, hold the
Do not use the cruise control system when driv- paddle switch on the instrument control panel at
ing conditions do not permit maintaining a con- RSM/ACC to accelerate or at SET/CST to decel-
stant speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads erate until the desired speed is reached or press
that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or the SET button on the transmission shift knob to
roads with a loose driving surface. Failure to fol- accelerate or the RESUME button to decelerate
low this precaution could cause a collision or until the desired speed is reached.
loss of vehicle control, possibly resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Power Takeoff (PTO) Governor
Caterpillar electronic engines may be equipped with
CAUTION a PTO governor. This mode is used only when the
vehicle is parked. The PTO mode is activated by the
Do not attempt to shift gears without using the
SPD CNTL and RSM/ACC–SET/CST switches on the
clutch pedal when the cruise control is engaged.
dash (Fig. 2.37) or by optional PAUSE, RESUME,
Failure to follow this precaution will result in a
and SET buttons on the transmission shift knob
temporarily uncontrolled increase in engine
(Fig. 2.43).
speed; transmission damage and gear stripping
could result. 1. To engage the PTO:
1. To cruise at a particular speed: 1.1 Press the upper half of the SPD CNTL
1.1
Press the upper half of the SPD CNTL
panel.
(on/off) rocker switch on the instrument
control panel. 1.2 Hold the throttle down until the tachometer
reaches the desired engine speed.
1.2 Hold the throttle down until the speedom-
eter reaches the desired speed. 1.3 Momentarily flip the paddle switch on the
instrument control panel down to SET/
1.3 Momentarily flip the RSM/ACC–SET/CST
CST or push the SET button on the trans-
paddle switch on the instrument control
mission shift knob.
panel down to SET/CST or push the SET
button on the transmission shift knob. 2. To disengage the PTO:
2. To disengage the cruise control:
2.40
2.1 Depress the brake pedal or clutch pedal, If DDEC IV detects low oil pressure, both the Check
or Engine and Engine Protection lights will go on and
the engine will shut down in thirty seconds (if pro-
2.2 Press the lower half of the SPD CNTL grammed).
panel or press the PAUSE button on the Optimized Idle®
shift knob.
The Optimized Idle option on DDEC IV-equipped ve-
3. To resume a previously selected engine speed: hicles is a system that automatically stops and re-
3.1 If the SPD CNTL switch on the instrument starts the engine to accomplish the following:
control panel is turned off, turn it on. • Keep the engine oil temperature between 60 to
3.2 Momentarily flip the paddle switch on the 104°F (16 to 40°C)
instrument control panel up to RSM/ACC • Keep the battery charged
or press the RESUME button on the trans-
mission shift knob. • Keep the cab or sleeper at a constant, desired
temperature (if equipped with a thermostat)
4. To adjust engine speed up or down, hold the
RSM/ACC–SET/CST paddle switch up to accel- The benefits of the system include reduced engine
erate or down to decelerate until the desired idle time, fuel savings, reduction of exhaust emis-
speed is reached or press the SET button on the sions and noise, increased starter and engine life,
transmission shift knob to accelerate or the RE- and less chance of dead batteries due to electrical
SUME button to decelerate until the desired loads.
speed is reached.
Optimized Idle operates in two modes. They are the
NOTE: The resume engine speed memory is engine mode or the thermostat mode. The engine
not maintained if the ignition is shut off. mode keeps the battery charged and the engine oil
temperature within factory set limits. The thermostat
Detroit Diesel Electronic Engine mode is the same as the engine mode, but also
keeps the cab and sleeper at a constant preset tem-
Control (DDEC IV®) Operator Control perature.
IMPORTANT: This vehicle is equipped with an The engine mode is always activated when the sys-
Instrumentation Control Unit (ICU) that provides tem is operated. The thermostat mode is activated
warning messages and diagnostic fault codes. when the thermostat is turned on.
See Instrumentation Control Unit, depending on The thermostat mode controls the set point, which is
the type of unit installed in your vehicle. the desired temperature of the cab and sleeper, and
The DDEC IV system uses a computer that is pro- the comfort zone, which is the number of degrees
grammed to automatically control engine timing and from the set point before the engine needs to heat or
fuel injection, providing maximum engine perfor- cool the cab. There are three comfort zones: 4°F
mance and fuel economy. (2°C), 7°F (4°C), or 10°F (6°C).
DDEC IV systems will shut down the engine if sen- Vehicles equipped with Optimized Idle have a label
sors indicate an emergency engine condition such as and a dash light. The dash light is on the dash mes-
low coolant level, high coolant temperature, or high sage center or the Driver Message Center, on the A
oil temperature. If such a condition occurs, the yellow panel. See Fig. 2.44. See Fig. 2.45 for the dash
Check Engine light on the dash will illuminate. If the label detail. If equipped with the thermostat mode, a
problem gets bad enough to cause possible engine thermostat is located in the sleeper, above the bunk.
damage, the DDEC IV will gradually cut engine See Fig. 2.46.
power down to 70 percent of original power. At that
point, the red Engine Protection (ENG PROT) light The thermostat consists of an LCD readout and four
will turn on and thirty seconds later, DDEC IV will buttons.
shut down the engine (if programmed).
2.41
1
The display normally shows the temperature of the
sleeper, but changes accordingly as the buttons are
pressed.
FASTEN SEATBELTS The button functions are as follows:
0000432 MILES
• Up button: increases the set point and comfort

02/11/97 f601264
zone.
1. Optimized Idle Light • Down button: decreases the set point and
comfort zone.
Fig. 2.44, Optimized Idle Light
• Cool/heat button: detects either cooling or
heating operation.
• Mode button: scrolls through the various func-
OPTIMIZED IDLETM tions. It can also be used to set desired tem-
TO USE:
perature values.
− IDLE ENGINE
− CLOSE HOOD 1. Activate Optimized Idle (engine mode) as fol-
− ENGAGE PARKING BRAKES TO AVOID lows:
− PUT TRANSMISSION IN UNINTENTIONAL
NEUTRAL AND VEHICLE MOVEMENT,
HI RANGE (IF EQUIPPED)
DO NOT MOVE SHIFT
1.1 Set the parking brake.
− THEN, MOVE CRUISE SWITCH
FROM OFF TO ON LEVER OR RANGE
− IF DESIRED, TURN CAB SELECTOR WHEN 1.2 If it is tilted, close and secure the hood.
THERMOSTAT ON (IF EQUIPPED) OPTIMIZED IDLE IS ON
1.3 Start the engine and let it idle.
11/13/96 f080062
1.4 Put the transmission in neutral.
Fig. 2.45, Optimized Idle Dash Label 1.5 Turn on the cruise control.
3 4 5 IMPORTANT: The cruise control must be

turned on after the engine is idling. If it was
2
previously turned on, turn off the cruise con-
6 trol, then turn it on again.
MODE
7 1.6 The dash light will begin blinking, indicat-

°F
ing that Optimized Idle is active. The sys-
°C tem is now in the engine mode and after
8 an initial phase, in which the idle speeds
1 up to 1000 or 1500 rpm (depending on the
outside temperature), the engine will stop
and start automatically to keep the battery
11/08/96
10 9 f601250 charged and the engine oil warm. The
1. Down Button dash light stays on and shines steadily at
2. Up Button this point.
3. Upper/Lower Temperature Icon 2. Activate the thermostat mode (if so equipped) as
4. Temperature Display
5. Degrees Fahrenheit Indicator follows:
6. Mode Button NOTE: When the system is in the thermostat
7. Cooling Icon
8. Cool/Heat Selection Button
mode, it is also in the engine mode. It will
9. Heating Icon continue to operate in the engine mode even
10. Degrees Celsius Indicator if the thermostat mode is turned off.
Fig. 2.46, Optimized Idle Thermostat 2.1 With the system in the engine mode, set
the cab and sleeper heater or air condi-
tioner controls to the highest setting.
2.42
2.2 Turn on the thermostat by touching any of If the engine is not running: Start the en-
the four buttons. See Fig. 2.46. gine. Release the parking brakes or put
the transmission into gear.
The display will flash the current sleeper
temperature and the previous mode (cool- 5.2 Let the engine return to base idle. The
ing or heating) selected. If the cab needs active light will turn off. Optimized Idle is
to be cooled or heated, the cool/heat icon now disabled and all the DDEC features
will flash. are available.
2.3 Choose either cool or heat by pressing the
Cool/Heat button. Make sure the selection Detroit Diesel Electronic Engine
matches that of the cab controls. Control (DDEC VI®) Operator Control
IMPORTANT: If the heat or cool selection of Because the DDEC VI system is electronic, vehicle
the thermostat does not match that of the battery power must be available to operate the com-
cab, the system will idle and cycle exces- puter. The system operates at 12 volts, however, in
sively. the event of a power supply malfunction, the system
will continue to operate at reduced voltage. When
2.4 Select Fahrenheit or Celsius by pressing this occurs, the amber warning lamp (Check Engine)
and holding the Mode button until either will come on. The engine will operate only at reduced
the °F or °C is displayed. rpm. When the battery reaches a point where the
2.5 Select the temperature set point by press- Motor Control Module (MCM) hasn’t enough power to
ing either the UP button or the DOWN function, the engine will shut down.
button, as applicable. Holding the button Besides the engine and its related sensors, the
will cause the display to count up or down DDEC VI system has two control modules:
rapidly. When the desired set point is dis-
played, release the button. The set point • a Motor Control Module (MCM) located on the
is stored in memory. engine;
2.6 Select the temperature comfort zone by • a Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) lo-
pressing the MODE button until the upper cated in the vehicle cab.
and lower temperature limit icon is dis- The two control units are connected by a proprietary
played. Then use the UP or DOWN button datalink, through which all necessary data and infor-
to select one of the three comfort zones of mation is exchanged. The CPC broadcasts informa-
4°F (2°C), 7°F (4°C), or 10°F (6°C). tion on the J1587 and J1939 datalinks, where it is
3. To change the display to either Fahrenheit or read by the diagnostic tool. The MCM monitors both
Celsius, press the MODE button until only the °F the engine and datalink. When a malfunction is de-
or °C icon is flashing. Press the UPor DOWN tected, the system selects an appropriate response;
button to change to the desired value. The main for example the emergency-running mode may be
display will appear five seconds after the button activated.
is released.
Motor Control Module (MCM)
4. To deactivate the thermostat mode and return to
The MCM is located on the left-hand side of the en-
just the engine mode, press the MODE button
gine. See Fig. 2.47.
and hold it for three seconds.
5. The MCM processes the data received from the
To shut down Optimized Idle completely, either
CPC; for example, the position of the accelerator
turn off the ignition or use the drive away feature.
pedal, engine brake, etc. This data is evaluated to-
The drive away feature allows the use of all the gether with the data from the sensors on the engine,
DDEC features. Use the drive away feature as such as coolant and fuel temperature, and oil and
follows: charge pressure. The data is then compared to the
5.1 If the engine is running: Release the park- characteristic maps stored in the MCM. From this
ing brakes or put the transmission in gear. data, the quantity and timing of fuel injection are cal-
culated.
2.43
California Engine Idle Limiting

In order to meet the California engine idle limiting
standard, an engine idle shutdown feature has been
built into the DDEC VI engine control strategy. When
the California engine idle limiting feature is enabled,
the engine will generally shut down after five minutes
of continuous idling when the transmission is in neu-
tral or park, and the parking brake is set, or after fif-
teen minutes when the transmission is in neutral or
park, and the parking brake is not set.
Activating or momentarily changing the position of
the service-brake pedal, the clutch pedal, stop-
02/19/2008 f545236 engine override switch, the accelerator pedal, or
parking brake status, during the final 30 seconds be-
Fig. 2.47, Motor Control Module (MCM) fore a shutdown would otherwise occur, will prevent
the engine from shutting down, and will reset the
Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) shutdown timer. After an automatic shutdown, the
The CPC is located in the vehicle cab. See engine may be restarted and operated normally.
Fig. 2.48. The CPC communicates with the MCM, If a parked regen of the aftertreatment system is initi-
over the J1939 datalink. Data for specific applications ated, it will override the five-minute idle shutdown.
is stored in the CPC. These include idle speed, maxi- The HEST lamp will flash every ten seconds, indicat-
mum running speed, and speed limitation. ing a regeneration is in progress, and the driver is
not controlling the engine idle.
The automatic shutdown feature is generally disabled
on engines certified by the U.S. EPA for use outside
California.
Idle Shutdown Timer

This feature is an optional 1-to-100 minute idle shut-
down system. Its purpose is to conserve fuel by
eliminating excessive idling, and allowing a turbo-
charger cool-down period. To activate the shutdown,
the transmission must be in neutral with the vehicle
parking brakes set and the engine in idle or fast-idle
02/19/2008 f545235
mode.
Fig. 2.48, Common Powertrain Controller (CPC)
Data Recording Capability
The CPC receives data from the following sources: DDEC VI contains the ability to extract detailed data
• the operator (accelerator pedal position, engine on the engine use and performance, using DDEC
brake switch, etc.); Reports software. This data, known as DDEC Data,
is stored in the CPC and contains information on en-
• other electronic control units (for example, the gine performance (such as fuel economy, idle time,
antilock brake system); time in top gear), and critical incidents (such as de-
• the MCM (oil pressure, coolant temperature, tailed diagnostic data records and hard braking
etc.). events). DDEC Data can be downloaded using
DDEC Reports software to produce reports. See the
Detroit Diesel DD15 Engine Operator’s Guide for
complete details.
2.44
Flashing Malfunction Codes speed falls below 1000 rpm or when the vehicle
slows down to a preset speed, depending on DDEC
All malfunction codes are four digits. The malfunction programming. This prevents stalling the engine.
code recorded in the computer memory will remain
until it is erased by a technician. The flashing mal- For safety reasons, do not use cruise control when it
function code can also be obtained by the operator. is not possible to keep the vehicle at constant speed
See the Detroit Diesel DD15 Engine Operator’s due to:
Guide for complete details. • Winding roads
Engine Brake • Heavy traffic
The engine brake is enabled by an ON/OFF switch, • Slippery pavement
with a separate intensity switch to select low, me- • Descending grades calling for engine brake
dium, or high braking power.
assistance
WARNING For a detailed explanation of the engine brake opera-

tion, see the Detroit Diesel DD15 Engine Operator’s
To avoid injury from loss of vehicle control, do Guide.
not activate the engine brake system under the
following conditions: Caterpillar C–10, C–12, and 3406E
• on wet or slippery pavement, unless the ve- Electronic Engine Operator Control
hicle is equipped with antilock braking system IMPORTANT: This vehicle is equipped with an
(ABS) and you have had prior experience driv- Instrumentation Control Unit (ICU) that provides
ing under these conditions;
warning messages and diagnostic fault codes.
• when driving without a trailer or pulling an See Instrumentation Control Unit, depending on
empty trailer; the type of unit installed in your vehicle.
• if the tractor drive wheels begin to lock, or The Caterpillar C–10, C–12, and 3406E electronic
there is fishtail motion after the engine brake is engines use a computer (electronic control module)
activated. to automatically control engine timing and fuel injec-
tion. The electronic features of these engines include
If the engine is equipped with both cruise control and
an electronic governor, fuel-to-air ratio control, pro-
an engine brake, the engine brake can operate auto-
grammable engine ratings, injection timing control,
matically while in cruise control mode. If the cruise
fault analysis and recording, and a datalink used for
control/engine brake function is turned on in the
programming the electronic control module and
DDEC VI system programming, the engine brake will
troubleshooting the system.
come on “low” when the set road speed increases a
few miles-per-hour (kilometers-per-hour) above the All Caterpillar electronic engines have an engine
cruise set speed. The maximum amount of braking check light located above the speedometer and ta-
(low, medium, high) is selected with the dash chometer. This warning light comes on or flashes if
switches. When the vehicle returns to the set cruise the engine oil pressure is low, the coolant tempera-
speed, the engine brake will turn off. ture is high, the intake manifold air temperature is
high, the coolant is low (optional), or whenever there
The engine brake will only operate when the accel- is a problem within the electronic engine system.
erator pedal is fully released. Disengaging the clutch Some vehicles equipped with Caterpillar electronic
will prevent the engine brake from operating. engines have an automatic engine shutdown option.
Vehicles equipped with antilock braking systems This option will shut off fuel to the engine if poten-
(ABS) have the ability to turn the engine brake off if tially damaging conditions are detected. See the Cat-
a wheel-slip condition is detected. The engine brake erpillar electronic engine troubleshooting manual for
will automatically turn itself back on once the wheel troubleshooting procedures.
slip is no longer detected. The DDEC VI system will See Chapter 7 for complete operating instructions
deactivate the engine brake system when the engine for the cruise control and the PTO governor.
2.45
BrakeSaver Control, Optional If the system is programmed to shut down, the en-
gine will shut down 30 seconds after the red engine
The BrakeSaver (optional on Caterpillar 3406E en- stop light comes on. The ignition switch will restart
gines) is operated by a lever mounted in the cab. the engine after shutdown, but if the potentially dam-
The lever controls the amount of oil being directed aging problem still exists, the engine will operate at
through the BrakeSaver. The time required to fill the the reduced speed or torque level allowed just prior
BrakeSaver with pressure oil to the point of maxi- to shutdown.
mum braking in the BrakeSaver is approximately 1.8
seconds. Request/Inhibit Regen Switch
Cummins CELECT™ Plus Electronic A parked regen of the diesel particulate filter can be
Engines Operator Control initiated with the request/inhibit regen switch. It may
also be used to inhibit the vehicle from performing an
IMPORTANT: This vehicle is equipped with an automatic regen. See Fig. 2.49.
Instrumentation Control Unit (ICU) that provides
warning messages and diagnostic fault codes.
See Instrumentation Control Unit, depending on
the type of unit installed in your vehicle.
Cummins CELECT Plus is an electronic fuel control
system. These electronic engines are controlled by a
microprocessor-based computer. This computer con-
trols specific engine and vehicle speed modes of op-
eration to maximize vehicle fuel economy and perfor-
mance.
Vehicles with these engine systems have three indi-
cator lights: a yellow check engine light, a red stop 10/02/2006 f610848
engine light, and an engine protection (engine fluids)
light. These indicators are located in the lightbar Fig. 2.49, Request/Inhibit Regen Switch
above the speedometer and tachometer. With the The style and function of switch will vary with the en-
ignition switch on, the indicator lights come on for gine make and model in the vehicle. See the engine
about two seconds; then, if there is no problem with operation manual for operation details.
the engine system, the lights will go out. Whenever
there is a problem within the electronic engine sys-
tem, one of the lights will come on and stay on as
Ether Start, Optional
long as the problem exists. For cold-weather starting, the vehicle may be
The yellow check engine light and the red stop en- equipped with one of several automatic ether start
gine light warn the driver of a system fault during ve- systems. See the engine manufacturer’s engine op-
hicle operation. If the yellow check engine light eration manual for additional information.
comes on while driving, some features will not work
but the vehicle can still be driven. If the red stop en- Low Voltage Disconnect, Optional
gine light comes on while driving and if the engine The optional Sure Power Low Voltage Disconnect
will not accelerate, pull off the road and shut down (LVD) system monitors battery power when accesso-
the engine. The engine protection light alerts the ries are being used while the engine is shut down.
driver of a possible engine fluid out of range condi- The system automatically turns off cab and sleeper
tion. These conditions consist of: below normal en- accessories when voltage drops to 12.3 volts to en-
gine oil pressure, above normal engine oil tempera- sure that there is enough battery power to start the
ture, above normal engine coolant temperature, vehicle. An alarm sounds for one minute before ac-
below normal coolant level, and above normal intake cessories are turned off. If no action is taken within
manifold air temperature. In any of these situations, that minute, the LVD module will shut off power to
have the problem repaired as soon as possible.
2.46
predetermined cab and sleeper circuits. These cir- Repeated ultra-deep discharging of a gel cell will re-
cuits will remain off until the LVD measures 13.0 duce its life significantly.
volts applied to the system, which can be done by To protect against ultra-deep discharging, a low volt-
starting the engine. After the engine is started, the age warning alarm and indicator light activate when
system will reset. the battery voltage falls to 12.0 volts or less. To si-
All vehicles equipped with LVD have a sticker on the lence the alarm, turn off all cab electrical loads or
dash indicating the presence of the system. Another start the engine.
sticker is located inside the right-hand door frame
behind the seat, along with the LVD module. The IMPORTANT: To recharge a gel cell, see an au-
LVD module is located on the engine tunnel, behind thorized Freightliner dealer or the instructions in
the lower right-hand dash panel. the Century Class Trucks Workshop Manual.
Battery Isolator System, Optional Road Light Switch, Optional

A battery isolator system has two or three regular The road light switch operates the road lights
batteries to turn the starter motor, and one or two gel mounted on the bottom edge of the front bumper or
cell batteries to provide power for cab and sleeper recessed in the front bumper.
accessories when the engine is off. The system uses For vehicles built to operate in the United States, the
an isolator relay, which is normally open. The relay low beam headlights must be turned on before the
isolates the engine-starting batteries while the engine road lights can be turned on. The road lights will not
is not running so the engine can still be started even go on if the high beam headlights are already on,
if the gel cell has been used to the point of complete and switching from low beams to high beams will
discharge. switch off the road lights.
The isolator relay is closed only while the engine is For vehicles built to operate in Canada, the marker
running. With the engine running, all four batteries lights must be on before the road lights can be
are connected in parallel allowing the alternator to turned on.
charge them all, in addition to supplying power for all
vehicle loads. Utility Light Switch, Optional
When the engine is not running, the gel cell provides
Utility lights can be swivel-mounted on top of the
all of the vehicle’s electrical needs except for turning
cab, mounted on the intake/exhaust support, or flush-
the starter motor.
mounted in the back of the cab or sleeper box. They
The gel cell is longer-lived and cheaper to use than a are operated by the utility light switch, which when
standard wet cell, but it can take a charge only within turned on also illuminates a red indicator light in the
an extremely narrow range—13.8 to 14.1 volts. switch (if equipped).
At 14 volts, a gel cell has a very high charge accep-
tance rate. Because a truck charging system oper- Panel Lamp Control Switch
ates at approximately 14 volts, under normal condi- The circuit to the panel lamps is activated by the
tions a gel cell will never need to be recharged with headlight switch. When the headlights are on, the
an external charger. panel lamp switch controls the intensity of the instru-
ment panel lamps. Slide the switch up to brighten
CAUTION them and down to dim them.
Do not attempt to charge a gel cell with a stan- Headlight Switch and Daytime
dard battery charger. All standard battery charg-
ers supply at least 16 volts to the battery. This
Running Lights
will damage the gel cell. A three-position headlight switch is used to operate
However, the single gel cell has limited current- the exterior lights. When the switch is up, the head-
supply capability and will drain down faster than a lights, and all other vehicle lights are on. All vehicle
standard multiple-battery installation that has no bat-
tery isolator system. Avoid ultra-deep discharging.
2.47
lighting is off when the switch is in the middle posi- The bottom paddle, when pushed in, turns the
tion. When down, the switch activates only the clear- washers on. When pressed for less than 1/2-second,
ance, instrument panel, and marker lights, and the the wipers will perform a single, low speed dry wipe
taillights. The switch for the headlight high beams is (mist function). When pressed for more than 1/2-
built into the turn signal lever. When the headlights second, the wash cycle begins and continues for
are on high beam, a blue light in the warning and three cycles or until the paddle is released. When the
indicator light module goes on. The ignition switch bottom paddle is pushed up, the wipers operate in
must be on for the high beams to operate. fast delay. When the bottom paddle is pushed down,
the wipers operate in slow delay. With the wipers in
Switching on the ignition and releasing the parking
delay mode (fast or slow), push the bottom paddle
brakes automatically activates the daytime running
up to shorten the delay period, or push the paddle
lights. The daytime running lights will operate until
down to lengthen it.
the parking brakes are applied, then they will switch
off. The vehicle must not be driven unless the day-
time running lights are activated. CAUTION
Interrupt Switch Do not move the wiper arms manually. Wiper
motor damage will occur if the arms are moved.
A spring-loaded interrupt switch temporarily deacti-
vates the marker lights and taillights. With the vehicle Left and Right Windshield-Fan
lights on, raise and release the interrupt switch to
briefly turn off the marker lights and taillights. To alert
Switches Optional Ceiling-Mounted
the driver that the switch is functioning, the dash Fans
lights will flash with the marker lights when the switch
is actuated. Ceiling-mounted defogger fans are operated by Low/
Off/High toggle switches located in the base of the
fan.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls
The wipers are operated by a double-paddle switch Heater/Air-Conditioner Controls
mounted on the auxiliary instrument panel. See
Fig. 2.50. The top paddle, when pushed in, turns the Heater/air conditioner controls consist of a four-
wipers on (if they are off) or off (if they are on). speed fan switch, an air selection switch, a tempera-
When it is pushed up, the top paddle switches the ture control switch, and a fresh air/recirculation
wipers to high speed; when it is pushed down, it switch. See Fig. 2.51. See Chapter 4 for detailed
switches them to low speed. operating instructions of the heater/air conditioner.
1 2 3
1
5
10/26/95
4 f830717
1. Fan Switch
11/15/95 f541127
2. Air Selection Switch
3. Temperature Control Switch
1. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4. Fresh Air/Recirculation Switch
5. Auxiliary (sleeper bunk) Switch
Fig. 2.50, Instrument Panel (LH DR shown)
Fig. 2.51, Heater/Air Conditioner Controls
2.48
Jacobs Engine Brake Switch,

Optional
The Jake Brake is controlled by a dash-mounted
paddle switch that controls the degree of engine
braking. See Chapter 7 under the heading Engine
Braking System, Optional for additional information.
Interaxle Differential Lockout Control

Valve Switch
9/07/95 f310489
Differential lockout, standard on all dual-drive ve-
hicles, is driver-actuated by means of a Lock/Unlock Fig. 2.53, Fifth Wheel Air Slide Switch
control valve switch mounted on the control panel.
See Fig. 2.52. A red indicator light comes on when-
ever the interaxle differential is locked out (switch is CAUTION
in the lock position; no differential action between the
drive axles). A guard around the switch minimizes Do not activate the fifth wheel slide control valve
accidental activation. while the vehicle is in motion. To do so could
cause damage to the fifth wheel member, the
kingpin, the cab or trailer, and ultimately to the
drivetrain.
Parking Brake Control Valve, and

Trailer Air Supply Valve
The yellow diamond-shaped knob operates the park-
ing brake valve. See Fig. 2.54. Pulling the knob ap-
plies both the tractor and the trailer spring parking
brakes. Pushing in the knob releases the tractor
spring parking brakes. Before the spring parking
09/26/95 f350141
brakes can be released, the air pressure in either air
Fig. 2.52, Interaxle Differential Lockout Switch
brake system must be at least 65 psi (447 kPa).
Fifth Wheel Air Slide Control Valve

1
Switch, Optional Air-Operated Sliding 2
Fifth Wheel
The fifth wheel air slide valve permits repositioning of
the sliding fifth wheel from inside the cab. Moving the
air slide control valve switch to the lock position de-
activates the control valve and locks the fifth wheel
to the baseplate. Moving the switch to the unlock po- 03/10/99 f610291
sition activates the control valve and unlocks the fifth
1. Trailer Air Supply Valve Knob
wheel slide mechanism, allowing changes to the total 2. Parking Brake Control Valve Knob
length of the tractor-trailer and changes to axle loads
to comply with varying state or provincial laws. See Fig. 2.54, Brake Valve Knobs
Fig. 2.53. A red indicator light, if equipped, is illumi-
nated whenever the fifth wheel slide is unlocked. A The red octagonal-shaped knob operates the trailer
guard is positioned around the switch to minimize air supply valve. See Fig. 2.54. After the vehicle and
accidental activation.
2.49
its air hoses are connected to a trailer and the pres-

sure in the air system is at least 65 psi (447 kPa),
the trailer air supply valve knob must be pushed in
(and should stay in) to charge the trailer air supply
system and release the trailer spring parking brakes.
Before disconnecting a trailer or when operating a
vehicle without a trailer, the trailer air supply valve
knob must be pulled out.
See Chapter 6 under the heading Brake System for
instructions regarding use of the trailer air supply
valve and parking brake valve. 09/26/95 f350143
Controlled Traction Differential Control Fig. 2.56, Air Suspension Dump Valve
Valve Switch will not absorb road shocks and could be dam-
A controlled traction differential feature is included or aged.
available as an option on some rear axles. A control
valve switch engages and disengages the controlled Lane Guidance™ System Rocker
traction feature. See Fig. 2.55. A guard is positioned Switch, Optional
around the switch to minimize accidental activation.
The lane departure warning system is controlled by a
dash-mounted rocker switch that toggles the system
on and off. Additional information is detailed later in
this chapter.
Automatic Engine Idler/Timer,

Optional
A Henke automatic engine idler/timer allows the
driver to select the idle time required for engine shut-
down. The driver can turn off the ignition, remove the
ignition key, lock the vehicle, and leave it with the
09/26/95 f350142
engine idling; the automatic timer will shut the engine
Fig. 2.55, Controlled Traction Differential Switch off at the end of the selected time.
See Chapter 9 for complete operating instructions. Cigarette Lighter

Air Suspension Dump Valve, Optional Push in the lighter to heat the element. The lighter
will stay in and will automatically pop out when the
The air suspension dump valve allows the air in the element is hot.
vehicle air suspension to be quickly exhausted, low-
ering the rear of the vehicle. This makes it easier to CB Radio Connections
connect to or disconnect from a trailer. A control
valve switch exhausts and fills the air suspension. To An antenna connection and positive (+) and negative
exhaust air from the suspension, move the switch to (–) power connections are provided for a CB radio.
LOWER. See Fig. 2.56. A guard is positioned around
the switch to minimize accidental activation. Turn Signal Lever
The turn signal lever is mounted on the steering col-
CAUTION umn. See Fig. 2.57. Pushing the lever counterclock-
wise turns on the left-turn signal lights; pushing it
Never exhaust air from the suspension while clockwise turns on the right-turn signal lights. When
driving. If the air is exhausted, the suspension
2.50
1
Trailer Brake Hand Control Valve
2 Lever
The trailer brake hand control valve lever is used for
applying the trailer brakes without applying the truck
or tractor brakes and is mounted on the steering col-
umn. See Fig. 2.57. See Chapter 6 under the head-
ing Brake System for operating instructions.
3 Transmission Controls
9/26/95 f461056 If equipped, the transmission range control valve and
1. Turn Signal Lever splitter valve are attached to the gearshift knob.
2. Trailer Brake Hand Control Valve Lever Transmission shift pattern labels are located inside
3. Hazard Warning Light Switch Tab the cab.
Fig. 2.57, Steering Column-Mounted Controls (LH DR See Chapter 8 for complete transmission operating
shown) instructions.
one of the turn signal lights is on, a green indicator Allison Automatic Transmission
light flashes at the far left or far right of the warning
and indicator light panel. To cancel the signal, return Controls
the lever to the neutral position. Allison HD-series automatic transmission models are
controlled by an electronic control unit (ECU). The
Hazard Warning Light Switch Tab ECU processes information from sensors, pressure
The hazard warning light switch tab is located under- switches, and the shift selector to automatically con-
neath the turn signal lever. See Fig. 2.57. Hazard trol the transmission according to programmed speci-
warning lights are operated by pulling the tab out. fications. See Fig. 2.58.
When the hazard warning light switch tab is pulled
out, all of the turn signal lights and both of the indica-
tor lights on the control panel will flash. To cancel the
warning lights, move the turn signal lever up or
down.
1
Headlight Dimmer
Pull the turn signal lever toward the steering wheel to 2
change from low-beam to high-beam headlights or
from high beam back to low beam.
When the headlights are on high beam, a blue light
on the indicator light panel comes on. For vehicles
built to operate in the United States, switching from
low beams to high beams will switch off the road
lights.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be on for the 10/28/94 f600368a
high beams to work. 1. Indicator Panel 2. Mode ID
Fig. 2.58, Allison Push Button Shift Selector
Vehicles with these transmissions have a red do-not-

shift light in the lens and bezel assembly. Also, there
is a service light in the indicator panel on the shift
2.51
selector. With the ignition switch on, both lights come SleeperCabs have additional lights in the bunk area,
on for a few seconds; then, if there is no problem including bunk reading lights, under-bunk lights (bag-
with the transmission system, the lights will go out. gage compartment lights), and fluorescent lights.
Whenever there is a problem with the transmission
system, the lights will come on and stay on as long Dome Light Switches
as the problem exists.
Diffuse dome lights are installed on all cabs. See
If service is displayed in the indicator panel, some Fig. 2.59 and Fig. 2.60. The dome lights are located
features may not work, but the vehicle can still be either on the overhead console, or on the cab roof (if
driven. If the do-not-shift light comes on while driving no overhead console is installed). Both dome lights
(accompanied by eight short beeps from the shift se- turn on when either the driver or passenger door is
lector), operating limits will be placed on the trans- opened. The dome lights can also be turned on by
mission, such as restricting upshifts and downshifts. pressing in on the light lens.
However, the vehicle can still be driven to reach ser-
vice assistance. In either situation, have the problem
repaired as soon as possible. See the Allison Trans-
mission Service Manual for troubleshooting proce-
dures.
See Chapter 8 for complete transmission operating
instructions.
Suspension Seat Adjustment Controls

Due to the maximum adjustability of mid- and high- 07/11/97 f541715
back air suspension seats, it is possible to combine
the seat back recline adjustment and the seat slide Fig. 2.59, Dome/Tray, Red Map, and Clear Reading
adjustment so that the seat back contacts the back- Lights (SleeperCab)
wall. It is the responsibility of the driver to adjust the
seat to prevent damage to the seat and the cab inte-
rior.
All adjustment controls for a suspension seat are lo-
cated on the seat base. See Chapter 5 for complete
instructions.
Mirror Heat Switch, Optional

One or both outside door mirrors can be heated to
keep them defrosted. Whenever the mirror heat 07/14/97 f541717
switch is on, an amber indicator light illuminates in
the switch. Fig. 2.60, Dome Light with Red Map Light
Power Mirrors Red Map Light Switches

Both outside mirrors can be equipped with an electri- Red map lights are available on all cabs. See
cal remote control. Operate the driver door-mounted Fig. 2.59 and Fig. 2.60. They are located next to the
switch to adjust the mirror. dome lights in the same fixture. Like the dome lights,
the map lights can be turned on by pressing in on
Interior Light Controls the light lens.
The interior lights include dome lights, red map

lights, clear reading lights, and courtesy lights.
Day cabs are available with an optional rear wall
fluorescent light in the cab.
2.52
Clear Reading Light Switches, Optional— Rear-Wall Fluorescent Light Switches,

SleeperCabs Only Optional
Clear reading lights are available on SleeperCabs A rear-wall fluorescent light is available on all raised
only. See Fig. 2.59. They are located next to the roof cabs. See Fig. 2.63. It is located on the rear
dome lights in the same fixture. Like the dome lights, wall where the wall meets the roof. To turn on the
the reading lights can be turned on by pressing in on rear-wall fluorescent light, press the rocker switch on
the light lens. either the lower or upper bunk control panels. See
Fig. 2.64.
Courtesy Light Switch, Optional
Courtesy lights are available on all cabs. They illumi-
nate the footwell area on both sides of the cab. The 1
driver’s courtesy light is attached to the steering col-
umn and the passenger’s footwell light is located on
the lower right dash panel. See Fig. 2.61 and
Fig. 2.62. To turn on the courtesy lights, press the
rocker switch on the dash. When the lights are on,
the switch is illuminated by a light inside it.
2
09/29/95 f541133
1. Fluorescent Light
2. Fluorescent Light Lens
Fig. 2.63, Mid-Roof Fluorescent
2
1
07/14/97 f541716
Fig. 2.61, Driver’s Floor Courtesy Light

9
3
4
7
5
11/06/98 f830811
1. Reading Light Switch 6. Clock

2. Reading Light 7. Volume Control Knob
06/10/98 f601053 3. A.T.C. Control Knob 8. Dome Light Switch
4. Dome Light Switch 9. Fan Control Knob
Fig. 2.62, Passenger’s Footwell Courtesy Light (LH DR 5. Cigarette Lighter
shown)
Fig. 2.64, Bunk Reading Light and Control Panel
2.53
Mid-Roof Fluorescent Light Switches

(SleeperCabs Only)
A mid-roof fluorescent light (curtain bow light) is stan-
dard on SleeperCabs only. It is located on the ceiling
in the middle of the cab where the curtain is drawn to
separate the bunk area from the rest of the cab. See
1
Fig. 2.63. To turn on the mid-roof fluorescent light,
press the rocker switch on the dash or on either the
lower or upper bunk control panels. See Fig. 2.64.
Bunk Reading Light Switches, Optional— 2

SleeperCabs Only
3
Bunk reading lights are high-intensity reading lights
for use when reading in the bunk. They are located
on the bunk control panel for each bunk. To turn on
the bunk reading lights, press the rocker switch on
the bunk control panel that holds the light. See
Fig. 2.64.
Baggage Compartment Light Switches

(SleeperCabs Only)
Baggage compartment lights are on all cabs. One 09/29/95 f541139
light is located on each side of the cab on the under-
side of the lower bunk and illuminates the baggage 1. Under-Bunk Light 3. Switch
2. Bunk
compartment. Both lights turn on when either bag-
gage compartment door is opened. The lights also Fig. 2.65, Baggage Compartment Light
come on when the lower bunk is raised. See
Fig. 2.65. Roll Stability Advisor and
Tilt Steering Wheel Control System
The optional tilt steering wheel control pedal is lo- NOTE: This describes the full-feature Roll Sta-
cated to the left of the clutch pedal. See Fig. 2.66. bility Advisor and Control system. For vehicles
equipped with only Roll Stability Advisor or only
After adjusting the seat to the desired ride position,
unlock the steering column by pushing and holding Roll Stability Control, see the applicable major
the control pedal all the way down. Tilt the steering headings that follow.
column to the desired position, then release the con- Roll Stability Advisor and Control is an onboard infor-
trol pedal to lock the steering column in place. mation and training system for drivers, capable of
automatically slowing the vehicle to reduce the risk of
WARNING rollover. The system uses a lateral acceleration sen-
sor that monitors rollover risk. Shortly after a curve,
Make sure that the steering column is locked be- lane change, or other driving maneuver that results
fore driving the vehicle. Never tilt the column in a rollover risk detection, a driver advisory message
while driving the vehicle. Doing so could cause is displayed in the Driver Message Center, a dash
loss of vehicle control, personal injury, and prop- warning light illuminates, and an audible tone
erty damage. sounds. The purpose is to advise that the previous
maneuver produced a rollover risk. If a significant
rollover risk is detected, Roll Stability Control will in-
tervene and attempt to actively reduce vehicle speed.
2.54
• Roll Stability Control

• Hard Braking Advisor
A decal (Fig. 2.67) on the auxiliary dash panel and
an amber-colored dash indicator light (Fig. 2.68) indi-
cate that the vehicle is equipped with one or more
components of the Roll Stability Advisor and Control
system.
2
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
lamp indicates traction
OR roll control event.
Follow instructions in
driver’s manual.
24−01204−000
07/11/2003 f080125
A Fig. 2.67, Roll Stability Advisor and Control Dash Decal

1
11/14/95 f461069
A. Driver’s Door Opening
1. Adjustment Valve 2. Air Line Connections
Fig. 2.66, Tilt Steering Wheel Control Pedal (LH DR

shown)
The goal of the system is to reduce accidents—

especially rollover accidents—by helping the driver to
identify high-risk conditions and reduce vehicle
speed. 06/26/2003 f602128
Fig. 2.68, Roll Stability Advisor and Control Dash

WARNING Indicator Lamp
The Roll-Stability Control system is intended only
as an aid for a conscientious and alert driver.
Roll Stability Advisor
Carefully read the information in this manual to The Roll Stability Advisor system provides advisory
understand this system and its limitations. The information to the driver about risky maneuvers just
Roll-Stability Control system is not a substitute performed. This information is conveyed by illumina-
for safe driving procedures. Failure to drive tion of the dash indicator light, by text messages dis-
safely, and use the system properly, could result played in the dash-mounted Driver Message Center,
in personal injury and/or death and property and by an audible tone.
damage.
IMPORTANT: This is not an advance warning
Roll Stability Advisor Messages
system. The system advises only after the driv- Roll Stability Advisor displays different text messages
ing maneuver is completed. depending on the severity of the risk of each occur-
rence of risky driving. From the lowest risk level to
The Roll Stability Advisor and Control system pro- the highest risk level, the system displays the follow-
vides three functions: ing messages for the lengths of time indicated in
• Roll Stability Advisor Fig. 2.69.
2.55
The dash indicator light illuminates whenever the Roll

Message Display Display Buzzer Stability Control system intervenes. See Fig. 2.68.
Time: Time:
Seconds
19.6
Seconds
10
Hard Braking Advisor
VERY HIGH RISK OF
ROLLOVER DETECTED The Hard Braking Advisor is an onboard braking in-
REDUCE SPEED formation and training system. It utilizes the informa-
AT LEAST _ MPH tion from the ABS wheel speed sensors to determine
when braking is severe enough to produce lockup at
or in metric
one or more wheels on the tractor and/or very rapid
REDUCE SPEED
vehicle deceleration. Shortly after a hard braking
AT LEAST _ KPH
event occurs, an advisory message is displayed in
HIGH RISK OF 14 5 the Driver Message Center indicating that the braking
ROLLOVER DETECTED behavior was too aggressive for the current road sur-
REDUCE SPEED face conditions. This system is not a replacement for
AT LEAST _ MPH a driver’s good judgment. Sometimes it is necessary
to brake hard.
or in metric
REDUCE SPEED Hard Braking Advisor Messages

AT LEAST _ KPH
8.4 2
In order from the lowest risk level to the highest risk
ROLLOVER RISK
DETECTED
level, the messages displayed are:
REDUCE SPEED • Loss of Traction, ABS Activated; Road Surface
AT LEAST _ MPH May Be Poor
or in metric • Hard Braking Detected; Look Ahead, Brake
REDUCE SPEED Sooner
AT LEAST _ KPH
• Hard Braking With ABS Activated; Look Ahead,
4 1
WARNING Brake Sooner
RAC SYSTEM FAIL
ACTIVE SLOWING
4 None Clearing Messages
ROLLOVER RISK
When a diamond symbol appears in the upper right
10/23/2006 f040752 corner of the display, press the key with a diamond
label on the 10-key keypad to clear the screen and
Fig. 2.69, Roll Stability Advisor Warnings stop the audible tone. See Fig. 2.70. If the diamond
key is not pressed, the message will turn off by itself.
NOTE: The system will calculate and recom-
mend a speed reduction value. It may be differ-
ent than the values shown here.
Bring the vehicle to an authorized service facility if
the system failure message is displayed.
Roll Stability Control 07/11/2003 f602133
The Roll Stability Control system automatically re- Fig. 2.70, Diamond Key at the Left End of the 10-Key
duces engine power, applies the engine brake, Keypad
and/or applies the tractor and trailer brakes when the
acceleration sensor detects that the vehicle is at risk Trip/Leg Totals
of rolling over. The control can intervene even before
an advisory message is displayed. A count of Roll Stability and Hard Braking advisories
is included with the TRIP and LEG information pre-
sented in the Driver Message Center. Press the TRIP
2.56
or LEG keys on the Driver Message Center twice to

see the number of these events that have occurred
during a TRIP or LEG. Hold the set/reset button FASTEN SEATBELTS
while viewing the screen to reset the event counters. 0000432 MILES
Exterior Switches 1 2
Battery Disconnect Switch, Optional 04/02/96 f601125
1. Tractor ABS Warning 2. Wheel Spin Indicator
The switch is used whenever service operations re-
quire that the batteries be disconnected. It is also Fig. 2.72, ABS Warning and Indicator Lights (standard)
used whenever the vehicle is placed out of service
for extended periods, to prevent battery discharge. go out only if all of the tractor’s ABS components are
See Fig. 2.71. working.
IMPORTANT: The battery disconnect switch IMPORTANT: If any of the ABS warning lights
does not completely isolate the batteries from do not work as described above or come on
the electrical system. For service operations that while driving, repair the ABS system immedi-
require that the batteries be disconnected, al- ately to ensure full antilock braking capability.
ways shut down the engine and remove the The wheel spin indicator light (WHEEL SPIN) comes
negative battery cables. on if one of the drive wheels spins under power. The
light goes out when the wheel stops spinning. A label
on the dash explains what actions should be taken
when the WHEEL SPIN indicator light comes on.
See Fig. 2.73.
IF REAR WHEEL SPIN OCCURS,

PARTIALLY RELEASE THROTTLE
PEDAL UNTIL WHEEL SPIN
AMBER LIGHT EXTINGUISHES,
THEN ENGAGE AXLE LOCK.
09/22/98 f600311a
01/18/95 f600150a
Fig. 2.73, Dash Label
Fig. 2.71, Battery Disconnect Switch
CAUTION
Meritor WABCO Antilock
Axle lock should only be engaged when the ve-
Braking System (ABS) hicle is moving slowly at low throttle. Engage-
The Meritor™ WABCO® Antilock Braking System ment at high speed or power can damage the
(ABS) has a tractor warning light (TRACTOR ABS) axle(s).
and if equipped with automatic traction control (ATC), Vehicles with electronic engines and ABS may have
a wheel spin indicator light (WHEEL SPIN). See automatic traction control (ATC). On these vehicles,
Fig. 2.72. the ATC system automatically limits wheel spin when
After the ignition switch is turned on, the tractor power is applied to the drive axles during reduced-
warning light (TRACTOR ABS) and (if equipped) the traction situations.
wheel spin (WHEEL SPN) indicator light come on for
about three seconds. After three seconds, the lights
2.57
If the vehicle has ATC, there will be a momentary An optional side sensor(s), mounted on the side of
contact rocker switch on the dash labeled NORM/ the vehicle, also transmits and receives radar signals
SPIN and ATC. for a distance of two to 10 feet (0.5 to 3 meters)
alongside your vehicle. The side sensor can detect
When the ATC system is in the NORMAL mode, it unseen vehicles and objects, moving and stationary,
will apply gentle braking to the spinning wheel to adjacent to your vehicle.
feed power to the wheel(s) with better traction. If
both wheels are spinning, the system will signal the
electronic engine to reduce power. WARNING
Pressing NORM/SPIN will temporarily allow more The Eaton VORAD EVT–300 Collision Warning
drive wheel spin to help burn through a thin layer of System (CWS) is intended solely as an aid for an
ice or to help throw off accumulated mud or snow. alert and conscientious professional driver. It is
SPIN mode is indicated by a flashing WHEEL SPIN not intended to be used or relied upon to operate
light. Pressing NORM/SPIN again will cycle the sys- a vehicle. Use the system in conjunction with
tem back to normal operation. rearview mirrors and other instrumentation to
See the brake system operating instructions in Chap- safely operate the vehicle. Operate this vehicle,
ter 6 for more information. equipped with the EVT–300 Collision Warning
System, in the same safe manner as if the EVT–
300 Collision Warning System were not present.
Collision Warning System
The EVT–300 Collision Warning System is not a
(CWS), Eaton VORAD EVT–300 substitute for safe, normal driving procedures,
(Stand Alone), Optional nor will it compensate for any driver impairment
such as drugs, alcohol, or fatigue.
NOTE: Coverage under this heading contains
information and instructions for vehicles with the The EVT–300 Collision Warning System may pro-
vide little or no warning of hazards such as pe-
driver display unit (DDU) displays and control
destrians, animals, oncoming vehicles, or cross
switches. traffic.
For vehicles with the integrated ICU displays Failure to drive safely and use the system prop-
and panel switches, see the next major heading erly could result in personal injury and/or death
in this chapter. and severe property damage.
The Eaton VORAD EVT–300 is a computerized colli-
sion warning system (CWS) that uses front-mounted Driver Display Unit (DDU)
and side-mounted (optional) radar to continuously NOTE: All system controls are located on the
monitor vehicles ahead and alongside your vehicle. DDU. See Fig. 2.74. Indicators to inform the
The system warns of potentially dangerous situations driver about the system’s operation are located
by means of visual and audible alerts. The system on both the DDU and the optional side sensor
performs in fog, rain, snow, dust, smoke, and dark- display.
ness. To be detected, objects must be within the
radar beam’s field of view and provide a surface area The DDU controls system power, range for vehicle
that can reflect back the radar beam. warnings, and speaker volume. At the lower front
edge of the DDU, a slot is provided to insert the op-
The front-looking antenna assembly transmits radar tional driver’s identification card. Alert and indicator
signals to and receives them back from vehicles and lights advise of multiple warning levels, system
objects ahead. This allows the determination of the power, system failure and if configured, failure of the
distance to, relative speed of, and angle to the target driver to enter the identification card.
of vehicles and objects ahead. The system uses this
information to warn the driver of potentially danger- A light sensor automatically adjusts alert and indica-
ous situations. tor light brightness depending on lighting conditions.
A small speaker provides audible alert tones to warn
of closing on an object ahead and when equipped
2.58
3 4 5
2 6
ON SC
FAIL
1 7
VOLUME ALERTS RANGE
EATON VORAD 11 10 9
TECHNOLOGIES
12
10/15/98 8 f610258
1. Red System Failure Indicator Light 7. Ambient Light Sensor
2. Green Power ON/Driver’s Card Status Indicator Light 8. Driver’s Identification Card Slot
3. Volume Control and Power ON/OFF Knob 9. Red Alert Light
4. Speaker 10. Orange Alert Light
5. Range Knob 11. Yellow Alert Light
6. Green SC Indicator Light 12. Distance/Danger Alert Lights
Fig. 2.74, Driver Display Unit (EVT-300)
with an optional side sensor of objects alongside NOTE: This electronic parameter can be config-
when the turn signal is activated in preparation for a ured.
lane change. Additional tones indicate speaker vol-
ume, system failure, driver’s card status, and data 4. Rotate the range knob to adjust the first alert de-
extraction pass or fail. tection range to between 3 and 2.25 seconds.
Push and hold the knob for five seconds to acti-
1. The green power-on/driver’s card (optional) sta- vate the accident reconstruction function and
tus indicator light illuminates when the system is freeze the most recent data in half of the allo-
activated and the power-on LED test is complete. cated memory.
If the system is configured to require that the
driver’s card be read and it is not, the ON light NOTE: The system may be configured to pre-
blinks continuously. vent adjustment of the range levels.
2. Push in the volume control and power ON/OFF 5. The red system failure indicator light illuminates
knob to turn power on or off. Turn the knob left if a system problem is detected. Press and hold
or right to increase or decrease speaker volume. the volume control knob for five seconds to dis-
Press and hold the knob for five seconds and play fault codes. The fault codes will be blinked
then release it to activate the failure display out as a pattern of flashes on this indicator light.
mode. See Table 2.5 for fault codes.
NOTE: The system may be configured to have Fault Codes
no on/off capability. Fault Code Suspect Failure
3. The speaker is located under the top cover of 11 Central Processing Unit (CPU)
the DDU. It sounds audible tones to alert the 12 CyberCard
driver to potential hazards. Volume may be re- 13 Driver Display Unit (DDU)
stricted to a range above a minimum level. 14 Antenna Assembly
2.59
Fault Codes 11. The red alert light illuminates, along with the yel-
low and orange alert lights, when you are less
Fault Code Suspect Failure
than one-second behind a vehicle. If the vehicle
15 Right Side Sensor
ahead is opening the interval, no tone will sound.
16 Left Side Sensor If you are closing the interval, double tones will
21 Right-Turn Signal sound. Within a 1/2-second or less following in-
22 Left-Turn Signal terval, opening or closing, the tones will repeat
23 Brake twice per second.
24 Speed
12. If a stationary vehicle or object or an object mov-
25 Cruise
ing at least 20 percent slower than your vehicle
31 J1587 is detected within 220 feet (67 meters) and within
32 J1939 three seconds, all three alert lights will illuminate
33 VBUS and the double tones will sound. This warning
34 DDU Communications overrides all others and is not affected by the
35 Antenna Assembly Communications range control knob setting.
41 No Fault or End of Fault Codes
IMPORTANT: The detection range will be re-
Table 2.5, Fault Codes duced during a sharp turn.
13. If your vehicle is traveling less than five mph (8
6. The green SC indicator light will flash eight times km/h) and an object is detected less than 15 feet
if the range knob is pressed to store accident (4.5 meters) in front of your vehicle and the clos-
reconstruction information. It will also flash eight ing rate is less than two mph (3 km/h) but more
times after the system is activated, after the than 1/2 mph (1 km/h), the yellow alert light will
power-on LED test is finished, and if accident illuminate and a low-frequency double tone will
reconstruction data was previously stored. sound.
7. The ambient light sensor senses lighting condi- NOTE: All warnings apply only to objects within
tions and automatically adjusts the intensity of
the maximum detection range and in your lane.
the indicator and alert lights.
Proximity alert tones and vehicle-closing 1- to
8. If the system’s configuration requires, insert the 2-second following interval tones are configured
driver’s identification card in the slot at the lower items. All tones are disabled in sharp turns or
front edge of the DDU. A high-pitched tone will when the brakes are applied. If the configuration
sound when the driver’s identification card has permits, the three-second alert level may be ad-
been successfully read. One low tone will sound
justed with the range control knob. A single low-
if the driver’s card has been unsuccessfully read.
If configured, a repeated low tone will sound if frequency tone sounds when a system failure is
the system is on and the requested driver’s card detected. A medium-frequency tone sounds
has not been inserted. when the volume control level is changed. Suc-
cessful downloading of Vehicle Information Man-
9. The yellow alert light illuminates when an object agement System (VIMS) data will cause a
is detected within the system’s maximum range
double tone to sound. Unsuccessful download-
of 350 feet (107 meters) on a straight road.
Range is reduced in curves by the turn radius of ing will cause a low-frequency tone to sound.
the curve. This light also illuminates when the 14. A failure of the optional side sensor(s) will cause
proximity alarm threshold is crossed. a continuous red light on the side sensor display
10. The orange alert light illuminates, along with the to appear.
yellow alert light, when your vehicle is within a
two- to three-second following interval behind Side Sensor Display
another vehicle in the same lane. If you are 1. The yellow indicator light illuminates continuously
within a two-second following interval and closing when no vehicle is detected by the side sen-
on the vehicle ahead, a warning tone will also sor(s). See Fig. 2.75.
sound.
2.60
Failure to drive safely and use the system prop-

erly could result in personal injury and/or death
and severe property damage.
1 Certain special road situations may affect the sys-
tem’s ability to detect objects. These situations in-
clude the effects of curves, dips, and hills which can
2 provide an unexpected result:
NOTE: A warning may sound when an object is
detected in front of the vehicle even though the
3 driver intends to turn away or stop before reach-
ing the object.
• When an object is detected in a very sharp
right- or left-hand turn, the audible alarm will
not sound.
• When approaching a curve, before turning into
01/27/97 f601259
it, alarms may sound and lights illuminate be-
1. Red Alert Light (vehicle or object detected) cause of an object off the road directly in line
2. Ambient Light Sensor with your vehicle. This will not occur when the
3. Yellow Indicator Light (no vehicle or object detected) brakes are applied.
Fig. 2.75, Side Sensor Display • Elevated obstacles such as overpasses and
overhead signs may be detected when ap-
2. The ambient light sensor senses lighting condi-
proaching a roadway descending to a lower
tions and automatically adjusts the intensity of
elevation.
indicator and alert lights.
• Vehicles cannot be detected on the other side
3. The red alert light illuminates when objects are of a hill. An alarm will not sound until the object
detected by the side sensor(s). If the right turn is within the antenna assembly’s field of view.
signal is activated and the side sensor detects
an object, the red alert light will illuminate and • On approaching a steep hill, objects above the
the DDU speaker will sound a high-frequency beam cannot be detected. Generally, the beam
double tone. This tone is sounded only once per hitting the road surface does not cause an
activation of the turn signal. The red light will alarm.
also illuminate and stay on if a failure of the side
• The side sensor only detects objects within its
sensor is detected. If objects are temporarily un-
field of view, next to the tractor. A vehicle far-
able to be detected during heavy rain, both the
ther back behind the field of view, will not be
red and yellow lights will illuminate.
detected.
Special Road Situations • The side sensor range is set to detect average
sized vehicles two to 10 feet (0.5 to 3 meters)
WARNING away in the adjacent lane.
• The radar beam of the CWS will detect near
The Eaton VORAD EVT–300 Collision Warning range cut-ins of approximately 30 feet (9
System (CWS) is intended solely as an aid for an meters) or less, depending on the angle of en-
alert and conscientious professional driver. It is trance into the lane in front of your vehicle.
not intended to be used or relied upon to operate
a vehicle. Use the system in conjunction with
rearview mirrors and other instrumentation to
WARNING
safely operate the vehicle. This system will not Heavy rain or water spray at the side sensor may
warn of many possible hazards. Do not assume it cause both the yellow and red lights on the side
is "all clear" if no alert lights are illuminated.
2.61
sensor display to illuminate at the same time. ing a trip and to notify his maintenance depart-
Under these conditions, the system is tempo- ment or Eaton VORAD. See "Failure Display
rarily unable to provide adequate warnings. Mode/Fault Codes" below. In this mode, specific
fault codes are indicated by the pattern of blinks
Failure to drive safely and use the system prop- of the driver display unit red FAIL light.
and severe property damage. 4. Each fault code is a two-digit number, as shown
in Table 2.5. The red FAIL light blinks the same
NOTE: A continuous fixed object on the right number of times as the first digit, a pause of ap-
side of the vehicle such as a guard rail, wall, proximately 3/4 of a second follows, then the
tunnel, or bridge may cause the side sensor light blinks the same number of times as the sec-
alert light to stay on. ond digit.
5. Additional fault codes are blinked out at intervals
In Case of Accident of approximately eight seconds. After all the fault
The optional accident reconstruction capability pro- codes have been displayed, a code 41 will be
vides two segments of system data, one of which flashed.
can be stored in system memory. Push and hold the
DDU range knob for about five seconds to store the Failure Display Mode/Fault Codes
first segment. Within six seconds, the green SC indi-
cator light will blink rapidly eight times, confirming 1. Press and hold the DDU volume control and
that the data has been saved. If the range knob is power ON/OFF knob. Continue pressing the
pushed again, a fail tone will sound. After the first knob until the FAIL light begins to blink in ap-
segment is saved, the second segment runs continu- proximately five seconds. If configured, the sys-
ously, but only contains the last 10 minutes (approxi- tem will turn off if you release the knob before
mately) of system data. five seconds. After five seconds, the DDU FAIL
light begins to blink out the failure flash codes. A
NOTE: Once the first memory segment is fro- code 41 will be displayed either if no faults are
zen, the other can’t be frozen. Only by discon- found or when all fault codes have been dis-
necting the main CPU connector can the sec- played.
ond memory segment be preserved. You must 2. Position the DDU range knob to the left to blink
return the CPU to Eaton VORAD for download- active fault codes and to the right to blink inac-
ing and interpretation of accident reconstruction tive codes.
data.
3. Fault codes can only be reviewed, tested, and
cleared by using a Pro-Link® 9000 diagnostic
Maintenance and Diagnostics tool.
1. Keep the antenna assembly and side sensor(s)
free of a buildup of mud, dirt, ice, or other debris Collision Warning System
that might reduce the system’s range.
(CWS), Eaton VORAD EVT–300
2. The system tests itself continuously and evalu-
ates the results every 15 seconds. If a problem (with ICU-Integrated display),
is detected with the front radar system, the red
FAIL light on the DDU illuminates continuously as
Optional
long as the failure is active. The corresponding NOTE: Coverage under this heading contains
fault code is stored in the CPU’s memory. information and instructions for vehicles with the
3. Both active and inactive fault codes can be indi-
Instrument Control Unit (ICU), Level III displays
cated by the DDU when the system is placed in and control switches.
failure display mode. Inactive faults are those For vehicles with the driver display unit (DDU),
that have occurred and have cleared. Active see the previous major heading in this chapter.
faults are still present. Fault codes provide the
driver the ability to record the system faults dur-
2.62
The Eaton VORAD EVT–300 is a computerized colli- Failure to drive safely and use the system prop-
sion warning system (CWS) that uses front-mounted erly could result in personal injury and/or death
and side-mounted (optional) radar to continuously and severe property damage.
monitor vehicles ahead and alongside your vehicle.
The system warns of potentially dangerous situations
Dash Switches
by means of visual and audible alerts. The system The following dash switches (Fig. 2.76) are used to
performs in fog, rain, snow, dust, smoke, and dark- control the CWS and optional SmartCruise.
ness. To be detected, objects must be within the
radar beam field of view and provide a surface area • Headway Alert (HDWY ALERT): This switch
that can reflect back to the radar beam. turns on the CWS. On most systems, the CWS
will turn on automatically when the ignition is
The front-looking antenna assembly transmits radar turned on. The switch is backlit by a green light
signals to and receives them back from vehicles and that indicates the system is on.
objects ahead. This allows the determination of the
distance to, relative speed of, and angle to the target If the system is equipped with the optional
of vehicles and objects ahead. The system uses this SmartCruise, the switch will not be installed.
information to warn the driver of potentially danger- • Headway Control (HDWY CNTL): This switch
ous situations. Vehicles with optional SmartCruise is installed on vehicles with the optional Smart-
also use this system to maintain consistent headway. Cruise. When this switch is pressed the light
An optional side sensor(s), mounted on the side of comes on to indicated that the vehicle is in
the vehicle, also transmits and receives radar signals SmartCruise mode. It has the same function as
for a distance of 2 to 10 feet (0.5 to 3 meters), along- the SPD CNTL switch, which will be installed
side your vehicle. The side sensor can detect ve- on vehicles without SmartCruise. The switch
hicles and objects, moving and stationary, adjacent will be backlit by a green light when the Head-
to your vehicle. way Control is on.
• Resume/Accelerate - Set/Coast (RSM/ACC -
WARNING SET/CST): This switch works the same as it
does on conventional cruise control. On ve-
The Eaton VORAD EVT–300 Collision Warning hicles with SmartCruise, the speed will change
System (CWS) is intended solely as an aid for an if necessary to maintain the set headway.
alert and conscientious professional driver. It is • Headway Volume (HDWY VOL+/-): This
not intended to be used or relied upon to operate switch adjusts the volume of the headway
a vehicle. Use the system in conjunction with alerts and other audible alerts from the CWS.
rearview mirrors and other instrumentation to The speaker volume will reset to maximum vol-
safely operate the vehicle. Operate this vehicle, ume when the system is turned off and back
equipped with the EVT–300 Collision Warning on again, or the ignition is turned off and back
System (and optional SmartCruise), in the same on.
safe manner as if the EVT–300 Collision Warning
System were not present. • Headway Adjustment Switch (HDWY+/
HDWY-): This switch will adjust the headway
The EVT–300 Collision Warning System is not a for alerts. When the system power is reset, the
substitute for safe, normal driving procedures, headway will default back to the maximum dis-
nor will it compensate for any driver impairment tance.
such as drugs, alcohol, or fatigue.
For vehicles with SmartCruise, the headway
The EVT–300 Collision Warning System may pro- adjustment will determine the headway the ve-
vide little or no warning of hazards such as pe- hicle will maintain from other moving vehicles
destrians, animals, oncoming vehicles, or cross in the same traveling lane of your vehicle.
traffic. Cruise control must be set for the headway to
On vehicles with SmartCruise, the vehicle will not adjust.
deactivate cruise control for stationary targets,
such as a car stopped in your traveling lane.
2.63
1 2 3 4 5 headway is to look when the vehicle ahead drives by

a certain object, like a traffic sign, and then start
counting the time required to reach the same sign. If
the count reaches three, then the headway is a
3-second headway. A more precise method of deter-
mining the headway would be to use a stopwatch
rather than counting.
For example, if the headway is 3 seconds and the
vehicle speed is 55 mph (88.5 km/h), then the dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead is 242 ft (74 m). If the ve-
hicle speed is reduced to 40 mph (64 km/h), the dis-
tance is 176 ft (53.5 m) for a 3-second headway.
Audible and visual headway alerts are as follows:
05/08/2000 f610414
• When a moving object is detected in the travel
1. Headway Control Switch
lane and is less than 350 ft (107 m) from the
2. Resume/Accelerate - Set/Coast Switch
3. Headway Alert Switch (on vehicles without front of the vehicle, the HDWY DETECT light
SmartCruise) will illuminate on the ICU. No warning tone will
4. Headway Adjustment Switch sound.
5. Headway Volume Switch • When a moving object is detected in the travel
Fig. 2.76, Dash Switches for CWS and optional lane and it has a headway between one and
SmartCruise two seconds, the HDWY DETECT light will illu-
minate and a message will appear on the ICU.
Headway Alerts A warning tone will sound.
The ICU displays indicator lights and messages that • When a moving object is detected in the travel
advise of multiple warning levels, system power, sys- lane and it has a headway between 1/2 second
tem failure. See Fig. 2.77 and Table 2.6. and 1 second, the HDWY DETECT light will
illuminate and a message will appear on the
1 2 ICU. Warning tones will sound also.
If the headway is increasing, no tone will
FASTEN SEATBELTS
sound. If the headway is decreasing, double
0000432 MILES tones will sound. Within a 1/2-second or less
following interval, opening or closing, the tones
3 will repeat twice per second.
07/13/2000 f610412
1. SmartCruise Lamp (HDWY CRUISE) • If a stationary vehicle or object or an object
2. Headway Alert Lamp (HDWY DETECT) moving at least 20 percent slower than your
3. System Failure Lamp (HDWY FAIL) vehicle is detected within 220 feet (67 meters)
and within 3 seconds, HDWY DETECT lamp
Fig. 2.77, ICU Displays will illuminate, a message will be displayed,
The speaker provides audible alert tones to warn of and double tones will sound. This warning
closing on an object ahead, and when equipped with overrides all others and is not affected by the
an optional side sensor, of objects alongside when headway setting.
the turn signal is activated in preparation for a lane • If your vehicle is traveling less than 5 mph (8
change. Additional tones indicate speaker volume, km/h) and an object is detected less than 15 ft
system failure, and data extraction pass or fail. (4.5 m) in front of your vehicle and the closing
The "object ahead" alerts given by the system are rate is less than 2 mph (3 km/h) but more than
based on headway to the vehicle ahead. That is the 1/2 mph (1 km/h), the HDWY DETECT lamp
time required by the host vehicle to travel ahead and will illuminate, a message will be displayed,
reach the vehicle ahead. A simple way to figure the and a low-frequency double tone will sound.
2.64
ICU Display Messages

ICU Message Description
The Speed Set and Headway readings will display when the vehicle speed
Speed Set: 55 mph (88.5 km/h) drops 5 mph (8 km/h) below the set speed. The vehicle will automatically
Headway Set: 3.0s accelerate to the set speed when the headway is clear up to the Headway Set
distance.
WARNING
CWS has failed. HDWY FAIL lamp will also illuminate.
HEADWAY FAILURE
WARNING Vehicle speed is below 30 mph (48 km/h), minimum cruise speed. An audible
CRUISE OFF tone will also be heard. The cruise is off.
HEADWAY RANGE
Displays current headway setting (maximum setting displayed).
f601895
HEADWAY ALERT VOLUME

Displays current audible tone volume (maximum volume shown).
f601896
HEADWAY EVENT DATA

Accident reconstruction segment was saved.
WAS SAVED
HDWY EVENT DATA NOT Second accident reconstruction segment was not saved. Only one accident
SAVED, MEMORY FULL reconstruction segment may be saved.
OBJECT AHEAD Displayed if an object is detected and has a headway 0.5 to 1 second. Also
displayed if a very slow or stationary target is detected in the vehicle
f601891 headway.
OBJECT AHEAD
Displayed if an object is detected and has a headway of more than one
second and up to 2 seconds.
f601892
OBJECT AHEAD
Displayed if an object is detected and has a headway of more than 2 seconds
and up to 3 seconds.
f601893
APPROACHING OBJECT
Displayed if an object is within 15 ft (4.5 m) and the vehicle is traveling less
than 5 mph (8 km/h)
f601894
Table 2.6, ICU Display Messages
NOTE: All warnings apply only to objects within on the dash. A single low-frequency tone
the maximum headway range and in your lane. sounds when a system failure is detected. A
Proximity alert tones and vehicle-closing 1- to medium-frequency tone sounds when the vol-
2-second following interval tones are configured ume control level is changed. Successful down-
items. All tones, except the 1/2-second alert, are loading of Vehicle Information Management Sys-
disabled in sharp turns or when the brakes are tem (VIMS) data will cause a double tone to
applied. If the configuration permits, the sound. Unsuccessful downloading will cause a
3-second alert level may be adjusted with the low-frequency tone to sound.
headway adjustment switch (HDWY +/HDWY -)
2.65
Driver Identification SmartCruise is an Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

system that uses the EVT-300 hardware and Smart-
The EVT is capable of selecting two driver IDs. This Cruise software to maintain the vehicle’s headway by
identification can be set on the ICU. interacting with the engine and requesting that the
If the vehicle is programmed for multiple drivers, fol- engine either de-fuel or de-fuel and apply the engine
low the steps in Fig. 2.78 to select identification of a brakes. Since SmartCruise does not apply the ser-
driver. vice brakes or steer the vehicle, the driver needs to
be in control of the vehicle at all times. Also, because
of the limitations of the EVT-300 system in distin-
SERVICE WARNING guishing real targets from false targets, when these
SCREEN targets are stationary and present in or near the ve-
PUSH ANY ARROW KEY hicle’s path (road signs in a curve or near the lane of
PUSH travel, overpasses, parked vehicles on the side of the
ANY
ARROW road, center dividers, retaining walls, etc.), Smart-
KEY
SELECT DRIVER: 1 SELECT DRIVER: 2 Cruise ignores stationary targets when maintaining
SET=OK, =CHANGE SET=OK, =CHANGE
the headway. The EVT-300 Collision Warning System
PUSH SET KEY or (CWS) alerts the driver of a target in the vehicle’s
RELEASE PARK BRAKE path.
FASTEN SEATBELTS SmartCruise works in conjunction with the engine’s
123456.7 MILES
PUSH SET KEY or
cruise control functions. All of the cruise control func-
RELEASE PARK BRAKE tions operate as usual when no targets are present
in front of the vehicle. For operation of the cruise
09/12/2003 f610413
control, see Chapter 7.
Fig. 2.78, Driver Identification Setup Sequence When a valid target is present and SmartCruise de-
termines that the headway cannot be maintained it
SmartCruise–Adaptive Cruise Control will request the engine to de-fuel, or to de-fuel and
(Optional) apply the engine brake. Once the correct headway
has been achieved, SmartCruise will maintain the
WARNING headway. When the target vehicle accelerates be-
yond the vehicle set speed, SmartCruise will acceler-
The Eaton VORAD EVT–300 Collision Warning ate up to the set speed and will allow the engine to
System (CWS) with SmartCruise is intended continue with the normal cruise control functions.
solely as an aid for an alert and conscientious The driver may override the system at any time, and
professional driver. It is not intended to be used the system will relinquish control anytime the clutch
or relied upon to operate a vehicle. Use the sys- or service brake pedals have been pressed, or the
tem in conjunction with rearview mirrors and fuel pedal is pressed to accelerate the vehicle.
other instrumentation to safely operate the ve-
hicle. This system will not warn of many possible If the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph (48 km/h)
hazards. It will not adjust the vehicle speed for (minimum cruise set speed), the engine will change
many possible hazards. Do not assume it is "all from cruise control to throttle control. The message,
clear" if no alert lights are illuminated and the WARNING CRUISE OFF will display in the ICU. The
SmartCruise does not adjust vehicle speed. message will not display if the brake, clutch, or panel
switches were used to deactivate cruise control.
erly could result in personal injury and/or death IMPORTANT: If SmartCruise is not functioning
and severe property damage. (due to a failure) conventional cruise control can
be used instead. To enable conventional cruise
On vehicles with SmartCruise, the vehicle will not
deactivate cruise control for stationary targets, control, toggle the headway control (HDWY
such as a car stopped in your traveling lane. CNTL) switch twice within 10 seconds. Toggling
of the switch twiceactivates conventional cruise
control only after SmartCruise has failed.
2.66
Accident Reconstruction (Optional) Special Road Situations

The EVT-300 system has a continuously operating
memory segment that records target and vehicle WARNING
data for the purpose of reconstructing an accident.
The memory will record as much data as possible. The Eaton VORAD EVT–300 Collision Warning
When the memory is full, the earliest information is System (CWS) is intended solely as an aid for an
recorded over. alert and conscientious professional driver. It is
not intended to be used or relied upon to operate
To activate the accident reconstruction and freeze a vehicle. Use the system in conjunction with
the most recent action in memory, hold the volume rearview mirrors and other instrumentation to
adjustment switch (HDWY VOL +/-) and headway safely operate the vehicle. This system will not
adjustment switch (HDWY +/-) up simultaneously for warn of many possible hazards. Do not assume it
five seconds. The ICU will confirm that the data was is "all clear" if no alert lights are illuminated.
saved with an audible tone and the message, HEAD-
WAY EVENT DATA WAS SAVED. Snow and/or mud accumulations may also affect
the performance of the front and side sensors.
The data stored will be cleared by the system after
30 days. Failure to drive safely and use the system prop-
In the event that the first segment is frozen, the EVT and severe property damage.
will continue to record current data in a second seg-
ment as long as there is power to the system. Certain special road situations may affect the sys-
tem’s ability to detect objects. These situations in-
If the first segment of data has already been frozen clude the effects of curves, dips, and hills, and these
and the user attempts to freeze another segment, the can provide an unexpected result:
EVT will not allow the user to freeze the segment.
Instead, an audible tone will be heard and the ICU NOTE: A warning may sound when an object is
will display the message, HDWY EVENT DATA NOT detected in front of the vehicle even though the
SAVED, MEMORY FULL. driver intends to turn away or stop before reach-
ing the object.
Side Sensor Display
• When an object is detected in a very sharp
1. The yellow indicator light illuminates continuously right- or left-hand turn, the audible alarm will
when no vehicle is detected by the side sen- not sound.
sor(s). See Fig. 2.75.
• When approaching a curve, before turning into
2. The ambient light sensor senses lighting condi- it, alarms may sound and lights illuminate be-
tions and automatically adjusts the intensity of cause of an object off the road, directly in line
indicator and alert lights. with your vehicle. This will not occur when the
brakes are applied.
3. The red alert light illuminates when objects are
detected by the side sensor(s). If the side sensor • Elevated obstacles such as overpasses and
detects an object, the red alert light will illuminate overhead signs may be detected when ap-
and if the right turn signal is activated, the proaching a roadway descending to a lower
speaker will sound a high-frequency double tone. elevation.
This tone is sounded only once per activation of
• Vehicles cannot be detected on the other side
the turn signal. The red light will also illuminate
and stay on if a failure of the side sensor is de- of a hill. An alarm will not sound until the object
tected. If objects are temporarily unable to be is within the antenna assembly’s field of view.
detected during very heavy rain storms, both the • On approaching a steep hill, objects above the
red and yellow lights will illuminate. beam cannot be detected. Generally, the beam
hitting the road surface does not cause an
alarm.
2.67
• The side sensor only detects objects within its Lane Guidance System,
field of view, next to the tractor. A vehicle far-
ther back behind the field of view will not be Optional
detected.
The Lane Guidance™ lane departure warning system
• The side sensor range is set to detect average monitors the vehicle’s position within the roadway
sized vehicles 2 to 10 feet (0.5 to 3 meters) lane markings and sounds a warning in the cab
away in the adjacent lane. when the vehicle is about to stray outside its lane,
• The radar beam will detect near range cut-ins, provided the turn signal is not on and the vehicle is
approximately 30 feet (9 meters) or less, de- traveling at least 40 mph (64 km/h). The system in-
pending on the angle of entrance into the lane cludes a digital camera mounted high near the center
in front of your vehicle. of the windshield inside the cab, a central processing
unit in the overhead console, and a stereo speaker
above and behind each door that emits a sound simi-
WARNING lar to a rumble strip. See Fig. 2.79. The sound is
made on the side of the vehicle it’s straying toward,
Heavy rain or water spray at the side sensor may prompting the driver to respond and steer away from
cause the red light on the side sensor display to the sound and back into the center of the correct
illuminate. Under these conditions, the system is lane.
temporarily unable to provide adequate warnings.
NOTE: A continuous fixed object on the right
side of the vehicle such as a guard rail, wall,
tunnel, or bridge may cause the side sensor
alert light to stay on. 3
Maintenance and Diagnostics

1. Keep the antenna assembly and side sensor(s) 1
free of a buildup of mud, dirt, ice, or other debris 2
that might reduce the system’s range.
11/18/1999 f610358
2. The system tests itself continuously and evalu- 1. Clock 3. Digital Camera
ates the results every 15 seconds. If a problem 2. Windshield
is detected with the front radar system, the
HDWY FAIL light on the ICU illuminates continu- Fig. 2.79, Lane Departure Warning System Camera
ously as long as the failure is active. The corre-
sponding fault message is displayed on the ICU.
WARNING
3. Both active and inactive faults can be indicated
by the ICU when the system is placed in failure The lane departure warning system is intended
display mode. Inactive faults are those that have only as an aid for a conscientious and alert
occurred and have cleared. Active faults are still driver. The system may not indicate lane depar-
present. Faults provide the driver the ability to tures under certain conditions. Read carefully the
record the system faults during a trip and to no- information in this manual to understand the cir-
tify their maintenance department or Eaton cumstances under which this system may not
VORAD. In this mode, specific fault messages provide adequate lane departure warnings. Do
are displayed on the ICU. not rely solely on the system to safely operate
the vehicle. The system does not warn of all pos-
4. Additional failure messages are displayed at in- sible hazards. For example, the system cannot
tervals of approximately 8 seconds.
2.68
prevent an accident if the driver is impaired or • A cracked, dirty, or streaked windshield.

not driving safely.
The lane guidance system is not meant for use in
The lane departure warning system is not a sub- city traffic or in heavy highway traffic. System alerts
stitute for safe driving procedures. are automatically disabled when vehicle speed drops
below 40 mph (64 km/h). The system may be manu-
ally turned off with the instrument panel rocker switch
erly could result in personal injury and/or death if an unacceptable level of false alerts is reached.
NOTE: If the green light on the LANE ALERT
IMPORTANT: It is still the responsibility of the
rocker switch remains off despite depressing the
driver to change driving styles depending on
switch and the LANE SRCHNG amber warning
existing traffic and road conditions.
light remains on, the system is not fully func-
Starting the vehicle activates the system. On start-up tional and needs service at a dealer or autho-
the system performs a self-test, then sounds two rized service facility.
chirps through the speakers to indicate the system is
ready. The rocker switch on the B instrument panel
turns the system on and off. Once the vehicle is
started and the system is ready, the ON light at the
bottom of the switch illuminates. Pushing the top of
the rocker switch turns the system off; pushing the
switch again turns the system on. The top portion of
the switch reads LANE ALERT and is backlit with the
dash lights on.
The LANE SRCHNG amber warning light illuminates
to indicate the system is not fully functional. When
the warning light is on, the system audible alert may
not indicate a lane departure. Conditions that can
cause the warning light to come on include:
• The system is unable to detect lane markings.
• Vehicle speed is less than 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Lane width is greater than 13 feet (4 m).
• A dirty windshield or a similar problem is ob-
scuring the camera.
• A system problem is detected.
While the system is capable of detecting a number of
different types of lane markers, its performance may
be compromised or degraded by certain conditions,
including the following:
• Weather conditions such as snow, heavy rain,
ice, or standing water.
• Damaged, worn, or faded lane markings.
• Broken pavement, dirt, sand, salt, gravel, or
skid marks.
• Poor lighting, such as heavy glare or an inop-
erable headlight.
2.69
3
Vehicle Access
Ignition and Lock Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Cab Door Locks and Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Grab Handles and Access Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Door Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Sleeper Compartment Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Circuit Breaker/Relay Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Cab-to-Sleeper Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Sleeper Bunk Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Sleeper Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Baggage Compartment Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Back-of-Cab Grab Handles, Steps, and Deck Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Battery Box Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
Hood Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
Keyless Security System, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Cab Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Windshield Washer Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Vehicle Access
Ignition and Lock Key

One key operates the ignition switch and all of the
door locks.
IMPORTANT: Each key is numbered. Record
the number so, if needed, a duplicate key can
be made.
1
Cab Door Locks and Handles 3

To unlock the driver’s door from outside the cab, in-
sert the key in the lockset and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise (Fig. 3.1). Turn the key counterclockwise
to the original position to remove it. Pull out on the
paddle handle to open the door (Fig. 3.1).
2
10/27/95 f600910
1. Lock Button 3. Door Handle

2. Integral Grab Bar
9/07/95 f600906 Fig. 3.2, Door Interior
1. Lockset 2. Paddle Handle
Fig. 3.1, Exterior Door Handle
Grab Handles and Access
Steps
To unlock the passenger’s door from outside the cab,
insert the key in the lockset and turn it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise. Turn the key to the original WARNING
position to remove it.
Wet or dirty shoe soles greatly increase the
NOTE: The cab door locks can be operated chance of slipping or falling. If your soles are wet
when the doors are open. or dirty, be especially careful when climbing
onto, or down from, the back-of-cab area.
To lock a door from outside the cab, insert the key in
the lockset and turn it opposite the unlocking direc- Always maintain three-point contact with the
tion, then close the door if it is open. Or, push down back-of-cab access supports while entering and
the inside lock button (Fig. 3.2), then close the door. exiting the back-of-cab area. Three-point contact
means both feet and one hand, or both hands
To lock either door from inside the cab, push down and one foot, on the grab handles, steps, and
the lock button (Fig. 3.2), then close the door if it is deck plates. Other areas are not meant to sup-
open. Pull the integral grab bar (Fig. 3.2) when clos- port back-of-cab access, and grabbing or step-
ing the door. ping in the wrong place could lead to a fall, and
To open the door from the inside, pull the door personal injury.
handle toward you (Fig. 3.2). This will unlatch the
door whether or not it is locked. To unlock the door
without unlatching it, pull the lock button up.
3.1
Vehicle Access
Be careful not to get hands or feet tangled in Exiting the Driver’s Side (Fig. 3.3)
hoses or other back-of-cab equipment. Careless-
ness could cause a person to trip and fall, with Exit the cab from the driver’s side as follows:
possible injury.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to exit the cab
Entering the Driver’s Side (Fig. 3.3) while carrying any items in your hands.
1. Grasp the steering wheel with both hands, place
your left foot on the top step, and stand on the
threshold, facing into the cab.
2. Grasp the grab handle at the aft edge of the
1 door opening with your right hand.
3. Move your right foot to the bottom step.
4. Move your left hand to the grab handle.
5. Step to the ground with your left foot first.
2
Entering the Passenger’s Side (Fig. 3.4)
3
4 1
2
02/12/96 f600911
1. Steering Wheel 3. Top Step

2. Grab Handle 4. Bottom Step
3
Fig. 3.3, Driver’s Side Steps and Grab Handle
When entering the cab from the driver’s side, use the
4
grab handle and access steps as follows:
1. Open the driver’s door, and place anything that
you are carrying in the cab.
2. Grasp the grab handle with both hands. Reach
up as far as is comfortable. 03/27/96 f601124
3. Place your right foot on the bottom step, and pull 1. Upper Grab Handle 3. Top Step
yourself up. 2. Lower Grab Handle 4. Bottom Step
4. Place your left foot on the top step. Fig. 3.4, Passenger’s Side Steps and Grab Handles
5. Grasp the steering wheel with your left hand, and When entering the cab from the passenger’s side,
step up. use the grab handles and access steps as follows:
6. Step into the cab with your right foot first, and 1. Open the passenger’s door, and place anything
grasp the steering wheel with your right hand. that you are carrying in the cab.
3.2
Vehicle Access
2. Grasp the grab handle at the aft edge of the 1. Grasp the grab handle on the windshield post
door opening with your left hand. with both hands, and place your right foot on the
top step while standing up from the seat facing
3. Grasp the handle on the door (Fig. 3.5) with your
inward.
right hand.
2. Place your left foot on the bottom step.
3. Move your left hand to the grab handle at the aft
edge of the door opening.
4. Move your right hand to the grab handle on the
door (Fig. 3.5).
5. Step to the ground with your right foot first.
1 Entering the Driver’s Side for Right-
2
Hand-Drive Vehicles
When entering the cab from the driver’s side, use the
1. Open the driver’s door, and place anything that
you are carrying in the cab.
up as far as is comfortable.
3 3. Place your left foot on the bottom step, and pull
yourself up.
4. Place your right foot on the top step.
03/27/96 f601087 5. Grasp the steering wheel with your right hand,
and step up.
1. Lock Button 3. Grab Handle
2. Door Handle 6. Step into the cab with your left foot first, and
grasp the steering wheel with your left hand.
Fig. 3.5, Passenger’s Door Interior
4. Place your right foot on the bottom step and step Exiting the Driver’s Side for Right-
up to the upper step with your left foot. Hand-Drive Vehicles
5. With your left hand, grasp the upper grab handle Exit the cab from the driver’s side as follows:
on the windshield post.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to exit the cab
6. Place your right foot on the top step and step up. while carrying any items in your hands.
7. Move your right hand to the upper grab handle 1. Grasp the steering wheel with both hands, place
on the windshield post. your right foot on the top step, and stand on the
8. Step into the cab with your left foot first. threshold, facing into the cab.
Exiting the Passenger’s Side (Fig. 3.4) door opening with your left hand.
Exit the cab from the passenger’s side as follows: 3. Move your left foot to the bottom step.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to exit the cab 4. Move your right hand to the grab handle.
while carrying any items in your hands.
5. Step to the ground with your right foot first.
3.3
Vehicle Access
Entering the Passenger’s Side for Sleeper Compartment Vents

Right-Hand-Drive Vehicles To open any sleeper compartment vent, push the
When entering the cab from the passenger’s side, vent handle outward and forward with your fingertips.
use the grab handles and access steps as follows: To close the vent, turn your hand so that your fingers
are pulling on the handle from the front edge, then
1. Open the passenger’s door, and place anything pull in and back on the handle. Use care to avoid
that you are carrying in the cab. pinching your fingers.
door opening with your right hand. Circuit Breaker/Relay Panel
3. Grasp the lower door pocket with your left hand. The circuit breaker/relay panel is located in front of
4. Place your left foot on the bottom step and step the passenger’s seat under the top cover of the in-
up to the upper step with your right foot. strument panel. To access the compartment, first re-
move the vertical panel located immediately below
5. With your right hand, grasp the upper grab the right hand adjustable louvers. Gently pry up the
handle on the windshield post. lower edge by using your fingertips or a flat-bladed
6. Place your left foot on the top step and step up. screwdriver in the slots provided. Rotate the exposed
fastener one-quarter turn and lift off the cover. Re-
7. Move your left hand to the upper grab handle on moval of the smaller exposed duct might also be re-
the windshield post. quired.
8. Step into the cab with your right foot first.
Cab-to-Sleeper Access
Exiting the Passenger’s Side for
Right-Hand-Drive Vehicles WARNING
Exit the cab from the passenger’s side as follows: Place rigid or heavy objects in storage areas on
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to exit the cab the floor or under the bunk. Sudden stops or
while carrying any items in your hands. swerves could cause personal injury if items fall
from overhead storage shelves.
1. Grasp the grab handle on the windshield post
with both hands, and place your left foot on the To open the sleeper access on vehicles with vinyl
top step while standing up from the seat facing sleeper curtains, unzip the sleeper curtains. If de-
inward. sired, unsnap the curtains all the way around the
sides and top and remove the curtains.
2. Place your right foot on the bottom step.
To open the sleeper access on vehicles with velour
3. Move your right hand to the grab handle at the sleeper curtains, unfasten the snaps at one side,
aft edge of the door opening. then push the curtain to the opposite side.
4. Move your left hand to the lower door pocket.
5. Step to the ground with your left foot first.
Sleeper Bunk Latches
To move the lower or upper sleeper bunk (if
Door Windows equipped), disengage the latch at the front of the
lower bunk, or the latches on both sides of the upper
The windows in both doors operate electrically (if so bunk. Lock the bunks into operating position, down
equipped). Use the appropriate switch to raise or for the lower bunk and up or down for the upper
lower a door window. bunk, by engaging both the primary and secondary
latches.
3.4
Vehicle Access
Sleeper Door Back-of-Cab Grab Handles,

The sleeper door (Fig. 3.6, Ref. 1) is not intended for Steps, and Deck Plate
entry or exit. The door is intended only as a conve-
nient means to stow or remove personal belongings When trailer connections cannot be reached conve-
in and from the sleeper area. To open the door, push niently from the ground, Federal Motor Carrier Safety
down on the lever handle located inside the sleeper Administration Regulations require secure back-of-
compartment to the right of the door. The door can cab access supports.
be opened from the outside by pulling the release Grab handles are mounted where they can provide
cable strap inside the baggage door opening. To hand support, to maintain three points of hand-and-
close the door, push it closed until it latches. foot contact with the vehicle. See Fig. 3.7. Steps are
mounted on the fuel tank, battery box, or frame, de-
IMPORTANT: The sleeper doors are two-stage
pending on the available space. When a deck plate
latching. When closing the doors, ensure that is necessary, it is mounted across the top of the
they are completely latched to prevent wind frame rails.
noise and water intrusion.
2
1
02/12/96 f601031
1. Sleeper Door 3
2. Baggage Compartment Door
Fig. 3.6, Passenger-Side Sleeper and Baggage
Compartment Doors
Baggage Compartment Doors

To unlock the baggage compartment door on the 1
passenger’s side, insert the ignition key in the lock-
set, and turn it one-quarter turn clockwise. See
Fig. 3.6. Turn the key to the original position to re-
move it. Pull up and outward on the baggage door 1
handle to open the door. To close the door, push it
closed until it latches. To lock the door, insert the ig-
nition key in the lockset and turn it one-quarter turn 09/24/2007 f602335
counterclockwise. 1. Steps 3. Deck Plates
Use the same procedure to open the baggage com- 2. Grab Handle
partment door on the driver’s side, but turn the key Fig. 3.7, Back-of-Cab Access (typical)
counterclockwise to unlock the door and clockwise to
lock it.
3.5
Vehicle Access
4. Move one foot to the bottom step.

WARNING
5. Move your upper hand to a lower position on the
Wet or dirty shoe soles greatly increase the grab handle.
chance of slipping or falling. If your soles are wet 6. Step to the ground with your upper foot first.
or dirty, be especially careful when climbing
onto, or down from, the back-of-cab area.
Battery Box Cover
Always maintain three-point contact with the
back-of-cab access supports while entering and To remove the cover from the frame rail-mounted
exiting the back-of-cab area. Three-point contact battery box, release the latches that attach the left
means both feet and one hand, or both hands chassis fairing panel (if equipped) in front of the bat-
and one foot, on the grab handles, steps, and tery box. Remove the air fairing panel. See Group
deck plates. Other areas are not meant to sup- 60 of the Century Class Trucks Workshop Manual for
port back-of-cab access, and grabbing or step- instructions. If no air fairing panel is installed, remove
ping in the wrong place could lead to a fall, and the step plate. Pull on the end of each hold-down
personal injury. latch until the end clears the cover-mounted catch.
Pivot the latches out of the way, then lift off the
Be careful not to get hands or feet tangled in cover. When installing the cover, be sure it is posi-
hoses or other back-of-cab equipment. Careless- tioned properly before fastening the latches.
ness could cause a person to trip and fall, with
possible injury. To remove the cover from the battery box mounted
between the frame rails, remove the deck plate and
Back-of-Cab Access Points (typical) lift the handle on the top of the battery box cover. If
equipped, remove the spring pin.
When climbing onto the deck plate, use the grab
handle and access steps as follows:
Hood Tilting
up as far as is comfortable. The hood can be tilted to a full-open position. A grab
handle at the front of the hood provides a hand-hold
IMPORTANT: Climb onto, and down from, back- for hood tilting. A torsion bar helps you to tilt the
of-cab access facing in toward the vehicle, as hood open, and to return it to the operating position.
you would on a ladder. Do not climb up or down Hood straps prevent the hood from overtravel. In the
facing out away from the vehicle. operating position, the hood is secured to the lower
cab side panels by a hold-down latch on each side of
2. Place one foot on the bottom step and pull your- the hood.
self up.
3. Place your other foot on the top step. To Tilt the Hood
4. Move your lower hand to a higher position on the 1. Apply the parking brakes.
grab handle. 2. Release both hood hold-down latches by pulling
5. Step onto the deck plate. the ends outward.
Exiting Back-of-Cab CAUTION

When climbing down from the deck plate, use the
Do not let the hood free-fall to the full-open posi-
tion. To do so could cause damage to the hood
1. Grasp the grab handle with both hands. or hood straps.
2. Step onto the top step. 3. Using the bumper step and grab handle, slowly
tilt the hood until the straps support it. See
3. Move your upper hand to a lower position on the Fig. 3.8.
grab handle.
3.6
Vehicle Access
• A hand-held radio frequency transmitter that

looks like a key chain fob. It acts as a remote
control for locking the doors, unlocking the
doors, or placing the system on alert. Each
system allows as many as four different fobs.
See Fig. 3.9.
1 ALERT
2 3
9/07/95 f880328
Fig. 3.8, Hood Tilting
To Return the Hood

1. Grasp the grab handle, and lift the hood to the 08/30/96 f541289
45-degree position.
1. ALERT Button 3. UNLOCK Button
2. As the hood goes over center, use the bumper 2. LOCK Button
step and grab handle to control the rate of de-
Fig. 3.9, Key Chain Fob (radio transmitter)
scent to the operating position. See Fig. 3.8.
3. Make sure the hood is flush with the cowl, then • A red system-status LED (light-emitting diode)
secure the hood by engaging both hood hold- mounted on the overhead panel above the
down latches. clock. The LED flashes slow or fast to indicate
what state the system is in: armed, alert,
IMPORTANT: Make sure that both hold-down alarmed, or violated. It is off when the system
latches are fully engaged before operating the is disarmed. See Fig. 3.10.
vehicle.
• A Meritor relay module mounted behind the
right-hand B-pillar electrical compartment door
Keyless Security System, that arms and disarms the system and pro-
Optional grams the fobs.
• A program switch on the Meritor relay module
General Information that places the relay module in the learning
The optional Meritor keyless security system is a mode, which is the only state in which the sys-
complete vehicle security system. If installed, it locks tem can learn fob ID codes. The switch is
and unlocks the doors, protects against theft, and shown in its normal, or OFF, state (toggle
provides security for the driver while sleeping or rest- pointing up). See Fig. 3.11.
ing inside the vehicle. • A security system electronic control module
The system consists of the following components: (ECM), also mounted behind the right-hand
3.7
Vehicle Access

How It Works
1 The fob has three push buttons: LOCK, UNLOCK,
STEM
and ALERT. When a button is pushed, the fob sends
R ITY SY
SECU a radio frequency signal to the ECM. The signal con-
2 tains a unique vehicle access code that identifies the
individual fob, plus codes that indicate which button
3 has been pushed.
The ECM detects the signal sent by the fob, ampli-
fies it, and converts it to a digital sequence.
If the LOCK button is pressed, the ECM arms the
07/01/96 f541288 system. It locks the two cab doors, begins to monitor
1. System Status LED 3. Clock all the entry points (the two cab doors, the sleeper
2. Overhead Panel cab access door, and the two baggage doors, as in-
stalled), and instructs the relay module to start flash-
Fig. 3.10, Red System-Status LED ing the system LED at the slow rate. If any entry
points are open, the ECM sounds the horn and
flashes the cab marker lights twice. If the ignition
keyswitch is turned off, the ECM interrupts ignition
power to the engine.
The driver may be inside or outside the vehicle.
However, if the engine is running at the time the
LOCK button is pressed, the system still enters the
armed state, except that the engine is not immobi-
lized. This improves security for the occupant as well
as comfort while sleeping or resting, because the
system is armed, and the heating or air conditioning
is operating without draining any batteries.
Once the system is armed, the alarm functions acti-
vate whenever one of the entry points is opened. In
the alarmed state, the ECM does the following:
• Immobilizes the vehicle by cutting off power
between the ignition keyswitch and the engine
electronic control unit (ECU).
• Sounds the horn in pulses of 0.5 second on,
10/09/98 f541501a 0.5 second off.
• Flashes the cab marker lights in pulses of 0.5
Fig. 3.11, Program Switch
second on, 0.5 second off.
B-pillar electrical compartment door, that moni- • Changes the blink rate of the LED from slow to
tors all the entry points, controls the door fast.
locks, operates the alarm, and interrupts the
power to the engine, as necessary. There is If the UNLOCK button is pressed, the ECM disarms
also a PDM (power distribution module) relay the system, if armed. It unlocks all the entry points,
module mounted on top of the left-hand side of discontinues its monitoring of the entry points, in-
the ECM. structs the relay module to stop flashing the system
LED, and restores ignition power to the engine, if in-
terrupted.
3.8
Vehicle Access
If the ALERT button is pressed, the ECM executes 3. On the fob, press down both the LOCK and UN-
the unlock sequence and also activates the vehicle LOCK buttons at the same time and hold them
alarm functions (see above). To cancel an ALERT (to down for at least three seconds. See Fig. 3.9. If
turn off the alarm), press the UNLOCK button. the code was learned, the system LED flashes
and the doors unlock.
Once activated, the alarm sequence continues for 30
seconds unless deactivated by pressing the UN- IMPORTANT: If no valid code was received, the
LOCK button on the fob. After 30 seconds in the system does not erase any stored data in that
alarmed state, the system automatically enters the memory location. This is a security measure to
violated state. ensure that a fob ID cannot be erased acciden-
In the violated state, the horn does not sound and tally.
the cab marker lights do not flash, but the engine is
still immobilized and the LED continues to blink at 4. Repeat the above step to program additional
the fast rate. The vehicle remains in this state until fobs, up to a total of four.
the UNLOCK button is pressed. 5. When the programming sequence is over, return
the system to normal operation by turning the
Fob Programming program switch OFF (flip the toggle UP).
The security system ECM can store up to four fob
identification codes. Once the first fob has been pro-
Fob Battery Replacement
grammed, there are never any vacant memory loca- 1. Open the battery cover on the back of the fob
tions. with a suitable coin or other thin piece of metal.
IMPORTANT: As a security measure, all fobs Twist off the cover. See Fig. 3.12.
must be coded during the same programming
sequence. The first fob code is stored in all four
memory locations. Taken together, these ensure
that only the vehicle owner’s fobs can be pro-
grammed into the system. If additional fobs are 1
programmed, they overwrite the original code in 2
locations two, three, and four, in that order.
3
The ECM provides a 20-second time period to pro-
gram each fob. If the fob is not programmed within 4
this time span, the system will exit the programming
sequence.
After each valid code storage sequence, the system
LED will indicate the completion of a learning cycle 10/22/96 f541446
by turning off the LED for approximately 0.5 second, 1. Fob 3. O-Ring
and unlocking the doors. 2. Battery 4. Battery Cover
To program a fob, do the following steps: Fig. 3.12, Fob Battery
1. With the ignition keyswitch turned off, turn the
2. Remove the battery and the O-ring installed in-
program switch ON (flip the toggle DOWN). See
side the cover. Save the O-ring for later installa-
Fig. 3.11.
tion.
2. Now turn the ignition keyswitch on. Note that the
system LED illuminates continuously. See IMPORTANT: The battery may contain perchlor-
Fig. 3.10. This indicates that the ECM is ready to ate material; special handling may apply, see
begin the learning sequence. www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
NOTE: If the LED does not illuminate continu-
ously at this point, repeat the first two steps. 3. Install the new battery, as follows.
3.9
Vehicle Access
3.1 Insert the new battery into the fob. Make

sure the battery is right side up.
3.2 Install the O-ring as removed. If the O-ring
is damaged, or there are signs of moisture
inside the fob, replace the O-ring.
3.3 Twist on the battery cover and check it to
make sure it is tight.
4. Check the fob for correct operation.
Cab Amenities
Waste Bin 10/09/98 f601240a
To remove the waste bin, slide the waste bin out as
Fig. 3.14, Driver’s Cup Holder
far as it will go. Reach in behind the bin and release
the bin from the stops on the bin sides. Remove the
bin. See Fig. 3.13.
1
10/15/96 f601241
1. Lower B-Panel Dash Assembly

2. Passenger’s Cup Holder
06/18/96 f601165
Fig. 3.15, Passenger’s Cup Holder
Fig. 3.13, Waste Bin
Ash Tray and Cigar Lighter
To install the bin, insert the bin onto the slides, and
then slide the bin into place. The driver’s ash tray and cigar lighter assembly is on
the left side of the top of the lower dash panel. See
Fig. 3.16. There is a hinged cover that pivots back-
Cup Holders ward to allow access to the cigar lighter and to the
The Century Class vehicle features two cup holders. ash tray. The tray is removable.
The driver’s cup holder is located to the right of the
ash tray on the lower dash panel. The cup holder Dash Storage Bin
flips open for use, and can be pivoted into the dash
when not needed. See Fig. 3.14. The passenger’s The dash storage bin is located next to the driver’s
cup holder pivots out of the lower dash console. See cup holder on the lower dash panel. See Fig. 3.17.
Fig. 3.15. The passenger’s cup holder can also be The bin has a hinged cover, and can be used to
pivoted into the console when not in use. store sunglasses.
3.10
Vehicle Access
and replaced with a CB radio. The grille underneath

3 this portion of the console allows the radio’s speaker
to be heard.
4
1
11/12/96 f601242
1. Ash Tray 3. Hinged Cover 1 2 3 4

2. Cigar Lighter 4. Driver’s Cup Holder 10/15/96 f601244
Fig. 3.16, Ash Tray and Cigar Lighter 1. Driver’s Glove Box
2. Driver’s Overhead Storage Bin
3. Passenger’s Overhead Storage Bin
4. Passenger’s Glove Box
1 Fig. 3.18, Glove Boxes and Overhead Storage
2
Overhead Lights
Above both the driver’s and the passenger’s seats
are three oval-shaped lights mounted to the bottom
of the overhead console: a red light and two white
lights. The red light is mounted nearest to the wind-
shield. Each light is activated by pushing on the lens
cover. Also, the center light, a white light, activates
when the doors to the vehicle are opened.
10/15/96 f601243
1. Dash Storage Bin Cover Footwell Lights

2. Driver’s Cup Holder
There are optional red lights mounted underneath the
Fig. 3.17, Dash Storage Bin dash on the driver’s and the passenger’s sides of the
vehicle. These lights are activated by a rocker switch
Map Holder on the lower dash panel next to the climate control
switches.
An elastic-topped pouch is located above each door.
These are intended for holding maps and other
items. Windshield Washer Reservoir
The windshield washer reservoir is located on the
Glove Box left-hand side of the frontwall between the surge tank
Some vehicles have two glove boxes and two small and the hood. See Fig. 3.19.
overhead bins, all located in the overhead console
assembly. See Fig. 3.18. Above the sun visors on
both the driver’s and the passenger’s sides are the
glove boxes with latched doors or netted openings.
In the middle section of the console assembly are
two small bins. The driver’s-side bin is often removed
3.11
Vehicle Access
01/15/97 f820190
1. Surge Tank 3. Drain
2. Washer Reservoir
Fig. 3.19, Windshield Washer Reservoir
3.12
4
Heater and Air Conditioner
Blend Air Heater and Air Conditioner System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Water-Valve-Controlled Heater and Air Conditioner System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Parked HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Blend Air Heater and Air To increase airflow, turn the switch clockwise or to a
higher number. To decrease the airflow, turn the
Conditioner System switch counterclockwise or to a lower number. Set-
ting the fan switch to the off position disables the air
Constant Discharge Temperature conditioner and places the air source in the fresh air
Control mode.
The cab heater and air conditioner system is a Con- NOTE: When the fan switch on the cab climate
stant Discharge Temperature Control (CDTC) sys- control panel is off and the sleeper air condi-
tem. The CDTC maintains a constant temperature of tioner is on, the cab fan will operate at low
airflow in the cab regardless of outside air tempera- speed even though the cab fan switch is in the
ture, selected fan speed, engine coolant temperature, off position. This is necessary to protect the
or engine coolant flow. Once the temperature control evaporator in the cab heater and air conditioner
switch is turned to the desired temperature, no other system from freezing.
adjustments are necessary. The CDTC system is dis-
abled when the temperature control switch is in the There is a two-second delay between the time the
maximum cool or maximum warm position. engine is started and the blower is operational. It can
take an additional four seconds for the blower to
Cab Climate Control Panel reach high speed. The blower motor performs a self-
test immediately after the engine is started, which
The climate control panel allows you to control the causes the delay.
heating and air conditioning functions of the heater
and air conditioner. See Fig. 4.1. Air Selection Switch
Fan Switch The air selection switch allows you to control the flow
of air through the face outlets, the floor outlets, the
The fan switch controls the fan speed and forces defrost (windshield) outlets, or a combination of
fresh air or recirculated air through the selected air these outlets to give you nine air selection modes.
outlets. The fan switch has eight fan speeds and an See Fig. 4.2.
off position.
1. Face Mode: Directs all airflow through the face
or instrument panel outlets.
2. Selection between Face Mode and Bi-Level
Mode: Directs 75 percent of the airflow through
2
1 3
BUNK O 4
OVRD
2 4 6
1 3 5
06/21/2001 f610450
1. Bunk Override Switch 3. Recirculation Button 5. Air Conditioning Button

2. Fan Switch 4. Air Selection Switch 6. Temperature Control Switch
Fig. 4.1, CDTC Climate Control Panel
4.1
floor outlets. The air conditioner automatically

5 turns on in this mode. The recirculation button
4 6
will not work in this mode.
3 7
9. Defrost Mode: Directs all airflow through the
defrost outlets. The air conditioner automatically
turns on in this mode. The recirculation button
2 8
will not work in this mode.
Temperature Control Switch

1 9
The temperature control switch is used to select the
desired temperature. On the manual and CDTC cli-
mate control panel, turn the switch clockwise or to
the red area for warm air. Turn the switch counter-
clockwise or to the blue area for cool air.
06/21/2001 f610502
Air Conditioning
1. Face Mode
2. Selection Between Face Mode and Bi-Level Mode The air conditioner cools and dehumidifies the air
3. Bi-Level Mode inside the cab. Press the air conditioning button to
4. Selection Between Bi-Level Mode and Floor Mode turn the air conditioner on and off. See Fig. 4.3.
5. Floor Mode
6. Selection Between Floor Mode and Floor/Defog
Mode
7. Defog Mode
8. Selection Between Defog Mode and Defrost Mode
9. Defrost Mode 1
Fig. 4.2, Air Selection Switch Modes
the face outlets and 25 percent through the floor

outlets.
3. Bi-Level Mode: Directs the airflow equally to the
face outlets and floor outlets. 06/21/2001 f610505
1. Amber Indicator
4. Selection between Bi-Level Mode and Floor
Mode: Directs 25 percent of the airflow through Fig. 4.3, Air Conditioning Button
the face outlets and 75 percent through the floor
outlets. When the air conditioner is operating, the amber indi-
cator on the air conditioning button will be on
5. Floor Mode: Directs all airflow through the floor whether the request for air conditioning comes from
outlets. the cab climate control panel or the sleeper climate
6. Selection between Floor Mode and Floor/ control panel. When the instrument panel lights are
Defog Mode: Directs 75 percent of the airflow on, the snowflake indicator on the air conditioning
through the floor outlets and 25 percent through button will be on.
the defrost outlets. The air conditioner will be automatically disabled
7. Defog Mode: Directs the airflow equally to the when:
floor outlets and the defrost outlets. The air con- • The outside air temperature is low enough to
ditioner automatically turns on in this mode. The make air conditioning ineffective;
recirculation button will not work in this mode.
• The engine is running at low rpm;
8. Selection between Defog Mode and Defrost
Mode: Directs 75 percent of the airflow through
the defrost outlets and 25 percent through the
4.2
• Specific conditions exist that result in the ture settings in the sleeper. See Fig. 4.1. Press the
heater and air conditioner system going into upper half of the bunk override switch to override the
protection mode. sleeper settings with the cab settings. The amber
indicator on the switch is on when the bunk override
Recirculation mode is on. If the fan speed or temperature setting
on the sleeper climate control panel is adjusted when
The recirculation mode limits the amount of outside the bunk override mode is on, the bunk override
air entering the cab. Press the recirculation button to mode will be canceled.
prevent dusty or smoky air from entering the cab.
See Fig. 4.4. The recirculation mode can also de- When the heating and air conditioning system is in
crease the time required to cool or heat the cab inte- the bunk override mode, the cab climate control
rior during extreme outside temperature conditions. panel can be adjusted without affecting the sleeper
When the recirculation mode is on, the amber indica- settings. To reset the sleeper settings, set the fan
tor on the recirculation button will be on. speed and temperature settings on the cab climate
control panel to the desired sleeper settings and
press the upper half of the bunk override switch
again. The cab climate control panel can again be
adjusted without affecting the sleeper settings.
1 Press the lower half of the bunk override switch to
cancel the override mode. After the override mode is
canceled, the sleeper heater and air conditioner sys-
tem will operate from the sleeper fan speed and tem-
perature settings and the amber indicator will be off.
06/21/2001 f610504
Sleeper Climate Control Panel
1. Amber Indicator The sleeper heater and air conditioner system fea-
tures Constant Discharge Temperature Control
Fig. 4.4, Recirculation Button (CDTC). The sleeper climate control panel is shown
in Fig. 4.5. The CDTC maintains a constant tempera-
The recirculation button will not work when the air ture of airflow in the sleeper regardless of outside air
selection switch is in one of the following modes: temperature, selected fan speed, engine coolant tem-
• defog mode perature, or engine coolant flow. Once the tempera-
ture control switch is turned to the desired tempera-
• the selection between defog mode and defrost ture, no other adjustments are necessary.
mode
• defrost mode Fan Switch
NOTE: To prevent the buildup of fumes or odors The fan switch controls the sleeper heater and air
and to prevent oxygen depletion inside the cab, conditioner system fan speed. The sleeper climate
control panel has eight fan speeds and an off posi-
the system switches from full recirculation mode
tion. To increase airflow, turn the switch clockwise or
to partial recirculation mode after 20 minutes. In to a higher number. To decrease the airflow, turn the
extremely dusty or smoky conditions, the partial switch counterclockwise or to a lower number.
recirculation mode can be overridden by press-
ing the recirculation button twice to obtain full NOTE: When the cab air conditioner is on, the
recirculation mode. This resets the 20-minute sleeper fan will operate at low speed even
timer. though the sleeper fan switch is in the off posi-
tion. This is necessary to protect the evaporator
Bunk Override Switch, Optional in the sleeper heater and air conditioner system
from freezing.
The bunk override (BUNK OVRD) switch allows the
driver to remotely control the fan speed and tempera-
4.3
Air Outlets
The face outlets on the instrument panel have lou-
vers that can be moved right and left, and up and
1 2 down. Move the louvers to the desired location or to
1
2
3
close the outlet. The defrost (windshield) outlets and
the outlets that are directed at the doors are not ad-
O 4
justable.
The sleeper has one or two air outlets on the right
side of the cab, depending on the height of the cab.
The sleeper air outlet pivots from side to side and
has louvers that can be moved up and down or
closed.
Water-Valve-Controlled Heater
06/21/2001 f610503
and Air Conditioner System
1. Fan Switch General Information
The cab climate control panel allows you to control
Fig. 4.5, Sleeper Climate Control Panel all of the heating, air conditioning, defrosting, and
ventilating functions. See Fig. 4.6 or Fig. 4.7.
Temperature Control Switch
The temperature control switch is used to select the 1 2 3
desired temperature in the sleeper. Turn the switch
clockwise or to the red area for warm air. Turn the
switch counterclockwise or to the blue area for cool
air.
The air conditioner automatically turns on when nec-
essary to maintain the selected temperature in the
sleeper. If the sleeper air conditioner automatically
turns on when the cab air conditioner is on, the cab 4
9/07/95 f830716
air conditioner fan speed and temperature settings
will override the sleeper air conditioner settings. 1. Fan Switch
The CDTC system is disabled when the temperature 3. Temperature Control Switch
control switch is in the maximum cool or maximum 4. Maximum Air Conditioning
warm positions.
Fig. 4.6, Climate Control Panel, Heater and Air
The bunk override switch allows the driver to re- Conditioning
motely control the temperature and fan speed set-
tings in the sleeper. The bunk override mode can be A four-speed fan forces fresh or recirculated air to
canceled by changing the sleeper fan speed or tem- any selected air outlets at the windshield, door win-
perature setting. After the override mode is canceled, dows, dashboard face, and cab floor.
the sleeper heater and air conditioner system will An air selection switch controls the direction of warm
operate from the sleeper fan speed and temperature or cool air to the face and feet, face only, feet only,
settings and the amber indicator on the switch will be feet and windshield, or windshield only (defrost).
off.
A temperature control switch is used to select the
desired temperature. Turn the switch counterclock-
wise for cool air, or clockwise for warm air.
4.4
1 2 3
1
2
5
10/26/95
4 f830717
1. Fan Switch
4. Fresh Air/Recirculation Switch
5. Bunk Fan Switch
Fig. 4.7, Climate Control Panel, Heater Only
All of the dash-face outlets have adjustable louvers

that pivot right, left, up, and down. The outlets can
be closed by moving the louvers all the way down.
10/04/95 f830728
Windshield defrost outlets and the passenger’s door
window defrost outlet have nonadjustable louvers. 1. Temperature Control Switch
2. Fan Switch
The bunk outlet (at the right-hand rear corner of the
bunk) has two sets of vertical louvers that operate Fig. 4.8, Sleeper Climate Control Panel
like the horizontal dash-face louvers.
whether fresh or recirculated air has been selected.
The sleeper heater and air conditioner is installed in
See Fig. 4.6.
the right-side baggage compartment and uses the
cab’s refrigerant system for air conditioner operation. When the air selection switch is set to air condition-
The sleeper heater and air conditioner is equipped ing and recirculated air has been selected, the sys-
with a separate evaporator coil, expansion valve, and tem functions the same as when the air selection
fan. It is also equipped with its own heater core and switch is set at maximum air conditioning.
water valve, independent of the cab heater. The The fan bunk switch on the cab climate control panel
sleeper climate control panel is mounted on the right overrides the sleeper climate control panel. See
rear wall or the rear overhead storage compartment. Fig. 4.7. For increased ventilation in the sleeper, put
See Fig. 4.8. the switch in the HI position. For normal fan and tem-
NOTE: Shutting off the heater supply gate valve, perature operation, put the switch in the middle posi-
if equipped, on the engine limits the ability to tion. To turn the fan in the sleeper off, put the switch
control air conditioning temperature in the cab in the OFF position.
and in the sleeper. With the valve shut off, warm NOTE: When the bunk fan switch is in the OFF
coolant is no longer available from the engine position, the sleeper temperature control will
and the outlet air temperature controls can’t be default to the heat mode. The sleeper fan will
used to change air temperature. blow hot air when any air conditioning mode is
A fresh air/recirculation switch is standard equipment selected. To operate the temperature controls,
when there is no air conditioning. See Fig. 4.7. This move the bunk fan switch to the middle position.
control is an option when air conditioning is ordered. A cab exhaust system is included with sleeper cabs.
It allows the cab to be ventilated with either fresh or When the climate control unit is set for fresh air, 300
recirculated air. When the air selection switch is ro- cubic feet per minute of air is provided to the sleeper
tated to the maximum air conditioning position, the cab and exhausted through a vent in the left rear
system uses onlyrecirculated air, regardless of area of the sleeper. When the system is activated,
4.5
fresh air rapidly displaces stale air as the cab pres-

surizes. 1 2 3
IMPORTANT: To prevent the buildup of fumes or

odors inside the cab (for example, from smok-
ing), do not operate the heater and air condi-
tioning system in a recirculation mode for more
than 20 minutes.
Defogging and Defrosting Using 4

9/07/95 f830719
Fresh Air
1. Fan Switch
1. Turn the temperature control switch all the way 2. Air Selection Switch
clockwise for warm air, the fan switch to off and, 3. Temperature Control Switch at Warm
if equipped, the bunk fan switch to off before 4. Fresh Air/Recirculation Switch
starting the engine.
Fig. 4.10, Heating Settings
2. Remove any ice or snow from the outside of the
windshield, door windows, and fresh air inlet 2. Turn on the fan switch to the desired speed.
grille. 3. Move the air selection switch to the desired set-
3. With the engine at operating temperature, turn ting.
the fan switch to 4, the highest speed. See IMPORTANT: If the windows start to fog, move
Fig. 4.9. Leave it in this position for 30 seconds. the air selection switch to defrost (windshield)
This will clear the system of moist air.
and make sure the fan is on. To defog the driv-
er’s door window, turn the extreme left dash-
1 2 3 face outlet to direct airflow to the upper left.
NOTE: In mild weather the fan switch can be
kept off since forward motion of the vehicle will
provide airflow through the heater.
4. If the vehicle has a sleeper climate control panel,
set the controls as desired. Refer to "Heating,
9/07/95 f830718
Auxiliary Heater and Air Conditioner."
1. Fan Switch at Highest Speed 5. When a comfortable temperature has been
2. Air Selection Switch at Defrost reached, adjust the fan switch setting and tem-
3. Temperature Control Switch at Warm perature control as needed to maintain the tem-
perature.
Fig. 4.9, Defogging and Defrosting Settings
4. Move the air selection switch to the defrost odors inside the cab (for example, from smok-
(windshield) position. In this position warm, dry ing), do not operate the heater and air condi-
air is directed to the windshield.
NOTE: The air conditioner, if equipped, is auto- than 20 minutes.
matically engaged in the defrost mode. This
dries the air. Air Conditioning
Heating IMPORTANT: Operate the air conditioner at
least five minutes each month, even during cool
1. With the engine at operating temperature, move weather. This helps prevent drying and cracking
the temperature control switch all the way clock- of tubing seals, reducing refrigerant leaks in the
wise for heat. See Fig. 4.10.
4.6
system. Operate the air conditioner only after 5. Move the temperature control switch counter-
the engine compartment is warm, and the inte- clockwise for cool air. In this position, no heat is
rior of the cab is 70°F (21°C) or higher. During given off by the heater.
cold weather, the heater can be operated at the 6. Turn the fan switch to the highest speed, 4.
same time to prevent discomfort.
7. As soon as cool air is flowing from the dash-
1. If the cab is hot inside, temporarily open the win- board outlets, close the windows. Adjust the fan
dows to let the hot air out. switch setting as desired.
2. Move the air selection switch to the non-air con- 8. If the air from the vents is too cold, move the
ditioning face only position and turn the fan temperature control switch clockwise for warmer
switch off before starting the engine. See air flow.
Fig. 4.11.
odors inside the cab (for example, from smok-
1 2 3 4 ing), do not operate the heater and air condi-
than 20 minutes.
Fresh Air
1. Move the fresh air/recirculation switch to the
fresh air position. Move the air selection switch
6 5 to the desired position. See Fig. 4.7.
9/07/95 f830720
2. Move the temperature control switch counter-
1. Fan Switch
2. Air Conditioning Settings
clockwise for no heating or clockwise for heat.
3. Face Only Setting (non-air conditioning) 3. Set the fan switch at the desired speed.
5. Maximum Air Conditioning IMPORTANT: To prevent the buildup of fumes or
6. Fresh Air/Recirculation Switch odors inside the cab (for example, from smok-
Fig. 4.11, Air Conditioning Settings ing), do not operate the heater or ventilation
system in a recirculation mode for more than 20
3. Start the engine. minutes.
4. Move the air selection switch to either one of the
air conditioning settings. With the control at ei- Heating, Sleeper Heater and Air
ther one of the air conditioning settings, fresh air Conditioner
is drawn into the cab. With the control at maxi-
1. With the engine at operating temperature, set the
mum air conditioning, the air inside the cab is
recirculated. bunk fan switch on the cab climate control panel
to the middle position. See Fig. 4.7.
IMPORTANT: If the outside air is dusty or When the bunk fan switch in the middle position,
smoky, set the air selection switch at maximum full control is given to the sleeper heater and air
air conditioning and keep the windows and vent conditioner climate control panel. The bunk fan is
closed to prevent drawing in dust or smoke. On off when the bunk fan switch is in the OFF posi-
vehicles with the fresh air/recirculation switch, tion. The bunk fan is on high when the bunk fan
recirculated air can be selected either with the switch is in the HI position.
switch or by setting the air selection switch to NOTE: Whenever the refrigerant compressor is
maximum air conditioning. operating, the fan will always run at a very low
4.7
speed, even with the fan switch in the off posi- 4. When air conditioning is not desired, turn the
tion. This prevents ice from forming on the temperature control switch clockwise and turn
evaporator, especially during humid weather. the fan off.
2. Turn the temperature control switch all the way IMPORTANT: To prevent the buildup of fumes or
clockwise to heat. Turn the fan switch to position odors inside the sleeper (for example, from
3. See Fig. 4.8. smoking) do not operate the heater and air con-
3.
ditioning system in a recirculation mode for
When the sleeper compartment heats to the de-
sired temperature, turn the temperature control more than 20 minutes.
switch counterclockwise to adjust outlet air tem- NOTE: Whenever the refrigerant compressor is
perature. Then, turn the fan switch to adjust the operating, the fan will always run at a very low
air flow level. speed, even with the fan switch in the off posi-
The system will automatically maintain the se- tion. This prevents ice from forming on the
lected outlet air temperature. evaporator, especially during humid weather.
4. When heat is not desired, turn the temperature
control switch counterclockwise and turn the fan Parked HVAC
off.
The parked HVAC system consists of a compact
IMPORTANT: To prevent the buildup of fumes or electrical 3000-BTU air conditioning system, and a
odors inside the sleeper (for example, from diesel-fired heater unit.
smoking) do not operate the heater and air con-
ditioning system in a recirculation mode for Overview
more than 20 minutes. The Bergstrom NITE (No Idle Thermal Environment)
parked, or no-idle, air conditioning system is a com-
Air Conditioning, Sleeper Heater and pact, electrically powered, 3000-BTU system. It is
Air Conditioner designed to provide a means of air conditioning to
the sleeper area without having the engine running. It
1. Turn on the cab air conditioner (refer to "Air Con- is completely self-contained, and runs on 12-volt
ditioning") and set the bunk fan switch on the deep-cycle batteries. The system is designed to
cab climate control panel to the middle position. maintain cool air in the sleeper interior. For optimal
See Fig. 4.7. operation, the curtain between the cab and the
When the bunk fan switch in the middle position, sleeper must be closed when using the A/C system.
full control is given to the sleeper heater and air The parked A/C unit will not cool down a hot sleeper
conditioner climate control panel. The bunk fan is that has been sitting in the sun without the vehicle
off when the bunk fan switch is in the OFF posi- A/C running. If the interior temperature is higher than
tion. The bunk fan is on high when the bunk fan desired, start the engine and run the vehicle A/C sys-
switch is in the HI position. tem until the desired sleeper temperature is
achieved. This will help cool the sleeper to a tem-
2. Turn the temperature control switch on the perature that the parked A/C system can maintain.
sleeper climate control panel all the way counter- Once the sleeper temperature is lowered, the system
clockwise to cool. Turn the fan switch to position will maintain a comfortable setting.
3. See Fig. 4.8.
The A/C unit is located under the lower bunk in the
3. When the sleeper compartment cools to the de- sleeper compartment. The unit gets its intake air
sired temperature, turn the temperature control from the under-bunk area through a grate in the top
switch clockwise to adjust outlet air temperature. panel. An air intake grille is located on the front panel
Then, turn the fan switch to adjust the air flow of the lower bunk. The outlet ducting runs from the
level. left side of the unit to an outlet near the bunk occu-
The system will automatically maintain the se- pant’s face on the back wall of the sleeper. It is im-
lected outlet air temperature. portant to keep the air intake grille, and the area
under the bunk, free of objects that might block air
4.8
flow or put objectionable odors into the cooling air.

Air for the condenser is taken in from under the cab
and exhausted through another opening in the cab
floor.
1
The system receives power from four deep-cycle bat-
teries located between the frame rails. These batter-
ies are completely isolated from the starting batteries
to keep the starting batteries from being drawn down 2
during operation.
The heater unit is located under the lower bunk in 3
the sleeper compartment next to the A/C unit. The
unit gets its intake air through a duct attached to a
grille located on the right side of the front panel of 4
the lower bunk. The outlet ducting runs from the
back of the unit to a grille on the left side of the front 5 AUTO
panel of the lower bunk.
Operation 6
IMPORTANT: Before operating the Parked

HVAC system, make sure that the intake and 08/29/2007 f831760
outlet vents for the A/C and heater units are 1. Temperature Control 4. Heat Only
clear. Blocked vents will hamper the operation Dial 5. AUTO
2. Mode Switch 6. Off
of the unit. 3. A/C Only
The control panel for the parked A/C and heater is
Fig. 4.12, Parked A/C and Heater Control Panel
located on the back wall of the sleeper near the left
side. It has a temperature control dial, and a four-
position mode selector switch. Turn the temperature Parked A/C and Heater Mode Switch Operation
control dial to the left for cooling, and to the right for Mode Function
heat. See Fig. 4.12. See Table 4.1 for a description Off Turns the unit off.
of the function of the mode switch. Allows the unit to automatically heat or
cool the sleeper, depending on the
The system must be turned off whenever it is not in temperature setting and the sleeper
use, or the batteries may not charge properly. After AUTO
temperature. Adjusts the compressor,
using the system, turn the mode switch to the OFF heater, and fans to keep temperature
position, even if the unit is not running. constant.
Allows only the heat portion of the system
Heat Only to run. Adjusts the heater only to keep the
temperature constant.
Allows only the A/C portion of the system
A/C Only to run. Adjusts compressor and fans only
to keep the temperature constant.
Table 4.1, Parked A/C and Heater Mode Switch
Operation
4.9
5
Seats and Seat Belts
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Seat Belts and Tether Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Sleeper Compartment Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
Supplemental Restraint System, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
Air Bag, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
SPACE System, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
Seats Seat Adjustments

General Information The following is a description of adjustments that can
be made to various Freightliner-installed seats. Not
Unless otherwise noted, all seat adjustments should all seats have all of the adjustments listed below.
be made while seated and before the engine is See Fig. 5.1.
started. 1. Back Cushion Tilt: This adjustment enables the
Due to the maximum adjustability of mid- and high- back cushion to pivot forward or backward.
back air suspension seats, it is possible to combine
2. Lumbar Support: Lumbar support changes the
the seat back recline adjustment and the seat slide
shape of the seat back to give more or less sup-
adjustment so that the seat back contacts the back-
port to the occupant’s lumbar (lower back) area.
wall. It is the responsibility of the driver to adjust the
This adjustment is either mechanical or air con-
seat to prevent damage to the seat and the cab inte-
trolled, depending on make and model of the
rior.
seat.
WARNING 3. Isolator: This feature (also referred to as back-
slap isolator or Chugger-Snubber®) reduces the
Keep hands, tools, and other objects away from amount of road shock by isolating the occupant
the scissor points under the seats. Failure to do from the motion of the vehicle, and allowing the
so could cause personal injury. upper seat to move in a simple pendulum mo-
tion. A lockout feature is used whenever the iso-
lator is not desired.
1
3 4
2
8
6 7
5
10/26/2000 f910149a
1. Back Cushion Tilt 5. Bottom Cushion Angle (fore and aft cushion height)
2. Lumbar Support 6. Fore and Aft Seat Adjustment (seat track adjustment)
3. Isolator Feature 7. Seat Tilt
4. Height Adjustment 8. Upper Back Cushion
Fig. 5.1, Seat Adjustments
5.1
4. Height Adjustment: The entire seat moves up or

down when adjusting the height. The adjustment
is either manually or air controlled, depending on
the make of the seat.
5. Bottom Cushion Angle or Fore and Aft Bottom
Cushion Height: This feature enables the occu-
pant to raise or lower the front or back of the
bottom cushion. This adjustment is easier to per-
form when all weight is removed from the seat. 2
6. Fore and Aft Seat or Seat Track Adjustment: The
entire seat moves forward or backward when this 3
adjustment is made.
4
7. Seat Tilt: When this adjustment is made, the seat
assembly (back and bottom cushions) tilts for-
ward or backward. 5
6
8. Upper Back Cushion Adjustment: When this ad-
justment is made, the upper back cushion
1 7
changes angle to provide upper back support. 03/12/2001 f910456
9. Weight Adjustment: On those seats with weight 1. Isolator and Fore/Aft Seat Adjustment Lever
adjustment, the feature is fully automatic. When 2. Bottom Cushion Angle Guide
you sit on the seat, a leveling valve places you in 3. Armrest Adjustment Knob
the center of the ride zone. Additional adjust- 4. Back Cushion Tilt Position Indicator
ments are possible by using the height adjust- 5. Back Cushion Tilt Lever
ment feature. 6. Height Adjustment and Lumbar Support Lever
7. Fore/Aft Seat Position Indicator
EzyRider® Seat Fig. 5.2, EzyRider Seat Adjustment Controls (Vehicles
Built Before November 28, 2005)
For seat adjustment controls on vehicles built before
November 28, 2005, see Fig. 5.2. For seat adjust- Fore and Aft Seat Adjustment
ment controls on vehicles built on or after November
28, 2005, see Fig. 5.3. Pull the fore and aft seat adjustment lever out to the
second stop and slide the seat forward or backward
Back Cushion Tilt to the desired position.
To tilt the back cushion, raise the back cushion tilt Height Adjustment
lever and lean forward or backward. Release the
lever to lock the cushion in place. To raise or lower the seat, use the height adjustment
switch or lever on the side of the seat.
Lumbar Support
Bottom Cushion Angle
To adjust the amount of support for your lower back,
use the lumbar support switch or lever on the side of To adjust the bottom cushion angle, pull the bottom
the seat. cushion up and forward or down and back. The bot-
tom cushion angle is controlled by the guides on
Isolator each side of the seat.
To engage the isolator, push in on the isolator lever. Seat Position Indicators
To lock out the isolator, pull the isolator lever out to
the first stop. Seats installed in vehicles built before November 28,
2005 are equipped with seat position indicators. A
back cushion tilt position indicator and a fore/aft seat
5.2
3 1
7
4
6 2
5 3
4
6 5
10/10/96 f910131
01/06/2006 1 f910565 1. Back Cushion Tilt Lever
1. Isolator and Fore/Aft Seat Adjustment Lever 2. Lumbar Support Switch (LSO models)
2. Armrest Adjustment Knob 3. Damper Adjustment Switch
3. Bottom Cushion Angle Guide 4. Weight and Height Adjustment Switch
4. Back Cushion Tilt Lever 5. Bottom Cushion Tilt Knob
5. Lumbar Support Switch 6. Fore and Aft Adjustment and Isolator Lever
6. Height Adjustment Switch 7. Lumbar Support Knob (non-LSO models)
Fig. 5.3, EzyRider Seat Adjustment Controls (Vehicles Fig. 5.4, Freightliner/Bostrom Seat Adjustment Controls
Built on or After November 28, 2005)
Weight and Height Adjustment
position indicator allow the driver to see where the
seat is adjusted within the adjustment ranges. To raise the seat, press the upper portion of the
weight and height adjustment switch. To lower the
Armrest Angle (optional armrests) seat, press the lower portion of the switch.
To adjust the vertical angle of the armrest, turn the Isolator

adjustment knob on the underside of the armrest.
To engage the isolator, put the isolator lever in the
Freightliner/Bostrom Seat center position. Lock out the isolator by moving the
lever to the right.
See Fig. 5.4 for seat adjustment controls.
Fore and Aft Seat Adjustment
Back Cushion Tilt Hold the fore and aft adjustment lever to the left and
To tilt the back cushion, lean forward slightly to re- slide the seat forward or backward to the desired po-
move pressure from the cushion and hold the back sition.
cushion tilt lever rearward. Lean backward slowly to
the desired position and release the lever to lock the Bottom Cushion Tilt Adjustment
cushion in place. Rotate the bottom cushion tilt knob to increase or
decrease bottom cushion tilt.
5.3
Lumbar Support Height Adjustment

To increase lumbar support on LSO models, press Push the height adjustment knob in to inflate the sus-
the plus sign on the lumbar support switch. To de- pension and raise the seat. Pull the knob out to de-
crease lumbar support on LSO models, press the flate the suspension and lower the seat.
minus sign on the switch. To increase lumbar support
on non-LSO models, rotate the lumbar support knob Isolator and Fore-Aft Seat Adjustment
forward. To decrease lumbar support on non-LSO
models, rotate the knob rearward. Move the fore-aft adjustment lever to the left to ad-
just the seat to the desired fore-aft position. Move
Damper Adjustment the same lever to the center position to lock out the
isolator feature. Move the lever to the right to engage
Press the damper adjustment switch to adjust the the isolator.
damper.
Seat Cushion Adjustment
Dura-Form Fleetcruiser Seat To put the seat cushion in the upper position, lift up-
See Fig. 5.5 for seat adjustment controls. ward on the front of the cushion, then push rearward.
To put the seat cushion in the lower position, pull for-
ward and then push downward.
Lumbar Support
Move the lumbar support lever to any of the three
positions as desired.
5
National 2000 Series Seat
See Fig. 5.6 for seat adjustment controls.
1
Back Cushion Tilt
4 2
3 To tilt the back cushion, turn the back cushion tilt
knob until the desired position is reached.
Height Adjustment
02/09/95 f910003a To raise or lower the height of the seat, use the
1. Back Cushion Tilt Handle height adjustment switch on the side of the seat.
2. Height Adjustment Knob
3. Isolator and Fore-Aft Adjustment Lever Fore and Aft Seat Adjustment
4. Seat Cushion Adjustment
5. Lumbar Support Lever To adjust the fore and aft position of the entire seat,
move the fore and aft seat adjustment lever to the
Fig. 5.5, Dura-Form Fleetcruiser Seat Adjustment left and slide the seat forward or backward to the
Controls desired position. Move the lever back to its original
position to lock the seat in place.
Back Cushion Tilt
To tilt the back cushion through a range of 10 de-
Rear Cushion Adjustment
grees, push down on the back cushion tilt handle. To adjust the height of the rear of the seat cushion,
Move the back cushion to the desired position and remove your weight from the seat and turn the rear
release the handle. cushion adjustment knob to one of three positions.
5.4
Seat Belts and Tether Belts

General Information
Seat belt assemblies are designed to secure persons
in the vehicle to help reduce the chance of injury or
the amount of injury resulting from accidents or sud-
7 den stops. For this reason, Daimler Trucks North
America LLC urges that the driver and all passen-
gers, regardless of age or physical condition, use
6 seat belts when riding in the vehicle.
WARNING
1
5
Always use the vehicle’s seat belt system when
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so can result
2 in severe personal injury or death.
4 3
Seat belt assemblies in Daimler Trucks North
America (DTNA) vehicles meet Federal Motor Ve-
11/14/2000 f910445 hicle Safety Standard 209, "Type 1" and "Type 2" re-
1. Back Cushion Tilt Knob
quirements.
2. Lumbar Support Switch When transporting a child, always use a child re-
3. Height Adjustment Switch straint system or the vehicle seat belts as appropri-
4. Fore and Aft Seat Adjustment Lever ate. To determine whether a child restraint system is
5. Bottom Cushion Front Height Adjustment Handle required, review and comply with applicable state
6. Isolator Handle
7. Rear Cushion Adjustment Knob
and local laws. Any child restraint used must comply
with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213,
Fig. 5.6, National 2000 Series Seat Adjustment Controls "Child Restraint Systems." When providing a child
restraint system, always carefully read and follow all
Isolator instructions pertaining to installation and usage for
the child. Make certain the child remains in the re-
Also called a Chugger Snubber®, the isolator reduces straint system at all times when the vehicle is in mo-
the amount of road shock by isolating the occupant tion.
from the motion of the vehicle and allowing the seat
to move in a simple pendulum motion. To use the In addition to seat belt assemblies, tether belts are
isolator feature, turn the isolator handle to the hori- installed on suspension-type seats. Tether belts help
zontal position. Turn the isolator handle down when secure the seat to the floor and are intended to re-
the isolator feature is not desired. strain the seat and seat belt in case of an accident or
sudden stop.
Lumbar Support IMPORTANT: Seat belts have a finite life which
To adjust the lumbar support, use the lumbar support may be much shorter than the life of the vehicle.
switch on the side of the seat to give more or less Regular inspections and replacement as needed
support to your lower back. are the only assurance of adequate seat belt
security over the life of the vehicle.
Bottom Cushion Front Height
To adjust the height of the front of the bottom cush-
ion, lift the bottom cushion front height adjustment
handle, and pull forward or push back to the desired
setting.
5.5
Seat Belt Inspection 1. Slowly pull the link end of the three-point seat
belt out of the retractor and pull it across your
lap (from outboard to inboard) far enough to en-
WARNING gage the buckle. If the retractor locks too soon,
allow the belt to retract slightly, then slowly pull it
Inspect and maintain seat belts. When any part of out again.
a seat belt system needs replacement, the entire
seat belt must be replaced, both retractor and 2. Fasten the three-point seat belt by pushing the
buckle side. Any time a vehicle is involved in an link into the buckle until it latches (Fig. 5.7). Give
accident, and the seat belt system was in use, the belt a tug at the buckle. If the buckle un-
the entire vehicle seat belt system must be re- latches, repeat this step. If the problem contin-
placed before operating the vehicle. Do not at- ues, replace the three-point seat belt.
tempt to modify the seat belt system; doing so
could change the effectiveness of the system.
Failure to replace worn or damaged seat belts, or
making any modifications to the system, may re-
sult in personal injury or death.
Inspect the seat belts and tether belts (if so
equipped).
1. Check the web for fraying, cuts, extreme dirt and
dust, or for severe fading from exposure to sun-
light, especially near the buckle latch plate and in
the D-loop guide area.
2. Check operation of the buckle, latch, Komfort
Latch or Sliding Komfort Latch (if equipped), web
retractor, and upper seat belt mount on the door
pillar. Check all visible components for wear or
damage.
01/18/95 f910004a
3. Check the seat belt and tether belt connection
points and tighten any that are loose. Fig. 5.7, Fastening the Three-Point Belt
3. Position the shoulder strap diagonally across

Seat Belt Operation your chest with the adjustable D-loop bracket (if
Three-Point Seat Belt With Komfort Latch equipped). The shoulder strap must be centered
on your shoulder and chest, away from your face
NOTE: For vehicles not equipped with the Kom- and neck. See Fig. 5.8. If desired, engage the
fort Latch, see the seat belt operation under the Komfort Latch as follows.
heading "Three-Point Seat Belt."
Pull on the shoulder strap to lessen the pressure
of the strap on your shoulder and chest. Allow no
WARNING more than one inch (2.5 cm) of slack between
your chest and the shoulder harness. More slack
Wear three-point seat belts only as described can significantly reduce the seat belt’s effective-
below. Three-point seat belts are designed to be ness in an accident or a sudden stop. While
worn by one person at a time. In case of an acci- holding the belt slack, press the Komfort Latch
dent or sudden stop, personal injury or death lever up, clamping the seat belt webbing
could result from misuse. (Fig. 5.9 and Fig. 5.10).
Fasten the seat belts before driving. Fastening a 4. To unbuckle the three-point seat belt, push the
three-point seat belt while driving creates a haz- button on the buckle as shown in Fig. 5.11. If the
ard. Komfort Latch was used, release it by giving the
shoulder belt a quick tug. If you lean forward
5.6
A B C
08/09/2010 f910634
A. Correct—Belt is centered on your shoulder and

chest, away from your face and neck.
B. Wrong—Belt must not rub against face or neck.
C. Wrong—Belt must not hang off shoulder.
Fig. 5.8, Proper Shoulder Strap Fit
01/18/95 f910049a
Fig. 5.11, Releasing the Three-Point Seat Belt
against the shoulder belt, the Komfort Latch will

A automatically release, and will need to be reset.
NOTE: The Komfort Latch does not have to be
released in an emergency situation. The Kom-
fort Latch will release by itself under rough road
or other abnormal conditions. Make sure the
three-point seat belt is completely retracted
when it is not in use.
01/06/95 f910048a Three-Point Seat Belt

A. 1 Inch (2.5 cm) Maximum NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Komfort
Fig. 5.9, Adjusting Shoulder Harness Clearance Latch, see the seat belt operation under the
heading "Three-Point Seat Belt With Komfort
Latch."
WARNING
Wear three-point seat belts only as described
below. Three-point seat belts are designed to be
worn by one person at a time. In case of an acci-
dent or sudden stop, personal injury or death
could result from misuse.
Fasten the seat belts before driving. Fastening a
three-point seat belt while driving creates a haz-
ard.
11/02/95 f910144
1. Slowly pull the link end of the three-point seat
Fig. 5.10, Locking Komfort Latch
belt out of the retractor and pull it across your
lap (from outboard to inboard) far enough to en-
gage the buckle. If the retractor locks too soon,
5.7
allow the belt to retract slightly, then slowly pull it 2. To lengthen the belt, tip the link end downward
out again. and pull the link until it connects with the buckle.
2. Fasten the three-point seat belt by pushing the 3. After the belt is connected, shorten it by pulling
latch into the buckle. Listen for an audible click. on the loose end until the belt is snug, but com-
See Fig. 5.7. fortable. Be sure the belts are not twisted. See
Fig. 5.12.
3. Tug on the seat belt to make sure it is securely
fastened. If the buckle unlatches, repeat this
step. If the problem continues, replace the three-
2
point seat belt.
4. Snug the seat belt to your waist.
A
5. Position the shoulder strap diagonally across 1
your chest with the adjustable D-loop bracket (if
equipped). The shoulder strap must be centered 3
on your shoulder and chest, away from your face
and neck. See Fig. 5.8.
01/06/95 f910068a
6. To unbuckle the three-point seat belt, press the
release button on the buckle; see Fig. 5.11. A. Pull on the loose end to shorten the belt.
1. Buckle 3. Link
NOTE: Make sure the three-point seat belt is 2. Belt Release Button
completely retracted when it is not in use.
Fig. 5.12, Bunk Restraint Adjustment
Sleeper Compartment Bunk Restraint Operation

Restraints 1. Starting at the foot of the bunk, pull up the link
General Information end of the belt far enough to engage the buckle.
See Fig. 5.13.
On vehicles equipped with a sleeper compartment,
bunk restraints should be used whenever the sleeper
compartment is occupied and the vehicle is moving.
Restraints are designed to lessen the chance of in- 2 3
jury or the amount of injury resulting from accidents
or sudden stops. For this reason, Daimler Trucks
North America LLC urges the use of bunk restraints
when the sleeper compartment is occupied in a mov-
ing vehicle.
WARNING
Do not use the sleeper compartment while the 4
vehicle is in motion unless a bunk restraint is 5
installed and used. Not using the bunk restraint
increases the chance of injury, or the degree of
injury, from accidents or sudden stops to all oc- 1
cupants of the vehicle. 02/14/96 f910150
1. Mattress 4. Belt Anchor

Bunk Restraint Adjustment 2. Sleeper Wall 5. Buckle
3. Restraint
1. Make sure the belt is attached to the bunk sup-
port and sleeper wall. Fig. 5.13, Bunk Restraint
5.8
2. Fasten the belt by pushing the link end into the Do not place objects on the steering wheel or be-
buckle until they latch. Make sure that the belt is tween you and the steering wheel. Keep your
not twisted. Check the engagement by trying to hands on the sides and lower portion of the
pull the link out of the buckle. If they come apart, steering wheel. Any objects may cause harm dur-
repeat this step. If the problem continues, re- ing an accident.
place the belt. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the
Failure to follow these instructions may result in
other two belts located in the middle and upper
death or personal injury.
portion of the bunk to lock the restraint in place.
3. To release the bunk restraint, push the release Air Bag Safety Guidelines
button on the buckle at the head of the bunk and
pull the link from the buckle. The air bag system contains components that use
combustible chemicals. Because these chemicals are
Repeat this step for the other two buckles to combustible, care must be taken when replacing or
completely release the bunk restraint. handling system components.
Supplemental Restraint WARNING

System, Optional Consider undeployed air bags to be dangerous
The supplemental restraint system can consist of an and capable of deploying at any time. Do not at-
air bag and SPACE system, or an air bag only sys- tempt to service the air bag system unless
tem. Your vehicle may or may not have a supple- trained to do so. Damaged air bag systems
mental restraint system. should be examined by qualified personnel be-
fore any attempt is made to remove or to deploy
Air Bag, Optional the air bag. All intentional deployments and test-
ing of the system should be performed by trained
The air bag, when used with seat belts, provides ad- personnel. Unintentional or improper air bag de-
ditional protection to the driver in severe frontal colli- ployment could cause severe bodily injury or
sions. The operational readiness of the air bag sys- death.
tem is indicated by the supplemental restraint system Do not attempt to disassemble the air bag inflator
(SRS) indicator on the dash. The SRS indicator unit or breach the integrity of the sealed metallic
comes on when the engine is started and then goes inflator case. Doing so could cause severe bodily
off. The indicator will remain on if there is a problem injury or death.
with the air bag system. The vehicle should be ser-
viced if the SRS indicator does not come on when Do not allow system chemicals to contact other
the engine is started or if the SRS indicator remains liquids, combustibles, and flammable materials.
on. Doing so could cause chemical burns or per-
sonal injury.
WARNING The surface of the deployed air bag may contain
small amounts of sodium hydroxide (which is a
Air bags are designed to inflate only in severe by-product of the gas generant combustion) and
frontal collisions. The driver and the passenger metallic sodium. Sodium hydroxide may be irri-
should always wear seat belts. For maximum pro- tating to the skin and eyes. Always wear rubber
tection in a collision or rollover, always be in a gloves and safety glasses when handling a de-
normal seated position with your back against ployed air bag. Immediately wash your hands and
the seat back and your head upright. Fasten your exposed skin areas with a mild soap and water.
seat belt and ensure that it is properly positioned Flush your eyes immediately if exposed to so-
on your body as described under the "Seat Belt dium hydroxide.
Operation" heading. Since the air bag inflates
with considerable speed and force, a proper seat Review and comply with the following list of
position will keep you a safe distance from the warnings. Failure to do so could result in severe
inflating air bag. injury or death.
5.9
• Keep all liquids, acids, halogens, heavy pant of the seat and lower the seat suspension, mov-
metals, and heavy salts away from the air ing the occupant down and away from the steering
bag system. wheel and ceiling. See Fig. 5.15. The air bag is acti-
vated simultaneously. This sequence of actions oc-
• Do not cut, drill, braze, solder, weld, strike,
curs in about a tenth of a second.
or probe any part of the air bag system.
• Do not expose the air bag module to elec-
tricity. Never probe a circuit. 3
• Do not attempt to adapt, reuse, or install an
air bag system in any vehicle other than the
specific vehicle for which it is designed.
• Do not cut wires or tamper with the connec-
tor between the vehicle wiring harness and
the air bag module. Cutting or removing the
connector from the system will disable the 2
safety shunt and could cause unintentional
deployment. 1
• Allow deployed air bag systems to cool 5
after deployment.
• Wear rubber gloves and safety glasses
4
when handling a deployed air bag.
• Wash your hands and exposed skin surface 09/03/97 f910172
areas immediately after handling a de- 1. Pretensioning Cable Tether
ployed system. 2. SPACE Module
3. Suspension Seat
• Store, transport, dispose of, and recycle 4. Gas Cylinder
deployed air bag system components in 5. Sensor Bracket
accordance with all applicable federal,
state, and local regulations. Fig. 5.14, SPACE System Components
• The air bag module may contain perchlor-

ate material: special handling may apply, WARNING
see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate. The SPACE system will activate during a severe,
frontal collision even if the seat belts are not fas-
• Keep all heavy objects in the cab secured. tened, but the SPACE system only provides pro-
tection to the occupant when the seat belts are
SPACE System, Optional fastened. Always use the seat belts when operat-
ing the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in se-
The Seat Pretensioner Activation for Crash survival vere personal injury or death.
Enhancement (SPACE) system, when used with seat
belts, provides additional protection to the driver
and/or passenger in severe frontal collisions.
WARNING
The SPACE system provides a significant increase in Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were worn
seat stability during a severe, frontal collision. When in an accident must be replaced and their an-
the SPACE module senses a severe, life-threatening choring points must be checked. Do not attempt
frontal impact, the module triggers two gas-cylinders to modify the SPACE system. Doing so could
mounted at the base of the seat. See Fig. 5.14. The change the effectiveness of the system. The
gas cylinders activate the power cinches that then
tighten the lap and shoulder belts against the occu-
5.10
1 Safety Guidelines for the SPACE

2 System
1 The SPACE system contains components that use
2 combustible chemicals. Because these chemicals are
combustible, care must be taken when replacing or
handling system components.
8
3
A
WARNING
4 Do not attempt to service the air bag/SPACE sys-
tem. Damaged or deployed air bag/SPACE sys-
5 tems should be examined only by qualified per-
6 sonnel before any attempt is made to remove,
replace, or handle the air bag/SPACE system
B
components. All intentional deployments and
testing of the system should be performed by
7 trained personnel. Unintentional or improper de-
ployment of the air bag/SPACE system could
cause severe bodily injury or death.
07/29/97 f910235
Do not attempt to service or to disassemble the
A. Seat Tether Without the SPACE System SPACE module. The SPACE module cannot be
B. Seat Belt Assembly B-Pillar Components serviced. Doing so could result in severe bodily
1. Height Adjuster 5. Buckle injury or death.
2. Shoulder Loop 6. Buckle Cable
3. Seat Belt 7. SPACE Module Although the air bag/SPACE system components
4. Latch 8. Seat Tether will not likely explode, self-deploy, or produce
shrapnel, take care when it is necessary to re-
Fig. 5.15, SPACE System Seat Belt Assembly place or perform work around the air bag/SPACE
SPACE system must be replaced after being acti- system components. Review and comply with the
vated. Failure to do so may result in personal in- following list of warnings. Failure to do so could
jury or death. result in severe injury or death.
• Do not cut, drill, braze, solder, weld, strike,
Infants and children must not be placed in seats
equipped with the SPACE system. The SPACE or probe any part of the air bag/SPACE sys-
system is designed for adults only. Failure to fol- tem.
low these instructions may result in personal in- • Keep all liquids, acids, halogens, heavy
jury or death. metals, and heavy salts away from the air
The operational readiness of the SPACE system is bag/SPACE system.
indicated by the supplemental restraint system (SRS) • Do not expose the air bag/SPACE system
indicator on the dash. The SRS indicator comes on components to electricity.
when the engine is started and then goes off. The
indicator will remain on if there is a problem with the • Do not attempt to adapt, reuse, or install an
air bag or SPACE system. The vehicle should be air bag/SPACE system in any vehicle other
serviced if the SRS indicator does not come on when than the specific vehicle for which it is de-
the engine is started or if the SRS indicator remains signed.
on. • Keep hands and tools away from the scis-
sor points under the seats.
• Do not cut wires or tamper with the connec-
tors between the vehicle wiring harness
5.11
and the air bag/SPACE system. Cutting or

removing the electrical connectors could
cause unintentional deployment.
• Do not expose the air bag/SPACE system to
electricity. Never probe a circuit.
• Store, transport, dispose, and recycle de-
ployed air bag/SPACE system components
in accordance with all applicable federal,
state, and local regulations.
• Replace damaged seat belts or seat belts
that were worn in an accident, and check all
anchoring points. Only qualified personnel
familiar with air bag/SPACE systems should
replace the seat belts used in a vehicle with
an air bag/SPACE system.
• The air bag/SPACE system requires a spe-
cial seat belt. Care must be taken to be
sure the correct seat belt is used.
• Keep all heavy objects in the cab secured.
5.12
6
Steering and Brake Systems
Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Steering System cause, bring the vehicle to a safe stop. Do not drive
the vehicle until the cause of the problem has been
General Information corrected.
When there is no load on the vehicle, and the front

tires are pointed straight ahead, the steering wheel
WARNING
spokes should be centered, ±10 degrees, as shown
Driving the vehicle without the power-assist fea-
in Fig. 6.1. See Group 46 of the Century Class
ture of the steering system requires much greater
Trucks Workshop Manual for steering adjustment
effort, especially in sharp turns or at low speeds,
procedures.
which could result in an accident and possible
injury.
Drivers should carefully use the power available with
a power steering system. If the front tires become
lodged in a deep chuckhole or rut, drive the vehicle
out, instead of using the steering system to lift the
tires from the hole. Also, avoid turning the tires when
10° 10° they are against a curb, as this places a heavy load
on steering components and could damage them.
1 2
Brake System
10° 10°
General Information
A dual air brake system consists of two independent
air brake systems which use a single set of brake
10/15/98 f461694 controls. Each system has its own reservoirs, plumb-
1. 9 o’Clock 2. 3 o’Clock
ing, and brake chambers. The primary system oper-
ates the service brakes on the rear axle; the second-
Fig. 6.1, Proper Steering Wheel Position (with tires ary system operates the service brakes on the front
pointed straight ahead) axle. Service brake signals from both systems are
sent to the trailer.
CAUTION
WARNING
Never steam clean or high-pressure wash the
steering gear. Internal damage to gear seals, and Do not operate the vehicle with the front brakes
ultimately the steering gear, can result. backed off or disconnected. Backing off or dis-
connecting the front brakes will not improve ve-
Power Steering System hicle handling and may lead to loss of vehicle
control, resulting in property damage or personal
The power steering system consists of an integral injury.
steering gear (which includes a manual steering
Loss of air pressure in the primary system causes
mechanism, a hydraulic control valve, and a hydrau-
the rear service brakes to become inoperative; front
lic power cylinder), hydraulic hoses, power steering
brakes will continue to be operated by secondary
pump, reservoir, and other components. Some
system air pressure. In addition, trailer brakes will be
models are also equipped with a separate hydraulic
operated by the secondary system. Loss of second-
power cylinder on the right side of the front axle. The
ary system air pressure causes the front axle brakes
power steering pump, driven by the engine, provides
to become inoperative; rear service brakes and trailer
the power assist for the steering system. If the en-
brakes will be operated by the primary system.
gine is not running, there is no power assist. If the
power-assist feature does not work due to hydraulic Before driving your vehicle, allow time for the air
fluid loss, steering pump damage, or some other compressor to build up a minimum of 100 psi (689
6.1
kPa) pressure in both the primary and secondary After correcting the brake system problem, uncage
systems. Monitor the air pressure system by observ- the spring parking brakes before resuming normal
ing the dual system air pressure gauge and the low- vehicle operation.
air-pressure warning light and buzzer. The warning
light and buzzer shut off when air pressure in both Brake System Operation
systems reaches 64 to 76 psi (441 to 524 kPa).
Before driving the vehicle, secure all loose items in
The warning light and buzzer come on if air pressure the cab so that they will not fly forward during a full
drops below 64 to 76 psi (441 to 524 kPa) in either brake application. Make sure all passengers are
system. If this happens, check the dual system air wearing seat belts.
pressure gauge to determine which system has low
air pressure. Although the vehicle’s speed can be During normal brake stops, depress the foot brake
reduced using the foot brake control pedal, either the control pedal until braking action slows down the ve-
front or rear service brakes will not be operating, hicle. Increase or decrease the pressure on the
causing a longer stopping distance. Bring the vehicle pedal so that the vehicle comes to a smooth, safe
to a safe stop, and have the air system repaired be- stop. Apply the spring parking brakes if the vehicle is
fore continuing. to be parked.
IMPORTANT: In the event of a total loss of ser- IMPORTANT: An air brake proportioning system
vice brakes with full system air pressure, use is used in tractor air brake systems when the
the parking brake control valve (yellow knob) to vehicle is not equipped with ABS. When operat-
bring the vehicle to a complete stop in the saf- ing in bobtail mode, the rear brake chambers
est location possible. (whose axle load has been greatly reduced) re-
ceive reduced or proportional air pressure, while
On tractor-trailer vehicles, if both the primary and the front axle brake chambers receive full (nor-
secondary systems become inoperative, the trailer
service brakes or spring parking brakes will automati-
mal) air pressure. This results in a different
cally apply when air pressure drops below 35 to 45 brake pedal "feel," as the pedal seems to re-
psi (242 to 310 kPa). The tractor spring parking quire more travel and/or effort to slow or stop
brakes will automatically apply when air pressure the vehicle. However, the air brake proportioning
drops below 20 to 30 psi (138 to 207 kPa). On system actually improves vehicle control when
straight trucks, spring parking brakes will apply when the tractor is in the bobtail mode of operation.
air pressure drops below 20 to 30 psi (138 to 207 When the tractor is towing a trailer, the rear
kPa). Do not wait for the brakes to apply automati- brake chambers will receive full (normal) appli-
cally. When the warning light and buzzer first come cation air pressure.
on, immediately bring the vehicle to a safe stop. Be-
fore continuing operation of the vehicle, correct the NOTE: If equipped with main and auxiliary
cause of the air loss. transmissions, do not shift both transmissions
Before the vehicle can be moved, the spring parking into neutral while the vehicle is rolling. Shifting
brakes must be released by applying an external air both transmissions back into gear would be diffi-
source at the gladhands, or by manually caging the cult while the vehicle is rolling.
parking brake springs. The trailer brake hand control valve (Fig. 6.2) actu-
ates the trailer service brakes independently from the
WARNING vehicle chassis service brakes. The valve can be
partially or fully applied, but in any partially-on posi-
Do not release (cage) the spring parking brakes tion it will be overridden by a full application of the
and then drive the vehicle. There would be no foot brake control pedal. Moving the valve handle
means of stopping the vehicle, and this could clockwise actuates the trailer brakes, while moving it
result in serious personal injury or vehicle dam- counterclockwise releases the trailer brakes. The
age. Before releasing (caging) the spring parking valve handle is spring-loaded and returns to it’s origi-
brakes, make the connection to a towing vehicle, nal, no-air application position when released.
or chock the tires.
6.2
1
2 1
2
3 03/10/99 f610291
9/26/95 f461056 1. Trailer Air Supply Valve Knob

2. Parking Brake Valve Knob
1. Turn Signal Lever
2. Trailer Brake Hand Control Valve Fig. 6.3, Brake Valve Knobs
3. Hazard Warning Light Tab
vice brakes are wet. To do so could damage the
Fig. 6.2, Steering Column-Mounted Controls (left-hand
brakes if hot, or cause them to freeze during cold
drive shown)
weather.
If the brakes are wet, drive the vehicle in low
WARNING gear and lightly apply the brakes to heat and dry
them. Allow hot brakes to cool before using the
Do not use the trailer service brakes for parking;
spring parking brakes. Always chock the tires.
they are not designed for this purpose. If air
bleeds out of the trailer air tank during parking, If the trailer is not equipped with spring parking
the vehicle could roll causing serious personal brakes, pulling out the yellow knob applies the tractor
injury or property damage. spring parking brakes and the trailer service brakes.
When the tractor and trailer parking brakes (or trailer
The red octagonal-shaped knob (Fig. 6.3) in the con-
service brakes) are both applied, the trailer brakes
trol panel actuates the trailer air supply valve. After
are released by pushing in the red knob, leaving the
the vehicle’s air hoses are connected to a trailer, and
tractor parking brakes applied. Air pressure in the
the pressure in both air systems is at least 65 psi
primary or secondary reservoir must be at least 65
(448 kPa), the red knob must be pushed in. It should
psi (447 kPa) before the tractor spring parking
stay in, to charge the trailer air supply system and to
brakes, or the trailer service or spring parking
release the trailer spring parking brakes. It must be
brakes, can be released.
pulled out before disconnecting a trailer. It must also
be pulled out when operating a vehicle without a On trailers not equipped with spring parking brakes,
trailer. If pressure in both air systems drops to 35 to chock the trailer tires before disconnecting the truck
45 psi (242 to 310 kPa), the red knob automatically or tractor when parking just the trailer.
pops out, exhausting the trailer air supply, and apply- When parking a truck or tractor with a trailer (combi-
ing the trailer service or spring parking brakes. nation vehicle), and the trailer is not equipped with
The yellow diamond-shaped knob (Fig. 6.3) in the spring parking brakes, apply the truck or tractor
control panel actuates the parking brake valve. Pull- spring parking brakes.
ing out the knob applies both the tractor and trailer
spring parking brakes and automatically causes the WARNING
trailer air supply valve knob to pop out.
If a trailer is not equipped with spring parking
CAUTION brakes, do not park it or a combination vehicle
by pulling out only the trailer air supply valve
Do not use the spring parking brakes if the ser- knob. This would apply only the trailer service
vice brakes are hot, such as after descending a brakes. If air were to bleed from the trailer brake
steep grade. Also, do not use the spring parking system, the trailer brakes would release, possibly
brakes during freezing temperatures if the ser- causing an unattended runaway vehicle.
6.3
sure supply in the brake chamber to prevent front

CAUTION and rear wheel lockup.
Never apply the service and spring parking If equipped with Automatic Traction Control, an addi-
brakes simultaneously. To do so transmits exces- tional solenoid valve is installed. During reduced-
sive input force to the brake components, which traction situations, the valve increases or reduces air
could damage or cause eventual failure of brake pressure supply in the brake chamber to provide bet-
actuating components. ter traction whenever wheel spin occurs.
The electronic control unit also has a safety circuit
Meritor WABCO® Antilock Braking that constantly monitors the wheel sensors, traction
System (ABS) (Fig. 6.4) control valve (if equipped), solenoid control valves,
and the electrical circuitry.
After the ignition switch is turned on, the tractor
warning light (TRACTOR ABS) and, if equipped with
FASTEN SEATBELTS Automatic Traction Control, the wheel spin (WHEEL
0000432 MILES
SPIN) indicator light come on for about three sec-
onds. After three seconds, the warning lights go out
only if all of the tractor’s ABS components are work-
1 2
04/02/96 f601125
ing.
1. Tractor ABS Warning 2. Wheel Spin Indicator The wheel spin (WHEEL SPIN) indicator light comes
on if one of the drive wheels spins during accelera-
Fig. 6.4, ABS Dash Lights tion. The light goes out when the wheel stops spin-
ning. When the light comes on, partially release the
The Meritor WABCO® Antilock Braking System (ABS) throttle pedal until the light goes out. If slippery road
is an electronic wheel speed monitoring and control conditions continue, engage the axle lock.
system that works with the standard air brake sys-
tem. ABS passively monitors vehicle wheel speed at
all times, and controls wheel speed during emer- CAUTION
gency stops. If equipped with Automatic Traction
Control, wheel spin is controlled during reduced- Axle lock should only be engaged when the ve-
traction situations. In normal braking applications, the hicle is moving slowly at low throttle. Engage-
standard air brake system is in effect. ment at high speed or power can damage the
axle(s).
IMPORTANT: For proper ABS system operation,
do not change tire sizes. The sizes of the tires Do not engage the axle lock while the WHEEL
SPIN light is on. To do so could damage the rear
installed during production are programmed into axle. Refer to Chapter 9 for axle lock instructions.
the electronic control unit. Installing different
sized tires could result in a reduced braking Vehicles with electronic engines and ABS may have
force, leading to longer stopping distances. automatic traction control (ATC). On these vehicles,
the ATC system automatically limits wheel spin dur-
ABS includes signal-generating tone wheels and sen- ing reduced-traction situations.
sors located in the wheel hubs of each sensed
wheel. The sensors transmit vehicle wheel speed If the vehicle has ATC, there will be a momentary
information to an electronic control unit (located in a contact rocker switch on the dash labeled NORM/
panel behind the driver’s seat). The control unit’s SPIN and ATC.
main circuit interprets the speed sensor signals and When the ATC system is in the NORMAL mode, it
calculates wheel speed, wheel retardation, and a ve- will apply gentle braking to the spinning wheel, to
hicle reference speed. If the calculations indicate feed power to the wheel(s) with better traction. If
wheel lockup, the main circuit signals the appropriate both wheels are spinning, the system will signal the
solenoid control valve to reduce braking pressure. electronic engine to reduce power.
During emergency braking, the solenoid control valve
Pressing NORM/SPIN will temporarily allow more
alternately reduces, increases, or maintains air pres-
drive wheel spin to help burn through a thin layer of
6.4
ice, or to help throw off accumulated mud or snow. • When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-
SPIN mode is indicated by a flashing WHEEL SPIN tion, the trailer ABS lamp will illuminate mo-
light. Pressing NORM/SPIN again will cycle the sys- mentarily, then turn off.
tem back to normal operation.
• If the lamp comes on momentarily during ve-
The Meritor WABCO® ABS system combines one hicle operation, then shuts off, a fault was de-
front-axle control channel with one rear axle to form tected and corrected.
one control circuit. For example, the sensor and sole-
noid control valve on the left-front axle form a control • If the lamp comes on and stays on during ve-
circuit with the sensor and solenoid control valve on hicle operation, there is a fault with the trailer
the right rear axle. If, during vehicle operation, the ABS. Repair the trailer ABS system immedi-
safety circuit senses a failure in any part of the ABS ately to ensure full antilock braking capability.
system (a sensor, solenoid control valve, wiring con- The Trailer ABS lamp will not illuminate unless a
nection, short circuit, etc.), the tractor warning light compatible trailer is connected to the tractor.
(TRACTOR ABS) comes on and the control circuit
where the failure occurred is switched to normal IMPORTANT: If a compatible trailer is con-
braking action. The remaining control circuit will re- nected, and the lamp is not illuminating momen-
tain the ABS effect. Even if the ABS system is com- tarily when the ignition key is turned to the ON
pletely inoperative, normal braking ability is main- position, it is possible that the lamp is burnt out.
tained. An exception would be if a solenoid control
valve (or combination solenoid control valve) is dam- Meritor WABCO® Electronic Braking
aged and inoperative. As these components are an
integral part of the air brake system, normal braking
System (EBS)
may be impaired or inoperative. The Meritor WABCO® Electronic Braking System
IMPORTANT: If any of the ABS warning lights (EBS) is designed to continuously monitor and coor-
dinate all aspects of service braking.
do not work as described above, or come on
while driving, repair the ABS system immedi- The EBS pairs an electronic control system with a
ately to ensure full antilock braking capability. pneumatic application system. Key braking data such
as driver brake demand, wheel speed, and vehicle
During emergency or reduced-traction stops, fully load is gathered by a network of electronic sensing
depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a devices (including load sensors, and signal generat-
safe stop; do not pumpthe brake pedal. With the ing tone wheels and sensors located in the wheel
brake pedal fully depressed, the ABS system will hubs of each sensing axle).
control all wheels to provide steering control and a
reduced braking distance. An electronic control unit, the central module, over-
sees the translation of electronic signals into pneu-
Although the ABS system improves vehicle control matic actuation. During a braking application,
during emergency braking situations, the driver still electronic-pneumatic modulators control the brake
has the responsibility to change driving styles de- pressure of each wheel, as well as at the trailer cou-
pending on the existing traffic and road conditions. pling head. As a result, the same amount of vehicle
For example, the ABS system cannot prevent an ac- deceleration will occur for a given brake pedal travel,
cident if the driver is speeding or following too regardless of vehicle load. During emergency stops
closely. (i.e. wheel lockup), the EBS also activates the An-
tilock Braking System (ABS).
Trailer ABS Lamp Operation
The EBS includes a system check for all modulators,
Antilock braking systems on tractors are designed to sensors, brake system electric circuits and data lines
communicate with trailer ABS systems, if they are and is thereby able to detect malfunctions in the
compatible. Compatibility will result in the illumination braking system. When a fault is detected, the central
of the trailer ABS lamp during vehicle start-up and module will disable the affected part of the EBS.
fault detection. Under this safe status (i.e. fail-safe) mode, the nonaf-
The dash-mounted lamp will operate as follows when fected parts will continue to function. For example, in
a compatible trailer is properly connected to a tractor: the case of a sensor malfunction, the system works
6.5
without the sensor information but at a reduced per- Visit a repair facility as soon as possible when
formance level. brakes equipped with automatic slack adjusters are
determined to be out of adjustment.
If a serious malfunction causes a total switch-off of
one or more electronic braking circuits, a pure pneu-
matic backup system is available. WARNING
The following functions can be deactivated in the Manually adjusting an automatic slack adjuster to
event of a malfunction: bring the pushrod stroke within legal limits is
• ABS can be deactivated at one individual likely masking a mechanical problem. Adjustment
wheel, at one axle, or for the whole vehicle. is not repairing. In fact, continual adjustment of
automatic slack adjusters may result in prema-
• ATC control can be deactivated. If it is shut ture wear of the adjuster itself. Further, the im-
down, then both the brake control and the en- proper adjustment of some automatic slack ad-
gine control will be shut down. justers may cause internal damage to the
• If electrical control is lost, the affected axle is adjuster, thereby preventing it from properly
braked by means of the pneumatic redundancy functioning.
pressure. The driver must compensate by ex-
erting more force on the brake pedal to stop
the vehicle.
This system has built-in diagnostics to ensure that all
components are operating properly. Under normal
conditions, the system performs a three second self-
check when the ignition is turned on. The two warn-
ing lamps (EBS, ABS) and the information lamp
(ATC) should illuminate for three seconds and then
go out if all EBS components are working properly. If
all three lamps do not switch on or if all three lamps
do not switch off after three seconds, the system
should be checked.
NOTE: If there is no bulb check and no dis-
played fault, most likely the brake pedal is par-
tially depressed, either by the driver or by some-
thing holding the pedal down. This safety
feature alerts the driver that the brake pedal is
not fully in the released position.
Automatic Slack Adjusters

Automatic slack adjusters are required on all vehicles
equipped with air brakes manufactured after October
20, 1994. Automatic slack adjusters should never be
manually adjusted except during routine maintenance
of the foundation brakes (e.g., replacing shoes), dur-
ing slack adjuster installation or in an emergency
situation.
When the brake pushrod stroke exceeds the legal
brake adjustment limit on a vehicle, there is likely a
mechanical problem with the foundation brake com-
ponents or the adjuster is improperly installed.
6.6
7
Engines and Clutches
EPA07 Aftertreatment System (ATS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
DD15 Heavy-Duty Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
Engine Starting—CAT, Cummins, DDE S60, M-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
Starting After Extended Shutdown or Oil Change—CAT, Cummins, DDE S60, M-B . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
Engine Break-In—CAT, Cummins, DDE S60, M-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
Engine Operation—CAT, Cummins, DDE S60, M-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
Cold-Weather Operation—CAT, Cummins, DDE S60, M-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
High-Altitude Operation—CAT, Cummins, DDE S60, M-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18
Engine Shutdown—CAT, Cummins, DDE S60, M-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18
Engine Braking System—CAT, Cummins, DDE S60, M-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20
Exhaust Braking System—CAT, Cummins, DDE S60, M-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22
Clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
EPA07 Aftertreatment System eration occurs as the vehicle is driven normally

under load; the driver is not even aware that it is
(ATS) happening. The harder an EPA07 engine works, the
better it disposes of soot, as the exhaust heat alone
On-road diesel engines built after December 31, is enough to burn the soot to ash. Over the course of
2006 are required to meet EPA07 guidelines for re- a workday, however, passive regeneration cannot
duced exhaust emissions of particulate matter and always keep the ATD filter clean, so the filter must
nitrogen oxides (NOx). NOx is limited to just over 1 undergo active regeneration. In active regeneration,
gram per brake horsepower hour (g/bhp-hr), and par- extra fuel is injected into the exhaust stream to su-
ticulate matter cannot exceed 0.01 g/bhp-hr. perheat the soot trapped in the DPF and turn it to
EPA07-compliant engines require ultralow-sulfur die- ash. Active regeneration happens only when the ve-
sel (ULSD) fuel, and they should never be run on hicle is moving above a certain speed, determined by
fuel with sulfur content higher than 15 ppm. In addi- the engine manufacturer. Consult manufacturers’
tion, they require low-ash engine oil. The following documentation for details.
guidelines must be followed, or the warranty may be Both active and passive regeneration happen auto-
compromised. matically, without driver input.
• Use ultralow-sulfur diesel (ULSD) with 15 ppm
NOTE: Caterpillar engines do not use a DOC;
sulfur content or less, based on ASTM D2622
test procedure.
CAT engines burn diesel fuel at the regeneration
head to superheat the exhaust and burn the
• Do not use fuel blended with used engine lube trapped soot to ash. Engine software monitors
oil. and controls this process.
• Engine lube oil must have a sulfated ash level Only when operating conditions do not allow for ATD
less than 1.0 wt %, meeting the API CJ-4 index filter cleaning by at-speed active or passive regen-
specifications. eration, the vehicle may require a driver-activated
IMPORTANT: Using non-specification fuels or parked regeneration. The vehicle must be standing
oils can lead to shortened diesel particulate filter still, and the driver must initiate a parked regen.
Completing a parked regen takes 20 minutes to an
(DPF) cleaning or exchange intervals. For ex- hour, depending on ambient conditions.
ample, using CI-4+ oil with 1.3% sulfated ash
(30% more ash content) may result in the need
for DPF cleaning or exchange 20 to 30% sooner DANGER
than would normally be required. During parked regeneration, exhaust tempera-
The "exhaust system" in EPA07-compliant vehicles is tures are very high, and could cause a fire, heat
called the aftertreatment system (ATS). The ATS var- damage to objects or materials, or personal in-
ies according to engine manufacturer and vehicle jury to persons near the exhaust outlet.
configuration, but instead of a muffler, an aftertreat- Before initiating a parked regeneration, make cer-
ment system has a device that outwardly resembles tain the exhaust outlets are directed away from
a muffler, called the aftertreatment device (ATD). structures, trees, vegetation, flammable materi-
IMPORTANT: See your engine operation manual als, and anything else that may be damaged or
for complete details and operation of the after- injured by prolonged exposure to high heat.
treatment system. The warning lamps in the driver message center alert
Inside the ATD on Mercedes-Benz, Detroit Diesel, the driver of a regen in progress, high exhaust tem-
and Cummins engines, the exhaust first passes over peratures, the need to perform a parked regen either
the diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC), then it passes soon or immediately, and of an engine fault that af-
through the diesel particulate filter (DPF), which traps fects the emissions.
soot particles. If exhaust temperature is high enough, A slow (10-second) flashing of the high exhaust sys-
the trapped soot is reduced to ash, in a process tem temperature (HEST) lamp indicates that a
called passive regeneration (regen). Passive regen- parked regeneration is in progress, and the engine’s
7.1
high idle speed is being controlled by the engine scheduled for the earliest convenient time. See
software, not the driver. Fig. 7.2.
A steadily illuminated high temperature (HEST) lamp A DPF lamp blinking at the same time as a steadily
alerts the operator of high exhaust temperature dur- illuminated yellow Check Engine lamp, indicates that
ing the regeneration process, if vehicle speed is a parked regen must be performed immediately, or
below 5 mph (8 km/h). The HEST lamp does not sig- an engine derate will occur. If the red Stop Engine
nify the need for any kind of vehicle or engine ser- lamp illuminates with the blinking DPF lamp and the
vice; it only alerts the vehicle operator of high ex- Check Engine lamp, a parked regen must occur or
haust temperatures. Make sure the engine exhaust an engine shutdown will occur. Park the vehicle and
pipe outlet is not directed at any person, or at any perform a parked regen. See Fig. 7.3.
surface or material that will melt, burn, or explode.
See Fig. 7.1.
09/25/2006 f610815a
09/25/2006 f610816a Fig. 7.2, Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Status Lamp
Fig. 7.1, High Exhaust System Temperature (HEST)

Lamp
CHECK STOP
WARNING
Active regeneration can occur automatically any-
time the vehicle is moving. The exhaust gas tem- 1 2 3
03/20/2008 f611000
perature could reach 1500°F (800°C), which is hot
enough to cause a fire, heat damage to objects 1. Stop Engine Override Switch
or materials, or personal injury to persons near 2. Amber Check Engine Warning Lamp
3. Red Stop Engine Lamp
the exhaust outlet. See Regen-Inhibit Switch later
in this chapter for instructions on preventing au- Fig. 7.3, Engine Lamps
tomatic regen if necessary.
A steadily illuminated yellow malfunction indicator
The exhaust temperature can remain high even lamp (MIL) indicates an engine fault that affects the
after the vehicle has stopped. When stopping the emissions. See Fig. 7.4.
vehicle shortly after an automatic regen, ensure
the exhaust outlets are directed away from struc- When diesel particulate filter servicing is needed, it
tures, trees, vegetation, flammable materials, and must be performed by an authorized technician, and
anything else that may be damaged or injured by a record must be maintained for warranty purposes.
exposure to high heat. The record must include:
A steadily illuminated yellow diesel particulate filter • date of cleaning or replacement;
(DPF) lamp indicates that a regen may be required
• vehicle mileage;
soon. Bring the vehicle to highway speeds to allow
for an active regen, or a parked regen should be • particulate filter part number and serial number.
7.2
DD15 Heavy-Duty Engine

See Chapter 2 of this manual for information on the
DDEC VI operator controls. See the Detroit Diesel
DD15 Engine Operator’s Guide for complete details
of engine operation.
Engine Protection
An engine protection system monitors all engine sen-
sors and electronic components, and recognizes sys-
09/25/2006 f610814a tem malfunctions. If a critical fault is detected, an
amber Check Engine warning lamp and a red Stop
Fig. 7.4, Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Engine lamp illuminate. See Fig. 7.3.
The request/inhibit regen switch (Fig. 7.5), located The standard parameters that are monitored for en-
on the dash, can have three selectable positions: gine protection are: low coolant level, high coolant
temperature, low oil pressure, and high oil tempera-
• request regeneration; ture.
• default (either automatic regeneration or inhibit
state);
Amber Check Engine Warning Lamp
• inhibit regeneration. When the amber Check Engine warning lamp comes
on for any reason, the vehicle can still be operated,
NOTE: The regen switch can start a parked and the driver can proceed to the required destina-
regen only when at least one of two conditions tion. See Fig. 7.3. This condition should be reported
exists: either the DPF light is lit, or the engine to an authorized service center as soon as possible.
software calls for it. If neither of those conditions
exist, the regen switch cannot cause a regen- Red Stop Engine Lamp
eration to happen. When the red Stop Engine lamp comes on, the com-
puter has detected a major malfunction in the engine
The function of the switch will vary by the engine that requires immediate attention. See Fig. 7.3. It is
make and model in the vehicle. See the engine op- the operator’s responsibility to shut down the
eration manual for switch operation details. engine to avoid serious damage. This system fea-
tures a 30-second, stepped-down power-shutdown
sequence, or an immediate emergency-running
mode, in the event that a major engine malfunction
occurs. The conditions that will cause the red Stop
Engine lamp to come on are:
• high coolant temperature
• loss of coolant
• high oil temperature
• low oil pressure
10/02/2006 f610848 • auxiliary shutdown
Fig. 7.5, Request/Inhibit Regen Switch Stop Engine Override Switch

In the event that the vehicle is operating in a critical
location when a shutdown is initiated, a Stop Engine
Override (SEO) switch can be used to override the
7.3
shutdown sequence. See Fig. 7.3. This override re- air intake arrangement, you may also hear a “chuff-
sets the shutdown timer, restoring power to the level ing” sound as the engine starts to pull hard at lower
when the red stop engine lamp was illuminated. The rpm. This is normal, and caused by the velocity
switch must be recycled after five seconds to obtain changes of the air flow within the air intake plumbing.
a subsequent override. Electronic engines can actually deliver more fuel at
lower engine speeds than at rated speed.
CAUTION The DD15 engine has been designed for a very quiet
operation, but the air flow may be noticeable to the
Using the override button so the engine operates tuned attentive ear. The turbocharger operates at
for an extended period may result in engine dam- higher boost pressure, forcing exhaust to flow
age. The operator has the responsibility to take through the exhaust gas recirculation plumbing. In
action to avoid engine damage. some situations the driver may believe they have ex-
perienced a charge air cooler system leak. Even
DDEC VI Driving Tips while connecting trailer lights and air hoses, the
Accelerating the Vehicle driver may hear a different tone (exhaust and under
hood with the engine idling). If equipped with a turbo
The accelerator pedal was designed to communicate boost gauge, the driver may occasionally note the
“percentage” of accelerator pedal travel to the engine intake manifold pressure exceeds 35 psi (241 kPa).
MCM. A throttle characteristic you may need time to
get used to, is the DDEC limiting speed governor. Idling
This allows the driver to command total engine re-
The common belief that idling a diesel engine causes
sponse between idle and rated speed, such as accel-
no engine damage is wrong. Idling produces sulfuric
erating at half throttle—an advantage when driving
acid, that is absorbed by the lubricating oil, and eats
under slippery conditions. To obtain 100 percent fuel-
into bearings, rings, valve stems, and engine sur-
ing at any speed, the accelerator pedal must be de-
faces. If you must idle the engine for cab heat or
pressed to the fully pressed position.
cooling, the high idle function of the cruise control
Shifting switches should be used. An idle speed of 900 rpm
should be enough to provide cab heat in above
Depending on your transmission model, the gear split freezing ambient temperatures.
may vary from 400 to 500 rpm. The electronic gover-
nor provides almost no overrun capability; if the Cold-Weather Operation
transmission is downshifted too early, you will experi-
Precautions must be taken during cold weather to
ence a temporary loss of pulling power until the en-
protect your engine. Special cold-weather handling is
gine speed falls below rated speed. In general, when
required for fuel, engine oil, coolant, and batteries.
using a 9-speed transmission, you should always
The engine does not require starting aids down to
downshift between 1000 and 1100 rpm. This is true
50°F (10°C). A grid heater is included for tempera-
even on steep grades with heavy loads. When using
tures between 50°F (10°C) and –4°F (–20°C). Tem-
an 18-, 15-, or 13-speed transmission, you will need
peratures below –4°F (–20°C), will require a grid
to downshift at an rpm that allows “less than rated”
heater, block heater, and oil pan heater.
rpm, before throttle application in the next gear
down. You may want to limit engine speed to 1900
rpm in all gears. CAUTION
The DD15 engine provides horsepower through 2100 NEVER use ether as a starting aid on a DD HD
rpm, but fuel economy is not as efficient above 1800 engine. Doing so will result in injector damage.
rpm. If you decide to drive at lower rpm for improved
fuel economy, don’t let different engine noises throw A winterfront may be used to improve cab heating. At
you off guard. The DD15 engine sounds quiet at least 25 percent of the grill opening should remain
1400 rpm, almost as if it had quit pulling. If you had open in sectioned stripes that run perpendicular to
a boost gauge to look at while driving, you would no- the charge air cooler tube flow direction. This as-
tice the turbocharger maintaining steady intake mani- sures even cooling across each tube, and reduces
fold pressure, even as rpm falls. Depending on the
7.4
header-to-tube stress and possible failure. Winter- erly, by lifting your foot briefly off the accelera-
fronts should only be used when the ambient tem- tor pedal. You should feel the system activate.
perature remains below 10°F (–12°C).
• Ensure the progressive braking switch is in the
Driving on Flat, Dry Pavement appropriate power position. Check your pro-
gressive braking switch often for proper posi-
Use the following guidelines when driving on flat, dry tion, since road conditions can change quickly.
pavement. Never skip a step when operating the progres-
sive braking switch. Always go from OFF to
• If driving on flat, dry, open stretches, with a
LOW and then to a higher position when on
light load, place the progressive braking switch slippery roads.
in the LOW position.
• Do not exceed the safe control speed of your
• If you find you are still using the service
vehicle. Example: You could descend a 6 per-
brakes, move the switch to a higher position cent grade, under control at 10 mph (16 km/h)
until you do not need to use the service brakes without an engine brake, but at 25 mph (40
to slow the vehicle. km/h) it requires an engine brake. You could
• If you are carrying a heavier load and road not descend that same hill at 50 mph (80
traction is good, move the progressive braking km/h) and still expect to remain under control.
switch to the HIGH position. Know how much slowing power your engine
brake can provide before descending hills, and
• Check your progressive braking switch often do not exceed a safe control speed.
for proper position, since road conditions can
change quickly. Never skip a step when oper- Driving on Wet or Slippery Pavement
ating the progressive braking switch. Always go
from OFF to LOW, and then to a higher posi-
tion. WARNING
Descending a Long, Steep Grade To avoid injury from loss of vehicle control, do
not activate the engine brake system under the
An explanation of “control speed” may be helpful in following conditions:
understanding how to use the engine brake system
while descending a grade. Control speed is the con- • on wet or slippery pavement
stant speed at which the forces pushing the vehicle • when driving without a trailer (bobtailing) or
forward on a grade, are equal to the forces holding it pulling an empty trailer
back, without using the vehicle service brakes. In
other words, this is the speed the vehicle will main- • if the tractor drive wheels begin to lock, or
tain without using the service brakes or throttle. there is fishtail motion after the engine
brake is activated
CAUTION NOTE: On single trailers or combinations, a light
air application of the trailer brakes may be desir-
Do not over apply the vehicle service brakes able to help keep the trailer stretched out. Fol-
when descending a long, steep grade. Excessive low the manufacturer’s recommended operating
use of the vehicle brakes will cause them to heat procedure when using the trailer brakes.
up, reducing their stopping ability. This condi-
tion, referred to as “brake fade”, may result in On wet or slippery pavement, start with the master
loss of braking, which could lead to loss of con- switch in the OFF position and use the gear you
trol of the vehicle, resulting in personal injury or would normally use under these conditions. If the
property damage. vehicle is maintaining traction, place the selective
braking switch in the LOW position and turn ON the
Use the following guidelines when descending a engine brake system. If the drive wheels are main-
long, steep grade. taining traction and you desire greater slowing power,
• Before beginning the descent, determine if move the braking switch to the next higher position.
your engine brake system is operating prop- However, if the tractor drive-wheels begin to lock, or
7.5
there is a fishtail motion, turn the engine brake sys- tric priming pump to the priming port on the fuel
tem OFF immediately and do not activate it until road filter module. See the engine operation manual
conditions improve. for complete instructions.
Check your progressive engine braking switch often
for proper position, since road conditions can change Prestart
quickly. Never skip a step when operating the pro- NOTE: These prestart steps apply to all en-
gressive braking system. Always go from OFF to gines.
LOW and then to a higher position. See Chapter 2
for the proper operation of the engine brake. 1. Perform the engine pretrip inspection and daily
maintenance checks in Chapter 11.
Engine Starting—CAT, 2. Apply the parking brake.
Cummins, DDE S60, M-B NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a neutral start
Normal Starting switch, the transmission must be in neutral be-
fore the engine can be started. For air start sys-
For cold-weather starting, refer to "Cold-Weather tems, check the air supply before starting the
Starting" later in this chapter. engine. There must be 100 psi (689 kPa) of air
Whenever you start an engine, watch for any signs pressure available.
of engine problems. If the engine vibrates, misfires, 3. For manual transmissions, place the transmis-
or makes unusual noises, turn the engine off as soon sion in neutral and disengage the clutch.
as possible and determine the cause of the problem.
Frequently, engine damage may be avoided by a For automatic transmissions, make sure the
quick response to early indications of problems. transmission shift control is in neutral or park.
Starting Precautions
CAUTION
When starting a vehicle equipped with a manual CAUTION
transmission and clutch lockout switch, the
clutch pedal must be fully depressed during the Do not crank the engine for more than 30 sec-
entire start sequence. Failure to do so can cause onds at a time. Wait two minutes after each try to
the pinion to release and re-engage, which could allow the starter to cool. Failure to do so could
cause ring gear and starter pinion damage. cause starter damage.
If a vehicle does not start on the first attempt, NOTE: Some starters are equipped with op-
make sure that the engine has completely tional overcrank protection. If overcranking oc-
stopped rotating before reapplying the starter curs, a thermostat breaks the electrical circuit to
switch. Failure to do so can cause the pinion to the starter motor until the motor has cooled.
release and re-engage, which could cause ring
gear and starter pinion damage.
CAUTION
Moving a vehicle with the starter and/or using the
starter to bump the engine for maintenance pro- Protect the turbocharger during the start-up by
cedures is strictly prohibited. Use of these meth- not opening the throttle or accelerating the en-
ods to bump the engine over or move the vehicle gine above 1000 rpm until minimum engine idle
can cause the pinion to release and re-engage, oil pressure registers on the gauge. Failure to do
which could cause ring gear and starter pinion so could damage the turbocharger.
damage.
IMPORTANT: The starter can not be used for WARNING
priming the fuel system. Priming is done by op-
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
erating the manual hand priming pump located air inlet opening in the air intake in an attempt to
on the fuel filter module, or connecting an elec-
7.6
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire NOTE: Some starters are equipped with op-
causing serious personal injury or property dam- tional overcrank protection. If overcranking
age. occurs, a thermostat breaks the electrical
circuit to the starter motor until the motor
WARNING has cooled.
Starting fluid is highly flammable and explosive. 2.2 Wait two minutes to allow the starter
It can cause serious injury or death if improperly motor to cool. Turn the ignition switch
handled. Do not smoke where starting fluid is in back to the on position and try again to
use. Keep sparks, flames, and arc welding equip- start the engine.
ment away from starting fluid. 2.3 As soon as the engine starts, release the
ignition switch, allowing the engine to run
Caterpillar at a slow idle.
NOTE: Before doing these steps, do the steps
in "Prestart". CAUTION
1. Turn the ignition switch to the on position If the oil pressure is less than 5 psi (35 kPa), shut
(Fig. 7.6). All the electronic gauges on the ICU down the engine immediately to prevent serious
(instrumentation control unit) complete a full damage. If the vehicle is equipped with an auto-
sweep of their dials, the warning and indicator matic shutdown system, the engine will shut
lights light up, and the buzzer sounds for three down after 30 seconds.
seconds.
3. Caterpillar C–10/C–12/C–15/C–16 engines may
be operated at low load and speed once the en-
gine oil pressure has reached 10 to 20 psi (69 to
138 kPa). Caterpillar 3406E engines may be op-
erated at low load and speed once the engine oil
pressure has reached 18 psi (124 kPa).
4. When the engine has reached the normal operat-
ing temperature of 189°F (87°C), the engine may
be operated at full load.
OFF
Cummins
ON
in "Prestart".
ACC START
1. Turn the ignition switch to the on position
03/22/2001 f602079 (Fig. 7.6). All the electronic gauges on the ICU
(instrumentation control unit) complete a full
Fig. 7.6, Ignition Switch Positions sweep of their dials, the warning and indicator
lights light up, and the buzzer sounds for three
NOTE: The engine electronics supply the cor- seconds.
rect amount of fuel for starting the engine. Pedal 2. Turn the ignition switch to the start position. After
pressure is unnecessary. the engine starts, release the key.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the start position. Do NOTE: Some starters are equipped with op-
not press down on the throttle pedal. Release
the switch the moment the engine starts.
tional overcrank protection. If overcranking oc-
curs, a thermostat breaks the electrical circuit to
2.1 If the engine does not start after 30 sec- the starter motor until the motor has cooled.
onds of cranking, turn the ignition switch
off.
7.7
3. Bring the engine up to operating speed gradually

as it warms up and develops stable oil pressure. WARNING
NOTE: When the engine is started, it takes a Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
short time to build up a lubricating oil film be- air inlet opening in the air intake in an attempt to
tween the shafts and bearings, and between the start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
pistons and liners. The oil pressure gauge indi- causing serious personal injury or property dam-
cates any drop in lubricating oil pressure within age.
15 seconds of engine start-up. 3. Check the oil pressure gauge immediately after
4. If minimum engine oil pressure at idle of 10 psi starting the engine.
(69 kPa) does not register within 15 seconds, 4. If no pressure registers within 10 to 15 seconds
shut down the engine. or the ENGINE PROTECT indicator comes on,
shut down the engine and check the lubricating
CAUTION oil system.
Protect the turbocharger during the start-up by CAUTION

not opening the throttle or accelerating the en-
gine above 1000 rpm until minimum engine idle Protect the turbocharger during the start-up by
oil pressure registers on the gauge. Failure to do not opening the throttle or accelerating the en-
so could damage the turbocharger. gine above 1000 rpm until minimum engine idle
5. Idle the engine for three to five minutes at 1000 oil pressure of 12 psi (83 kPa) registers on the
rpm before operating the engine under load. gauge.
5. Idle the engine for about five minutes at 1000
DDE S60 rpm before operating the engine under load.
in "Prestart".
Mercedes-Benz
1. Turn the ignition switch to the on position
(Fig. 7.6). All the electronic gauges on the ICU in "Prestart".
(instrumentation control unit) complete a full
sweep of their dials, the warning and indicator CAUTION
lights light up, and the buzzer sounds for three
seconds. Never attempt to start any Mercedes-Benz elec-
tronic engine using ether or any other starting
2. When all the indicators go out, turn the ignition fluid. Serious engine damage could result.
switch to the start position. Without touching the
throttle pedal, start the engine. If the engine 1. Turn the ignition switch to the on position
won’t start within 15 seconds, release the ignition (Fig. 7.6). All the electronic gauges on the ICU
switch and allow the starter motor to cool. (instrumentation control unit) complete a full
sweep of their dials, the warning and indicator
IMPORTANT: If the engine won’t start, check the lights light up, and the buzzer sounds for three
main engine power fuses. The fuses are located seconds.
along the main engine electrical harness on the
left frame rail, near the batteries. If the fuses are IMPORTANT: On vehicles equipped with an in-
blown, replace the fuses. Be sure to find the take air preheater, the INTAKE HEATER indica-
cause of the blown fuses as soon as possible. tor stays on for a minimum of two seconds, re-
gardless of coolant temperature. Wait until the
NOTE: Some starters are equipped with op- INTAKE HEATER indicator goes out before at-
tional overcrank protection. If overcranking oc- tempting to start the engine.
curs, a thermostat breaks the electrical circuit to
the starter motor until the motor has cooled.
7.8
2. Turn the ignition switch to the start position. If the engine doesn’t start after 30 seconds of crank-
Without touching the throttle pedal, start the en- ing, turn the key to the off position and wait two min-
gine. utes; then repeat the starting procedure.
NOTE: Some starters are equipped with op- If the coolant temperature is less than 64°F (18°C),
tional overcrank protection. If overcranking oc- the engine will start up in the cold-start strategy. This
curs, a thermostat breaks the electrical circuit to reduces the amount of fuel available to the injectors,
the starter motor until the motor has cooled. advances the timing, and controls white smoke emis-
sions. The engine remains in the cold-start strategy
3. Idle the engine for one to three minutes at 600 to until the coolant temperature rises above 64°F
850 rpm before operating the engine under load. (18°C), or until it has been running for 12 minutes.
4. Check the oil pressure gauge for any drop in lu- IMPORTANT: Do not move the vehicle when it
bricating oil pressure or mechanical malfunction is in the cold-start strategy. Power will be notice-
in the lubricating oil system. Minimum oil pres- ably reduced.
sure at idle is 7 psi (50 kPa).
After a cold engine start of less than 64°F (18°C),
Caterpillar electronic engines automatically idle at
CAUTION 800 rpm (for C–10 and C–12 engines), or 600 rpm
Do not rev the engine if the oil pressure gauge (for 3406E, C–15, and C–16 engines). These elec-
indicates no oil pressure. Shut down the engine tronic engine systems will adjust the idle speed to
if no oil pressure appears within approximately 700 to 750 rpm when the engine is warm enough to
ten seconds. Check to determine the cause of the drive the vehicle.
problem. Operating the engine with no oil pres-
sure will damage the engine.
Cummins
The cold-start system approved for use on Cummins
Cold-Weather Starting engines has been based upon starting aid capabili-
ties to –25°F (–32°C). For more information, see the
Modern electronic engines do not normally require Cummins Operation and Maintenance Manual.
special starting aids. At low temperatures, oil pan
heaters or water jacket heaters are sometimes used Turn the ignition switch to the on position (Fig. 7.6).
to assist in starting.
If the engine doesn’t start after 30 seconds of crank-
ing, turn the key to the off position and wait two min-
WARNING utes; then repeat the starting procedure.
If using a cold-weather-start system, be sure to Run the engine slightly above idle until oil pressure
follow the manufacturer’s instructions regarding shows on the gauge. If oil pressure doesn’t show on
its use, handling, and storage. Many starting flu- the gauge within 30 seconds of starting, turn the key
ids are in capsules or pressure cans, and im- to the off position and wait one minute; then repeat
proper usage can be dangerous. the starting procedure.
Do not attempt to use any type of vapor- DDE S60
compound start system near heat or open flame.
Engine damage due to an explosion or fire in the The engine may require the use of a cold-weather
intake manifold could result. starting aid if the outside temperature falls below
40°F (4°C).
Do not breathe the ether fumes; doing so could
result in personal injury. Turn the ignition switch to the on position and start
the engine.
Caterpillar If the engine doesn’t start after 30 seconds of crank-
Turn the ignition switch to the on position (Fig. 7.6). ing, turn the key to the off position and wait two min-
utes; then repeat the starting procedure.
7.9
Run the engine slightly above idle until oil pressure 3. If the engine is equipped with a fuel/water sepa-
shows on the gauge. If oil pressure doesn’t show on rator, drain off any accumulated water.
the gauge within 30 seconds of starting, turn the key
4. Check the drive belts to make sure they are in
to the off position and wait one minute; then repeat
good condition and properly adjusted. Replace
the starting procedure.
any drive belts that are cracked, worn, or glazed.
Mercedes-Benz 5. Check the turbocharger for signs of oil or ex-
haust leaks. Correct any problems before starting
CAUTION the engine.
6. Check the engine mounting bolts for tightness.
Never attempt to start any Mercedes-Benz elec- Retighten them if necessary.
tronic engine using ether or any other starting
fluid. Serious engine damage could result. 7. Make sure the battery cable connections are
clean and tight. Check that the batteries are
The intake air preheater is activated by turning the charged.
ignition switch to the on position (Fig. 7.6). If the en-
gine is at normal temperature, the INTAKE HEATER 8. Start the engine. See "Engine Starting".
indicator goes out after two seconds.
If the temperature is low enough to require the Engine Break-In—CAT,
heater, the INTAKE HEATER indicator stays on while Cummins, DDE S60, M-B
the intake air preheater warms up. After the indicator
goes out, start the engine. If the engine doesn’t start Caterpillar
after about 30 seconds of cranking, turn the key to
the off position and wait two minutes; then repeat the Every Caterpillar engine must pass a full-load opera-
starting procedure. tion test on a dynamometer before shipment, elimi-
nating the need for a break-in period. Only an initial
NOTE: If the engine doesn’t start on the second operational check is necessary.
try, wait at least five minutes before using the
intake air preheater again. Cummins
Cummins engines are run on a dynamometer before
Starting After Extended being shipped from the factory. They do not require a
Shutdown or Oil Change—CAT, break-in period.
Cummins, DDE S60, M-B DDE S60

An engine in storage for an extended period of time Detroit Diesel engines can be put to work upon deliv-
(over winter, for example) may accumulate water in ery without having to follow a formal break-in sched-
the oil pan. Oil diluted by water cannot provide ad- ule. The engine has been "run-in" on a factory dyna-
equate bearing protection at start-up. For this reason, mometer during performance and quality assurance
change the engine oil and filters after extended tests prior to shipment.
storage.
Do the following steps after an oil change or after the Mercedes-Benz
engine has been shut down for more than three Every Mercedes-Benz engine is tested on a dyna-
days: mometer before shipment. Therefore, no break-in
1. Make sure the transmission is filled with the cor- period is necessary for the MBE4000 engine. Before
rect type of fluid, as recommended by the trans- running the engine for the first time, follow the in-
mission manufacturer. structions in Chapter 2 of the MBE4000 Engine Op-
erator’s Manual.
2. Make sure the fuel tank is full. If air has entered
the fuel system, prime the fuel system, using the
engine manufacturer’s instructions.
7.10
Engine Operation—CAT, tem in order to bring the vehicle to a safe stop if the
engine malfunctions. If the driver doesn’t understand
Cummins, DDE S60, M-B how the warning system works, an engine shutdown
could cause a safety hazard. See Chapter 2 for in-
Operating vehicles with diesel engines in areas formation on the control panel for these engines.
where there are concentrated flammable vapors
(such as diesel, gasoline, or propane fumes) can cre- The electronic control system can monitor engine oil
ate a hazardous situation. These vapors can be pressure, coolant temperature, intake manifold air
drawn into the engine through the air intake, and temperature, and coolant level. There are four cus-
cause engine overspeed. Be especially cautious of tomer programmable levels for Caterpillar engine
low-lying or closed-in areas, and always check for monitoring: off, warning (factory default), derate, and
signs that flammable vapors may be present. shutdown.
In the engine monitoring off mode, the ECM (engine
DANGER control module) will ignore the oil pressure sensor
and coolant level sensor (if installed). Engine moni-
Do not operate the engine in an area where flam- toring warning mode uses oil pressure, coolant tem-
mable vapors such as gasoline or diesel fumes perature, intake manifold temperature, and the cool-
are present. Shut down the engine when in an ant level sensor (if installed and enabled). The
area where flammable liquids or gases are being CHECK ENGINE indicator will flash and the warning
handled. Failure to observe these precautions signal will come on when the diagnostic code is ac-
could result in serious injury or death. tive. Engine monitoring derate and shutdown modes
allow the ECM to alter engine performance or stop
All diesel engines have been built to comply with the the engine to help the engine avoid damage and re-
requirements of the Federal (U.S.) Clean Air Act. turn to normal conditions.
Once the engine is placed in service, the responsibil-
ity for meeting both state and local regulations is with 1. Operate the engine at low load. After normal oil
the owner/operator. Good operating practices, regular pressure is reached and the temperature gauge
maintenance, and proper adjustments are factors begins to move, the engine may be operated at
which will help to stay within the regulations. full load.
Adequate maintenance of the engine, which is the 2. Keep engine speed to a minimum. An acceptable
responsibility of the owner/operator, is essential to range is 1200 to 1600 rpm.
keep the emission levels low.
3. Select a gear that allows a smooth, easy start
The driver should be familiar with the vehicle warning without increasing engine speed above low idle
system in order to bring the vehicle to a safe stop if or slipping the clutch. Engage the clutch
the engine malfunctions. If the driver doesn’t under- smoothly. Jerky starts waste fuel and put stress
stand how the warning system works, an engine on the drivetrain.
shutdown could occur, causing a safety hazard. See It is not necessary to accelerate Caterpillar elec-
Chapter 2 for information on the control panels for tronic engines to governed speed in the lower
the various engines. gears to get the vehicle moving, except in a high
power demand situation such as starting on a
Caterpillar grade.
Proper operation and maintenance are key factors in 4. Continue to upshift until cruising speed is
obtaining the maximum life and economy of a vehicle reached. Use only the rpm needed to make an
engine. Follow the directions in this manual and the upshift into the next gear. The engine speed
Caterpillar Operation and Maintenance Manual for needed to make an upshift increases as the ve-
trouble-free, economical engine operation. hicle speed increases or if upshifts are made on
Caterpillar C–10, C–12, C–15, C–16, and 3406E uphill grades. If the vehicle can be operated in a
electronic engines can be equipped with a variety of higher gear after reaching the desired speed,
options designed to warn the driver of engine mal- select the highest gear available that will pull the
functions. The driver of a vehicle equipped with these load. Experience with your vehicle will show you
engines should know the extent of the warning sys-
7.11
what rpm is needed to make upshifts under vari- During downhill operation, the crankshaft is turned by
ous conditions. This progressive shifting tech- the rear wheels (through the drivetrain). To reduce
nique will lower fuel costs because the engine the speed of the vehicle, an application of braking
will be operating at the lowest rpm needed to pull force can be made to the crankshaft. The Brake-
the load. Saver does this by converting rotation energy into
heat, which is removed by the engine cooling sys-
Caterpillar electronic engines can be pro-
tem. The BrakeSaver is controlled by the driver, as
grammed to limit engine rpm while the vehicle is
necessary, by operating a lever on the instrument
operated in the lower and higher gears. This fea-
panel. Braking force increases as the lever is moved
ture assists the driver in following progressive
toward the ON position. An air pressure gauge pro-
shifting techniques.
vides a relative indication of the braking force. An oil
5. On uphill grades, begin downshifting when the temperature gauge indicates the heat in the Brake-
engine speed falls to 1200 rpm for C–10, C–12, Saver during its operation. If the temperature gauge
C–15, C–16, and 3406E electronic engines. Fuel indicates HOT, the BrakeSaver control lever must be
economy will be best if you let the engine lug moved to the OFF position. The oil temperature will
back to around this speed before you downshift. decrease rapidly with the BrakeSaver off. When the
Downshift until a gear is reached in which the temperature reaches normal, the BrakeSaver can be
engine will pull the load. Let the engine lug down used.
if you can make it to the top of a hill without
downshifting. CAUTION
IMPORTANT: Do not let C–10, C–12, C–15,
C–16, and 3406E electronic engines exceed Do not engage the BrakeSaver and control the
wheel speed with the accelerator. The design of
2300 rpm (2100 rpm if equipped with an ex-
the cooling system is for the control of the tem-
haust brake). perature of the oil at full engine power or full
6. On a downhill grade, do not coast or put the BrakeSaver capacity, but not both at the same
transmission in neutral. Select the correct gear time.
that does not allow the engine to exceed its
maximum speed. Use the brakes to limit the ve- Cummins
hicle speed.
Follow the directions in this manual and the Cum-
A simple rule to follow is to select the same gear mins Operation and Maintenance Manual for trouble-
(or one gear lower) than would be needed to go free, economical vehicle engine operation.
up the grade.
1. Cummins diesel engines produce high horse-
7. As with any engine, prolonged idling of Caterpil- power and peak torque characteristics at lower
lar engines is not recommended. An idling en- rpm. Because of this, it is not necessary to keep
gine wastes fuel and if left unattended, is also the engine "wound up" to deliver the required
unsafe. horsepower at the wheels. These characteristics
Caterpillar engines can be programmed to shut may also result in less shifting and make shifting
off automatically after a specified idling time. The at lower rpm (toward peak torque) more practi-
vehicle transmission must be in neutral and the cal.
parking brake must be set for the automatic shut- 2. Depending on the vehicle gearing, the posted
off option to work. speed limit can sometimes allow operation in ei-
ther of the top two gears; however, for improved
BrakeSaver, Optional operating efficiency (fuel economy and engine
The BrakeSaver (optional on 3406E engines) permits life), operate in the top gear at reduced rpm
the operator to control the speed reduction of the rather than in the next lower gear at the maxi-
vehicle on grades, curves, or anytime speed reduc- mum rpm.
tion is necessary but long applications of the service 3. Drive at partial throttle whenever road conditions
brakes are not desired. and speed requirements permit. This driving
7.12
technique permits operating within the most eco- safety hazard. See Chapter 2 for information on the
nomical power range of the engine. DDEC control panel.
4. When approaching a hill, open the throttle All engines have an operating range in which the en-
smoothly to start the upgrade at full power, then gine performs most efficiently. The operating range
shift down as desired to maintain the maximum extends from maximum torque rpm at the low end to
vehicle speed. The high torque of Cummins en- engine rated speed at the high end. Detroit Diesel
gines may permit topping some grades without engines deliver best fuel economy when operated in
shifting. the low- and mid-speed segments of the efficiency
range and produce maximum horsepower at rated
5. Cummins engines are designed to operate over speed, which is also the recommended maximum
a wide speed range. More frequent shifting than speed of the engine.
necessary does not allow proper utilization of this
flexibility. The driver who stays in top gear and 1. It is seldom necessary to accelerate the engine
uses the wider speed range will achieve the best to governed speed in the lower gears to get the
fuel economy. vehicle moving, except in a high power demand
situation such as starting on a grade.
6. The Cummins diesel engine is effective as a
brake on downhill grades, but care must be used To conserve fuel, start off in low gear and de-
not to overspeed the engine going downhill. The velop only the engine speed needed to get roll-
governor has no control over engine speed when ing. Then, increase engine speed gradually as
it is being pushed by the loaded vehicle. upward gear shifting progresses.
Never turn off the ignition switch while going As described by Detroit Diesel, this progressive
downhill. With the engine still in gear, fuel pres- shifting technique will get the vehicle up to the
sure will build up against the shutdown valve, desired cruising speed while minimizing noise
and may prevent it from opening when the igni- emission and maximizing fuel economy. A pro-
tion key is turned on. gressive shift pattern is illustrated in Fig. 7.7.
CAUTION
1
Do not allow the engine to exceed its governed
speed, or serious engine damage could result. 2
7. Use a combination of brakes and gears to keep 3

the vehicle under control at all times and to keep 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
the engine speed below the rated governed rpm. (16) (32) (48) (64) (80) (97)
4
DDE S60 11/02/95 f250319
Individual driving habits can make a difference in the 1. Governed RPM

performance and economy of any engine. The rec- 2. Engine RPM
ommendations below call attention to the techniques 3. Idle RPM
4. Miles (Kilometers) Per Hour
that can be employed to save fuel and extend the
operating efficiency and life of a new Detroit Diesel Fig. 7.7, Progressive Shift Pattern
engine for the longest possible time.
Engines with Detroit Diesel Electronic Control
NOTE: A momentary hesitation in throttle re-
(DDEC) can be equipped with a variety of options sponse will occur when a vehicle with a turbo-
designed to warn the operator of engine problems. charged engine is started on a grade. Do not
The operator of a DDEC-equipped engine should disengage the clutch. The rpm will recover, and
know the extent of the warning system in order to the vehicle will accelerate up the grade.
bring the vehicle to a safe stop if the engine malfunc- 2. For city driving, run in the highest gear possible
tions. If the operator does not understand how the
and reduce engine speed. This enables you to
system works, an engine shutdown could cause a
operate at a safe speed for traffic conditions
7.13
while using less fuel and reducing noise. Also, loaded vehicle moving against a grade and it
when slowing down for reduced speed zones, won’t harm the engine.
remain in your running gear and reduce engine
6. The driver who is not familiar with the vehicle’s
rpm to stay within the speed limit. Avoid down-
shift points can greatly improve driving skill by
shifting until you are ready to return to highway
learning them for all gears. By knowing rather
cruising speed.
than guessing where the shift points are, it is
3. For highway cruising, and for best fuel economy, possible to avoid overspeeding the engine by
run the engine at 80 to 90 percent of rated rpm downshifting too soon or missing the full use of a
to maintain highway speed. Engines with 1800 gear by downshifting too late. The shift points of
rpm ratings are exceptions and will provide fuel any vehicle can be determined by a simple road-
economy when run at their rated speed. Proper test method. Run the vehicle and determine the
gear selection should permit cruising in the maximum road speed possible in every gear at
economy range with no appreciable sacrifice in the engine governed full-load speed setting.
desired highway speed.
The top road speed possible in a gear would be
It is okay to operate below rated rpm at full the shift point for that gear. The results should be
throttle if you are satisfied with the way the ve- recorded in the proper order of shifting and dis-
hicle performs. However, there are times when played inside the cab.
hilly terrain, high winds, or other conditions make
it impractical to operate without reserve power. CAUTION
Such conditions are better met if the vehicle is
operated in a lower gear with reserve power Do not allow the engine to exceed its governed
available for changes in terrain, wind, etc. speed, or serious engine damage could result.
4. The proper use of gears will shorten time on hills 7. To slow the vehicle on downgrades and curves
and minimize the amount of shifting. When start- (using the engine), shift to a lower gear and
ing up a hill, gradually depress the throttle pedal allow the vehicle to decelerate in that gear. The
all the way and keep it there as the vehicle engine provides maximum braking effect when
moves up the grade. If the engine continues to running at the top end of the operating range,
maintain a satisfactory road speed, remain in but it must not be allowed to exceed its full-load
that gear for the entire grade. rated rpm. Continue to downshift as further re-
If the hill causes a steady decline in engine rpm, duction in vehicle speed is required. If the ve-
downshift as required until the engine can main- hicle is above the allowable maximum speed of a
tain a stable uphill speed. Make full use of each lower gear, use the service brakes to slow the
gear before going to a lower gear. By remaining vehicle to an acceptable speed where the trans-
in a gear until arriving at the speed of the next mission may be downshifted safely. Again, the
lower gear, the vehicle will top the grade in the importance of knowing the shift points is demon-
best possible time on less fuel and fewer shifts. strated.
5. Because of their constant torque over a wide IMPORTANT: The engine governor has no con-
speed range, Detroit Diesel engines can be oper- trol over engine rpm when the engine is being
ated at full throttle at lower rpm than other en- pushed by a loaded vehicle down a grade. Use
gines. This offers benefits in fuel economy and service brakes and gears in combination on
engine life. And more than likely, it will be pos- long grades to keep the vehicle speed under
sible to top most grades without downshifting. control and the engine rpm below full-load rated
When the vehicle starts into a grade, allow the governed speed.
engine to lug down to maximum torque rpm be-
8. Essential information regarding the operation and
fore downshifting. Downshift, if required, at maxi-
mum torque rpm also or at the predetermined care of Allison automatic transmissions is con-
road speed for the next lower gear. tained in the Allison Driver’s Handbook. Applying
the knowledge presented will not only make driv-
Do not be afraid to lug the engine down. It has ing easier, but will give the maximum benefits
more than enough torque at low rpm to keep a from an Allison-equipped vehicle.
7.14
Maintenance literature is also available for driv- same gear used to climb a hill of the same
ers of Allison-equipped vehicles who desire grade.
trouble-free performance and maximum life from
5. Never allow the engine to exceed the rated
their equipment. These maintenance books are
speed. Use the exhaust brake and the optional
available from any authorized Detroit Diesel en-
constant-throttle brake, if installed, to lower en-
gine distributor.
gine rpm below the rated speed.
9. As with all engines, prolonged idling of Detroit
6. Never allow the engine to idle for more than 30
Diesel engines is not recommended. An idling
engine wastes fuel, and left unattended is also minutes. Excessive idling can cause oil to leak
unsafe. from the turbocharger.
A Detroit Diesel Electronic Control (DDEC) en-

gine can be equipped to shut off automatically
CAUTION
after a specified idling time. The vehicle trans- Stop the engine at the first sign of malfunction.
mission must be in neutral and the parking brake Almost all malfunctions give some warning to the
must be set for the automatic shutoff option to operator before significant damage occurs. Many
work. To start the engine, follow the normal engines are saved because alert operators heed
start-up procedure. the warning signs (sudden drop in oil pressure,
Engines equipped with DDEC will idle fast when unusual noises, etc.) and immediately shut down
cold. As the engine warms up to operating tem- the engine.
perature, the idle speed will decrease. Warm the
engine until idle speed is normal before operat-
NOTE: Long periods of idling are not good for
ing the vehicle. an engine because the combustion chamber
temperatures drop so low that the fuel may not
Mercedes-Benz burn completely. This will cause carbon to clog
the injector spray holes and piston rings, and
While you are driving, watch for any signs of engine may result in stuck valves.
problems. If the engine overheats, uses excessive
fuel or lubricating oil, vibrates, misfires, makes un- If the engine coolant temperature becomes too
usual noises, or shows an unusual loss of power, low, raw fuel will wash the lubricating oil off the
turn the engine off as soon as possible and deter- cylinder walls and dilute the crankcase oil, caus-
mine the cause of the problem. Frequently, engine ing all moving parts of the engine to suffer from
damage may be avoided by a quick response to poor lubrication.
early indications of problems.
1. Use the tachometer to determine when to shift. Cold-Weather Operation—CAT,
Follow the pattern on the shift lever when moving
through the gears. Cummins, DDE S60, M-B
2. Depending on the vehicle gearing, the posted Satisfactory performance of a diesel engine operating
speed limit can sometimes allow operation in ei- in low ambient temperatures requires modification of
ther of the top two gears; however, for improved the engine, surrounding equipment, operating prac-
operating efficiency (fuel economy and engine tices, and maintenance procedures. The lower the
life), operate in the top gear at reduced rpm, temperatures, the greater the amount of modification
rather than in the next lower gear at the maxi- required; and yet with the modifications applied, the
mum rpm. engines must still be capable of operation in warmer
climates without extensive changes.
3. Cruise at partial throttle whenever road condi-
tions and speed requirements permit. This driv- The following information is provided to engine own-
ing technique permits operating within the most ers, operators, and maintenance personnel on how
economical power range of the engine. the modifications can be applied to get satisfactory
performance from their diesel engines.
4. Use lower gears in steep downhill driving. Nor-
mally, the gear used to descend a hill is the There are three basic objectives:
7.15
• Reasonable starting characteristics followed by If the engine does not start, prime the fuel system.
practical and dependable warm-up of the en- When the use of unblended No. 2 diesel fuel in win-
gine and equipment. ter cannot be avoided, install a thermostatically con-
• A unit or installation which is as independent trolled fuel heater. Fuel heaters can prevent wax
as possible from external influences. from clogging the fuel filters and formation of ice
crystals from water in the fuel.
• Modifications which maintain satisfactory oper-
ating temperatures with a minimum increase in IMPORTANT: If a fuel heater is used, make sure
maintenance of the equipment and accesso- it has thermostatic controls to prevent excessive
ries. heating of the fuel in warm weather. Excessive
If satisfactory engine temperature is not maintained, heating of fuel can cause a loss of engine
higher maintenance cost will result due to increased power.
engine wear. Special provisions to overcome low For cold weather operation, use the following guide-
temperatures are definitely necessary, whereas a lines:
change to a warmer climate normally requires only a
minimum of revision. Most of the accessories should 1. When starting the engine in temperatures below
be designed in such a way that they can be discon- 32°F (0°C), use engine lubricants of lower vis-
nected so there is little effect on the engine when cosity. Refer to the Caterpillar Operation and
they are not in use. Maintenance Manual for specifications.
IMPORTANT: If a winterfront is used on a ve- 2. When the temperature is below freezing, use suf-
hicle with an electronic engine equipped with a ficient antifreeze solution in the cooling system to
charge air cooler, make sure that there are slit prevent freezing.
openings distributed across the face of the win- 3. During cold weather, give more attention to the
terfront to allow airflow through the entire condition of the batteries. Test them frequently to
charge-air-cooler core. Do not use a winterfront ensure sufficient power for starting. See Group
with closed areas that block uniform air flow 15 of the Century Class Trucks Workshop
across all sections of the charge-air-cooler Manual for detailed information.
crossflow tubes. This will adversely affect the 4. If so equipped, turn off the battery disconnect
operation and durability of the charge air cooler. switch after the engine is shut down, to prevent
battery discharge.
On all engines, the following steps are necessary
when operating in cold weather: For starting below 0°F (–18°C), an optional cold-
weather starting assist is recommended. For
1. Check for cracks in the battery cases, for corro- temperatures below –10°F (–23°C), consult your
sion of the terminals, and for tightness of the Caterpillar dealer for recommendations.
cable clamps at the terminals.
5. When customer parameters include cold-mode
2. Charge the batteries to full capacity. Replace any operation and the coolant temperature is below
battery that is unable to hold full charge or is 82°F (28°C), the system puts the engine into
physically damaged. cold mode. It adjusts the low idle to 600 rpm (for
3. Check the alternator output. the 3406E, C–15, and C–16 engines) and 800
rpm (for the C–10 and C–12 engines). It also
4. Check the condition and tension of the drive advances the timing, to reduce white smoke
belts. emissions and improve warm-up time. The sys-
tem will keep the engine in cold mode until the
Caterpillar coolant temperature rises above 82°F (28°C).
If the engine is in good mechanical condition and the After cold mode has been completed, operate
precautions necessary for cold-weather operation are the vehicle at low load and low rpm until the en-
taken, ordinary cold weather will not cause difficulty gine coolant reaches normal operating tempera-
in starting or loss of efficiency. ture of 189°F (87°C).
7.16
6. Fuel cloud point is the temperature at which wax engine performance and operation of the elec-
crystals become visible, which is generally above tronic engine controls. If a fuel heater is used,
the pour point of the fuel. To keep the fuel filter make sure it has thermostatic controls. If the
elements from plugging with wax crystals, the fuel heater has a timer, set the timer to activate
cloud point should be no higher than the lowest only for a limited period of time before the en-
ambient temperature at which the engine must
gine starts. Make sure the fuel heater is used
start.
only for starting the engine.
Cummins For more information, see the Cummins Operation
and Maintenance Manual.
The two most commonly used terms associated with
preparation of equipment for low-temperature opera- DDE S60
tion are "winterization" and "arctic specifications."
Winterization of the engine and/or components, so Preparations made in advance of winter and mainte-
that starting and operating are possible in the lowest nance performed during the cold months will help to
temperature to be encountered, requires: ensure efficient engine starting and operation.
• Proper lubrication with low-temperature lubri- • Engine oil thickens as it gets colder, slowing
cating oils. cranking speed. When cold, multi-grade oil of-
fers less resistance to the cranking effort of the
• Protection from the low-temperature air. The engine and permits sufficient rpm to be devel-
metal temperature does not change, but the oped to start the engine. See "How to Select
rate of heat dissipation is affected. Lubricating Oil" in the Detroit Diesel Engine
• Fuel of the proper grade for the lowest tem- Operator’s Guide for specific recommenda-
tions.
perature.
• When an engine equipped with a DDEC sys-
• Heat to raise the engine block and component
tem is started at temperatures below 25°F
temperatures to at least –25°F (–32°C) for
(–4°C), the idle speed automatically increases
starting in lower temperatures.
to 900 rpm. The injection timing is also ad-
• Electrical equipment capable of operating in vanced to decrease white smoke. As the en-
the lowest expected temperature. All switches, gine oil warms up, the idle speed gradually de-
connections, and batteries in the electrical sys- creases. When the oil temperature reaches
tem should be inspected and kept in good con- 122°F (50°C), both the idle speed and the in-
dition to prevent losses through poor contacts. jection timing return to normal.
Arctic specifications refer to the design of material • A winterfront may be used to improve cab
and specifications of components necessary for sat- heating while idling. At least 25% of the grille
isfactory engine operation in extremely low tempera- opening should should remain open in sec-
tures to –65°F (–54°C). Contact the nearest Freight- tioned stripes that run perpendicular to the
liner dealer or Cummins engine dealer, to obtain the charge air cooler tube flow direction. This as-
special items required. sures even cooling across each tube and re-
duces header-to-tube stress, and possible fail-
CAUTION ure. Winterfronts should only be used when the
ambient temperature remains below 10°F
"Antileak" antifreezes are not recommended for (–12°C)
use in Cummins engines. Although these anti- • During cold weather, the batteries should be
freezes are chemically compatible with DCA tested more frequently to ensure ample power
water treatment, the "antileak" agents may clog for starting. All electrical connections should be
the coolant filters. tight and in good condition to prevent losses
IMPORTANT: Fuel heaters used on vehicles through loose or corroded connections.
with Cummins CELECT Plus engine systems • Ethylene glycol base antifreeze is recom-
could cause high fuel temperatures that affect mended. An inhibitor system is included in this
7.17
type of antifreeze, and the corrosion protection

is sufficient as long as the recommended con-
High-Altitude Operation—CAT,
centration range of 30 to 67 percent (antifreeze Cummins, DDE S60, M-B
to water by volume) is employed.
Engines lose horsepower when operated at high alti-
• If the engine is to be operated in arctic tem- tude because the air is too thin to burn as much fuel
peratures, consult the nearest Freightliner as at sea level. This loss is about three percent for
dealer or an authorized Detroit Diesel engine each 1000 feet (300 m) altitude above sea level for a
dealer for information regarding availability of naturally aspirated engine. Most turbocharged en-
special cold-weather equipment. gines are rated for higher altitudes than naturally as-
pirated engines.
Mercedes-Benz An engine will have smoky exhaust at high altitudes
Special precautions must be taken during cold unless a lower gear is used. The engine will not de-
weather. For service products to use in cold weather, mand full fuel from the fuel system unless the engine
see Chapter 5 of the MBE4000 Engine Operator’s is altitude-compensated by the use of a turbocharger.
Manual. Shift gears as needed to avoid excessive exhaust
smoke.
IMPORTANT: At outside temperatures below
–4°F (–20°C), a coolant preheater is recom-
mended.
Engine Shutdown—CAT,
1. Periodically check the coolant mixing ratio (con-
Cummins, DDE S60, M-B
centration of antifreeze in the coolant). Add more Caterpillar
if necessary. The coolant mixing ratio should
never rise above 60 percent antifreeze.
CAUTION
2. Use low-viscosity lubricating oils for adequate
lubrication. Stopping the engine immediately after it has been
3. At temperatures below 32°F (0°C), do not use working under load can result in overheating and
summer-grade (2-D) diesel fuel. To avoid fuel accelerated wear of the engine components. Ex-
problems due to paraffin separation, use winter- cessive temperatures in the turbocharger center-
grade (1-D or winterized 2-D) diesel fuel only. housing will cause oil coking problems. Follow
the procedure, outlined below, to allow the en-
gine to cool.
WARNING
1. With the vehicle stopped, apply the parking
The addition of kerosene lowers the flash point brakes. Reduce the engine speed to low idle.
of diesel fuel. To prevent fire and risk of injuries 2. Place the transmission shift lever in neutral.
due to burning, do not smoke or use open flames
around fuel mixed with kerosene. Comply with all NOTE: If the engine has been operating at low
appropriate safety regulations. loads, run it at low idle for 30 seconds before
4. When winter-grade diesel fuel is not adequate, it stopping. If the engine has been operating at
is possible to mix kerosene with the diesel fuel. highway speed or at high loads, run it at low
Add the kerosene only when refilling the tank, idle for three minutes to reduce and stabilize
and before adding the diesel fuel. internal engine temperatures before stopping.
NOTE: Engine power may drop according to the 3. Turn off the ignition switch and shut down the
proportion of kerosene. For this reason, never engine.
add more than 50 percent kerosene to the fuel. 4. After engine shutdown, fill the fuel tank.
5. Check the crankcase oil level. Maintain the oil
level between the add and full marks on the dip-
stick.
7.18
6. If equipped with an idle shutdown timer, it can be tion chamber, bearings, shafts, etc. This is espe-
set to shut the engine down after a preset cially important with turbocharged engines.
amount of time. Ninety seconds before the pre-
set shutdown time, the CHECK ENGINE light will NOTE: Do not idle the engine for excessively
begin to flash at a rapid rate. If the clutch pedal long periods. Long periods of idling are not
or service brake indicate a position change dur- good for an engine because the combustion
ing this final ninety seconds, diagnostic lamp chamber temperatures drop so low the fuel may
flashing, the idle shutdown timer will be disabled not burn completely. This will cause carbon to
until reset. clog the injector spray holes and piston rings,
7. If freezing temperatures are expected, allow the and may result in stuck valves.
engine jacket water expansion tank to cool, then 3. If the engine coolant temperature becomes too
check the coolant for proper antifreeze protec- low, raw fuel will wash the lubricating oil off the
tion. The cooling system must be protected cylinder walls and dilute the crankcase oil; there-
against freezing to the lowest expected outside fore, all moving parts of the engine will suffer
temperature. Add permanent-type antifreeze, if from poor lubrication.
required.
4. Turn off the ignition switch and shut down the
8. Repair any leaks, perform minor adjustments, engine.
tighten loose bolts, etc. Observe the vehicle mile-
age or the service meter reading, if so equipped. DDE S60
Perform periodic maintenance as instructed in
the Maintenance Interval Schedule in the Cater- 1. With the vehicle stopped, apply the parking
pillar Operation and Maintenance Manual. brakes, and place the transmission in neutral.
2. Allow the engine to run at idle for four to five
Cummins minutes. This allows the engine to cool and the
turbocharger to slow down.
CAUTION
When safe to do, shut down the engine at the
CAUTION
first sign of malfunction. Almost all malfunctions After high-speed operation, shutting down the
give some warning to the operator before signifi- engine without idling may cause damage to the
cant damage occurs. Many engines are saved turbocharger, as it will continue to turn without
because alert operators heed warning signs (sud- an oil supply to the bearings.
den drop in oil pressure, unusual noises, etc.)
and immediately shut down the engine. Failure to 3. Turn off the ignition switch and shut down the
do so could damage the engine. engine.
1. With the vehicle stopped, apply the parking Mercedes-Benz
brakes, and place the transmission in neutral.
If any of the following occur, shut down the engine
IMPORTANT: Bearings and seals in the turbo- immediately.
charger are subjected to the high heat of com-
bustion exhaust gases. While the engine is run- • The oil pressure swings back and forth or falls
ning, this heat is carried away by oil circulation, sharply.
but if the engine is stopped suddenly, the turbo- • Engine power and rpm fall even though the
charger temperature may rise as much as throttle pedal remains steady.
100°F (56°C). The extreme heat may cause • The exhaust pipe gives off heavy smoke.
bearings to seize or oil seals to leak.
• The coolant and/or oil temperature climb ab-
2. Idle the engine three to five minutes before shut- normally.
ting it down. This allows the lubricating oil and
the water to carry heat away from the combus-
7.19
• Abnormal sounds suddenly occur in the engine The Jake Brake is controlled by a single, dash-
or turbocharger. mounted paddle switch with three positions: OFF, LO
and HI.
1. With the vehicle stopped, apply the parking
brakes and place the transmission in neutral. Jacobs Engine Brake Operation
CAUTION WARNING
Idle the engine one to two minutes before shut-
Do not use the engine brake if road surfaces are
ting it down, if this can be done without damage
slippery. Using the engine brake on wet, icy, or
to the engine. After hard operation, shutting
snow-covered roads could result in loss of ve-
down the engine without idling may cause dam-
hicle control, possibly causing personal injury
age to the turbocharger.
and property damage.
2. Allow the engine to idle one to two minutes be- To engage the engine brake, the dash switch must
fore shutting it down. This allows the lubricating be in the LO or HI position and both the clutch and
oil and the coolant to carry heat away from the throttle pedals must be fully released. To disengage
combustion chambers, bearings, shafts, and the engine brake, depress the throttle or clutch
seals. The extreme heat may cause bearings to pedal, or move the dash switch to OFF. Use the LO
seize or oil seals to leak. position when driving on flat, open stretches of road.
IMPORTANT: Bearings and seals in the turbo- If you need to use the service brakes to slow down,
charger are subjected to the high heat of com- switch to a higher position until there is no need for
bustion exhaust gases. While the engine is run- the service brakes.
ning, this heat is carried away by oil circulation,
but if the engine is stopped suddenly, the turbo- WARNING
charger temperature may rise as much as 115°F
(63°C). The engine brake must be disengaged when
shifting gears. The clutch must be used if the
dash switch is in the LO or HI position. If the en-
CAUTION gine brake is engaged when the transmission is
in neutral, the braking power of the engine brake
Except in emergency, do not shut down the can stall the engine, which could result in loss of
MBE4000 engine when the coolant temperature is vehicle control, possibly causing personal injury
above 194°F (90°C). To do so could damage the and property damage.
engine.
Since the engine brake is most effective at rated en-
3. Turn off the ignition switch and shut down the gine speed, gear selection is very important. Gearing
engine. down the vehicle within the limits of the rated engine
speed makes the engine brake more effective. Rec-
Engine Braking System—CAT, ommended engine braking speed is above 1800 rpm
and below the rated speed.
Cummins, DDE S60, M-B
IMPORTANT: Maximum retarder performance is
Jacobs Engine Brake obtained when you use the lowest possible gear
A Jacobs engine brake is a hydraulic-electric engine without exceeding the recommended engine
attachment that converts a diesel engine into an air braking speed.
compressor. This is done by changing engine ex- "Control speed" is the speed at which the engine
haust valve operation. An engine brake is not a sub- brake performs 100 percent of the required downhill
stitute for a service braking system, except in emer- braking, resulting in a constant speed of descent.
gencies, because it does not provide the precise The control speed varies, depending on vehicle
control available from the service brakes. weight and the downhill grade.
7.20
Below a set engine speed (set at the factory to 700 ate selection of gears when the engine brake is
rpm), the engine control unit (ECU) will not engage in use.
the engine brake. The engine brake will not work
4. When either the clutch or throttle pedal is de-
below the set engine speed.
pressed, the engine brake is deactivated.
For faster descent, select a higher gear than that
used for control speed. Service brakes must then be CAUTION
used intermittently to prevent engine overspeed and
to maintain desired vehicle speed. If the engine brake fails to shut off when either
IMPORTANT: When descending a grade, re- the throttle or clutch pedal is depressed, place
member that frequent use of service brakes the dash switch in the OFF position and do not
use the engine brake until the throttle or clutch
causes them to become hot, which results in a
switch system is repaired. If the engine brake
reduction of their stopping ability. Grade descent fails to shut off when the dash switch is turned
speed should be such that the service brakes off, the engine should be shut down and the en-
are used infrequently and that they remain cool, gine brake repaired before continuing operation.
thus retaining their effectiveness. Failure to do so could result in damage to the
A driver may descend slower than control speed by engine.
selecting a lower gear, one that will not overspeed
the engine. The engine brake retarding force will Turbo Brake (MBE4000 only)
then be sufficient to cause vehicle deceleration. Oc- For high braking output, the Mercedes-Benz
casional deactivation of the engine brake may be MBE4000 engine can be equipped with an optional
necessary to maintain the designated road speed turbo brake. The turbo brake redirects the exhaust
under these conditions. gas flow through the turbocharger to provide 600
brake horsepower.
WARNING The turbo brake can be operated either manually or
automatically, through the cruise control function.
Using the engine brake as a primary braking sys-
tem when the service brakes are operable is dan- Because the charge air pressure is maintained at a
gerous. This can cause long, unpredictable stop- high level during braking, full throttle response is
ping distances, possibly resulting in personal available immediately, if the operator desires it, with-
injury or property damage. out any turbo lag.
Whenever vehicle braking is required, the engine The turbo brake is maintenance-free, highly reliable,
brake may be used with the service brakes. There is and adds virtually no weight to the engine.
no time limit for operation of the engine brake.
1.
Constant-Throttle Valves (MBE4000
After the engine is warmed up and the vehicle is
in motion, move the paddle switch to the desired only)
position, LO or HI. Depending on the engine To increase braking performance, the Mercedes-
model, LO will provide 1/3 or 1/2 of the full brak- Benz MBE4000 engine can be equipped with con-
ing capacity of the engine. HI will provide maxi- stant throttles in each combustion chamber. Small
mum engine braking. valves built into the cylinder head allow a small
2. The engine brake activates when the dash amount of compressed air to escape through the ex-
switch is in LO or HI position and the driver’s haust port during the combustion stroke. The
feet are removed from both the clutch and constant-throttle valves are open during the entire
throttle pedals. If it fails to activate, take the ve- time that the engine brake is activated. Although
hicle to an authorized Freightliner dealer for ser- some braking ability is lost because the valves are
vice. constantly open, constant-throttle braking is quieter in
operation than other types of engine brakes.
3. To obtain maximum retarding, maintain the top
governed speed of the engine through appropri- When both the exhaust brake and the constant
throttles are installed, a three-position switch on the
7.21
dash controls the engine braking system. Like the haust brake comes on as soon as you remove your
engine brake, the constant throttles are deactivated foot from the accelerator pedal. While going down
when the accelerator or clutch pedal is depressed. the grade, use a low enough gear to safely descend
The ABS system, when active, also deactivates with a minimum application of the service brakes. As
constant-throttle braking. a general guideline, use the same gear as you would
to ascend the hill.
Exhaust Braking System—CAT,
Cummins, DDE S60, M-B CAUTION
General Information Do not allow the engine to exceed its governed
speed, or serious engine damage could result.
An exhaust brake is an optional auxiliary braking sys-
Apply the service brakes to reduce the engine rpm or
tem that assists but does not replace the service
make a slower descent by using a lower gear.
brake system. The exhaust brake can be used alone
or together with the constant-throttle valves for steep
or long grades. The exhaust brake switch located on WARNING
the control panel, in combination with the accelerator
and clutch pedals, allows the driver to make maxi- Do not use the exhaust brake when driving on
mum use of the exhaust brake in off-highway and slippery or low-traction road surfaces. Failure to
mountain driving as well as in traffic or high-speed follow this precaution could result in a loss of
highway driving. vehicle control and possible personal injury or
property damage.
When only the exhaust brake is installed, a two-
position switch on the dash controls the engine brak- Exhaust Brake Operating Characteristics
ing system. The exhaust brake is only active when
the engine speed is between 900 and 2700 rpm. De- When you remove your feet from both the accelera-
pressing the accelerator or clutch pedal deactivates tor and clutch pedals and the exhaust brake switch is
the exhaust brake. The ABS system, when active, in the on position, the exhaust brake is applied. The
also deactivates the exhaust brake. following conditions should exist if the brake is oper-
ating properly.
The exhaust brake is a butterfly valve mounted in the
exhaust pipe. When the driver’s foot is not on the • A slight change in the sound of the engine may
accelerator pedal and the exhaust brake switch is in be noticed when the exhaust brake is applied.
the on position, an air cylinder shuts the butterfly • Exhaust smoke should appear normal.
valve which restricts the flow of exhaust gases and
retards the engine. This retarding action is carried • Engine temperature should remain in the nor-
through the engine and drivetrain, slowing the vehicle mal operating range.
and reducing the need for frequent service brake ap-
• Road speed usually decreases when the ex-
plications.
haust brake is applied during a descent. When
Exhaust brakes are not intended for use as the pri- the vehicle is carrying a heavy load or the
mary braking system during vehicle operation. grade is extremely steep, you may need to
apply the service brakes occasionally.
Starting the Engine
• Do not expect a retarding effect similar to sud-
Before starting the engine, make sure that the ex- den hard application of the service brakes. The
haust brake switch is in the off position. Do not turn exhaust brake retards the vehicle with a
the exhaust brake on until the engine has reached smooth braking effect.
normal operating temperatures.
• During a descent, the tachometer usually
Driving Downhill shows a drop in rpm depending on the grade
and the vehicle load.
While approaching a steep grade, make sure that the
exhaust brake switch is in the on position. The ex- • Depending on the grade and vehicle load, you
may or may not feel the retarding force acting
7.22
against your body when the brake is applied. Gear Shifting Techniques
The retarding force of the brake may not al-
ways be noticed, but it is actually preventing Many drivers upshift into the next gear, or even skip-
the vehicle from going much faster. shift into a higher gear, before the vehicle has
reached the proper speed. This type of shifting is
Shutting Off the Engine almost as bad as starting off in a gear that is too
high, since the engine rpm and vehicle speeds are
Make sure the exhaust brake is turned off before too far apart, requiring the clutch to absorb the speed
shutting off the engine. difference with friction, creating heat. For transmis-
sion operating instructions, refer to Chapter 8 in this
Clutches manual.
General Information The clutch brake is applied by fully depressing the

clutch pedal. Its purpose is to stop the transmission
The major reason why clutches wear out too soon is gears from rotating in order to engage the transmis-
excessive heat. Clutches are designed to absorb and sion gears quickly in making an initial start.
dissipate more heat than encountered in typical op-
eration. The temperatures developed in typical op- CAUTION
eration will not break down the clutch friction sur-
faces. However, if a clutch is slipped excessively or Never apply the clutch brake when making down-
asked to do the job of a fluid coupling, high tempera- shifts or upshifts. The clutch pedal should never
tures develop quickly and destroy the clutch. Tem- be fully depressed before the transmission is put
peratures generated between the flywheel, driven in neutral. If the clutch brake is applied with the
discs, and pressure plates can be high enough to transmission still in gear, a reverse load will be
cause the metal to flow and the friction facing mate- put on the gear. At the same time, it will have the
rial to char and burn. effect of trying to stop or decelerate the vehicle
Heat and wear are practically nonexistent when a with the clutch brake. Rapid wear of the friction
clutch is fully engaged. But during the moment of discs will take place necessitating frequent re-
engagement, when the clutch is picking up the load, placement. Considerable heat will be generated,
it generates considerable heat. An improperly ad- which will be detrimental to the release bearings
justed or slipping clutch will rapidly generate suffi- and transmission front bearings.
cient heat to destroy itself.
Excessive Vehicle Overload, or
The most important items that a driver should be Overloading the Clutch
aware of to ensure long service life of the clutch in-
clude: starting in the right gear, clutch malfunctions, Clutches are designed for specific vehicle applica-
and when to adjust a clutch. tions and loads. These limitations should not be ex-
ceeded.
Clutch Operation
Starting the Vehicle in the Proper Gear CAUTION
An empty vehicle can be started in a higher trans- Overloading will not only result in damage to the
mission gear ratio than a partially or fully loaded ve- clutch, but also to the entire powertrain.
hicle. A good rule of thumb for the driver to follow is:
select the gear combination that allows you to start Riding the Clutch Pedal
moving with an idling engine, or if necessary, just
enough throttle to prevent stalling the engine. After Riding the clutch pedal is very destructive to the
the clutch is fully engaged, the engine should be ac- clutch, since partial clutch engagement permits slip-
celerated to the correct rpm for the upshift into the page, generating excessive heat. Riding the clutch
next higher gear. pedal will also put a constant thrust load on the re-
lease bearing, which can thin out the lubricant. Re-
lease bearing failures can be attributed to this type of
misuse.
7.23
Holding the Vehicle on an Incline With a

Slipping Clutch
A slipping clutch accumulates heat faster than it can
be dissipated, resulting in early clutch failures. Never
use the clutch as a hill holder.
Coasting With the Clutch Released

(Pedal Depressed) and the Transmission
in Gear
Coasting with the clutch released and the transmis-
sion in gear can cause high driven disc rpm through
multiplication of ratios from the final drive and trans-
mission.
WARNING
Do not coast with the clutch released (pedal de-
pressed) and the transmission in gear. High
driven-disc rpm could cause the clutch facing to
be thrown off the disc. Flying debris could cause
injury to persons in the cab. 02/09/96 f250306
A. Free Pedal
Engaging the Clutch While Coasting
Fig. 7.8, Clutch Free Pedal
Engaging the clutch while coasting can result in tre-
mendous shock loads and possible damage to the See Group 25 of the Century Class Trucks Work-
clutch, as well as to the entire drivetrain. shop Manual for clutch adjustment procedures and
specifications.
Reporting Erratic Clutch Operation
Promptly CAUTION
Reporting erratic clutch operation as soon as pos- Operating the vehicle with incorrect free pedal
sible will give maintenance personnel a chance to could result in clutch damage.
inspect and lubricate the clutch components, make
necessary internal clutch and linkage adjustments, Clutch brake squeeze is an increased resistance
etc. (greater than the force of the clutch spring) felt as
the clutch pedal approaches the end of its stroke. If
Clutch free pedal is a decreased resistance felt at the gears grind when shifting into first or reverse
the top of the clutch pedal stroke. See Fig. 7.8. With gear with the clutch pedal fully depressed, the clutch
the clutch pedal in this range, the clutch is fully en- is out of adjustment or the clutch brake is worn and
gaged and the only resistance to clutch pedal move- needs to be replaced.
ment is the force of the return spring. If clutch free
pedal is 3/4 inch (20 mm) or less, measured at the Clutch Adjustments
pedal, have the clutch adjusted.
Clutches have an internal adjustment, and external
Free pedal should be included and commented on linkage adjustment. See Group 25 of the Century
daily in the driver’s report, since clutch free pedal is Class Trucks Workshop Manual for clutch adjustment
the maintenance department’s guide to the condition procedures and specifications.
of the clutch and the release mechanism.
7.24
CAUTION
Operating the vehicle with the clutch improperly
adjusted could result in clutch or clutch brake
failure.
Lubrication
On vehicles equipped with a greaseable release
bearing, the release bearing and linkage should be
lubricated at frequent intervals. See Group 25 of the
Century Class Trucks Maintenance Manual for inter-
vals and procedures.
CAUTION
Failure to lubricate the release bearing and link-
age as recommended could result in release
bearing and clutch damage.
7.25
8
Transmissions
Freightliner SmartShift Shift Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Eaton Fuller AutoShift Automated Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Eaton UltraShift DM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6
Meritor SureShift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.12
ZF Meritor FreedomLine Automated Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.13
Eaton Fuller Range-Shift Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15
Eaton Fuller Splitter and Range-Shift Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.18
Eaton Fuller Deep-Reduction Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.21
Meritor Range-Shift Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.24
Meritor Splitter and Range-Shift Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.26
Eaton Fuller AutoSelect Automated Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.27
Eaton Fuller Top 2 and Lightning Semi-Automated Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.30
Meritor Engine Synchro Shift (ESS) Automated Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.32
Allison Automatic Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.35
Transmissions
Freightliner SmartShift Shift position (R, N, D) selector switch (Fig. 8.3) is located
at the end of the lever.
Control
5
General Information, SmartShift™ 6 7
4 8
The SmartShift transmission control is an electronic 3
transmission control device. It is installed with the
following transmissions:
• Eaton® Fuller® AutoShift™
9
• Eaton Fuller UltraShift™ DM 1
2
10
• Meritor™ SureShift
11
• ZF Meritor™ FreedomLine™ 12
01/24/2003 f270120
It replaces the typical floor-mounted shift lever or To upshift manually, pull the lever up (towards you). To
dash-mounted push button control. downshift manually, pull the lever down (away from you).
SmartShift accepts driver requests for transmission 1. SmartShift Control Lever
functions and transmits them through hard wiring to 2. Slide Switch (forward driving mode switch)
3. MAN Position (of slide switch)
the transmission control unit (TCU). SmartShift is a 4. AUTO Position (of slide switch)
true shift-by-wire system. 5. Upshift Direction
SmartShift offers two main advantages over conven- 6. Reverse Position (of selector switch)
tional transmission control devices. Usable cab 7. Selector Switch
space is increased and access to the sleeper is im- 8. Neutral Lock Button
9. Neutral Position (of selector switch)
proved by removing the shift lever from the floor. 10. Drive Position (of selector switch)
The SmartShift control mounts to the right-hand side 11. Low Position (of selector switch)
of the steering column and is operated by the fingers 12. Downshift Direction
of the driver’s right hand, allowing both hands to re- Fig. 8.1, Four-Position SmartShift Control (with Eaton
main on the steering wheel. Fuller transmissions)
A two-position slide switch is mounted on the body of
the control lever just before the paddle widens out. Embedded in the selector switch is a small neutral
The slide switch allows the driver to choose auto- lock button to prevent accidental shifts into gear from
matic (AUTO) mode or manual (MAN) mode. The neutral. Any time you shift through N, press down on
SureShift lever has no slide switch. the neutral lock button to move the switch from neu-
tral (N) to another gear, such as drive (D), low (L), or
In AUTO mode, gears shift automatically, without reverse (R). When shifting to N, it is not necessary to
driver interaction. Manual gear shifts (all SureShift press the neutral lock button.
shifts; AutoShift, UltraShift, or FreedomLine when in
MAN mode) are accomplished by a momentary pull
or push on the control in the plane perpendicular to Eaton Fuller AutoShift
the steering wheel. Pull upward (toward you) on the Automated Transmissions
control to upshift and push downward (away from
you) to downshift. The control is spring-loaded and Refer to the Eaton website for additional information,
returns to mid-position when released after an upshift www.roadranger.com.
or downshift.
For the Eaton Fuller automated transmissions, a
General Information, AutoShift
four-position (R, N, D, L) selector switch (Fig. 8.1) is 10-Speed RTO Models
located at the end of the lever. For the Meritor Sure-
Shift transmission, a three-position (R, N, F) selector Eaton Fuller 10-speed AutoShift automated transmis-
switch (Fig. 8.2) is located at the end of the lever. sions have 10 forward speeds and two reverse
For the Meritor FreedomLine transmission, a three- speeds. The transmission consists of a 5-speed front
8.1
Transmissions
section and a 2-speed rear section. The driver must The driver does not need to break torque or increase
use the clutch to start and stop the vehicle. or decrease engine speed to synchronize the shift.
The transmission signals the engine controller when
2 to break torque and the engine controller automati-
3 cally increases or decreases engine speed. When
4 engine speed is correct, the transmission engages
SHIFT
the next gear and signals the engine controller to
UP
PULL
resume operation.
Smart
Shift The AutoShift system consists of the following com-
PUSH 5 ponents:
1 SHIFT
• The Gear Display Module (Fig. 8.4) mounted

DOWN
6
on the dashboard indicates the current gear
7 position or transmission status. The display
11/23/99 f270081 also flashes the next gear to be engaged while
To upshift, pull the lever up (towards you). To downshift, the transmission is in Neutral during a gear
pull the lever down (away from you). change.
1. SmartShift Control Lever • The Driver Command Console (DCC) replaces
2. Upshift Direction the shift lever and controls the transmission’s
3. Reverse Position (of selector switch)
4. Selector Switch
shift patterns.
5. Neutral Position (of selector switch)
6. Forward Position (of selector switch)
7. Downshift Direction
Fig. 8.2, Three-Position SmartShift Lever (with Meritor

SureShift)
2 1 A
1
2
3 SOLID
R
4 3
N
D
SOLID
5 6
4
7 FLASHING
5
SOLID
02/17/98 B f270062
06/03/99 f270065 A. Gear Display Module B. Module Detail
1. Upshift (in manual mode, pull upward) 1. Current Gear
2. Steering Wheel 2. 9th Gear Engaged
3. Reverse Position 3. In 9th Gear, Preselected Toward 10th
4. Neutral Position 4. Out Of Gear, Waiting For Engine/Transmission rpm
5. Drive Position To Synchronize
6. Downshift (in manual mode, push downward) 5. 10th Gear Engaged
7. Steering Column
Fig. 8.4, Gear Display Module
Fig. 8.3, SmartShift Control Operation (FreedomLine
control, showing only R, N, D positions)
8.2
Transmissions
• The DCC (Fig. 8.5) has indicators for reverse, forward or backward, which could result in per-
neutral, and the three forward positions: drive, sonal injury and damage to property and the
hold, and low. Service and wait lamps are also transmission.
located on the console. The gear select handle
contains upshift and downshift buttons and a Automatic and Manual Modes
gear select lever detent button.
A two-position slide switch (forward driving mode
switch) is located near the end of the control
(Fig. 8.1). The switch positions are labelled MAN
(manual shift mode) and AUTO (automatic drive
R
mode).
3
N
SERVICE
NOTE: In automatic drive mode, upshifts and
1 WAIT
D downshifts require no driver interaction. Move
H
HOLD
5 the selector switch to the drive (D) position, dis-
L engage the clutch to engage the gear selected,
2 4 engage the clutch and drive the vehicle. In
B manual shift mode, upshifts and downshifts re-
quire either a pull upward or push downward on
A the control.
02/16/98 f270064
A. Console Top View Driver Message Center

B. Select Handle Side View
1. Indicator Lamps 3. Upshift Button
Gear information is presented to the driver via the
2. Gear Position 4. Detent Button level III ICU (ICU2M) Driver Message Center. In au-
Indicator 5. Downshift Button tomatic drive mode, the number of the forward gear
currently engaged appears continually on the mes-
Fig. 8.5, Enhanced Driver Command Console (DCC) sage display screen when in drive (D). In manual
shift mode, the current gear is displayed until a new
• The shifter performs shifts at the front portion gear is requested. When neutral (N) is engaged, "N"
of the transmission. It preselects the shift to will appear on the message display screen. When
neutral and completes the gear change after reverse (R) is engaged on 10- or 18-speed AutoShift
driver input. transmissions, either "RL" or "RH" will appear on the
• The Electronic Control Unit (ECU) includes two message display screen. AutoShift transmissions with
controllers: a transmission ECU and a system fewer speeds do not have a dual range reverse gear
ECU. The transmission ECU controls all trans- and "R" will appear when reverse is engaged.
mission shift functions and the system ECU IMPORTANT: The information shown on the
manages all vehicle interfaces for transmission message display screen indicates the state of
shift functions.
the transmission only, not the state of the
• An electronic range valve, controlled by the SmartShift control.
transmission ECU, is used to perform range
shifts. Start-Up
1. With the parking brake applied, press the clutch
Operation, SmartShift With Eaton all the way down to the floor.
Fuller AutoShift
2. Start the engine.
WARNING 3. Check to make sure the transmission is in neu-
tral.
If the engine cranks in any gear other than neu- 4. With the transmission in neutral, release the
tral, have the vehicle serviced immediately. If the clutch.
vehicle is started in gear it will suddenly move
8.3
Transmissions
NOTE: This allows the speed sensor on the stopped and in drive (either manual or auto-
input shaft to get a reading. matic mode). Each pull upward on the control
5.
increases the starting gear by one gear, but no
Press down on the clutch again and release the
parking brake. higher than fourth gear. The number of the gear
selected will flash on the message display
6. Select the desired starting gear. screen until the driver engages the clutch. This
7. Release the clutch. gear will be stored in memory as the default
starting gear until either a different starting gear
Reverse is selected by the driver or the engine is shut
1.
down. The transmission may also be pro-
To engage reverse (R), slide the selector switch
upward to the next position above the Neutral grammed so that it is not possible to select a
position and disengage the clutch. starting gear other than the preprogrammed de-
fault starting gear.
NOTE: AutoShift 10- and 18-speed transmis-
sions have a dual-range reverse. Reverse low Upshifting
(RL) is the default reverse gear.
NOTE: With the transmission in drive (D) in the
2. Select reverse high (RH) by pulling upward on automatic mode, upshifts require no driver inter-
the control. action.
NOTE: Reverse may be engaged below a pro- 1. With the transmission in drive in the manual
grammable forward speed in order to rock the mode, request an upshift by pulling upward on
vehicle. If reverse is selected above the pro- the control. If the requested gear is available, the
grammed forward speed, an audible warning will transmission will upshift.
sound and a message indicating that the gear is NOTE: A single, momentary pull upward on the
not available will appear on the message dis- control selects the next higher gear when it is
play screen. available. Two consecutive, momentary upward
Neutral Position pulls will cause a skip shift when the next two
higher gears are available and conditions are
Select neutral (N) by moving the selector switch to right.
the "N" position.
2. To skip shift, move the control two times in less
NOTE: Neutral is always available during opera- than 1/2 second. The number of the gear en-
tion. When in neutral, upshift and downshift re- gaged will appear on the message display
quests are ignored. If the mode selector switch screen.
is moved from neutral to drive (D) while the ve- NOTE: The Eaton Fuller AutoShift 18-speed
hicle is moving, the transmission will shift into a transmission is able to perform triple upshifts
gear causing the engine to go to a high torque when the next three higher gears are available
level, under the engine’s rated torque. and conditions are right. To triple shift this trans-
Selecting a Starting Gear mission, move the control three times in less
than 1/2 second.
1. In automatic mode, select drive (D) by sliding the
selector switch downward to the next position If a requested gear is not available, an audible
below the neutral position. warning will sound and the message display
screen will indicate that the gear is not avail-
2. Disengage the clutch to engage the gear se- able. An unavailable requested upshift is not
lected. Engage the clutch and drive the vehicle.
stored in memory. The upshift must be re-
NOTE: To select a starting gear other than the quested again.
default starting gear, either pull upward or push
downward on the control while the vehicle is
8.4
Transmissions
Downshifting Operation, AutoShift (without

NOTE: With the transmission in drive (D) in the SmartShift)
automatic mode, downshifts require no driver
interaction. WARNING
1. With the transmission in drive in the manual
If the engine cranks in any gear other than neu-
mode, request a downshift by pushing downward
tral, have the vehicle serviced immediately. If the
on the control. If the requested gear is available,
vehicle is started in gear it will suddenly move
the transmission will downshift.
forward or backward, which could result in per-
NOTE: A single, momentary push downward on sonal injury and damage to property and the
the control selects the next lower gear when it is transmission.
available. Two consecutive, momentary down-
ward pushes will cause a skip shift, when the Start-Up
next two lower gears are available and condi- 1. With the parking brake applied, press the clutch
tions are right. all the way down to the floor.
2. To skip shift, move the control two times in less 2. Start the engine.
than 1/2 second. The number of the gear en- 3. Check to make sure the transmission is in neu-
gaged will appear on the message display
tral.
screen.
4. With the transmission in neutral, release the
NOTE: The Eaton Fuller AutoShift 18-speed clutch.
transmission is able to perform triple downshifts
when the next three lower gears are available NOTE: This allows the speed sensor on the
and conditions are right. To triple shift this trans- input shaft to get a reading.
mission, move the control three times in less 5. Press down on the clutch again and release the
than 1/2 second. parking brake.
If a requested gear is not available, an audible 6. Select the desired starting gear.
warning will sound and the message display
7. Release the clutch.
screen will indicate that the requested gear is
not available. Unlike upshifting, an unavailable Reverse
requested downshift is stored in memory and
the shift will be made when the gear is avail- NOTE: To drive in reverse, first depress the
able. The time limit for this memory is a pro- clutch.
grammable parameter. 1. Move the gear select lever to the "R" position.
Low Gear Operation 2. Select either LO or HI reverse by depressing ei-
ther the downshift or upshift button (Fig. 8.5) on
Use low (L) when descending steep hills and using the gear select handle (if equipped).
compression braking. Engine speed will be increased
by 200 rpms and shift points will be offset by 200 3. Release the clutch.
rpm. The efficiency of the exhaust brake will be maxi- NOTE: The clutch must be used for starting and
mized.
stopping.
Using the Clutch
Driving in the "D" Mode
Use the clutch to start and stop the vehicle.
NOTE: The drive mode is used for normal driv-
ing conditions.
1. Fully depress the clutch.
8.5
Transmissions
2. Move the gear select lever from neutral to drive. Driving in the "H" Mode
NOTE: The clutch must be fully depressed to NOTE: You must use the upshift and downshift
shift from neutral to drive. buttons on the gear select handle to change
3. Upshifting and downshifting are performed auto- gears while in the "H" (hold) mode.
matically with no driver interaction required. 1. Depress the clutch pedal.
NOTE: The clutch must be used for starting and 2. Place the shift lever in the "H" mode.
stopping.
3. Select the starting gear you want.
Parking the Vehicle 4. Slowly release the clutch pedal.
1. With the clutch pedal depressed, move the gear
select lever to neutral. Upshifting
2. Ensure that a solid "N" appears on the gear dis- NOTE: In the "H" mode you, the driver, decide
play module. See Fig. 8.4. when to upshift and downshift.
NOTE: If the gear display does not show a solid 1. Accelerate.
"N," the transmission is not yet in neutral. 2. Press the upshift button on the gear select
3. Set the parking brakes. handle. To skip shift, press twice.
4. Slowly release the clutch pedal. 3. The transmission automatically selects and shifts
to the next gear.
Selecting a Starting Gear
Downshifting
NOTE: In either the automatic or manual drive
1. Decelerate.
mode, a starting gear other than the default
starting gear, may be selected. Push either the 2. Press the downshift button on the gear select
upshift or downshift buttons on the gear select handle. To skip shift, press twice.
handle while the vehicle is stopped and in drive. 3. The transmission automatically selects and shifts
Each push of the upshift button increases the to the next gear.
starting gear by one gear. Depending on the
vehicle’s load, you may select gears first Eaton UltraShift DM
through fifth as the starting gear. The number of
the gear selected will flash on the gear display General Information, UltraShift™ DM
module until the driver engages the clutch. This
Eaton UltraShift DM is a ten-speed heavy-duty fully-
gear will be stored in memory until either a dif- automated transmission. No clutch pedal is required
ferent starting gear is selected by the driver or to operate the vehicle.
the engine is shut down. The transmission may
also be programmed so that it is not possible to UltraShift DM uses a dry clutch system which is of-
select a starting gear other than the prepro- fered only on this automated transmission system.
grammed default starting gear. The highest pro- The UltraShift transmission uses the four-position
grammable default starting gear is third gear. SmartShift lever on the steering column to select
gears. To know what gear the transmission is in, look
1. With the vehicle stopped, place the gear select at the round current gear indicator on the right-hand
lever in the "D" or "H" position to select a starting control panel as shown in Fig. 8.6. All forward shifts
gear. See Fig. 8.5. can be made either manually or automatically, at the
2. Select a starting gear with the upshift or down- driver’s choice.
shift buttons on the gear select handle. See
Fig. 8.5.
8.6
Transmissions
3. After the ignition is turned on, the current gear

1
indicator shows the dot display, arranged in a
square pattern. All dots in the pattern should light
up, without gaps or spaces. See Fig. 8.8.
2
12/22/2003 f270079a
To know what gear the transmission is in, look at the
current gear indicator. 10/13/2003 f610678
1. Current Gear Indicator
2. SmartShift Control Fig. 8.8, Power Up Dot Display
Fig. 8.6, Shift Controls and Indicators, UltraShift 4. Wait for the current gear indicator to show a solid
Transmissions "N." When the "N" is solid, rather than flashing,
the UltraShift DM TCU is powered up. Start the
Operation, UltraShift DM engine and apply the service brake.
Power Up 5. Select drive (D) by pressing in the neutral lock
1. button and moving the selector switch downward
With the parking brake set, select neutral (N) by
to the position below neutral. Release the park-
moving the selector switch to the N position.
ing brake. The gear is displayed on the current
2. With the transmission in neutral, turn on the igni- gear indicator.
tion switch. The "CHECK TRANS" and "TRANS
TEMP" telltale lights come on and go out again NOTE: When D is selected, the transmission
(bulb check). See Fig. 8.7. starts up in the default starting gear.
6. On a level grade, release the service brake and
1 2 press down on the throttle pedal to allow the ve-
hicle to move forward. The vehicle will not move
CHECK until the pedal is depressed.
TRANS
TRANS
TEMP WARNING
BRAKE
When starting or stopping on hills and grades,
use extra care to prevent the vehicle from rolling
back. A rollback accident could cause death, seri-
ous personal injury, or property damage.
7. Prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when
10/27/2003 f610677
stopped on a hill or grade, or when the vehicle is
1. "CHECK TRANS" Light starting from a stop on a hill or grade.
2. "TRANS TEMP" Light
Fig. 8.7, Telltale Lights
8.7
Transmissions
7.1 To start from a full stop on hill or grade,

quickly move your foot from the brake
pedal and press firmly on the throttle
pedal.
On steep hills, set the parking brake and
release it only when there is enough en-
gine power to prevent rollback.
7.2 To stop on a hill or grade, press and hold 1 2
the brake pedal to keep the vehicle from
moving. On steep hills, set the parking 3
brake and chock the tires, front and/or
rear.
On steep hills, set the parking brake and
chock the tires, front and/or rear. Never
hold a hill with the throttle pedal. This will
cause the clutch to overheat. 01/21/2004 f270079c
1. Slide Switch (controls forward driving mode)
Power Down 2. Selector Switch (controls gear selection)
3. Neutral Lock Button (prevents accidental shift into
1. Apply the service brakes. gear)
2. Select neutral (N) by pressing in the neutral lock Fig. 8.9, Switches, UltraShift Transmissions
button and moving the selector switch to N.
When the "N" on the current gear indicator is
solid, rather than flashing, the UltraShift DM TCU
is ready to power down.
3. With the transmission in neutral, set the parking
brake.
4. Turn off the ignition key and shut down the en-
gine.
Automatic and Manual Modes

The SmartShift control has a slide switch located on
the body of the control lever just before the paddle
widens out. See Fig. 8.9. The slide switch controls
the forward driving mode, automatic or manual. 10/13/2003 f610680
To change mode at any time, move the slide switch NOTE: The gear indicator displays the current gear. In
in the desired direction. This allows the driver to re- this example, it displays first gear.
spond flexibly to a wide range of driving conditions, Fig. 8.10, Current Gear Display
such as blind corners, tight curves, and steep hills.
At the start of a shift, the current gear continues to
IMPORTANT: Whatever the mode, it is always display until the transmission has been pulled into
possible to shift manually by moving the lever neutral. At this point, as the transmission is synchro-
up or down as needed. When the engine speed nizing for the new (target) gear, the gear indicator
is within 75 revolutions per minute (rpm) of the flashes the number of the new gear.
load-based shift point for an automatic shift, the When the shift is complete, the new gear displays
UltraShift DM TCU will advance the shift. solid, without flashing.
In either mode, the gear indicator displays the cur-
rent gear. See Fig. 8.10.
8.8
Transmissions
Automatic Mode (AUTO)

In automatic drive mode (AUTO), upshifts and down-
shifts are made by the transmission without driver
intervention. Press in the neutral lock button, move
the selector switch to drive (D), and press down on
the throttle pedal. The transmission will shift auto-
matically.
If driving conditions require, it is still possible to re-
quest a manual shift. The transmission will make the
shift if the engine speed is within 75 rpm of the load-
based shift point for that gear.
If the driver presses down on the throttle pedal after
a manual downshift in automatic mode, the transmis- 10/14/2003 f610681
sion will upshift again if the UltraShift DM TCU re-
quires it. Fig. 8.11, Reverse Gear Display
Manual Mode (MAN) IMPORTANT: Under normal conditions, do not

In manual drive mode (MAN), upshifts and down-
select reverse with the vehicle moving forward.
shifts are made by the driver: The vehicle must be moving at less than two miles
• To shift up, pull the lever up (towards you). per hour (3 km/h) before selecting reverse. If reverse
is selected when the vehicle is moving faster, an au-
• To shift down, push the lever down (away from dible warning will sound and continue sounding at
you). three-second intervals until the control lever is re-
turned to the "D" position or the vehicle slows to the
The system will hold the current gear until the driver
proper speed.
requests a shift. In downhill situations in particular,
the driver must be alert to vehicle speed by down- If necessary to rock the vehicle, use the selector
shifting and/or using the service brakes as needed. switch to shift back and forth at low speed between
reverse and drive.
A shift request will still be refused if the selected gear
would cause engine overspeed or excessive lugging. Neutral
Selecting Gears IMPORTANT: Always start the engine with the
Reverse transmission in neutral, the parking brake set,
and the service brakes applied.
Reverse (R) is at the upper end of the four-position
selector switch located at the end of the SmartShift Neutral (N) is directly below R on the four-position
control lever. To select R, press in the neutral lock selector switch located at the end of the SmartShift
button and move the selector switch upward to the control lever. To select N, press in the neutral lock
position above neutral. button and move the selector switch to the position
below R. When neutral is selected, the letter "N" dis-
UltraShift DM has two reverse gears, reverse low
plays on the current gear indicator. See Fig. 8.12.
and reverse high. To manually shift between them,
use the shift lever as described for MAN mode.
There is no AUTO mode for reverse. WARNING
When reverse low is selected, the letter "R" displays Do not coast in neutral. Coasting in neutral can
on the current gear indicator. When reverse high is cause an accident, possibly resulting in severe
selected, the letter "H" displays on the current gear personal injury or death.
indicator. See Fig. 8.11.
Neutral is always available during operation, what-
ever the vehicle speed. When in neutral, requests to
8.9
Transmissions
learning the new load-based shift points, but after

that it will handle the shifting automatically.
Low
Low (L) is located at the lower end of the four-
position selector switch located at the end of the
SmartShift control lever. To select L, press in the
neutral lock button and move the selector switch to
the position below D.
When in low, the current gear is maintained. Re-
quests to upshift are not enabled.
IMPORTANT: If the engine is approaching over-
10/13/2003 f610679 speed, the UltraShift DM TCU will override the
current gear setting and upshift to prevent en-
Fig. 8.12, Neutral Display gine damage.
upshift or downshift are ignored. If the selector switch To enhance engine braking, downshifts are per-
is moved from neutral to drive while the vehicle is formed at higher rpm than normal.
moving, the transmission will shift into a gear within
the engine’s operating torque range. If L is selected from neutral while stopped, the ve-
hicle starts up in first gear and stays there until the
Before shutting down the engine, return the selector engine approaches overspeed.
switch to N. When the ignition is turned off, the trans-
mission will reset to neutral in a few minutes regard- Upshifting
less of the position of the shift lever.
To request an upshift with the transmission in drive,
Drive pull the control lever up (towards you). If the gear is
available, the transmission upshifts and the new gear
Drive (D) is directly below N on the four-position se- displays on the gear indicator. No skip shifts are
lector switch located at the end of the SmartShift available while upshifting.
control lever. To select D, press in the neutral lock
button and move the selector switch to the position No upshifts are available in low, except to prevent
below N. When drive is selected, the number of the engine overspeed.
currently selected forward gear (1 through 10) dis- If the transmission does not upshift quickly enough
plays on the gear indicator. See Fig. 8.10. after power-up or a load change, begin the shift
When in drive, requests to upshift or downshift are manually. The UltraShift DM TCU will learn the new
enabled. Either manual or automatic mode can be load-based shift conditions after three or four shifts.
selected on the slide switch. If the gear requested is unavailable, a tone will
More than one starting gear is available. To change sound. An unavailable request to upshift is not stored
the starting gear, press the brake pedal and select D in memory. The upshift must be requested again.
with the vehicle stopped. The current gear indicator
will display the starting gear. Move the shift lever up Downshifting
or down until the desired starting gear is displayed. NOTE: The driver can manually downshift at
The UltraShift DM TCU adapts to the working condi- any time, even when the slide switch is set to
tions of each vehicle and its driver. After power up or AUTO mode.
a load change, it needs to learn the new conditions.
To request a downshift with the transmission in drive
While learning, it may hold a gear too long before
or low, push the control lever down (away from you).
upshifting. Start the upshift manually. It may take
If the gear is available, the transmission downshifts
three or four shifts before UltraShift succeeds in
and the new gear displays on the gear indicator. Skip
shifts are available while downshifting.
8.10
Transmissions
For best engine braking, select low while moving. In The alerts continue until the clutch cools, the throttle
low, downshifts are performed at higher rpm than in is released, or the clutch is fully engaged.
drive.
System Problem
IMPORTANT: If the engine is approaching over-
speed, the UltraShift DM TCU will override the In the event of a problem, do the following steps:
current gear setting and upshift to prevent en- 1. Note the driving conditions at the time the prob-
gine damage. lem occurred.
If the gear requested is unavailable, a tone will 2. Record the status of the transmission at the time
sound. An unavailable request to downshift is not of the problem (AUTO or MAN mode, gear set-
stored in memory. The downshift must be requested ting R, N, D, or L, current gear, engine speed,
again. etc.)
When coasting to a stop, the UltraShift DM TCU 3. Reset the system, using the procedure below.
does not finish the downshift until the driver presses
down on the throttle pedal again. Reset Procedure
IMPORTANT: A downshift request can never Transmission operation can sometimes be restored
result in a shift into neutral, even if the vehicle is by doing the following reset procedure:
in the drive position in the lowest possible gear. 1. Stop the vehicle when it is safe to do so. Set the
Before starting down a hill, slow down. Downshift to parking brake.
a speed that you can control without hard pressure 2. Place the selector switch in neutral and turn off
on the service brakes. the ignition.
Before entering a curve, slow down to a safe speed. 3. Check all harness connectors as described in
Downshift if necessary. This lets you use some Chapter 11.
power through the curve to help the vehicle be more
stable on the turn. It also allows you to regain speed 4. Wait at least two minutes with the engine shut
faster as you come out of the curve. down.
5. Restart the engine.
Ultrashift Diagnostics
If the problem continues, contact an authorized
Clutch Protection Fault Freightliner or Eaton service facility.
Excessive clutch slippage creates heat and reduces
the life of the clutch. These are some conditions Locked In Gear
which lead to clutch abuse: If the transmission becomes locked in gear, a dash
(-) will appear on the current gear indicator when the
• Using the throttle to hold the vehicle on a
vehicle is restarted during the reset procedure.
grade
• Starting the vehicle in too high a gear
NOTE: If the transmission becomes locked in
gear while the vehicle is moving, increased
• Overloading the vehicle braking effort may be required to stop the ve-
• Using high idle with the vehicle in gear hicle.
The UltraShift DM TCU is programmed to prevent If the current gear indicator displays a dash during
clutch abuse. When the clutch overheats, the follow- power-up with the selector switch in neutral, do the
ing alerts take place: following steps:
• The "TRANS TEMP" light comes on 1. Make sure the parking brake is set.
• The current gear indicator displays "CA" 2. Turn off the ignition and wait at least two min-
utes.
• A warning tone sounds at one second intervals
3. Apply brakes.
8.11
Transmissions
4. With the service brakes applied, release the NOTE: Neutral is always available during opera-
parking brake. tion. When in neutral, upshift and downshift re-
5. Make sure the selector switch is in neutral and quests are ignored. If the mode selector switch
turn on the ignition key. Do not attempt to start is moved from neutral to forward (F) while the
the engine at this time. vehicle is moving, the transmission will shift into
a gear causing the engine to go to a high torque
6. If necessary to get the transmission to shift into
neutral, release the pressure on the brake pedal
level, under the engine’s rated torque.
slightly.
Selecting a Starting Gear
7. Once the UltraShift DM TCU reaches neutral, a
1. Select forward (F) by sliding the selector switch
solid "N" will appear on the current gear indicator
and the vehicle will start. Make sure the service downward to the next position below the neutral
brakes are applied and the parking brake is set. position.
If the current gear indicator continues to display a NOTE: When forward is selected, the transmis-
dash, contact an authorized Freighliner or Eaton ser- sion controller is signaled to engage the default
vice facility. starting gear.
2. Select a different starting gear by pulling upward
Meritor SureShift on the control while the vehicle is stopped and in
Forward, before disengaging the clutch to en-
Refer to the Meritor website for additional informa- gage the selected gear.
tion, www.arvinmeritor.com.
NOTE: Each pull upward on the control in-
Operation, Meritor SureShift creases the starting gear by one gear, but no
higher than fourth gear. The number of the se-
Manual Mode lected starting gear is displayed for one second
There is no slide switch on the Meritor SureShift con- and then the signal to disengage the clutch "CL"
trol. Only the manual mode is available. is displayed. Disengaging the clutch will engage
the selected starting gear, which will now be
Driver Message Center stored in memory as the default starting gear.
Gear information is presented to the driver via the However, when the transmission controller is
level III ICU Driver Message Center. The current for- reinitialized at the beginning of another power
ward numerical gear is displayed until a new gear is cycle, the starting gear will default to the origi-
requested. During the shifting process, the letters nally preprogrammed starting gear. The trans-
"SH" appear until the shift is completed. Then, the mission may also be programmed so that it is
newly engaged numerical gear is displayed. When not possible to select a starting gear other than
neutral (N) is engaged, "N" will appear on the mes- the preprogrammed default starting gear.
sage display screen. When reverse (R) is engaged,
"RL" will appear on the message display screen. Upshifting
IMPORTANT: The information shown on the With the transmission in forward (F), request an up-
message display screen indicates the state of shift by pulling upward on the control. If the re-
the transmission only, not the state of the quested gear is available, the transmission will up-
SmartShift control. shift.
Neutral Position NOTE: If a requested gear is not available, an

audible warning will sound and a message will
Neutral (N) is in the center of the three positions of appear on the message display screen advising
the selector switch at the end of the control. Select that the gear is not available. An unavailable
neutral by sliding the mode selector switch to the requested upshift is not stored in memory. The
center position.
8.12
Transmissions
upshift must be requested again. All shift re- ZF Meritor FreedomLine

quests with the clutch disengaged, while the
vehicle is in motion, will be ignored. Skip shifting Automated Transmissions
is not available with the Meritor version of Refer to the Meritor website for additional informa-
SmartShift. tion, www.arvinmeritor.com.
Downshifting General Information, FreedomLine
With the transmission in forward (F), request a down- The ZF Meritor™ FreedomLine is a fully-automated
shift by pushing downward on the control. If the re- manual transmission that features only an accelera-
quested gear is available, the transmission will down- tor and brake pedal in the cab. Clutch actuation is
shift. fully automated. On Freightliner vehicles, it will be
NOTE: If a requested gear is not available, an operated by a custom version of the SmartShift™
audible warning will sound and a message will controller. On Century Class S/T vehicles, dash mes-
appear on the message display screen advising sages will appear on the SmartDash™ (ICU2M).
that the gear is not available. An unavailable This transmission requires an additional 10-liter air
requested downshift is not stored in memory. reservoir. After any transmission service, it will be
The downshift must be requested again. All shift necessary to charge this tank with air before the ve-
requests with the clutch disengaged, while the hicle can be operated.
vehicle is in motion, will be ignored. Skip shifting
is not available with the Meritor version of Operation, FreedomLine
SmartShift. While in the forward position in the 1. With the parking brake engaged and/or the brake
lowest available gear, a downshift request will pedal pressed down, select neutral (N) by press-
not cause a shift into neutral. ing in the safety release and moving the selector
switch to the center position. See Fig. 8.13.
Reverse 2. With the transmission in neutral, start the engine.
1. To select reverse (R), slide the mode selector Allow the air pressure to build to 100 psi (689
switch upward to the next position above the kPa) to ensure clutch engagement before moving
Neutral position. the vehicle.
NOTE: Reverse low (RL) is the default reverse 3. With air pressure built up, select drive (D) by
gear. pressing in the safety release and moving the
selector switch downward to the position below
2. Select reverse high (RH) by pulling upward on neutral. Release the parking brake and/or pedal.
the control before disengaging the clutch.
NOTE: When D is selected, the transmission
NOTE: It is not possible to shift between low controller starts up in the default starting gear.
range reverse and high range reverse with the
vehicle in motion. If reverse is selected above 4. Press down on the accelerator pedal to allow the
the minimum detectable speed in Forward, an vehicle to move forward. The vehicle will not
move until the pedal is depressed.
audible warning will sound and a warning mes-
sage will appear on the message display
screen. WARNING
Using the Clutch A vehicle equipped with the FreedomLine fully-
automated transmission can roll backwards when
Use the clutch to start and stop the vehicle. stopped on a hill or grade, or when the vehicle is
starting from a stop on a hill or grade. This can
result in serious personal injury or property dam-
age.
8.13
Transmissions
• To shift down, push the lever down (away from

5 6
7
you).
4 On the driver message center display, the first char-
3 8
acter is blank to indicate manual mode.
NOTE: Automatic shifting is possible only in for-
ward gear. When the selector switch is in re-
9
1 verse (R), all shifts are done manually, regard-
2 less of the position of the slide switch.
10
11 Gear Positions
11/11/2002 f270080
Neutral
To upshift manually, pull the lever up (towards you). To
downshift manually, push the lever down (away from Neutral (N) is in the center of the three-position se-
you). lector switch located at the end of the SmartShift
1. SmartShift Control Lever control lever. To select neutral, press in the safety
2. Slide Switch (forward driving mode switch) release and move the selector switch to the center
3. MAN Position (on slide switch) position.
4. AUTO Position (on slide switch)
5. Upshift Direction Neutral is always available during operation. When in
6. Reverse Position (on selector switch) neutral, requests to upshift or downshift are ignored.
7. Selector Switch If the selector switch is moved from neutral to drive
8. Safety Release while the vehicle is moving, the transmission will shift
9. Neutral Position (on selector switch) into a gear within the engine’s operating torque
10. Drive Position (on selector switch) range.
11. Downshift Direction
Fig. 8.13, SmartShift Controller (FreedomLine custom Reverse
version) To select reverse (R), press in the safety release and
move the selector switch upward to the position
5. To stop on a hill or grade, press and hold the above neutral.
brake pedal to keep the vehicle from moving.
NOTE: When the selector switch is in reverse
6. To start from a full stop on hill or grade, quickly
(R), all shifts are done manually, regardless of
move your foot from the brake pedal and press
firmly on the accelerator pedal. the position of the slide switch.
The vehicle must come to a complete stop before
Automatic and Manual Modes selecting reverse. If reverse is selected with the ve-
The SmartShift selector has a slide switch located on hicle moving, an audible warning will sound. Once
the body of the control lever just before the paddle the vehicle has come to a complete stop, reverse low
widens out. The slide switch controls the forward can be engaged.
driving mode, automatic or manual. There are two reverse gears. Reverse low (RL) is the
In automatic drive mode, upshifts and downshifts are default reverse gear. To select reverse high (RH),
made by the transmission without driver intervention. pull the control lever up (towards you). You can shift
Press in the safety release, move the selector switch between RL and RH "on the fly," without stopping
to drive (D), and press down on the accelerator first.
pedal. On the driver message center display, the first
character is a special character to indicate automatic Upshifting
mode. NOTE: A request to upshift or downshift can
In manual drive mode, upshifts and downshifts are only be accepted in the manual mode.
made by the driver:
• To shift up, pull the lever up (towards you).
8.14
Transmissions
With the transmission in drive, to request an upshift,

pull the control lever up (towards you). If the gear is 1
available, the transmission will upshift.
An unavailable request to upshift is not stored in
07
memory. The upshift must be requested again. Skip
shifting in manual mode is not available with the ZF
Meritor version of SmartShift.
03/21/2002 f600996c
Downshifting 1. Driver Display Screen
NOTE: A request to upshift or downshift can
Fig. 8.14, SmartDash Display
only be accepted in the manual mode.
With the transmission in drive, to request a down- The first character of the display is either blank, to
shift, push the control lever down (away from you). If indicate the transmission is in manual mode, or an
the gear is available, the transmission will downshift. up-and-down arrow to indicate the transmission is in
automatic mode.
An unavailable request to downshift is not stored in
memory. The downshift must be requested again. NOTE: Pre-production vehicles will have a small
Skip shifting in manual mode is not available with the numeric "10" in place of the up-and-down arrow
ZF Meritor version of SmartShift. when in automatic mode.
IMPORTANT: A downshift request can never The next two characters indicate the current gear.
result in a shift into neutral, even if the vehicle is For forward drive gears, this appears as a two-digit
in the drive position in the lowest possible gear. number (Examples: "03, "11"). For reverse, two let-
ters appear, either "RL" for low reverse (the default),
Selecting a Non-Default Starting Gear or "RH" for high reverse. For neutral, a single letter
"N" appears.
NOTE: For the clutch to engage, pressure in the
primary air system must be at least 100 psi (689 Eaton Fuller Range-Shift
kPa).
Transmissions
1. Select drive (D) by pressing in the safety release
and moving the selector switch downward to the Refer to the Eaton website for additional information,
position below neutral. www.roadranger.com.
2. Select manual mode (MAN) by moving the two-
position slide switch towards the steering column
General Information, Eaton Range-
until it is in the manual position. Shift
3. To increase the starting gear, pull the lever up To operate a range-shift transmission, move the shift
(towards you). To decrease the starting gear, lever through all of the low gear positions, then acti-
push the lever down (away from you). vate the range switch. This provides an additional set
of ratios in the high range. Using the same shift lever
4. Select automatic mode (AUTO), if desired, by positions as used in low range, move the shift lever
moving the two-position slide switch away from through each position as before. On some models,
the steering column until it is in the automatic po- the initial low gear is used only in low range.
sition.
Eaton Fuller Range-Shift transmissions are not syn-
Driver Message Center chronized in the front section, but the range section
is synchronized to prevent grinding gears during
On the Century Class S/T, the gear is displayed on range shifts.
the driver display screen in the SmartDash™ (ICU2M)
message center. See Fig. 8.14. IMPORTANT: Not all lever positions are used in
each range and the shift patterns vary between
8.15
Transmissions
transmissions. Be sure to read the shift pattern For all conditions, use the highest gear that is
decal on the dash for the operating instructions still low enough to start the vehicle moving with
for the specific transmission installed in your ve- engine idling, and without slipping the clutch
hicle. excessively.
2. Use the clutch brake to stop gear rotation when
9-Speed RT, RTO, and RTX Models shifting into low (or 1st) or reverse when the ve-
Eaton Fuller 9-speed transmissions have a 5-speed hicle is stationary. The clutch brake is actuated
front section, and a 2-speed rear range section. On by depressing the clutch pedal all the way to the
the RT-8609 and all "A" and "B" ratio transmissions, floor.
the low gear is used only as a starting ratio. On "R" For normal upshifts and downshifts, only a partial
ratio transmissions, the high gear is used only as the disengagement of the clutch is necessary to
top gear. The remaining gear positions of the above break engine torque.
transmissions are used once in the low range and
once in the high range. See Fig. 8.15 for the shift 3. Do not make range shifts with the vehicle moving
patterns. in reverse gear.
4. Never attempt to move the range preselection
NOTE: The 3rd/7th and 4th/8th shift positions in
lever with the gear shift lever in neutral while the
the RT (direct ratio) and RTX-B (overdrive ratio) vehicle is moving. Preselection with the range
transmissions are opposite of the RTO (over- preselection lever must be made prior to moving
drive ratio) transmissions. The RTX-R ratio the shift lever out of gear into neutral.
transmissions have the 1st/5th shift positions
where LOW is in the A and B ratio transmis- 5. Do not shift from high range to low range at high
sions. The top gear in the RTX-R ratio transmis- vehicle speeds.
sions is called 9th gear. 6. Double-clutch between all upshifts and down-
shifts.
10-Speed RT, RTO, RTLO, and RTX
7. After your shifting ability improves, you may want
Models to skip some of the ratios. This may be done
Eaton Fuller 10-speed transmissions have ten selec- only when operating conditions permit, depend-
tive, evenly-spaced forward ratios. Each transmission ing on the load, grade, and road speed.
has a 5-speed front section, and a 2-speed rear
range section. The ten forward speeds are obtained Upshifting
by twice using a 5-speed shift pattern: the first time 1. Position the gear shift lever in neutral. Start the
in low range, the second time in high range. See engine, and bring the air system pressure up to
Fig. 8.16 for the shift patterns. 100 to 120 psi (689 to 827 kPa).
NOTE: The 4th/9th and the 5th/10th shift posi- 2. Position the range preselection lever down, into
tions in the RT (direct ratio) and RTX (overdrive low range.
ratio) transmissions are directly opposite in the
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor; shift into
RTO (overdrive ratio) transmissions.
low or 1st gear (Table 8.1), then engage the
clutch, with the engine at or near idle speed, to
Operation, Eaton Range-Shift start the vehicle moving. Accelerate to 80 per-
1. When operating off-highway, or under adverse cent of engine governed speed.
conditions, always use low gear (if so equipped) 4. Shift progressively upward from low or 1st gear,
when starting to move the vehicle. to the top gear in low range (Table 8.1), double-
When operating on-highway, with no load, or clutching between shifts, and accelerating to 80
under ideal conditions, use 1st gear when start- percent of engine governed speed.
ing to move the vehicle (except when equipped
with a 9-speed RTO transmission, then always
start in low gear).
8.16
Transmissions
A B C
5 7 5 8 6 8
1 3 1 4 2 4
D N
N N
6 8 E 6 7 5 7 9
2 4 2 3 1 3
03/13/96 f260027a
A. All RT and RTX-B Transmissions D. High Range

B. All RTO Transmissions E. Low Range
C. All RTX-R Transmissions
Fig. 8.15, Eaton Fuller 9-Speed Transmission Shift Patterns
A B Eaton Fuller Shift Progressions

Hi 7 9 Hi 7 10
R
2 4
R
2 5 TRANS. LOW RANGE HIGH
Lo Lo
MODEL Off-Highway On-Highway RANGE
C R R R
5 7
N N 8-Speed 1 3 1 3
Direct 6 8
(RT) 2 4 2 4
6 8 10 D 6 8 9 f260321 f260321 f260320
1 3 5 1 3 4
03/13/96 f260043a
9-Speed 5 7
R 1 3 R 1 3 R
Direct or
A. All RT and RTX Transmissions Overdrive
B. All RTO Transmissions LOW 6 8
(RT or 2 4 2 4
C. High Range RTX) f260322 f260323 f260324
D. Low Range
R R 6 8
2 4 2 4 R
Fig. 8.16, Eaton Fuller 10-Speed Transmissions Shift 9-Speed
Patterns Direct 5 7
(RTX-P) 1 3 1 3 9
f260325 f260325 f260326
CAUTION 9-Speed
R 1 4 R 1 4 R
5 8
To prevent damage to the range section syn- Overdrive 6 7

LOW LOW
(RTO) 2 3 2 3
chros, make sure the range preselection lever is f260327 f260327 f260328
in high range before moving the shift lever to 10-Speed 7 9
neutral. Leave the shift lever in neutral long Direct or
R 2 4 R 2 4 R
enough to be sure the range section has shifted. Overdrive 6 8 10
5. While in the top gear of the low-range shift pat- (RT or 1 3 5 1 3 5
RTX) f260329 f260329 f260330
tern, and ready for the next upshift, flip the range
7 10
preselection lever up into high range. Double- 10-Speed
R 2 5 R 2 5 R
clutch through neutral, and shift into the bottom Overdrive
gear in high range (Table 8.1). As the shift lever 6 8 9
(RTO) 1 3 4 1 3 4
passes through neutral, the transmission will au- f260331 f260331 f260332
tomatically shift from low range to high range.

Table 8.1, Eaton Fuller Shift Progressions
6. With the transmission in high range, shift pro-

gressively upward through each of the high
8.17
Transmissions
range gears (Table 8.1), double-clutching be-

Hi 5 5 7 7 1
tween shifts. R Dir OD Dir OD
Lo 1 3
Downshifting
1. With the transmission in high range, shift pro- A
gressively downward to the bottom gear in high N
range, double-clutching between shifts.
B
2. When in the bottom gear of the high-range shift 6 6
Dir OD
8 8
Dir OD
LOW
pattern, and ready for the next downshift, push 2 4 C D
the range preselection lever down into low range. 03/13/96 f260044a
Double-clutch through neutral, and shift into the A. High Range C. Overdrive (forward)
top gear of the low-range shift pattern. As the B. Low Range D. Direct Drive (rearward)
shift lever passes through neutral, the transmis- 1. Splitter Control Button
sion will automatically shift from high range to
low range. Fig. 8.17, Eaton Fuller 13-Speed Transmission Shift
Pattern
3. With the transmission in low range, downshift
through the low range gears as conditions re- models), or overdrive ratio (RTO models) of the split-
quire. ter gear. Ratios cannot be split while the transmis-
sion is in low range.
IMPORTANT: Never use the clutch brake when
downshifting, or as a brake to slow the vehicle. 18-Speed RTO Models
Eaton Fuller 18-speed transmissions have eighteen
Eaton Fuller Splitter and forward speeds and four reverse, consisting of a
Range-Shift Transmissions 5-speed front section and a 3-speed auxiliary sec-
tion. The auxiliary section contains low and high
Refer to the Eaton website for additional information, range ratios, plus an overdrive splitter gear. See
www.roadranger.com. Fig. 8.18 for the shift pattern.
General Information, Eaton Splitter 1

and Range-Shift 5
Dir
5
OD
7
Dir
7
OD
R 1 1 3 3
13-Speed RTLO Models Dir OD Dir OD
A
Eaton Fuller 13-speed transmissions have thirteen N
forward speeds and two reverse speeds. Each trans-
6 6 8 8
mission has a 5-speed front section, and a 3-speed Dir OD Dir OD B
LOW LOW
auxiliary section. The auxiliary section contains low- Dir OD 2 2 4 4
Dir OD Dir OD
and high-range ratios, plus an overdrive splitter gear. C D
See Fig. 8.17 for the shift pattern. 03/13/96 f260157a
All of the 13 speeds are controlled with one shift A. High Range C. Overdrive (forward)
lever. A range preselection lever and a splitter control B. Low Range D. Direct Drive (rearward)
button are built into the shift knob. The range prese- 1. Splitter Control Button
lection lever controls range selection and the splitter Fig. 8.18, Eaton Fuller 18-Speed Transmission Shift
control button (located on the side of the shift knob) Pattern
controls gear splits.
Low gear in the front section is used only as a start- One ratio in the front section (low) is used as a start-
ing ratio. The remaining four forward positions are ing ratio; it is never used when the transmission is in
used once in the low range and once in the high high range.
range. However, each of the four high range gear
positions can be split with the underdrive ratio (RT
8.18
Transmissions
The other four ratios in the front section are used 5. Never move the splitter control button while in
once in low range and once again in high range; neutral.
however, each of the five ratios (low–1–2–3–4) in low
6. Do not preselect with the splitter control button;
range and each of the four ratios (5–6–7–8) in high
after moving the control button, complete the
range can be split with the overdrive splitter gear.
shift immediately.
All of the 18 speeds are controlled with one shift
7. Except when downshifting from 5th direct to 4th
lever. A range preselection lever and a splitter control
gear, never push the range preselection lever
button are built into the shift knob. The range prese-
down into low range while operating in high
lection lever controls range selection and the splitter
range—the splitter will become inoperative.
control button (located on the side of the shift knob)
controls gear splits. 8. Do not shift from high range to low range at high
vehicle speeds.
Operation, Eaton Splitter and Range- 9. Do not make range shifts with the vehicle moving
Shift in reverse gear.
IMPORTANT: The shifter knob has an interlock 10. Never attempt to move the range preselection
feature that prevents the splitter control button lever with the gear shift lever in neutral while the
from being moved forward when the range pre- vehicle is moving. Preselection with the range
selection lever is down (in low range); when in preselection lever must be made prior to moving
high range and the splitter control button is in the shift lever out of gear into neutral.
the forward position, the range preselection 11. After your shifting ability improves, you may want
lever cannot be moved down. to skip some of the ratios. This may be done
only when operating conditions permit, depend-
1. When operating off-road, or under adverse condi- ing on the load, grade, and road speed.
tions, always use low gear when starting to move
the vehicle forward. Upshifting
When operating on-highway, with no load, or
1. Position the gear shift lever in neutral. Start the
under ideal conditions, use 1st gear when start-
engine, and bring the air system pressure up to
ing to move the vehicle forward.
100 to 120 psi (689 to 827 kPa).
For all conditions, use the highest gear that is
still low enough to start the vehicle moving with 2. Position the range preselection lever down, into
the engine at or near idle speed, and without low range. See Fig. 8.17 for 13-speed transmis-
slipping the clutch excessively. sions and Fig. 8.18 for 18-speed transmissions.
2. Use the clutch brake to stop gear rotation when 3. Make sure the splitter control button is in the di-
shifting into low (or 1st) or reverse when the ve- rect (rearward) position.
hicle is stationary. The clutch brake is actuated 4. For 13-speed transmissions:
by depressing the clutch pedal all the way to the
floor. Depress the clutch to the floor, shift into low or
1st gear; then engage the clutch, with the engine
For normal upshifts and downshifts, only a partial at or near idle speed, to start the vehicle moving.
disengagement of the clutch is necessary to Accelerate to 80 percent of engine governed
break engine torque. speed.
3. Use double-clutching between all upshifts and For 18-speed transmissions:
downshifts that require movement of the shift
Depress the clutch to the floor, shift into low;
lever. Splitting of the high range gears does not
then engage the clutch, with the engine at or
require movement of the shift lever.
near idle speed, to start the vehicle moving.
4. Never move the shift lever into low gear while in
To shift from low direct to low overdrive, move
high range.
the splitter control button (Fig. 8.18) into the
overdrive (forward) position, then immediately
8.19
Transmissions
release the accelerator. Press and release the the accelerator. Press and release the clutch
clutch pedal. After releasing the clutch, acceler- pedal. After releasing the clutch, accelerate
ate again. again.
5. For 13-speed transmissions: Continue upshifting through the shift pattern.
Double-clutch during lever shifts (6th to 7th to
Shift upward from low to 1st gear, 2nd, etc. until 8th); single-clutch during split shifts (6th direct to
4th gear, double-clutching between shifts, and 6th overdrive, etc.).
accelerating to 80 percent of engine governed
speed. See Fig. 8.17. For 18-speed transmissions:
For 18-speed transmissions: To shift from 5th direct to 5th overdrive, move the
splitter control button (Fig. 8.18) into the over-
Shift upward from low overdrive to 1st direct by drive (forward) position, then immediately release
first moving the splitter control button into the the accelerator. Press and release the clutch
direct (rearward) position (Fig. 8.18). Move the pedal. After releasing the clutch, accelerate
shift lever, double-clutching, to the 1st gear posi- again.
tion.
Continue upshifting through the shift pattern.
Continue upshifting through the shift pattern. Double-clutch during lever shifts (6th to 7th to
Double-clutch during lever shifts (1st to 2nd to 8th); single-clutch during split shifts (6th direct to
3rd to 4th); single-clutch during split shifts (1st 6th overdrive, etc.).
direct to 1st overdrive, etc.).
6. When in 4th gear (13-speed transmissions) or Downshifting
4th overdrive (18-speed transmissions) and 1. Downshift from 8th overdrive to 8th direct without
ready to shift up to 5th gear, use the range shift
moving the shift lever. Flip the splitter control but-
lever as follows:
ton to the direct (rearward) position, then imme-
For 13-speed transmissions: diately release the accelerator, and disengage
While in 4th gear, pull the range shift preselec- the clutch. Engage the clutch, and accelerate the
tion lever up, into high range. The transmission engine only after the transmission has shifted.
will automatically shift from low to high range as 2. Start the downshift from 8th direct to 7th over-
the shift lever passes through neutral. Then, dis- drive by flipping the splitter control button to the
engage the clutch; double-clutch through neutral; overdrive (forward) position; then, immediately
move the shift lever to 5th gear; engage the double-clutch through neutral, moving the shift
clutch, and accelerate the engine. lever from 8th to 7th gear.
For 18-speed transmissions: 3. Shift downward through each of the high range
While in 4th overdrive, pull the range shift prese- gears, alternating the procedures in steps 1 and
lection lever up, into high range. The transmis- 2, above, until reaching 5th direct.
sion will automatically shift from low to high 4. While in 5th direct and ready for the downshift to
range as the shift lever passes through neutral. 4th (13-speed transmissions) or 4th overdrive
Move the shift lever, double-clutching, to the 5th (18-speed transmissions), push the range prese-
gear position. Just before making final clutch en- lection lever down. Then, double-clutch through
gagement, move the splitter control button to the neutral and move the shift lever to the 4th gear
direct (rearward) position; then engage the clutch position. On 18-speed transmissions, move the
and accelerate. Do not move the control button splitter control button to the overdrive (forward)
while the shift lever is in neutral. position beforeengaging the clutch. Do not move
the control button while the shift lever is in neu-
7. Shift up through the high range gears as follows: tral.
For 13-speed transmissions: 5. Continue downshifting from 4th to 1st as follows:
To shift from 5th direct to 5th overdrive, move the For 13-speed transmissions:
splitter control button (Fig. 8.17) into the over-
drive (forward) position, then immediately release
8.20
Transmissions
Downshift through the low range gears as condi-

A 1 B
tions require.
5 8 5 7
For 18-speed transmissions: 1 4 1 3
Continue downshifting from 4th overdrive to 4th C

direct, then 4th direct to 3rd overdrive, 3rd over- N N
drive to 3rd direct, etc. Single-clutch when split
shifting (direct to overdrive, overdrive to direct). 6 7 D 6 8
Double-clutch when making lever shifts (4th to 2 3 2 4
3rd, 3rd to 2nd, etc.). E F
03/13/96 f260026a
downshifting, or as a brake to slow the vehicle. A. All RTO Transmissions
B. All RT and RTX Transmissions
C. High Range
Eaton Fuller Deep-Reduction D. Low Range
E. Deep Reduction IN (forward)
Transmissions F. Deep Reduction OUT (rearward)
1. Deep Reduction Button
Refer to the Eaton website for additional information,
www.roadranger.com. Fig. 8.19, Eaton Fuller 10-Speed RT, RTO and RTX
Model Transmissions Shift Patterns
General Information, Deep Reduction
ratio) transmissions are directly opposite in the
10-Speed RT, RTO and RTX Models RTO (overdrive ratio) transmissions.
Eaton Fuller 10-speed deep-reduction transmissions
have a 5-speed front section, and a 2-speed rear- Operation, Deep Reduction
range section, with a deep reduction gear. The low-
low, deep reduction gear is used only when operating IMPORTANT: The shifter knob has an interlock
under adverse conditions. Low gear in the front sec- feature that prevents the deep reduction button
tion is used only for rough, off-highway conditions, as from being moved forward when the range pre-
a starting ratio. The remaining four forward positions selection lever is up (in high range); when in low
are used once in the low range and once in the high range and the deep reduction button is in the
range. See Fig. 8.19 for the shift pattern. forward position, the range preselection lever
NOTE: The 3rd/7th and 4th/8th shift positions in cannot be moved up.
the RT and RTX-LL transmissions are opposite 1. For all driving conditions, use the highest gear
of the RTO-LL transmissions. that is still low enough to start the vehicle moving
with the engine idling, and without slipping the
15-Speed RT, RTO, and RTX Models clutch excessively.
Eaton Fuller 15-speed deep-reduction transmissions 2. Use the clutch brake to stop gear rotation when
have a 5-speed front section, and a 2-speed rear- shifting into low-low, low-1st (whichever is used
range section. They also have five additional deep as a starting ratio) or reverse, when the vehicle
reduction ratios. The 5-speed front section, and the is stationary. The clutch brake is actuated by de-
low and high range sections provide ten evenly and pressing the clutch pedal all the way to the floor.
progressively spaced forward speeds. The five deep For normal upshifts and downshifts, only a partial
reduction ratios are also evenly and progressively disengagement of the clutch is necessary to
spaced; however, they do overlap the low range ra- break engine torque.
tios, and should be used only when operating under
adverse conditions. See Fig. 8.20 for the shift pat- 3. Double-clutch between all upshifts and down-
terns. shifts.
NOTE: The 4th/9th, and the 5th/10th shift posi- 4. Never move the shift lever into low gear while in
tions in the RT (direct ratio) and RTX (overdrive high range.
8.21
Transmissions
10
A B
9
Lo Hi 7 9 8 1 Lo Hi 7 10
R 2 2 4 4 R 2 2 5 5
7 DR Lo DR Lo
DR DR Lo DR Lo DR
6
5
4 4
N 3 2 N
5 2
4 1
3
5
6 8 10 6 8 9
1 1 3 3 5 5 2 1 1 3 3 4 4
DR Lo DR Lo DR Lo 1 6 7 DR Lo DR Lo DR Lo
3
03/13/96 f260045a
A. Eaton Fuller RT and RTX transmissions shift pattern B. Eaton Fuller RTO transmissions shift pattern
1. High Range 4. High Range 6. Forward for IN
2. Low Range 5. Low Range 7. Rearward for OUT
3. Deep Reduction
Fig. 8.20, Eaton Fuller 15-Speed RT, RTO and RTX Model Transmissions Shift Patterns
5. Do not preselect with the deep reduction button. Table 8.2 for suggested shifting sequences. Deep
When making the shift from a deep reduction reduction gears are best suited for heavy loads and
ratio to a low range ratio, move the deep reduc- steep inclines. Low gear (in 10-speed transmissions)
tion button from a forward position to a rearward is best suited for off-highway use.
position, then complete the shift immediately.
The following instructions are recommended for start-
6. Never move the deep reduction button from a ing a loaded vehicle moving, under adverse condi-
rearward position to a forward position when the tions.
transmission is in high range.
1. Position the gear shift lever in neutral. Start the
7. Do not shift from high range to low range at high engine, and bring the vehicle air system pressure
vehicle speeds. up to 100 to 120 psi (689 to 827 kPa).
8. Do not make range shifts with the vehicle moving 2. Position the range preselection lever down, into
in reverse gear. low range.
9. Never attempt to move the range preselection 3. Move the deep reduction button to the forward
lever with the gear shift lever in neutral while the position, to engage the deep reduction gears.
vehicle is moving. Preselection with the range
4. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor; shift into
preselection lever must be made prior to moving
the shift lever out of gear into neutral. low-low gear (10-speed transmissions) or 1st
gear of deep reduction (15-speed transmissions);
10. After your shifting ability improves, you may want then engage the clutch, with the engine at or
to skip some of the ratios. This may be done near idle speed, to start the vehicle moving. Ac-
only when operating conditions permit, depend- celerate to 80 percent of engine governed speed.
ing on the load, grade, and road speed.
Upshifting
There are several patterns of upshifting, depending
on the vehicle load and the road conditions. See
8.22
Transmissions
Eaton Fuller Shift Progressions

DEEP REDUCTION LOW RANGE HIGH RANGE
TRANSMISSION
Adverse Conditions Off-Highway and On-Highway and Ideal
MODEL All Conditions
Only Adverse Conditions Conditions
R R R R 5 8
1 4 1 4
10-Speed RTO
LOW 6 7
LOW−
LOW 2 3 2 3
f260335 f260333 f260336 f260337
R R R R 5 7
1 3 1 3
10-Speed RTX LOW 6 8
LOW−
LOW 2 4 2 4
f260335 f260338 f260339 f260340
R R R 7 10
2
DR
5
DR Lo
2
Lo
5
Lo
2
Lo
5 R
15-Speed RTO
1 3 4 1 3 4 1 3 4 6 8 9
DR DR DR Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo
f260341 f260342 f260343 f260344
6
R 2 4 R 2 4 R 2 4 R 7
DR DR Lo Lo Lo Lo
15-Speed RT and RTX 6

1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 8 10
DR DR DR Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo
f260345 f260346 f260347 f260348
Table 8.2, Eaton Fuller Shift Progressions
5. For 10-speed transmissions: clutch through neutral, and shift into the bottom
gear in high range (see Table 8.2). As the shift
When ready for the next upshift, move the deep
lever passes through neutral, the transmission
reduction button rearward, then break the torque
will automatically shift from low range to high
on the gears by momentarily releasing the accel-
range.
erator or depressing the clutch pedal. Do not
move the shift lever. 8. With the transmission in high range, shift pro-
For 15-speed transmissions: gressively upward through each of the high
range gears (see Table 8.2), double-clutching
Shift upward from 1st gear of deep reduction to between shifts.
5th gear of deep reduction, double-clutching be-
tween shifts and accelerating to 80 percent of Alternate Upshifting Procedures (15-
engine governed speed. See Table 8.2. Speed Transmissions Only)
When ready for the next upshift, move the deep
The shift from deep reduction to low range can also
reduction button from the forward position to the
be made from 2nd, 3rd, or 4th gear of deep reduc-
rearward position, then double-clutch through
tion, but must be made to the next gear lower in the
neutral, and move the shift lever to the 4th gear
low range. The shift from 2nd gear of deep reduction
position in the low range.
to 1st gear in low range (or 3rd gear of deep reduc-
6. Shift upward from low gear (10-speed transmis- tion to 2nd gear in low range, and 4th gear of deep
sions) or 4th gear (15-speed transmissions), to reduction to 3rd gear in low range), is an upshift, and
the top gear in low range (see Table 8.2), the same procedure should be followed as that
double-clutching between shifts, and accelerating shown for shifting from 5th gear of deep reduction to
to 80 percent of engine governed speed. 4th gear in low range. See the above steps, under
the heading "Upshifting."
7. While in the top gear of the low-range shift pat-
tern, and ready for the next upshift, flip the range
preselection lever up into high range. Double-
8.23
Transmissions
Downshifting 10-Speed RM and RMX Models

1. With the transmission in high range, shift pro- Meritor 10-speed transmissions have ten evenly-
gressively downward to the bottom gear in high spaced forward ratios. Each transmission consists of
range, double-clutching between shifts. a 5-speed front section, and a 2-speed auxiliary sec-
tion. The ten forward speeds are obtained by twice
2. When in the bottom gear of the high-range shift
using a 5-speed shift pattern: the first time in low
pattern, and ready for the next downshift, push
range; the second time in high range. See Fig. 8.22
the range preselection lever down into low range.
for the shift pattern.
Double-clutch through neutral, and shift into the
top gear of the low-range shift pattern. As the
shift lever passes through neutral, the transmis-
Operation, Meritor Range-Shift
sion will automatically shift from high range to Reverse
low range.
To drive in reverse, push the range selector lever
3. With the transmission in low range, downshift down to put the transmission in the low range. Push
through the low range gears, as conditions re- the clutch pedal to the bottom of travel so the clutch
quire. brake slows the transmission for initial gear engage-
IMPORTANT: Never use the clutch brake when ment. Holding the clutch pedal at the bottom of
travel, shift into reverse.
downshifting, or as a brake to slow the vehicle.
Slowly release the clutch pedal to move the vehicle
Meritor Range-Shift in reverse.
Transmissions Upshifting
Refer to the Meritor website for additional informa- 1. To drive forward, make sure the vehicle is com-
tion, www.arvinmeritor.com. pletely stopped and the range selector lever is
pushed down to put the transmission in the low
General Information, Meritor Range- range.
Shift Push the clutch pedal to the bottom of travel so
the clutch brake slows the transmission for initial
9-Speed RM, RMO, and RMX Models gear engagement; holding the clutch pedal at the
Meritor 9-speed transmissions have a 5-speed front bottom of travel, shift into low.
section, and a 2-speed auxiliary section. The low 2. Slowly release the clutch pedal to begin moving
gear in the front sections of the "A" and "B" ratio the vehicle forward.
transmissions is used only as a starting ratio. The
high gear in the front section of the "R" ratio trans- 3. To upshift into 1st gear, only partial depression of
missions is used only as the top gear. The remaining the clutch pedal is needed. Do not push the
gear positions of the above transmissions are used clutch pedal all the way to the floor and engage
once in the low range and once in the high range. the clutch brake; instead, partially depress the
See Fig. 8.21 for the shift patterns. clutch pedal, and move the shift lever into neu-
tral.
NOTE: The 3rd/7th and 4th/8th shift positions in
the RM and RMX (direct ratio) are opposite of 4. Release the clutch, and allow the engine to de-
the RMO (overdrive ratio) transmissions. The celerate until the road speed and the engine rpm
match.
RMX-R ratio transmissions have the 1st/5th shift
positions where low is in the A and B ratio trans- 5. Partially depress the clutch pedal, and move the
missions. The top gear in the RMX-R ratio shift lever into first gear.
transmissions is called 9th gear. 6. Double-clutch and continue upshifting until you
reach the top gear in the low range, 4th gear in
9-speed models and 5th gear in 10-speed
models. See Table 8.3.
8.24
Transmissions
A B C
5 7 5 8 6 8
1 3 1 4 2 4
1
N N N
2
6 8 6 7 5 7 9
2 4 2 3 1 3
03/13/96 f260156a
A. All RM and RMX Transmissions B. All RMO Transmissions C. All RMX-R Transmissions
1. High Range 2. Low Range
Fig. 8.21, Meritor 9-Speed RM, RMO and RMX Model Transmissions Shift Patterns
A B Meritor Shift Progressions

7 9 7 10 TRANS. LOW RANGE HIGH
2 4 2 5 MODEL Off-Highway On-Highway RANGE
C 9-Speed 5 7
R 1 3 R 1 3 R
Direct or
N N Overdrive
LOW 6 8
D (RM or 2 4 2 4
6 8 10 6 8 9 RMX) f260322 f260321 f260320
1 3 5 1 3 4 6 8
R 2 4 R 2 4 R
9-Speed
03/13/96 f260155a
Direct 5 7
A. All RM and RMX Transmissions (RMX-R) 1 3 1 3 9
B. All RMO Transmissions f260325 f260325 f260326
C. High Range R R 5 8
1 4 1 4 R
D. Low Range 9-Speed
Overdrive 6 7
Fig. 8.22, Meritor 10-Speed RM, RMO and RMX Model (RMO) LOW
2 3 LOW
2 3
Transmissions Shift Patterns f260327 f260327 f260328
10-Speed 7 9
7. To upshift into high range—with the transmission R 2 4 R 2 4 R
Direct or
still in the highest low-range gear—move the Overdrive 6 8 10
range selector lever up to put the transmission (RM or 1 3 5 1 3 5
into high range, then partially depress the clutch RMX) f260329 f260329 f260330
pedal and move the shift lever into neutral. As R R 7 10

2 5 2 5 R
the shift lever passes through neutral, the trans- 10-Speed
mission will automatically shift from low range to Overdrive 6 8 9
high range. (RMO) 1 3 4 1 3 4
f260331 f260331 f260332
8. Release the clutch pedal, and let the engine slow

Table 8.3, Meritor Shift Progressions
until the road speed and engine rpm match.
9. Partially depress the clutch pedal, and move the 10. Double-clutch to continue upshifting.
shift lever into the lowest gear in the high range,
5th gear in 9-speed models and 6th gear in 10- Downshifting
speed models.
1. With the transmission in high range, shift pro-
gressively downward to the bottom gear in high
range, 5th gear in 9-speed models and 6th gear
8.25
Transmissions
in 10-speed models. Double-clutch between All of the thirteen speeds are controlled with one shift
shifts. See Table 8.3. lever. Built into the shift knob of the lever, are a
range selection lever and a splitter control button (on
2. When in the bottom gear of the high-range shift the side of the shift knob), that control range selec-
pattern, and ready for the next downshift, push tion and gear splits, respectively.
the range selection lever down into low range.
Double-clutch through neutral, and shift into the Low gear in the front section is used only as a start-
top gear of the low-range shift pattern. As the ing ratio. The remaining four forward positions are
shift lever passes through neutral, the transmis- used once in the low range and once in the high
sion will automatically shift from high range to range. However, each of the four high range gear
low range. positions can be split with the overdrive ratio of the
splitter gear. Ratios cannot be split while the trans-
3. With the transmission in low range, downshift mission is in low range.
through the low range gears as conditions re-
quire.
Operation, Meritor Splitter and
IMPORTANT: Never use the clutch brake when Range-Shift
IMPORTANT: The shifter knob has an interlock
Meritor Splitter and Range- feature that prevents the splitter control button
from being moved up when the range selection
Shift Transmissions lever is down (in the low range); when the trans-
Refer to the Meritor website for additional informa- mission is in the high range, and the splitter
tion, www.arvinmeritor.com. control button is up, the range selection lever
cannot be moved down.
General Information, Meritor Splitter
Reverse
and Range-Shift
To drive in reverse, push the range selector lever
13-Speed RMO Models down to put the transmission in the low range. Push
The Meritor RMO13–145A transmission has thirteen the clutch pedal to the bottom of travel so the clutch
forward speeds and two reverse speeds. Each trans- brake slows the transmission for initial gear engage-
mission consists of a 5-speed front section, and a ment; holding the clutch pedal at the bottom of travel,
3-speed auxiliary section. The auxiliary section con- shift into reverse.
tains low and high range ratios, plus, an overdrive Slowly release the clutch pedal to move the vehicle
splitter gear. See Fig. 8.23. in reverse.
Hi 5 5 7 7 1 Upshifting
R Dir OD Dir OD
Lo 1 3 1. To drive forward, make sure the vehicle is com-
A pletely stopped and the range selector lever is
pushed down to put the transmission in the low
N range.
B Push the clutch pedal to the bottom of travel so
C
6 6 8 8 the clutch brake slows the transmission for initial
LOW Dir OD Dir OD
D gear engagement; holding the clutch pedal at the
2 4
03/13/96 f260154a
bottom of travel, shift into low.
A. High Range C. Overdrive 2. Slowly release the clutch pedal to begin moving
B. Low Range D. Direct Drive the vehicle forward.
1. Splitter Control Button
3. To upshift into 1st gear, only partial depression of
Fig. 8.23, Meritor 13-Speed RMO Model Transmission the clutch pedal is needed. Do not push the
Shift Pattern clutch pedal all the way to the floor and engage
8.26
Transmissions
the clutch brake; instead, partially depress the release the clutch pedal. Accelerate the engine
clutch pedal, and move the shift lever into neu- only after the transmission has shifted.
tral.
2. To downshift from 8th direct to 7th overdrive, flip
4. Release the clutch pedal, and allow the engine the splitter control button up to the overdrive po-
to decelerate until the road speed and the engine sition, then immediately double-clutch through
rpm match. neutral, moving the shift lever from 8th to 7th
gear.
5. Partially depress the clutch pedal, and move the
shift lever into 1st gear. 3. Downshift through each of the high range gears
alternating the procedures in steps 1 and 2,
6. Double-clutch to continue upshifting until in fourth
above, until reaching 5th direct.
gear. See Table 8.3.
4. While in 5th direct, and ready for the next down-
7. To upshift into high range—with the transmission shift, push the range selection lever down into
still in 4th gear—push the range selection lever low range. Double-clutch through neutral, and
up to put the transmission into high range, then shift into 4th gear. See Fig. 8.23. As the shift
partially depress the clutch pedal and move the lever passes through neutral, the transmission
shift lever into neutral. As the shift lever passes will automatically shift from high range to low
through neutral, the transmission will automati- range.
cally shift from low range to high range.
5. With the transmission in low range, downshift
8. Release the clutch pedal, and let the engine slow through the low range gears as conditions re-
until the road speed and engine rpm match. quire.
9. Partially disengage the clutch, and move the shift
lever into 5th gear.
10. To upshift from 5th gear into 5th overdrive, flip
the splitter control button up to the overdrive po-
sition; then, immediately release the accelerator,
Eaton Fuller AutoSelect
and press and release the clutch pedal. It is not Automated Transmissions
necessary to move the shift lever when shifting
from direct to overdrive; the transmission will Refer to the Eaton website for additional information,
shift when synchronization with the engine’s www.roadranger.com.
speed is reached. Accelerate the engine only
after the transmission has shifted. General Information, AutoSelect
11. To shift from 5th overdrive to 6th direct, partially Eaton Fuller 10-speed AutoSelect automated trans-
disengage the clutch, shift into 6th—but before missions have 10 forward speeds and two reverse
engaging the clutch—flip the splitter control but- speeds. The transmission consists of a 5-speed front
ton down into the direct drive position; then en- section and a 2-speed rear section. The driver must
gage the clutch, and accelerate the engine. use the clutch to start and stop the vehicle.
Do not move the control button while the shift 10-Speed RTAO Models
lever is in neutral.
Eaton Fuller 10-speed transmissions have 10 forward
12. Shift upward through each of the high range
speeds and two reverse speeds. The transmission
gears, alternating the procedures in steps 10 and consists of a 5-speed front section and a 2-speed
11, above. rear section. The driver must use the clutch to start
and stop the vehicle.
Downshifting
When conditions are right for a shift, the transmission
1. Downshift from 8th overdrive to 8th direct without
Electronic Control Unit (ECU) notifies the driver with
moving the shift lever. Flip the splitter control but-
a tone from the Driver Command Console (DCC).
ton down to the direct drive position, then imme-
See Fig. 8.24. The driver, when ready to shift,
diately release the accelerator, and press and
breaks torque and the transmission goes to Neutral.
8.27
Transmissions
4
R
SOLID
1 VOLUME
4 6
N
1 3 5
SOLID SOLID
SERVICE
D
2 WAIT
H
HOLD 6
L 5 FLASHING
3 SOLID
2 7
B
A FLASHING
A
02/16/98 f270055 8
A. Console Top View SOLID
B. Select Handle Side View B
1. Shift Tone Volume 4. Upshift Button 02/25/98 F270056
Buttons 5. Detent Button A. Driver Display Module
2. Indicator Lamps 6. Downshift Button B. Driver Display Module Detail
3. Gear Position 1. Decrease Engine rpm Arrows
Indicator 2. Current Gear Position
Fig. 8.24, Driver Command Console (DCC) 3. Increase Engine rpm Arrows
4. 9th Gear Engaged
The driver then either increases or decreases engine 5. In 9th Gear, Preselected Toward 10th
6. Out Of Gear, Waiting For Engine/Transmission rpm
speed to synchronize the shift. When engine speed
To Synchronize
is correct, the transmission shifts automatically. 7. Engine/Transmission rpm Synchronized, Gear
The AutoSelect system consists of the following com- Engagement In Process
ponents. 8. 10th Gear Engaged
• The Driver Display Module, or DDM Fig. 8.25, Driver Display Module (DDM)
(Fig. 8.25), mounted on the dashboard, indi-
shift and downshift buttons and a gear select
cates gear position and the direction engine
lever detent button.
rpm needs to go for the next gear engage-
ment. When the gear select lever is in the "D" • The shifter performs shifts at the front portion
position, the display module indicates what the of the transmission. It preselects the shift to
driver must do to engage the next gear (decel- Neutral and completes the gear change after
erate or accelerate) by down and up arrows. driver input.
When the gear number is solid on the display,
that gear is fully engaged. When the gear num- • The Electronic Control Unit (ECU) consists of
ber is flashing the transmission is either out of two controllers: a transmission ECU and a sys-
gear, waiting for the engine and transmission tem ECU. The transmission ECU controls all
to synchronize, or the next gear engagement is transmission shift functions and the system
in process. ECU manages all vehicle interfaces for trans-
mission shift functions.
• The Driver Command Console, or DCC
(Fig. 8.24), replaces the shift lever and con- • An electronic range valve, controlled by the
trols the transmission’s shift patterns. There transmission ECU, is used to perform range
are indicators for the three forward positions: shifts.
drive, hold, and low, plus reverse and neutral
positions. Shift tone volume buttons and ser-
vice and wait lamps are also located on the
console. The gear select handle contains up-
8.28
Transmissions
Operation, AutoSelect 4. Apply the throttle.

NOTE: If the shift is missed, control engine
WARNING speed in the direction indicated by the arrows
on the display to synchronize engine rpm with
If the engine cranks in any gear other than neu- the transmission’s speed.
tral, have the vehicle serviced immediately. If the
vehicle is started in gear it will suddenly move Downshifting ("D" and "H" modes
forward or backward, which could result in per- without an engine load)
sonal injury and damage to property and the
transmission. 1. Decelerate.
Reverse NOTE: In the "H" mode, depress the downshift

button on the gear select handle. Depress twice
NOTE: To drive in reverse, first depress the to skip shift.
clutch.
2. An audible tone sounds from the Driver Com-
1. Move the gear select lever to the "R" position. mand Console when the transmission is ready to
2. shift. The arrows on the Driver Display Module
Select either LO or HI reverse by depressing ei-
indicate the direction engine rpm needs to go to
ther the downshift or upshift button (Fig. 8.24) on
synchronize the next shift. The next gear is
the gear select handle.
shown on the display.
3. Release the clutch.
3. Gently roll on the throttle. The upcoming gear
NOTE: The clutch must be used for starting and flashes on the display when neutral is engaged.
stopping. The arrows disappear, the current gear position
stops flashing, and engine rpm increases and
Upshifting ("D" and "H" modes) becomes steady.
NOTE: It is the driver who decides when to up- 4. Continue decelerating.
shift or downshift. When in the "D" (drive) mode, NOTE: If the shift is missed, control engine
an upcoming shift can be cancelled by putting speed in the direction indicated by the arrows
the gear select lever in the "H" mode or by on the display to synchronize engine rpm with
using the gear select handle buttons. When in the transmission’s speed.
the "H" (hold) mode, it is possible to skip shift
gears if the road and load conditions permit. Downshifting ("D" and "H" modes with
1. Accelerate. an engine load)
NOTE: In the "H" mode, depress the upshift but- 1. Decelerate.
ton on the gear select handle. Depress twice to NOTE: In the "H" mode, depress the downshift
skip shift. button on the gear select handle. Depress twice
2. An audible tone sounds from the Driver Com- to skip shift.
mand Console when the transmission is ready to 2. An audible tone sounds from the Driver Com-
shift. The arrows on the Driver Display Module mand Console when the transmission is ready to
(Fig. 8.25) indicate the direction engine rpm shift. The arrows on the Driver Display Module
needs to go to synchronize the next shift. The indicate the direction engine rpm needs to go to
next gear is shown on the display. See Fig. 8.25. synchronize the next shift. The next gear is
3. Release the throttle for the shift to neutral. The shown on the display.
upcoming gear flashes on the display when neu- 3. Release the throttle. The upcoming gear flashes
tral is engaged. The arrows disappear, the cur- on the display when neutral is engaged.
rent gear position stops flashing, and engine rpm
decreases and becomes steady.
8.29
Transmissions
4. Apply throttle to synchronize engine rpm with the

transmission’s speed. The arrows disappear, the
current gear position stops flashing, and engine
rpm increases and becomes steady.
NOTE: If the shift is missed, control engine
speed in the direction indicated by the arrows
on the display to synchronize engine rpm with
the transmission’s speed. 1
Eaton Fuller Top 2 and

Lightning Semi-Automated
Transmissions 2
Refer to the Eaton website for additional information, 09/12/2002 f261190

www.roadranger.com. 1. Shift Button
2. Service Light
General Information, Top 2 and
Fig. 8.27, Lightning Shift Knob
Lightning
10-Speed RTL/ RTLO and 13-Speed/18- • The button-only shift is a gear split shift that
occurs by moving the shift button.
Speed RTLO Models
• The lever-only shift occurs when the shift lever
Top 2 and Lightning transmissions have 10 selective
is moved without moving the shift button.
forward ratios and a 2-speed rear section. Half of the
10 speed ratios are shifted with the shift lever and • The combination button/lever shift is a gear
the other half are shifted by moving the shift button. ratio change that occurs when both the shift
They shift automatically between the two top gears. button and the shift lever are moved.
See Fig. 8.26 for the Top 2 shift knob, and Fig. 8.27
for the Lightning shift knob. The small red service light on the Lightning shift
knob illuminates for a few seconds when the engine
is turned on. This confirms that the transmission
electronics are operating properly.
B
Fuller NOTE: If the service light stays on or flashes, or
does not illuminate when the engine starts, take
the vehicle to an authorized Freightliner or
Eaton service facility as soon as possible.
A
Fuller See Fig. 8.28 for the shift patterns for Lightning and
10-speed Top 2, 13-speed Top 2, and 18-speed Top
C 2.
09/25/96 f260399
A. Shift Button Operation, Top 2/Lightning

B. Gears 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 when button is forward
C. Gears 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 when button is rearward
CAUTION
Fig. 8.26, Top 2 Shift Knob
Keep the transmission in gear at all times while
There are three types of shifts used with these trans- the vehicle in motion. Coasting in neutral could
missions. Button-only and combination button/lever lead to transmission damage.
shifts are both full gear changes. The lever-only shift
skips a gear.
8.30
Transmissions
HI H H HI H H
HI 4 8 5 L 7 L 5 L 7 L
R
LO R R H H
R 3 7 LO 1 3 LO 1 L 3 L
NEUTRAL NEUTRAL NEUTRAL
H
2 6 A 6 H
AUTO 6 AUTO
U LO
L
LO
H L
1 5 T 2 4
L
2 H
4 H
O L L
A B C
02/17/98 f270057
A. 10-Speed Shift Pattern B. 13-Speed Shift Pattern C. 18-Speed Shift Pattern
Fig. 8.28, Eaton Fuller Top 2 Shift Patterns
1. When operating off-highway, or under adverse 7. Avoid hunting for neutral by moving the gear shift
conditions, always use low gear (if so equipped) lever from the left rail to right rail. This action can
when starting to move the vehicle. cause excessive transmission wear.
When operating on-highway, with no load, or
under ideal conditions, use 1st gear when start-
Upshifting
ing to move the vehicle. 1. Position the gear shift lever in neutral. Start the
For all conditions, use the highest gear that is engine, and bring the air system pressure up to
still low enough to start the vehicle moving with 100 to 120 psi (689 to 827 kPa).
engine idling, and without slipping the clutch ex- 2. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor. Shift into
cessively. 1st gear, then engage the clutch, with the engine
2. Use the clutch brake to stop gear rotation when at or near idle speed, to start the vehicle moving.
shifting into 1st or reverse when the vehicle is 3. Button-only shift—Preselect the next gear by
stationary. The clutch brake is actuated by de- sliding the shift button forward. Break torque by
pressing the clutch pedal all the way to the floor. releasing the throttle or by depressing the clutch
For normal upshifts and downshifts, only a partial pedal. Decrease engine speed to synchronize
disengagement of the clutch is necessary to the engine speed with the transmission speed.
break engine torque. The shift will complete when the engine rpm has
decreased to the proper speed.
3. Do not make range shifts with the vehicle moving
in reverse gear. The button-only shift is used for gear changes
from 1st to 2nd, 3rd to 4th, 5th to 6th, 7th to 8th,
4. The shift lever should not be moved to the center and 9th to 10th.
or left rail positions at vehicle speeds above 40
mph (65 km/h). 4. Lever-only shift—Break torque by releasing the
throttle and depressing the clutch pedal. Double-
5. Double-clutch between all upshifts and down- clutching, move the shift lever to the next desired
shifts. gear position. Decrease engine speed to syn-
6. After your shifting ability improves, you may want chronize the engine speed with the transmission
to skip some of the ratios. This may be done speed. The shift will complete when the engine
only when operating conditions permit, depend- rpm has decreased to the proper speed.
ing on the load, grade, and road speed. The lever-only shift is used to skip a full gear.
With the shift button rearward—1st to 3rd, 3rd to
8.31
Transmissions
5th, 5th to 7th, and 7th to 9th. With the shift but- 5th, 5th to 3rd, and 3rd to 1st. With the shift but-
ton forward—2nd to 4th, 4th to 6th, 6th to 8th, ton forward—10th to 8th, 8th to 6th, 6th to 4th
8th to 10th. and 4th to 2nd.
NOTE: Lever-only shifts skip an entire gear ratio IMPORTANT: Never use the clutch brake when
and will require the engine rpm to decrease downshifting, or as a brake to slow the vehicle.
twice the amount of a normal shift.
5. Combination button/lever shift—Preselect the CAUTION
next gear by sliding the shift button rearward.
Break torque by releasing the throttle and de- Do not attempt a combination button/lever down-
pressing the clutch pedal. Double-clutch and shift at too high an engine speed (generally
move the shift lever to the next desired gear po- above 1400 rpm). Doing so could result in dam-
sition. age to the engine, transmission, and/or driveline.
The combination button/lever shift is used for 3. Combination button/lever shift—With the throttle
gear changes from 2nd to 3rd, 4th to 5th, 6th to still applied, preselect the next gear by sliding
7th and 8th to 9th. the shift button forward. Break torque by releas-
ing the throttle and depressing the clutch pedal.
Downshifting Double-clutch and move the shift lever to the
next desired gear position.
CAUTION The combination button/lever shift is used for
gear changes from 9th to 8th, 7th to 6th, 5th to
Do not attempt a button-only downshift at too 4th, and 3rd to 2nd.
high an engine speed (generally above 1400
rpm). Doing so could result in damage to the en-
gine, transmission, and/or driveline.
Meritor Engine Synchro Shift
1. Button-only shift—With the throttle still applied,
(ESS) Automated Models
preselect the next gear by sliding the shift button Refer to the Meritor website for additional informa-
rearward. Break torque by releasing the throttle tion, www.arvinmeritor.com.
or by depressing the clutch pedal. Increase en-
gine speed to synchronize the engine speed with General Information, ESS
the transmission speed. The shift will complete
when the engine rpm has increased to the 9–Speed and 10–Speed M, MO, RS, and
proper speed. RSX Models
The button-only shift is used for gear changes Meritor 9-speed and 10-speed automated transmis-
from 10th to 9th, 8th to 7th, 6th to 5th, 4th to 3rd, sions do not require use of the clutch except to start
and 2nd to 1st. and stop the vehicle.
NOTE: Meritor M and MO series ESS transmis-
CAUTION sions are available only on vehicles equipped
with either Caterpillar or Cummins electronic
Do not attempt a lever-only downshift at too high
an engine speed (generally above 1000 rpm). engines. Meritor RS and RSX series ESS trans-
Doing so could result in damage to the engine, missions are only available on vehicles
transmission, and/or driveline. equipped with Detroit Diesel electronic engines.
2. Lever-only shift—Break torque by releasing the The ESS system works with the engine fuel
throttle and depressing the clutch pedal. Double- control system to automatically synchronize en-
clutching, move the shift lever to the next desired gine rpm to road speed during gear changes.
gear position. Use the clutch only to start and stop the vehicle
The lever-only shift is used to skip a full gear. and to shift into forward or reverse. The HI and
With the shift button rearward—9th to 7th, 7th to LO ranges are automated, so the driver does
8.32
Transmissions
not have to select ranges. A "break torque" fea- The shift-intent switch (Fig. 8.29) is the upper switch
ture allows the driver to move the shift lever and on the driver’s side of the shift handle. It has four
take the transmission out of gear without chang- positions and controls upshifting and downshifting by
ing throttle position. Throttle position can be communicating to the ECM the driver’s intention of
maintained while braking and downshifting changing gears.
through the gears when stopping the vehicle, as NOTE: If the system switch is OFF, use the
well as on steep grades. shift-intent switch to select between ranges.
The major components of the ESS system are Push the top of the switch (Fig. 8.30) to select
the system switch, shift-intent switch, input and the HI range on upshifts and the bottom of the
output shaft speed sensors, a Neutral position switch (Fig. 8.31) to select the LO range on
sensor, and an electro-pneumatic solenoid. downshifts.
Operation, ESS
The ESS system collects and relays information per-
taining to the positions of the shift-intent and system
switches (Fig. 8.29), transmission input and output
shaft speeds, and shift lever position. The informa-
tion is received by the engine Electronic Control B
A
Module (ECM) which signals the fuel control system 02/17/98 f270059
to increase or decrease engine rpm to match road
speed. The ECM also controls HI and LO range se- A. Press the top portion (engage the first position) of
the shift-intent switch to begin an upshift.
lection in the auxiliary case on the rear of the
B. Press the top portion again (engage the second
transmission. position) to break torque.
Fig. 8.30, ESS Upshifting Using the Shift-Intent Switch
B
A
02/17/98 f270060
A. Press the bottom portion (engage the first position)
of the shift-intent switch to begin a downshift.
B. Press the bottom portion again (engage the second
position) to break torque.
02/17/98 f270058
1. Shift-Intent Switch 2. System Switch Fig. 8.31, ESS Downshifting Using the Shift-Intent
Switch
Fig. 8.29, ESS Shift Handle
The system switch (Fig. 8.29) is the lower switch lo- WARNING
cated on the driver’s side of the shift handle. It con-
trols ESS system operation. When in the down posi- Make sure that the transmission is in neutral (N)
tion, the system is operating and the word ON is when you start the vehicle. If the vehicle is
visible on the switch. In the up position, the word started in gear, it will suddenly move forward or
OFF is visible, the system is not operating, and the backward which could result in personal injury
transmission can be shifted manually. and damage to property and the transmission.
8.33
Transmissions
Starting The Vehicle 1.2 Apply pressure with the shift lever toward
the neutral position.
1. Ensure that the shift lever is in the neutral (N)
position. 1.3 Press the top portion of the shift-intent
switch again, far enough so that the
2. Push the clutch pedal to the bottom of its travel switch goes into a second position inside
to engage the clutch brake. the body of the shift handle. Then release
3. Start the engine. the switch. See Fig. 8.30. This will break
torque.
4. Slowly release the clutch pedal.
1.4 Immediately move the shift lever to the
5. Allow the system air to build up to the range neutral position.
specified on the gauge.
1.5 Allow engine rpm to slow down enough to
6. Release the parking brake. synchronize with road speed.
Shifting Into a Starting Gear 1.6 Move the shift lever to the next higher
gear.
CAUTION 2. To upshift through the rest of the gears, repeat
the substeps above. Before each upshift, push
Always use the proper starting gear. Do not shift the top of the shift-intent switch into the shift
into neutral and coast, as this will result in dam- handle body to break torque. The range shift is
age to the transmission. automatic.
1. Press the system switch down, into the ON posi- 3. To skip a gear, press the shift-intent switch into
tion, to activate the ESS system. the shift handle body, while in Neutral, one time
for every gear that is skipped.
2. Press the top portion of the shift-intent switch.
IMPORTANT: Use the clutch brake only when Downshifting
initially engaging a gear with the vehicle stand- 1. To downshift into the next lower gear.
ing still.
1.1 Press the bottom portion of the shift-intent
3. Push the clutch pedal to the bottom of its travel switch.
so that the clutch brake stops the transmission
input shaft from rotating. 1.2 Apply pressure with the shift lever toward
the neutral position.
4. Move the shift lever and engage a starting gear.
1.3 Press the bottom portion of the shift-intent
5. Slowly release the clutch pedal. switch again, far enough so that the
NOTE: If you do not shift the transmission out of switch goes into a second position inside
the body of the shift knob. Then release
neutral into a gear within two seconds, the ESS the switch. See Fig. 8.31. This will break
system will "time out" and deactivate. The trans- torque.
mission returns to manual operation. To reacti-
vate the ESS system, press the shift-intent 1.4 Immediately move the shift lever to the
switch again. See the following procedures for neutral position.
upshifting and downshifting for instructions on 1.5 Allow engine rpm to speed up enough to
how to use the shift-intent switch. synchronize with road speed.
1.6 Move the shift lever to the next lower
Upshifting
gear.
1. To upshift into the next higher gear:
2. To downshift through the rest of the gears, re-
1.1 Press the top portion of the shift-intent peat the substeps above. Before each downshift,
switch. push the bottom of the shift-intent switch into the
8.34
Transmissions
shift handle body to break torque. The range mission can be programmed to operate as a
shift is automatic. 4-speed, 5-speed, or 6-speed unit in the "primary"
shift mode. If needed, a "secondary" shift mode can
3. To skip a gear, press the shift-intent switch into be programmed to provide another shift configuration
the shift handle, while in neutral, one time for to optimize vehicle use under different operating con-
every gear that is skipped. ditions. To activate a secondary shift mode, or other
special function programmed into the electronic con-
Reverse trol unit (ECU), depress the Mode button. "Mode On"
1. Press the system switch on the shift handle so is displayed in the indicator panel just above the
that it is in the ON position and the ESS system push buttons. A label just above the Mode button
is activated. identifies the special function.
2. Push the clutch pedal to the bottom of its travel NOTE: Each time a push button is depressed
so that the clutch brake stops the transmission on the shift selector, a short beep will be heard.
input shaft from rotating. This indicates that the ECU has received input
3. Move the shift lever and engage reverse. to change operation.
4. Slowly release the clutch pedal and move the The HD-series transmission system is designed to
vehicle in the reverse direction. warn the driver of transmission malfunctions. The
driver of a vehicle equipped with these transmissions
NOTE: If a HI reverse range is required, follow should know the extent of the warning system in
the steps below. order to safely operate the vehicle. See Chapter 2
for information on the warning system.
5. Press the system switch on the shift handle so
that it is in the OFF position and the ESS system Operation, Allison
is deactivated.
6. Press the top portion of the shift-intent switch to CAUTION
engage the HI range.
7. Push the clutch pedal to the bottom of its travel The engine should never be operated for more
so that the clutch brake stops the transmission than 30 seconds at full throttle with the transmis-
input shaft from rotating. sion in gear and the output stalled. Prolonged
operation of this type will overheat the transmis-
8. Move the shift lever and engage reverse. sion fluid and will result in severe damage to the
9. Slowly release the clutch pedal and move the transmission.
vehicle in the reverse direction. 1. Start the engine, then check the digital display
See Fig. 8.32 for two ESS 9-speed shift patterns on the "push button shift selector." Under "Se-
and one ESS 10-speed shift pattern. lect" at the top of the unit, the display should al-
ways show the "primary" shift mode. Under
"Monitor," the gear the transmission is in should
Allison Automatic be displayed.
Transmissions
Refer to the Allison website for additional information,
WARNING
www.allisontransmission.com. Never shift from neutral (N) to drive (D) or re-
verse (R) at engine speeds above idle. The ve-
General Information, Allison hicle will lurch forward or backward, which could
HD-series automatic transmissions have six forward cause property damage and personal injury.
speeds and one reverse speed. See Fig. 8.33. 2. Use reverse (R) to back the vehicle. Completely
These transmissions have electronic shift controls stop the vehicle before shifting from a forward
that can be programmed to allow the use of different gear to reverse or from reverse to forward. There
numbers of geared speeds. For instance, the trans- is only one reverse gear.
8.35
Transmissions
R 5 7 R 6 8 R 7 9
R 1 3 R 2 4 R 2 4
N N N
LO 2 4 1 3 1 3 5
9
6 8 5 7 6 8 10
A B C
02/17/98 f270061
A. 9-Speed Shift Pattern with LO B. 9-Speed Shift Pattern C. 10-Speed Shift Pattern
Gear
Fig. 8.32, Meritor ESS 9- and 10-Speed Shift Patterns
automatically upshift near the governed speed of

the engine. A partially depressed position of the
pedal will cause the upshifts to occur at a lower
engine speed.
4. Occasionally the road, load, or traffic conditions
1 make it desirable to restrict the automatic shifting
to a lower range. The lower the gear range, the
2 greater the engine braking power.
Use the up or down arrow buttons on the shift
selector to reach the desired gear. The "Select"
indicator will display your choice, and the "Moni-
tor" indicator will show the selected gear once it
is reached.
NOTE: In the lower gear ranges, the transmis-
sion will not upshift above the highest gear se-
lected unless the engine governed speed is ex-
ceeded.
10/31/94 f600369a
1. Indicator Panel 2. Mode ID 5. Use neutral (N) and apply the parking brake
when the vehicle is parked with the engine run-
Fig. 8.33, Allison Push Button Shift Selector ning.
3. Select drive (D) for all normal driving conditions.
The vehicle will start out in 1st gear, and as CAUTION
speed increases, the transmission will upshift
through each gear automatically. As the vehicle Do not allow the vehicle to coast in neutral. This
slows down, the transmission will downshift to can result in severe transmission damage. Also,
the correct gear automatically. no engine braking is available.
The pressure of your foot on the accelerator
pedal influences the automatic shifting. When the
pedal is fully depressed, the transmission will
8.36
9
Rear Axles
Meritor Single Drive Axles With Traction Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Meritor Drive Axles With Main Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Meritor Main Differential Lock Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Meritor Tandem Drive Axles With Interaxle Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
Meritor Interaxle Differential Lockout Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
Eaton Single Reduction Axles With Controlled Traction Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
Eaton 2-Speed Tandem Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
Eaton Interaxle Differential Lockout Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
Rear Axles
Meritor Single Drive Axles WARNING

With Traction Equalizer
Be especially careful when driving under slippery
Some Meritor single drive axles are equipped with a conditions with the differential locked. Though
traction equalizer which is a load sensing, self- forward traction is improved, the vehicle can still
actuating feature. A traction equalizer provides nor- slip sideways, causing possible loss of vehicle
mal differential action where traction is good. When control, personal injury, and property damage.
one wheel begins to spin faster than the other, clutch
plates in the differential housing automatically en-
gage, delivering power to both wheels. There is no
Meritor Main Differential Lock
operator control with this feature. Operation
A traction equalizer occasionally tends to slip in a To lock the main differential and obtain maximum
jerking motion, producing irregular intervals of sharp traction under slippery conditions, move the control
noises. This generally occurs when the vehicle is op- switch to the lock position.
erating at low speeds on fairly sharp turns. This con-
dition, called slip-stick, is corrected by adding a fric-
tion modifier to the axle lubricant. This additive tends WARNING
to reduce the static coefficient of friction to a value
Lock the main differential only when the vehicle
equal to, or lower than, the sliding coefficient.
is standing still or moving less than 25 mph (40
See Group 35 of the Century Class Trucks Mainte- km/h). Never lock the main differential when the
nance Manual for additional information on friction vehicle is traveling down steep grades or when
modifiers and when to add them to axle lubricants. the wheels are slipping. This could damage the
differential or lead to loss of vehicle control,
CAUTION causing personal injury and property damage.
NOTE: On some vehicles, the differential lock
Tire sizes on both rear wheels should be the system is connected through the low speed
same on axles equipped with a traction equalizer. range of the transmission. If this system is used,
If not, excessive wear may occur in the traction
equalizer.
the transmission must be in the low speed
range for the differential to fully lock.
Meritor Drive Axles With Main If the vehicle is moving, maintain a constant vehicle
speed while engaging the differential lock. Briefly let
Differential Lock up on the accelerator to relieve torque on the gear-
The Meritor main differential lock is a driver- ing, allowing the differential to fully lock. The indica-
controlled traction device operated from the vehicle tor light should come on and the buzzer should
cab. A switch allows the driver to lock or unlock the sound on vehicles so equipped. When the differential
differential. An indicator light comes on when the dif- is fully locked, the turning radius will increase be-
ferential lock is engaged. An optional buzzer can also cause the vehicle understeers. See Fig. 9.1. Drive
be used to indicate differential lock engagement. cautiously and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
The main differential lock provides maximum traction To unlock the main differential, move the control
under slippery conditions. When the differential lock switch to the unlock position. Briefly let up on the
is engaged, the clutch collar completely locks the accelerator to relieve torque on the gearing, allowing
differential case, gearing, and axle shafts together, the differential to fully unlock.
maximizing traction of both wheels and protecting NOTE: If the differential lock system is con-
against spinout. Under normal traction conditions, do nected through the low speed range of the
not engage the differential lock. Operate the axle transmission, shifting out of low speed range will
with differential action between both wheels. also unlock the differential.
9.1
Rear Axles
the rear axle, so both axles turn together at the same

A speed. The LOCK position should be used when the
vehicle encounters poor traction conditions; however,
it also increases drivetrain and tire wear and should
be used only when improved traction is required.
B
Meritor Interaxle Differential
Lockout Operation
To lock the interaxle differential and achieve maxi-
02/09/96 f350079a mum pulling power when approaching slippery or
poor road conditions, move the lockout control valve
A. Turning Radius When Differential is Locked
(engaged)—Understeer Condition to LOCK while maintaining vehicle speed, before en-
B. Turning Radius When Differential is Unlocked countering the poor road conditions. Let up momen-
(disengaged) tarily on the accelerator to engage the differential
lock. Proceed over poor road conditions with caution.
Fig. 9.1, Turning Radius Do not wait until traction is lost and the tires are
spinning before locking the interaxle differential.
When the differential lock disengages, the indicator
light will go off and the buzzer will stop.
CAUTION
Meritor Tandem Drive Axles Do not actuate the interaxle differential control
With Interaxle Differential valve while the tires are slipping. Do not operate
the vehicle continuously with the interaxle differ-
Meritor tandem drive axles with an interaxle differen- ential locked during extended good road condi-
tial have a lockout feature. Differential lockout is con- tions. To do so could result in damage to the axle
trolled by a switch (Fig. 9.2) on the control panel. gearing and excessive tire wear.
To unlock the interaxle differential, move the lockout
control valve to UNLOCK while maintaining vehicle
speed, after leaving the poor road conditions. Let up
momentarily on the accelerator to allow the shift,
then resume driving at normal speed.
Eaton Single Reduction Axles

With Controlled Traction
Differential
09/26/95 f350141 The controlled traction differential system is a differ-
ential assembly designed to transfer torque from the
Fig. 9.2, Interaxle Differential Control slipping wheel to the one with traction.
In the UNLOCK position, there is differential action A control valve (Fig. 9.3) in the cab is actuated by
between the two axles. The differential compensates the driver to engage and disengage the controlled
for different wheel speeds and variations in tire size. traction feature.
Keep the interaxle differential unlocked for normal
driving on roads where traction is good. Disengaged, the axle has differential action all the
time. One wheel will spin independently of the other,
In the LOCK position, the interaxle differential is if slippery conditions are encountered.
locked out and the driveshaft becomes a solid con-
nection between the two axles. Power entering the Engaged, wheel slippage and spinout are minimized.
forward axle is also transmitted straight through to
9.2
Rear Axles
moving on the highway, the axle can be shifted to

high range.
To shift the axle to the high range: Make sure the
interaxle differential lockout is disengaged; keep the
throttle pedal down; move the range preselection
lever to high; release the throttle pedal until the axle
shifts; then accelerate.
To shift the axle to the low range: Keep the throttle
pedal down; move the range preselection lever to
low; release and depress the throttle pedal quickly to
09/26/95 f350142 increase engine rpm. The axle will shift to low range.
Fig. 9.3, Traction Control Differential Control NOTE: When parking the vehicle, put the axle in
the low range with the engine running. Engage
NOTE: The controlled traction differential can be the clutch and transmission to be sure the axle
engaged at any speed, except during spinout. has completed the shift into the low range.
Some vehicle motion is required to ensure en-
Eaton 2-Speed Tandem Axles gagement of the axle.
Each axle of the 2-speed tandem contains a high IMPORTANT: Refer to "Eaton Interaxle Differen-
range single reduction gear set and a low range tial Lockout Operation" for precautions that must
double reduction gear set. The operator selects the be taken when shifting axles in relation to the
desired axle range by moving the range preselection interaxle differential lockout.
lever located on the shifter knob. See Fig. 9.4.
Eaton Interaxle Differential
Lockout Operation
Interaxle differential lockout systems include a lock-
A out control valve (Fig. 9.2) located in the cab, and an
air-operated shift unit mounted on the forward rear
axle.
B When the interaxle differential lockout control valve is
in the LOCK position, the interaxle differential is
01/19/95 f260056a locked out and the driveshaft becomes a solid con-
nection between the two axles. Power entering the
A. High Range B. Low Range
forward axle is also transmitted straight through to
Fig. 9.4, Range Preselection Lever the rear axle, so both axles turn together at the same
speed. The LOCK position should be used when ad-
Dual Range 2-Speed Tandem Axle ditional traction is needed.
Operation with Multispeed
Transmissions CAUTION
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 8, "Transmissions," for Engage the lockout only when stopped or at slow
detailed information on how to use the range speeds and never when the wheels are spinning.
Do not operate the axles on dry pavement with
preselection lever. the lockout engaged for prolonged periods. Use
On multispeed transmission applications, the 2-speed only when additional traction is needed under
axle should be used as a dual range. Use the low adverse road conditions. Disengage the interaxle
range when operating off-highway or when starting differential lockout before shifting the axle to a
out with a heavy load on-highway. After the vehicle is higher range.
9.3
Rear Axles
When the interaxle differential lockout control valve is

in the UNLOCK position, the interaxle differential al-
lows differential action between the axles thereby
compensating for different wheel speeds and varia-
tions in tire size. Keep the interaxle differential lock-
out in the UNLOCK position for normal driving on
roads where traction is good. On 2-speed axles, the
interaxle differential must be in the UNLOCK position
before attempting to shift the axles out of low or high
range.
9.4
10
Fifth Wheels and Trailer
Couplings
Holland Fifth Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
ASF Castloc II and Simplex Series Fifth Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6
Fontaine Fifth Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Premier Trailer Couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15
Holland Trailer Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.17
Fifth Wheels and Trailer Couplings
Holland Fifth Wheels

General Information
The 2535 sliding fifth wheel models incorporate a
Model 3500 fifth wheel (Fig. 10.1), equipped with
either an air-operated release slide, or a manual re- 1
lease slide. Sliding fifth wheel assemblies are
mounted on a baseplate which permits forward and
rear movement along notched rails. Plungers are
meshed into teeth on the baseplate to lock the slid-
ing mechanism. Disengagement of the sliding mem-
ber is accomplished when the plungers are with-
drawn (manually or air-operated), releasing the fifth 3
wheel assembly so that it can be positioned for opti- 2
mum weight distribution over the tractor axles. 05/19/93 f310369
NOTE: Baseplate rails not shown.
1. Kingpin Lock Control Handle
2. Double-Ended Air Cylinder
3. Slide Plunger Release
Fig. 10.2, Air-Operated Release Slide Assembly

1
2
1
3
01/19/95 f310046a 2
1. Kingpin Lock Mechanism
2. Kingpin Control Handle
3. Mounting Bracket
Fig. 10.1, Holland Fifth Wheel 3
4
The air-operated release slide assembly (Fig. 10.2)
contains a double-ended air cylinder which locks and 02/01/96 f310438
unlocks both sides of the sliding member at the
NOTE: Baseplate rails not shown.
same time. The air cylinder is activated by a two-
position air-control valve in the tractor cab. 1. Kingpin Lock Control Handle
2. Plunger Release Handle
The manual release slide assembly (Fig. 10.3) is 3. Plunger Release Spring
equipped with a single release lever. Pulling on the 4. Plunger
release lever unlocks both plungers.
Fig. 10.3, Manual Release Slide
Type "B" Kingpin Lock Mechanism locks to close in a 360 degree grip around the shoul-
(Fig. 10.4) der and neck of the kingpin, positioning sliding yokes
The Type "B" kingpin lock mechanism utilizes two between the lock halves and tapered rib members of
spring-loaded lock halves. The final forward motion the fifth wheel understructure. The kingpin can be
of the kingpin into the open lock halves forces the released only by manually operating the kingpin lock
10.1
2 2
A B
1
1
3
3
5
4
07/11/2000 f310841
A. Closed Position, Locked B. Open Position, Unlocked

1. Release Handle and Spring 3. Lock Halves 5. Sliding Yoke
2. Adjustment Nut 4. Lock Pivot
Fig. 10.4, Type "B" Kingpin Lock Mechanism (bottom view)
control handle. The adjustment nut will compensate

for wear on the lock or kingpin. WARNING
Lockguard (Fig. 10.4) Keep the fifth wheel plate lubricated to prevent
binding between the tractor and trailer. A binding
The Holland lockguard is a device that prevents a fifth wheel could cause erratic steering and loss
false lockup, and is used on all models. The Lock- of vehicle control, possibly resulting in serious
guard is a spring-tensioned, smooth-surfaced tongue personal injury or death.
that the kingpin passes over and depresses when
entering the lock mechanism. The Lockguard will 2. The kingpin lock mechanism must be fully open,
prevent the locks from engaging before the kingpin and the fifth wheel plate must be completely lu-
fully enters the locks. If the kingpin enters the fifth bricated with chassis grease. For lubrication in-
wheel incorrectly and does not depress the tongue, structions, see Group 31 of the Century Class
the locks are unable to close. Trucks Maintenance Manual.
3. Position the tractor so that the fifth wheel lock
Fifth Wheel Locking Operation opening is in line (both vertically and horizontally)
Locking the Fifth Wheel Mechanism with the trailer kingpin. The kingpin should be in
a position to enter the throat of the locking
mechanism, to prevent a false lockup. See
NOTICE Fig. 10.5. Adjust the trailer landing gear to give
enough alignment height so that the fifth wheel
Before attempting to lock or unlock the fifth picks up the trailer on the fifth wheel ramps.
wheel lock mechanism of a sliding type fifth
wheel, the slide release plungers must be in the 4. With the fifth wheel lock opening aligned with the
locked position. This prevents the sliding mem- trailer kingpin, back the tractor slowly toward the
ber from moving rapidly to the far forward or trailer, making sure that the kingpin correctly en-
rearward position, which could damage the fifth ters the throat of the locking mechanism. When
wheel or kingpin. the trailer is picked up by the fifth wheel, stop the
tractor, then continue slow backward motion until
1. Chock the front and rear of the trailer tires to positive lockup occurs.
prevent the trailer from moving.
5. Apply the tractor parking brakes.
10.2
3
2
2
3
1 B
4
4
A
11/07/94 D C f310106a
A. Locks open.
B. Locks closed.
C. Kingpin correctly entering the lock. Note how the depressed tongue allows lock halves to close completely around the
neck and shoulder of the kingpin.
D. Kingpin incorrectly entering the lock. Note how the steel tongue prevents lock halves from closing, preventing false
lockup.
1. Fifth Wheel Plate 3. Kingpin
2. Trailer 4. Lockguard
Fig. 10.5, Lockguard Mechanism (rear view)
sulting in air leaks, or exposed or broken wires,

WARNING potentially affecting trailer brake or electrical sys-
tems.
Adjust the locks correctly to a maximum clear-
ance of 1/8 inch (3 mm). Incorrect adjustment of 7. After lockup is completed, connect the tractor-to-
the lock could cause the trailer to disconnect, trailer air system lines and electrical cable to the
possibly resulting in serious personal injury or trailer. Take care to prevent dirt or foreign mate-
death. rial from entering the air lines.
6. Make a visual check for proper kingpin lockup. 8. Charge the air brake system with air. Make sure
Release the tractor parking brakes. Test for king- that the air connections do not leak.
pin lockup by pulling on the trailer against the 9. Retract the trailer landing gear and secure the
chocks. Check for correct maximum clearance ratchet handle.
between the lock halves. If more than 1/8-inch
(3.2-mm) clearance exists between the lock 10. Remove the chocks from the trailer tires.
halves, the lock must be adjusted. See Group 11. The load distribution on the front steering axle
31 of the Century Class Trucks Workshop and rear drive axle(s) will have a direct effect on
Manual for adjustment procedures. the steering control of the vehicle.
Determine the front and rear axle weights by
NOTICE weighing the vehicle on scales designed for this
Always make sure the connect-hanger/support purpose.
keeps the trailer air hoses and electrical cables The maximum axle weight ratings are shown on
positioned so that they do not rub on anything. the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
Rubbing may wear through hoses or cables, re- (FMVSS) label or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
10.3
Standard (CMVSS) label attached to the left rear 6. Release the kingpin locking mechanism by pull-
door post of the tractor. The desired load on the ing the kingpin lock control handle (Fig. 10.1) to
axle is no less than 80 percent of the maximum the outward position.
axle weight rating, but in no instances should the
7. Slowly drive the tractor away from the trailer.
axle load exceed the maximum axle weight rat-
ing given on the FMVSS or CMVSS label.
Fifth Wheel Slide Operation
WARNING 1. Connect the trailer kingpin to the tractor fifth
wheel. For instructions, refer to Holland "Fifth
Do not overload any tractor axle by improperly Wheel Locking Operation" in this chapter.
loading the trailer. This could cause erratic steer-
2. After positive lockup of the fifth wheel lock
ing and loss of vehicle control, possibly resulting
mechanism has been accomplished, release the
in serious personal injury or death.
sliding member using one of the following meth-
Unlocking the Fifth Wheel Lock ods:
Mechanism 2.1 For air-operated models, set the cab-
operated control switch (Fig. 10.6) to
1. Apply the tractor parking brakes. UNLOCK.
2. Pull the trailer air supply valve to cut off the air
supply to the trailer.
3. Chock the front and rear of the trailer tires to
WARNING
Do not use the trailer air supply for parking trail-
ers not equipped with spring parking brakes.
This applies the trailer service brakes only. As air
bleeds from the trailer brake system, brake appli-
9/07/95 f310489
cation is lost. This could allow the unattended
vehicle to roll away, possibly resulting in serious Fig. 10.6, Cab Control, Fifth Wheel Slide
personal injury or death.
2.2 For manual release models, pull the re-
4. Lower the trailer landing gear until the weight is
removed from the fifth wheel. lease lever (Fig. 10.3) using a release
hook, or other suitable tool. Make sure
5. Disconnect the tractor-to-trailer air system lines both slide plungers have released. See
and electrical cable. Plug the air lines to prevent Fig. 10.7. If the plungers have not re-
dirt or foreign material from entering the lines. leased (come out), lower the trailer land-
ing gear to relieve pressure on the
NOTICE plungers.
3. Lower the trailer landing gear just enough to re-
Before attempting to lock or unlock the fifth move the weight from the tractor.
wheel, the slide release plungers must be in the 4. Pull the trailer air supply valve to cut off the air
locked position. This prevents the sliding mem- supply to the trailer.
ber from moving rapidly to the far forward or 5. Chock the front and rear of the trailer tires to
rearward position, which could damage the fifth prevent the trailer from moving.
wheel or kingpin.
10.4

NOTE: The fifth wheel may have to be moved
slightly to enable the locking plungers to enter
the fully locked position.
8. Lock the sliding member into position using one
of the following methods:
A
1
WARNING
Check to be sure that the slide plungers are in
the locked position. Failure to achieve complete
lockup may allow disengagement of the tractor
from the trailer, possibly resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
8.1 For air-operated models, set the cab-
operated control switch to LOCK. Visually
check the slide plungers to make sure
they are engaged in the fully locked posi-
B tion. See Fig. 10.7.
1
8.2 For manual release models, trip the re-
01/24/96 f310439 lease lever (Fig. 10.3) using a release
hook or other suitable tool. Make sure that
A. Locked (engaged) B. Unlocked (released)
both plungers have locked (retracted into
1. Plunger their pockets), and are fully engaged in
Fig. 10.7, Plunger Positions the rack teeth. See Fig. 10.7. It may be
necessary to move the tractor slightly
while keeping the trailer brakes locked.
WARNING 9. The amount of load distribution on the front
Do not use the trailer air supply for parking trail- steering axle and rear drive axle(s) will have a
ers not equipped with spring parking brakes. direct effect on the steering control of the vehicle.
This applies the trailer service brakes only. As air Determine the front and rear axle weights by
bleeds from the trailer brake system, brake appli- weighing the vehicle on scales designed for this
cation is lost. This could allow the unattended purpose.
vehicle to roll away, possibly resulting in serious
personal injury or death. The maximum axle weight ratings are shown on
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(FMVSS) label or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
NOTICE Standard (CMVSS) label attached to the left rear
door post of the tractor. The desired load on the
After moving the fifth wheel to the desired posi- axle is no less than 80 percent of the maximum
tion, be sure the trailer landing gear will not, at axle weight rating, but in no instances should the
any time, come in contact with the tractor frame axle load exceed the maximum axle weight rat-
or other components. Make sure that the front of ing given on the FMVSS or CMVSS label.
the trailer will not come in contact with the rear
of the cab or with other components if they ex-
tend beyond the rear of the cab.
6. Slowly move the tractor forward or backward
until the fifth wheel is in the desired location.
10.5
WARNING 5
4
Do not overload any tractor axle by improperly
loading the trailer. This could cause erratic steer- 6
ing and loss of vehicle control, possibly resulting 3
in serious personal injury or death. 8
Fifth Wheel Lubrication 2
3
For lubrication instructions, see Group 31 of the

1 7
Century Class Trucks Maintenance Manual.
ASF Castloc II and Simplex 10/26/2010 f310445

Series Fifth Wheels 1. Baseplate 5. Slider Saddle Plate
2. Bolted Stop 6. Safety Latch
General Information 3. Baseplate Rail 7. Operating Rod
4. Fifth Wheel Mount 8. Operating Lever
The ASF Castloc® II and Simplex® series fifth wheels
are used for pulling trailers having the standard Fig. 10.9, Taperloc Slide, Manually-Operated Release
2-inch (51-mm) diameter kingpin. When installed as
a stationary fifth wheel (Fig. 10.8), they are bracket- locked position. The kingpin is released either by ac-
mounted to the tractor frame in a position that best tivating a manual operating rod, or if equipped with
distributes the trailer load over the tractor axles. Touchloc®, by a dash mounted release-knob, which
When used as a sliding fifth wheel (Fig. 10.9), they activates an air cylinder underneath the top plate.
are mounted on the Taperloc® sliding mount (air- The air cylinder activates the operating rod. The op-
operated or manual release). erating rod is located on the left side of the fifth
wheel for Castloc II and Simplex II fifth wheels, and
on the right side for the Simplex fifth wheel assem-
1
bly.
2 On sliding fifth wheels, the top plate is mounted on a
sliding saddle plate, which slides along the baseplate
3 attached to the tractor frame. The baseplate rails
allow forward and rear movement of the slide assem-
bly, for optimum weight distribution over the tractor
axles.
4 Tapered slots in the baseplate rails, aligned in 4-inch
(102-mm) increments, provide for location of the fifth
wheel along the baseplate. Retractable, spring-
actuated lockpins are positioned through the slots to
10/26/2010 f310353b hold the fifth wheel in the desired position. The lock-
pins are retracted either manually or by an air-
1. Lubricant Grooves 3. Operating Rod
2. Safety Latch 4. Mounting Bracket operated cylinder controlled from the cab.
The manually-operated slide contains an operating
Fig. 10.8, Simplex Stationary Fifth Wheel
rod (Fig. 10.9) which unlocks both sides of the plate
The fifth wheel lock mechanism for the trailer kingpin at the same time.
consists of a rotating jaw that grips the trailer kingpin The air-operated sliding saddle plate contains an air
and a spring-actuated lock. The jaw rotates on a jaw cylinder which moves the operating lever to unlock
pin during coupling and uncoupling operations. King- both sides of the plate at the same time. The air cyl-
pin lockup occurs when the kingpin is forced into the inder is activated by a two-position air-control valve
jaw and the operating rod handle moves to the in the tractor cab.
10.6
Fifth Wheel Lock Mechanism for Trailer pin to move out of the mechanism. With the jaw in
Kingpin (Fig. 10.10) the fully open position, the operating rod drops out of
the lockset position, and the fifth wheel is ready for
coupling. See Fig. 10.11.
2 4
3
1
1
6 2
5
1
3
B C
10/26/2010 f310446
A. Locked Position
B. Jaw movement compresses spring.
C. Fully open.
1. Operating Lever 4. Jaw Eccentric Pin 11/02/2010 f310447
2. Safety Latch 5. Lock 1. Safety Latch
3. Jaw 6. Spring 2. Operating Rod (locked)
3. Operating Rod (unlocked)
Fig. 10.10, ASF Castloc II and Simplex Series Kingpin
Locking Mechanism Operation Fig. 10.11, Simplex Kingpin Locking Mechanism,
Locking and Unlocking
The Castloc II and Simplex Series fifth wheel lock
mechanism consists of a rotating jaw and a spring- During coupling, the kingpin contacts and rotates the
actuated lock that grips the trailer kingpin. The jaw jaw into the locked position. This action automatically
rotates on an eccentric pin during coupling and un- moves the operating rod into the locked position.
coupling operations. The spring-actuated lock holds This securely locks the jaw around the kingpin. In the
the jaw in the locked position once kingpin lockup locked position the safety latch swings freely over the
has occurred. operating rod. See Fig. 10.12.
In the locked position, there is approximately 1/16- Fifth Wheel Locking and Unlocking
inch (1.6-mm) clearance between the jaw and king-
pin. The jaw eccentric pin can be removed and ro- Locking the Fifth Wheel Lock Mechanism
tated to compensate for wear and maintain an
approximate 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) clearance during
service. prevent the trailer from moving.
Placing the operating rod in the lockset position NOTICE

moves the lock away from the jaw. This action un-
locks the jaw so that it can be rotated by movement Before attempting to lock or unlock the fifth
of the kingpin. When the tractor is moved out from wheel lock mechanism of a sliding type fifth
under the trailer, the kingpin will rotate the jaw until wheel, the slide release pull handle, if so
the jaw is in the unlocked position, allowing the king- equipped, and the slide locking wedges must be
10.7
throat of the locking mechanism. Continue back-

ward motion until positive lockup occurs.
7. Make a visual check (even if equipped with the
1
Touchloc air-operated system) for positive king-
pin lockup. The trailer bed plate must be flush on
the fifth wheel plate surface. When positive
2 lockup has occurred, the fifth wheel operating
rod will have moved inward to the locked posi-
tion, and the safety latch will swing freely over
10/26/2010 f310448 the operating rod. See Fig. 10.12.
1. Safety Latch 2. Operating Rod
NOTE: Only when the operating rod is fully re-
Fig. 10.12, Simplex Kingpin Locking Mechanism, Safety tracted in the locked position will the safety latch
Latch (locked position) be freely rotated down.
in the locked position. This prevents the sliding 8. Release the tractor parking brakes. Test for king-
member from moving rapidly to the far forward or pin lockup by pulling on the trailer against the
rearward position, which could damage the fifth chocks.
wheel member or kingpin.
2. The fifth wheel jaw must be fully open. Make NOTICE
sure that the operating rod is in the unlocked po-
sition. The fifth wheel must be completely lubri- Always make sure the connect-hanger/support
cated with chassis or multi-purpose grease. For keeps the trailer air hoses and electrical cables
lubrication instructions, see Group 31 of the positioned so that they do not rub on anything.
Century Class Trucks Maintenance Manual. Rubbing may wear through hoses or cables, re-
sulting in air leaks, or exposed or broken wires,
potentially affecting trailer brake or electrical sys-
WARNING tems.
Keep the fifth wheel plate lubricated to prevent 9. After lockup is completed, connect the tractor-to-
binding between the tractor and trailer. A binding trailer air system lines and electrical cable to the
fifth wheel could cause erratic steering and loss trailer. Take care to prevent dirt or foreign mate-
of vehicle control, possibly resulting in serious rial from entering the air system lines.
10. Charge the air brake system with air. Make sure
3. Make sure the fifth wheel top plate is tilted so the that the air connections do not leak.
ramps are as low as possible. If equipped with
an air suspension, make sure the air bags are WARNING
completely inflated.
4. Position the tractor so that the center of the fifth Adjust the jaw pin if there is more than 1/8-inch
wheel is in line with the trailer kingpin. The king- (3-mm) clearance between the kingpin and the
pin should be in a position to enter the throat of lock. Incorrect adjustment could cause the trailer
the locking mechanism. See Fig. 10.10. Adjust to disconnect, possibly resulting in serious per-
the trailer landing gear so that the lower front sonal injury or death.
trailer edge contacts the top surface of the tilted 11. With the trailer wheels chocked and the brakes
fifth wheel plate, approximately 8 inches (20 cm) set, check for clearance between the kingpin and
before the fifth wheel center. the fifth wheel jaws by moving the tractor forward
5. With the fifth wheel lock opening aligned with the and backward against the locked kingpin. A
trailer kingpin, back the tractor slowly toward the clearance of approximately 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)
trailer, making sure that the kingpin enters the between the jaw and kingpin is allowable. When
clearance between the jaw and kingpin exceeds
10.8
1/8 inch (3 mm), adjust the jaw to restore the 4. Lower the trailer landing gear until the trailer
1/16-inch (1.6-mm) clearance between the jaw rises about 1/2 inch (13 mm).
and kingpin. For instructions, see Group 31 of
5. Disconnect the tractor-to-trailer air system lines
the Century Class Trucks Workshop Manual.
and electrical cable. Plug the air lines to prevent
12. Retract the trailer landing gear, and secure the dirt or foreign material from entering the lines.
ratchet handle.
13. Remove the chocks from the trailer tires. NOTICE
14. The load distribution on the front steering axle Before attempting to unlock the fifth wheel lock
and rear drive axle(s) will have a direct effect on mechanism of a sliding type fifth wheel, the slide
the steering control of the vehicle. operating rod (Fig. 10.9) must be in the locked
Determine the front and rear axle weights by position, and the slide lockpins must be in the
weighing the vehicle on scales designed for this locked position (fully inserted in baseplate rail
purpose. slots). This prevents the sliding member from
moving rapidly to the far forward or rearward po-
The maximum axle weight ratings are shown on sition, which could damage the fifth wheel mem-
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard ber or kingpin.
Standard (CMVSS) label attached to the left rear 6. If equipped with a manual kingpin lock release:
door post of the tractor. The desired load on the Release the kingpin lock mechanism by raising
axle is no less than 80 percent of the maximum the safety latch to the rear and pulling the lock
axle weight rating, but in no instances should the operating rod out and up into the lockset posi-
axle load exceed the maximum axle weight rat- tion. See Fig. 10.11. The offset of the lock con-
ings given on the FMVSS or CMVSS label. trol upper rod should bottom against the plate
casting above the hole. If the operating rod can-
not be pulled to the lockset position, back the
WARNING tractor slightly to release the kingpin force
Do not overload any tractor axle by improperly against the jaw.
loading the trailer. This could cause erratic steer- If equipped with an air-operated kingpin lock re-
ing and loss of vehicle control, possibly resulting lease: Pull the air-release knob on the dash.
in serious personal injury or death. From outside the cab, visually check that the op-
erating rod has bottomed out against the plate
Unlocking the Fifth Wheel Lock casting above the hole. See Fig. 10.11. If the
Mechanism operating rod isn’t in the unlocked position, back
the tractor slightly to release the kingpin force
1. Apply the tractor parking brakes. against the jaw.
2. Pull the trailer air supply valve to cut off the air IMPORTANT: If equipped with an air-operated
supply to the trailer. lock release, you still must make a visual check
of the operating rod to make sure it is in the un-
WARNING locked position
Do not use the trailer air supply for parking trail- 7. Slowly drive the tractor away from the trailer.
This applies the trailer service brakes only. As air Fifth Wheel Slide Operation
vehicle to roll away, possibly resulting in serious prevent the trailer from moving.
personal injury or death. 2. Connect the trailer kingpin to the tractor fifth
3. Chock the front and rear of the trailer tires to wheel. For instructions, refer to "Fifth Wheel
prevent the trailer from moving. Locking Operation," in this chapter.
10.9
3. After positive lockup of the fifth wheel lock pins to make sure they have seated in the base-
mechanism has been accomplished, release the plate rail holes.
slide using one of the following methods:
For manually-operated models: Raise the operat-
3.1 For air-operated models, set the cab- ing rod so that it is free to move inward. Make
operated control switch (Fig. 10.6) to UN- sure that the lockpins have seated in the base-
LOCK. plate rail holes and the operating rod moves into
the locked position. Also, the safety latch must
3.2 For manually-operated models, raise the drop downward so that it holds the operating rod
safety latch and pull the slide operating in the locked position.
rod (Fig. 10.9) outward until the shoulder
is outside of the operating rod support, 9. The amount of load distribution on the front
then lower the operating rod as far as it steering axle and rear drive axle(s) will have a
will go. direct effect on the steering control of the vehicle.
4. Lower the trailer landing gear just enough to re- Determine the front and rear axle weights by
move the weight from the tractor. weighing the vehicle on scales designed for this
purpose.
supply to the trailer. The maximum axle weight ratings are shown on
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
NOTICE Standard (CMVSS) label attached to the left rear
After moving the fifth wheel to the desired posi- axle is no less than 80 percent of the maximum
tion, be sure the trailer landing gear will not, at axle weight rating, but in no instances should the
any time, come in contact with the tractor frame axle load exceed the maximum axle weight rat-
or other components. Make sure that the front of ing given on the FMVSS or CMVSS label.
the trailer will not come in contact with the rear
of the cab or with other components if they ex-
tend beyond the rear of the cab. WARNING
6. Slowly move the tractor forward or backward Adjust the fifth wheel slide correctly, and do not
until the fifth wheel is in the desired location. overload any tractor axle by incorrectly loading
7. Apply the tractor parking brakes. the trailer. Incorrect slide adjustment or improper
axle loading could cause erratic steering and
loss of vehicle control, possibly resulting in seri-
WARNING ous personal injury or death.
Check to be sure that the lockpins are seated in Fifth Wheel Lubrication
the holes and that the operating rod is in the
locked position with the safety latch securing the
operating rod. Failure to achieve complete lockup WARNING
may cause the trailer to detach from the tractor,
possibly resulting in serious personal injury or Keep the fifth wheel plate lubricated to prevent
death. binding between the tractor and trailer. A binding
fifth wheel could cause erratic steering and loss
NOTE: The fifth wheel may have to be moved of vehicle control, possibly resulting in personal
slightly to enable the locking pins to enter the injury or death.
fully locked position.
The fifth wheel plate must be kept well lubricated
8. Lock the sliding member into position using one with chassis grease to prevent friction and binding
of the following methods: between the tractor fifth wheel plate and the trailer.
For lubrication instructions, see Group 31 of the
For air-operated models: Set the cab-operated Century Class Trucks Maintenance Manual.
control switch to LOCK. Visually inspect the lock-
10.10
Fontaine Fifth Wheels 1
General Information
The Fontaine sliding fifth wheel mount is designed to
provide optimum axle loading for maximum tractor
use with different lengths and types of trailers. The
sliding fifth wheel mount is used with the Fontaine
H5092 series, and 6000/7000 No-Slack II series fifth
wheels, and is equipped with either an air-operated
release slide (AWB or HAWB models), or a manual
release slide (MWS or HMWS models).
On Fontaine fifth wheels kingpin release is accom-
plished by activating a manual lock control handle
located on either the right side or left side of the fifth
wheel. Kingpin lockup occurs when the kingpin is
forced into the jaws and the lock control handle
moves to the locked position. 2
07/25/95 f310190
The fifth wheel top plate is mounted on a slide as- 1. Locking Wedge
sembly, which is attached to slide rails that are 2. Slide Release Pull Handle
mounted on the vehicle frame. The slide rails permit
Fig. 10.14, Manual Release Sliding Fifth Wheel Mount,
forward and rearward movement of the slide assem- MWS Model
bly, allowing for optimum weight distribution over the
tractor axles. The slide portion of the sliding model may be at-
Slots are evenly spaced along the slide rails, and tached to either an air-operated release slide, or a
retractable tapered wedges are positioned through manual release slide.
the slots to hold the fifth wheel in the desired posi- The air-operated release slide contains an air cylin-
tion. See Fig. 10.13 or Fig. 10.14. der that locks and unlocks the fifth wheel slide. See
Fig. 10.13. The air cylinder is activated by a two-
1 position air-control valve in the tractor cab.
The manual release slide contains a slide release
pull handle, located on the left side of the fifth wheel,
which locks or unlocks the fifth wheel slide. See
Fig. 10.14.
Fifth Wheel Lock Mechanism for Trailer

Kingpin (Fig. 10.15)
The Fontaine fifth wheel lock mechanism for the
trailer kingpin consists of a spring-loaded jaw and a
sliding wedge.
The jaw and wedge each have a pin permanently
attached. The pin on the jaw and the pin on the
wedge fit into elongated notches in the lock control
handle. The notches in the handle control the limit of
2
07/25/95 f310189 movement for both the jaw and wedge. The notches
1. Locking Wedge 2. Air Cylinder
are arranged so that the wedge is actuated first dur-
ing release of the kingpin.
Fig. 10.13, Air-Operated Sliding Fifth Wheel Mount,
AWB Model
During lockup, the jaw is moved first with the spring-
loaded wedge being allowed to slip in place against
10.11
2 A Fifth Wheel Locking Operation

Locking the Fifth Wheel Lock Mechanism
1
NOTICE
Before attempting to lock or unlock the fifth
wheel, the slide release pull handle, if so
3 equipped, and the slide locking wedges must be
in the locked position. This prevents the sliding
B C member from moving rapidly to the far forward or
rearward position, which could damage the fifth
10/26/2010 f310184c
A. Unlocked Position C. Locked
WARNING
B. Locking
Keep the fifth wheel plate lubricated to prevent
1. Wedge 3. Trailer Kingpin binding between the tractor and trailer. A binding
2. Jaw
fifth wheel could cause erratic steering and loss
Fig. 10.15, Fontaine Kingpin Lock Mechanism of vehicle control, possibly resulting in serious
the jaw. A timing bracket ensures that the wedge and
2. The kingpin lock mechanism must be fully open,
jaw are moved at the proper time.
the fifth wheel plate must be completely lubri-
Placing the lock control handle in the unlocked posi- cated with chassis grease. For lubrication in-
tion moves the wedge away from the jaw. This action structions, see Group 31 of the Century Class
unlocks the jaw so that it can be moved by the trailer Trucks Maintenance Manual.
kingpin. When the tractor is moved out from under
3. Position the tractor so that the fifth wheel lock
the trailer, the kingpin moves the jaw until the kingpin
is out of the mechanism. With the jaw in the un- opening is in line (both vertically and horizontally)
locked position, the lock control handle will remain in with the trailer kingpin. The kingpin should be in
the unlocked position until manually moved by the a position to enter the throat of the locking
operator. mechanism (Fig. 10.15). Adjust the trailer landing
gear to give enough alignment height for positive
During coupling (Fig. 10.15), the motion of the king- kingpin lockup.
pin entering the jaw will actuate the jaw and wedge.
4. With the fifth wheel lock opening aligned with the
The jaw will move behind the kingpin, followed by the
wedge. The purpose of the wedge is to reinforce the trailer kingpin, back the tractor slowly toward the
jaw and take up slack around the pin. Any wear on trailer, making sure that the kingpin enters the
the jaw is immediately taken up by the wedge so throat of the locking mechanism. Continue back-
there is no slack in the connection. ward motion until positive lockup occurs.
6. Make a visual and physical check for positive
kingpin lockup. When lockup has occurred, the
fifth wheel control handle will have moved to the
locked position. Make sure that the safety latch
is down over the lock control handle. See
10.12
Fig. 10.16. This will hold the control handle in

the locked position. WARNING
7. Release the tractor parking brakes. Test for king- Incorrect fifth wheel lock adjustment could cause
pin lockup by pulling on the trailer against the the trailer to disconnect, possibly resulting in se-
chocks. rious personal injury or death.
10. With the trailer wheels chocked and the brakes
NOTICE set, check for clearance between the kingpin and
the fifth wheel jaws by moving the tractor forward
Always make sure the connect-hanger/support
and backward against the locked kingpin. There
keeps the trailer air hoses and electrical cables
should be no slack between the tractor and the
positioned so that they do not rub on anything.
trailer. If slack is present, uncouple the trailer.
Rubbing may wear through hoses or cables, re-
sulting in air leaks, or exposed or broken wires, For adjustment instructions, refer to the appli-
potentially affecting trailer brake or electrical sys- cable manufacturer’s service information.
tems. 11. Retract the trailer landing gear, and secure the
8. After lockup is completed, connect the tractor-to- ratchet handle. Remove the chocks from the
trailer air system lines and the electrical cable to trailer tires.
the trailer. Take care to prevent dirt or foreign 12. The load distribution on the front steering axle
material from entering the air system lines. and rear drive axle(s) will have a direct effect on
9. Charge the air brake system with air. Make sure the steering control of the vehicle.
that the air connections do not leak. Determine the front and rear axle weights by
weighing the vehicle on scales designed for this
purpose.
The maximum axle weight ratings are given on
1 the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
Standard (CMVSS) label attached to the left rear
A axle is no less than 80 percent of the maximum
axle weight rating, but in no instances should the
2 axle load exceed the maximum axle weight rat-
ing given on the FMVSS or CMVSS label.
WARNING
1
Do not overload any tractor axle by improperly
loading the trailer. This could cause erratic steer-
ing and loss of vehicle control, possibly resulting
B
2 Unlocking the Fifth Wheel Lock
10/26/2010 f310110a
NOTE: Make sure the safety latch is down when the

Mechanism
control handle is locked. 1. Apply the tractor parking brakes.
A. Unlocked B. Locked
1. Safety Latch 2. Lock Control Handle supply to the trailer.
Fig. 10.16, Fontaine Fifth Wheel, Locking and
Unlocking
10.13
WARNING
4. Lower the trailer landing gear until the weight is
removed from the fifth wheel.
5. Disconnect the tractor-to-trailer air system lines 10/26/2010 f310050
and electrical cable. Plug the air lines to prevent
dirt or foreign material from entering the lines. Fig. 10.17, Fontaine Sliding Fifth Wheel Manual Release
tion and can be positioned against the

NOTICE guide plate to hold it out. The slide re-
lease pull handle will stay in the unlocked
Before attempting to lock or unlock the fifth position until it is manually disengaged
wheel lock mechanism of a sliding type fifth from the guide plate.
wheel, the slide release pull handle, if so
equipped, and the slide locking wedges must be 3. Lower the trailer landing gear just enough to re-
in the locked position. This prevents the sliding move the weight from the tractor.
member from moving rapidly to the far forward or 4. Pull the trailer air supply valve to cut off the air
rearward position, which could damage the fifth supply to the trailer.
6. Release the kingpin locking mechanism by lifting WARNING
the safety latch and pulling the lock control
handle to the unlocked position. See Fig. 10.16. Do not use the trailer air supply for parking trail-
7. Slowly drive the tractor away from the trailer. This applies the trailer service brakes only. As air
Fifth Wheel Slide Operation cation is lost. This could allow the unattended
1. Connect the trailer kingpin to the tractor fifth vehicle to roll away, possibly resulting in serious
wheel. For instructions, refer to Fontaine "Fifth personal injury or death.
Wheel Locking Operation," in this chapter. 5. Chock the front and rear of the trailer tires to
2. After positive lockup of the fifth wheel lock prevent the trailer from moving.
mechanism has been accomplished, release the
slide using one of the following methods: NOTICE
2.1 For air-operated release models, set the
After moving the fifth wheel to the desired posi-
cab-operated control switch (Fig. 10.6) to
tion, be sure the trailer landing gear will not, at
UNLOCK.
any time, come in contact with the tractor frame
2.2 For manual release models, lift the slide or other components. Make sure that the front of
release pull handle to disengage it from the trailer will not come in contact with the rear
the guide plate. Then, pull out the handle of the cab or with other components if they ex-
(Fig. 10.17) until it is in the unlocked posi- tend beyond the rear of the cab.
10.14
6. Slowly move the tractor forward or backward axle is no less than 80 percent of the maximum
until the fifth wheel is in the desired location. axle weight rating, but in no instances should the
axle load exceed the maximum axle weight rat-
7. Apply the tractor parking brakes. ing given on the FMVSS or CMVSS label.
NOTE: The fifth wheel may have to be moved
slightly to enable the locking wedges to enter WARNING
the fully locked position.
Adjust the fifth wheel slide correctly, and do not
8. Lock the sliding member in position using one of overload any tractor axle by incorrectly loading
the following methods: the trailer. Incorrect slide adjustment or improper
axle loading could cause erratic steering and
WARNING loss of vehicle control, possibly resulting in seri-
ous personal injury or death.
Check to be sure that the lockpins are seated in
the holes. Failure to achieve complete lockup Fifth Wheel Lubrication
may cause the trailer to detach from the tractor,
possibly resulting in serious personal injury or
death. WARNING
8.1 For air-operated release models, set the Keep the fifth wheel plate lubricated to prevent
cab-operated slide control switch to binding between the tractor and trailer. A binding
LOCK. Visually inspect the locking fifth wheel could cause erratic steering and loss
wedges to make sure that they are fully of vehicle control, possibly resulting in serious
inserted in the slide rail slots. personal injury or death.
8.2 For manual release models, disengage For lubrication instructions, see Group 31 of the
the slide release pull handle from the Century Class Trucks Maintenance Manual.
guide plate. The slide release pull handle
is spring-loaded in the locked position and
will seek the locked position when disen-
Premier Trailer Couplings
gaged from the guide plate. The fifth IMPORTANT: Before operating the Premier cou-
wheel may have to be moved slightly to pling, refer to the Premier web site at
enable the locking wedges to fully enter www.premier-mfg.com for complete safety,
the locked position. When the slide re- operation, and maintenance instructions.
lease pull handle returns to the fully
locked position, visually and physically General Information
check the locking wedges to make sure
they are fully inserted into the slots in the Trailer couplings, used only on trucks, are attached
slide rails. Make sure the slide release pull to the rear closing crossmember.
handle is locked in position against the The Premier 260 and 460 trailer couplings
guide plate. (Fig. 10.18) have a rigid pintle hook, and are air-
9. The amount of load distribution on the front adjusted. An air chamber, mounted forward of the
steering axle and rear drive axle(s) will have a coupling, operates a pushrod, which pushes against
direct effect on the steering control of the vehicle. a shoe inside the coupling. The shoe maintains con-
stant pressure on the eye of the trailer drawbar when
Determine the front and rear axle weights by it’s over the pintle hook. This takes up any slack in
weighing the vehicle on scales designed for this the trailer connection, providing smoother towing and
purpose. less wear on the pintle hook. The air pressure is acti-
The maximum axle weight ratings are given on vated when the trailer brakes are released.
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard The Premier 690 trailer coupling (Fig. 10.19) has a
(FMVSS) label or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety moveable pintle hook, and is non-air adjusted. It is
Standard (CMVSS) label attached to the left rear used for heavy-duty applications.
10.15
4
4 5
3 5
3
2
2
6 6
1
1
A
B
01/20/95 f310312a
A. Model 260 B. Model 460
1. Pintle Hook 3. Pawl Assembly 5. Pawl Wedge
2. Latch 4. Pawl Lock 6. Shoe
Fig. 10.18, Premier 260 and 460 Trailer Couplings
1 2 truck while in use, resulting in serious personal

injury or property damage.
Trailer Hookup
1. Chock the front and rear tires of the trailer.
2. Open the coupling.
3 Models 260 and 460 (Fig. 10.18): Pull up on the
pawl lock; then, while squeezing the pawl
wedges together, lift up the pawl assembly. Lift
4 up the latch, and push it up against the pawl as-
07/13/2010 f310313a
sembly, locking the latch in place.
1. Linch Pin 3. Pintle Hook Model 690 (Fig. 10.19): Remove the linch pin
2. Handle 4. 294 Bolt from the handle, then push in on the handle and
turn it toward you. Open the pintle hook by pull-
Fig. 10.19, Premier 690 Trailer Coupling ing it down and toward you. Release the handle,
locking the pintle hook open.
Operation
3. Models 260 and 460: Back up the vehicle until
the drawbar eye is over the pintle hook, then
WARNING lower the trailer.
If at any time the 690 coupling is bound up (jack- Model 690: Back up the vehicle until the drawbar
knifed), the 294 bolt MUST be replaced immedi- eye enters the open jaw, contacts the back of the
ately! Do not use the coupling until the bolt has pintle hook, and closes the coupling.
been replaced. In addition, carefully inspect the 4. Close the coupling.
690 coupling, drawbar, drawbar eye, front end
assembly, and tail board for damage. Failure to Models 260 and 460: Push in on the pawl
do so may result in trailer separation from the wedges and lift the pawl assembly. The latch will
10.16
drop into the closed position. Lock the latch by 6. Slowly drive the vehicle away from the trailer.
lowering the pawl assembly.
Model 690: The pintle hook will automatically Holland Trailer Coupling
close and lock from the pressure of the drawbar
eye against it. Install the linch pin. General Information
The Holland PH–T–60–AL trailer coupling is de-
NOTICE signed for use with trailers having a maximum gross
weight of 10,000 lbs. It is a rigid type pintle hook,
Always make sure the connect-hanger/support used only on truck applications, and is fastened to
keeps the trailer air hoses and electrical cables the rear closing crossmember of the vehicle. See
positioned so that they do not rub on anything. Fig. 10.20. It is a non-air adjusted coupling.
Rubbing may wear through hoses or cables, re-
sulting in air leaks, or exposed or broken wires, 1 2
tems. 3
5. Hook up the trailer’s electrical and air lines.
6. Remove the chocks from the trailer’s tires.
Trailer Release
1. Apply the truck and trailer parking brakes. 4
WARNING
01/20/95 f310314a
Do not use the trailer air supply for parking trail- 1. Lock 3. Latch
ers not equipped with spring parking brakes. 2. Cotter Pin 4. Pintle Hook
bleeds from the trailer brake system, brake appli- Fig. 10.20, Holland PH-T-60-AL Trailer Coupling
vehicle to roll away, possibly resulting in serious Operation
personal injury or death. Trailer Hookup
2. Chock the front and rear tires of the trailer. 1. Chock the front and rear tires of the trailer.
3. Disconnect the trailer air and electrical lines. 2. Remove the cotter pin, then lift the lock and raise
Plug the air lines to keep out dirt. the latch.
4. Take the weight of the trailer drawbar eye off the 3. Back up the vehicle until the drawbar eye is over
pintle hook. the pintle hook.
5. Open the coupling. 4. Lower the trailer until the drawbar eye rests on
Models 260 and 460: Pull up on the pawl lock; the pintle hook.
then, while squeezing the pawl wedges together, 5. Close the latch, then insert the cotter pin.
lift up the pawl assembly. Lift up the latch, and
push it up against the pawl, locking the latch in
place. NOTICE
Model 690: Remove the linch pin from the Always make sure the connect-hanger/support
handle, then push in on the handle and turn it keeps the trailer air hoses and electrical cables
toward you. Open the pintle hook by pulling it positioned so that they do not rub on anything.
down and toward you. Release the handle, lock- Rubbing may wear through hoses or cables, re-
ing the pintle hook open. sulting in air leaks, or exposed or broken wires,
10.17

tems.
6. Hook up the trailer’s electrical and air lines.
7. Remove the chocks from the trailer’s tires.
Trailer Release
1. Apply the truck and trailer parking brakes.
WARNING
2. Chock the front and rear tires of the trailer.
3. Disconnect the trailer air and electrical lines.
Plug the air lines to keep out dirt.
4. Take the weight of the trailer drawbar off the
pintle hook.
5. Open the latch by first removing the cotter pin;
then lift up the lock and raise the latch.
6. Slowly drive the vehicle away from the trailer.
10.18
11
Pretrip and Post-Trip
Inspections and
Maintenance
Pretrip and Post-Trip Inspection Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
Pretrip and Post-Trip Inspection and Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
Pretrip and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
Pretrip and Post-Trip See Table 11.2 for a list of procedures that should
be performed weekly, post-trip.
Inspection Checklists See Table 11.3 for a list of procedures that should
Regulations in both Canada and the United States be performed monthly, post-trip.
clearly indicate that it is the driver’s responsibility to
perform an inspection and ensure the complete road-
IMPORTANT: Before performing any checks,
worthiness of a vehicle before placing it into service apply the parking brake and chock the tires.
for the day. Commercial vehicles may be subject to
inspection by authorized inspectors, and an unsafe
vehicle can be put "out of service" until the driver or
owner repairs it.
Use the inspection checklists to ensure that vehicle
components are in good working condition before
each trip. A driver that is familiar with the vehicle,
and drives it regularly, can perform the daily inspec-
tions, then add the weekly and monthly post-trip in-
spections as scheduled. If the driver does not oper-
ate the vehicle on a consistent basis, all three of the
inspection procedures should be performed before
the trip.
NOTE: Procedure reference numbers in the
checklists reference the corresponding detailed
instructions found under the pretrip and post-trip
maintenance procedures.
Pre- and post-trip inspections cannot be done
quickly. However, careful inspections save time by
eliminating stops later to adjust items overlooked or
forgotten.
If any system or component does not pass this in-
spection, it must be corrected before operating the
vehicle. Whenever equipment requires adjustment,
replacement, repair, addition of lubricants, or a
change of lubricants, see the Century Class Trucks
Workshop Manual for procedures and specifications,
and see the Century Class Trucks Maintenance
Manual for lubricant recommendations, specifica-
tions, and maintenance intervals.
IMPORTANT: The pre- and post-trip checklists,
and inspections and maintenance procedures
detailed in this chapter, are not all-inclusive.
Also refer to other component and body manu-
facturers’ instructions for specific inspection and
maintenance instructions.
See Table 11.1 for a list of procedures that should
be performed daily, before the first trip.
11.1
Procedure Performed Procedure

Daily Pretrip Inspections/Checks
(check off) Reference
Drain manually drained air reservoirs (that are not equipped with automatic drain
_______ D1
valves)
Check _______ windshield washer reservoir fluid D2
Check _______ surge tank coolant level D3
Inspect _______ radiator and charge air cooler D4
Check _______ engine for fuel, oil, or coolant leaks —
Inspect _______ engine and chassis wiring D5
Inspect _______ air intake system D6
Check _______ intake-air restriction indicator mounted on air intake D6
Check _______ engine oil level D7
Check _______ power steering fluid level —
Inspect _______ fuel tank(s), fuel lines, and connections D8
Check _______ fuel level D9
Check _______ fuel/water separator D10
Inspect _______ front and rear suspension components D11
Inspect _______ headlights, mirrors, and window glass, and windshield wipers D12
Check _______ doors (open without difficulty and close securely) —
_______ Adjust driver’s seat, then align rearview and downview mirrors —
Check _______ dash-mounted intake-air restriction indicator D6
Check _______ oil- and air-pressure warning systems D13
Check _______ ICU fault codes D14
Check _______ horn, windshield wipers, and windshield washer D15
Check _______ heater, defroster, and optional mirror heat controls D16
Check _______ backup alarm —
Check _______ panel lights and interior lights D17
Check _______ exterior lights and reflectors D18
Check _______ tire pressure D19
Inspect _______ tire condition D20
Inspect _______ rims and wheels D21
Inspect _______ hub oil seals and lubrication levels D22
Check _______ automatic transmission fluid level —
Inspect _______ air brake chambers and pushrods D23
Inspect _______ air brake lines D24
Inspect _______ slack adjusters D25
Check _______ air brake system operation D26
Inspect _______ frame rails (missing bolts), crossmembers (bent or loose) —
mud flaps (aren’t damaged, at least 10 inches above the ground, and brackets
Check _______ —
are secure)
exhaust system (mounted securely, connected tightly, no signs of leaks such as
Check _______ —
soot trails)
Inspect _______ seat belts and tether belts D27
_______ Remove chocks and test service brakes D28
Inspector___________________________________________________ Date ________________

Table 11.1, Daily Pretrip Inspection and Maintenance Checklist
11.2

Weekly Post-Trip Inspections/Checks
_______ Manually drain air reservoirs that are equipped with automatic drain valves —
Inspect _______ batteries and battery cables W1
Check _______ wheel bearing lubricant level W2
Inspect _______ steering components W3
Check _______ serpentine drive belt condition W4
Check _______ V-belt tension W5
Inspector___________________________________________________ Date ________________

Table 11.2, Weekly Post-Trip Inspection and Maintenance Checklist

Monthly Post-Trip Inspections/Checks
_______ Clean the battery terminals M1
Inspect _______ radiator hoses and heater hoses M2
fluid level in the hydraulic clutch reservoir (if applicable, and if necessary, fill with
Check _______ —
DOT 4 brake fluid)
Check _______ steering wheel play M3
Check _______ outer surfaces of the hood and body (for visible surface breaks and damage) —
Check _______ hood tilt damper (attached at both ends) —
Inspect _______ brake lining wear M4
Inspect _______ driveshaft —
Inspector___________________________________________________ Date ________________

Table 11.3, Monthly Post-Trip Inspection and Maintenance Checklist
Pretrip and Post-Trip 1.1 Open the wet tank valve. The drain cock
or pull chain drain is located on the for-
Inspection and Maintenance ward end of the supply air reservoir, which
is connected directly to the air compres-
Procedures sor. Block the valve open.
Daily Pretrip Inspection and
Maintenance Procedures WARNING
Whenever equipment requires adjustment, replace- When draining the air reservoir, do not look into
ment, and/or repair, see the Century Class Trucks the air jets or direct them toward anyone. Dirt or
Workshop Manual for procedures and specifications. sludge particles may be in the airstream and
Specific references to the manual will be found could cause injury.
where appropriate.
1.2 Exhaust the remaining air and moisture
1. Drain manually drained air reservoirs. from the system by opening the drain
Water and oil normally enter the air reservoir in cocks on the bottoms of the remaining air
the form of vapor because of the heat generated reservoirs. Block the valves open.
during compression. After the water and oil con-
dense, drain the resulting emulsion as follows:
11.3
1.3 Water and oil emulsion often form pockets

2
that will not drain while compressed air is
in the reservoirs. Because of these pock-
ets, leave the valves blocked open during
the first part of the pretrip inspection.
1.4 If the drained water is cloudy or oily, it 3
may indicate a problem with the compres- 4
sor. If oil is allowed to contaminate the air
dryer, it will not remove the water from the
air brake system, which could adversely 1
affect braking.
4
2. Check the fluid level in the windshield washer
reservoir.
06/13/2007 f500390
Add washer fluid as needed. Unscrew the cap to
add fluid. 1. Pressure Relief Cap 3. COLD MAX Fill Line
2. Filler Cap 4. COLD MIN Fill Line
WARNING Fig. 11.1, Coolant Surge Tank
Washer fluids may be flammable and poisonous. 4.2 Inspect the radiator and charge air cooler
Do not expose washer fluid to an open flame or for damage and accumulated debris.
any burning material, such as a cigarette. Always Straighten bent or damaged fins to permit
comply with the washer fluid manufacturer’s rec- airflow across all areas of the cores.
ommended safety precautions. NOTE: When traveling through areas of high
3. While the surge tank is cool, check the coolant insect concentration, it may be necessary to
level. clean the exterior of the radiator or the
In hot operation, the upper chamber will be com- charge air cooler core as often as every 200
pletely full, and there will be some coolant in the miles (320 km).
bottom chamber. When the tank has cooled, 4.3 On vehicles equipped with air condition-
there will be no coolant in the bottom chamber, ing, also inspect and clean the condenser.
and an air gap in the upper chamber. If clogged, the condenser can restrict air-
If the coolant is low, fill the surge tank to the flow through the radiator.
MAX line, with a 50/50 mixture of water and the 4.4 Check the radiator for leaks. If leaks are
type of antifreeze currently installed in your ve- found, have the radiator repaired or re-
hicle. placed. See Group 20 of the Century
See Fig. 11.1. Class Trucks Workshop Manual for in-
structions, or take the vehicle to an autho-
rized Freightliner dealer.
CAUTION
5. Inspect the engine and chassis wiring.
Coolant must be filled to the full line of the surge
tank. Low coolant could result in engine over- Check for loose wiring, chafed insulation, and
heating, which could cause engine damage. damaged or loose hold-down clamps. Tighten
loose wires or hold-down clamps; replace dam-
4. Inspect the radiator and charge air cooler. aged wiring or clamps.
4.1 Inspect the radiator and charge air cooler 6. Inspect the air intake system for leaks or dam-
for clogged fins. Use compressed air or age.
water directed from the fan side of the
core to backflush any material restricting
airflow.
11.4
If the oil level is at or below the minimum fill (or

CAUTION "add") mark on the dipstick, add enough oil to
maintain the level between the minimum fill (or
Failure to maintain a sealed air intake system "add") and the maximum fill (or "full") marks on
could allow the entry of dirt and contaminants the dipstick. See Fig. 11.2. Engine lube oil must
into the engine. This could adversely affect en- have a sulfated ash level less than 1.0 wt %;
gine performance and result in engine damage. currently referred to as CJ-4 oil. Use the proper
6.1 Check the intake-air restriction indicator. SAE viscosity rating for the temperature and time
of year.
6.2 Replace the primary filter element in the
air cleaner if the yellow signal stays
1
locked at 25 inH2O (635 mmH20) for Cat-
erpillar, Detroit Diesel, or Cummins en-
gines, or 20 inH2O (508 mmH20) for
Mercedes-Benz engines. See Group 09 of
the Century Class Trucks Workshop
Manual for filter element replacement in-
structions, or take the vehicle to an autho-
rized Freightliner dealer.
NOTE: After replacing the filter element,
reset the restriction indicator by pressing the
rubber reset button.
6.3 Inspect the secondary or safety filter ele- 02/09/96 f180038
ment in the air cleaner when replacing the 1. Dipstick

primary element, and replace it when
clogged or dirty. This element should be Fig. 11.2, Oil Level Checking
replaced with every third primary element
replacement. CAUTION
6.4 Check the engine air intake piping from
the air cleaner to the engine intake. In- Operating the engine with the oil level below the
spect the piping for loose connections, minimum fill (or "add") mark or above the maxi-
cracks, torn or collapsed hoses, punc- mum fill (or "full") mark could result in engine
tures, and other damage. Tighten loose damage.
connections, and have damaged compo- 8. Inspect the fuel tanks, fuel lines, and connections
nents replaced. Make sure the piping sys- for leaks.
tem is airtight so that all intake air passes
through the air cleaner. 8.1 Check that the fuel tanks are secured to
their mounting brackets and that the
7. Check the oil level with the vehicle parked on a mounting brackets are secured to the
level surface, and turned off for at least 20 min- frame.
utes, for most engines.
8.2 Replace leaking fuel tanks.
For the DD15 engine, the engine must be shut
down for 60 minutes and on a level surface for 8.3 If lines or connections are leaking, have
an accurate oil level reading. Otherwise the en- them repaired or replaced.
gine must be brought up to an operating tem- For repair and/or replacement procedures,
perature of 176°F (80°C), shut down, and al- see Group 47 of the Century Class
lowed to sit for 5 minutes on a level surface. Trucks Workshop Manual, or take the ve-
Failure to allow the oil to drain back properly as hicle in to an authorized Freightliner
just described, can result in a low oil level read- dealer.
ing.
11.5
8.4 If equipped with fuel tank shutoff valves, If the engine is equipped with a built-in water
be sure the valves are fully open. separator, place a suitable container under the
drain hose, loosen the drain valve, and allow the
WARNING water to run out. Close the drain valve, taking
care not to overtighten it.
Never operate the engine with the fuel tank shut- For Racor models, see Fig. 11.3. Check the
off valves partly closed. This could damage the water level in the sight bowl. To drain the water,
fuel pump, causing sudden loss of engine power, loosen the valve at the bottom of the bowl two
possibly resulting in serious personal injury due full turns, and allow the water to run out. Close
to reduced vehicle control. and tighten the valve finger-tight. Check the filter
9. Check the fuel level in the fuel tank(s). element and replace if clogged.
To keep condensation to a minimum, fuel tanks For ConMet models, see Fig. 11.4. Place a suit-
should be filled at the end of each day. Federal able container under the fuel/water separator.
regulations prohibit filling a fuel tank to more Check the water level in the sight bowl, if so
than 95 percent of its liquid capacity. equipped. To drain the water, loosen the valve at
the bottom and allow the water to run out. Close
and tighten the valve finger-tight.
WARNING
Never fill fuel tanks to more than 95 percent of
their liquid capacity. This could make them more
likely to rupture from impact, possibly causing
fire and resulting in serious personal injury or
death by burning.
Do not mix gasoline or alcohol with diesel fuel.
This mixture could cause an explosion, possibly
resulting in serious personal injury or death. Do
not fill the fuel tanks in the presence of sparks,
open flames, or intense heat. These could ignite
the fuel, possibly causing severe burns.
IMPORTANT: Use ultralow-sulfur diesel 11/30/95 f470166
(ULSD) with 15 ppm sulfur content or less,
based on ASTM D2622 test procedure. Fail- Fig. 11.3, Racor Fuel/Water Separator
ure to use ultralow-sulfur diesel fuels may IMPORTANT: When draining fluid from a fuel/
void the warranty on emission components. water separator, drain the fluid into an appropri-
9.1 Fuel should always be strained or filtered ate container and dispose of it properly. Many
before being put into the tanks. This will states now issue fines for draining fuel/water
lengthen the life of the engine fuel filter separators onto the ground. On all types of
and reduce the chances of dirt getting into separators, stop draining fluid when you see
the engine. fuel come out of the separator drain valve.
9.2 Before installing the fuel cap, clean the 11. Inspect the front and rear suspension compo-
area with a rag, or if necessary, clean the nents, including springs, spring hangers, shocks,
cap with solvent. and suspension brackets.
9.3 If needed, prime the fuel system. For 11.1 Check for broken spring leaves, loose
priming procedures, see the applicable U-bolts, cracks in the suspension
engine manufacturer’s manual. brackets, and loose fasteners in the spring
10. If equipped with a fuel/water separator, check for hangers and shackles.
water.
11.6
13.1 Check if the warning systems come on

when the ignition is turned on, and if not,
have the systems repaired.
13.2 Start the engine, then check that the oil-
and air-pressure warning systems are op-
erating. The buzzer should stop sounding
when the preset minimum is reached. If
the air pressure in both systems is above
the preset minimum when the engine is
started, test the low air pressure warning
system by lowering the pressure to below
this range, or until the warning system
comes on.
The air pressure in both the primary and
secondary air reservoir systems must be
above 65 psi (448 kPa) on most vehicles.
For vehicles with an optional Bendix dryer
11/30/95 f470167
reservoir module (DRM), the cut-out pres-
Fig. 11.4, ConMet Fuel/Water Separator sure is 130 psi (896 kPa).
14. Check the instrumentation control unit (ICU) for
11.2 Inspect the shock absorbers for loose fas-
teners and leaks. fault codes.
During the ignition sequence, if an active fault is
11.3 Tighten all loose fasteners and have any detected in any device that is connected to the
component(s) replaced that are worn, ECU, the message display screen will show the
cracked, or otherwise damaged. active fault codes, one after the other, until the
11.4 On vehicles with air suspensions, check parking brake is released or the ignition switch is
for leaks. Check air suspension compo- turned off. See Chapter 2 for detailed operating
nents for cuts and bulges. instructions for the ICU.
12. Clean the windshield, side, and rear windows, 15. Make sure that the horn, windshield wipers, and
then check the condition of the windshield wiper windshield washers are operating properly.
arms and blades. These devices must be in good working order for
safe vehicle operation.
12.1 Replace the wiper arms if the wiper
blades are not tensioned against the wind- 15.1 Make sure that the horn works. If a horn is
shield. not working, have it repaired before trip
departure.
12.2 Replace damaged or deteriorated wiper
blades. 15.2 Check the wiper and washer control on
the multifunction turn signal switch. If the
WARNING wipers and/or washers are not working,
have them repaired before trip departure.
When cleaning windshields and windows, always 16. During cold weather, make sure the heater, de-
stand on the ground or on a secure ladder or froster, and optional mirror heat controls are op-
platform. Use a long-handled window cleaner. Do erating properly. If so equipped, turn on the mir-
not use the cab steps, tires, fenders, fuel tanks, ror heat switch and make sure the system is
engine, or under-hood components to access the working.
windshield or windows. Doing so could cause a
fall and result in an injury. 17. Check the operation of all the panel lights and
interior lights.
13. Check the oil- and air-pressure warning systems.
11.7
Turn on the headlights, dash lights, and four-way 1 2

flashers and leave them on. If any of the gauge
bulbs, the dome light bulbs, or the right- and left-
turn indicator bulbs are not working, replace
them. See Table 11.4 for replacement bulb part
numbers.
Replacement Bulb Identification

Description Part Number 7
Headlight, Round, Halogen WEE H5024
Daytime Running Lamp SYL 3157KNA
Front Turn Signal Lamp SYL 3157KNA
Front Side Marker Light SYL 3157K
Fog/Road Lamp WEE 9420
6 5 4 3
Clearance/Cab Marker Bulb 22-40241-000
9/07/95 f600903
GE 2058U and SYL
Side Extender Bulb 1. Identification Lights 5. Headlights
3157K
2. Clearance Lights 6. Turn Signals and
Backup Lamp TL 40204
3. Daytime Running Side-Marker Lights
Tail/Brake/Rear Turn Signal Lights 7. Marker Lights
TL 40202R3
Lamp 4. Road Lights
Small Instrument Panel Gauge POL 77 267860 3
Lamp (TYPE 73) Fig. 11.5, Exterior Lights
Large Instrument Panel Gauge WEE 194 (POL 77
Lamp 268844 3) (TYPE 194) 19. Check tire inflation pressures using an accurate
Baggage Compartment Lamp GE 198 tire pressure gauge.
GE F27BX/SPX30/RS Tires should be checked when cool. For inflation
Interior Sleeper, Florescent
or Phillips PL-L24W/ pressures and maximum loads (per tire) see the
Lamp
84/4P tire manufacturer’s guidelines.
Interior Courtesy Lamp GE 193 and GE 906
A weekly pressure loss of 4 psi (28 kPa) or more
Reading Lamp GE 912
in a tire may indicate damage. The tire should be
Table 11.4, Replacement Bulb Identification inspected and, if necessary, repaired or replaced.
19.1 Be sure valve stem caps are on every tire
18. Make sure all the exterior lights are working and that they are screwed on finger-tight.
properly.
19.2 Inflate the tires to the applicable pressures
Check that all the lights and reflectors are clean. if needed.
See Fig. 11.5.
19.3 If a tire has been run flat or underinflated,
18.1 Check that the brake lights, taillights, check the wheel for proper lockring and
headlights, parking lights, turn signals, side-ring seating, and possible wheel, rim,
marker lights, identification lights, road or tire damage before adding air.
lights (if so equipped), and front clearance
lights are working properly and are clean. Moisture inside a tire can result in body
ply separation or a sidewall rupture. Dur-
18.2 Test the high and low beams of the heading tire inflation, compressed air reservoirs
lights. and lines must be kept dry. Use well-
18.3 Replace light bulbs or sealed beam units maintained inline moisture traps and ser-
that are not working. vice them regularly.
18.4 Be sure all reflectors and lenses are in

good condition and are clean. Replace
any broken reflectors or lenses.
11.8
WARNING
Do not operate the vehicle with underinflated or
overinflated tires. Incorrect inflation can stress
the tires and make the tires and rims more sus-
ceptible to damage, possibly leading to rim or
tire failure and loss of vehicle control, resulting
IMPORTANT: The load and cold inflation pres-
sure must not exceed the rim or wheel manu-
facturer’s recommendations, even though the
tire may be approved for a higher load inflation.
Some rims and wheels are stamped with a 02/09/95 f400058
maximum load and maximum cold inflation rat-
ing. If they are not stamped, consult the rim or Fig. 11.6, Dirt and Rust Streaks from the Stud Holes
wheel manufacturer for the correct tire inflation
pressure for the vehicle load. If the load ex- See Group 33 or Group 35 of the
ceeds the maximum rim or wheel capacity, the Century Class Trucks Workshop Manual
for service procedures on the studs and
load must be adjusted or reduced. hubs, and see Group 40 in the same
20. Inspect each tire for wear, bulges, cracks, cuts, manual for wheel and tire servicing, or
penetrations, and oil contamination. take the vehicle to an authorized Freight-
liner dealer.
20.1 Check the tire tread depth. If tread is less
than 4/32 inch (3 mm) on any front tire, or
less than 2/32 inch (1.5 mm) on any rear WARNING
tire, replace the tire.
Have any worn or damaged wheel components
20.2 Inspect each tire for bulges, cracks, cuts, replaced by a qualified person using the wheel
and penetrations. manufacturer’s instructions and the wheel indus-
20.3 Inspect each tire for oil contamination. try’s standard safety precautions and equipment.
Fuel oil, gasoline, and other petroleum Otherwise a vehicle or workshop accident could
derivatives, if allowed to contact the tires, occur, possibly resulting in serious personal in-
will soften the rubber and destroy the tire. jury or death.
21.3 Have broken, cracked, badly worn, bent,
21. Check the wheel nuts or rim nuts for indications
of looseness. Examine each rim and wheel com- rusty, or sprung rings and rims replaced.
Be sure that the rim base, lockring, and
ponent.
side ring are matched according to size
21.1 Remove all dirt and foreign material from and type.
the assembly. Dirt or rust streaks from the
21.4 Make sure all wheel nuts are tightened
stud holes, metal buildup around stud
450 to 500 lbf·ft (610 to 678 N·m) for Ac-
holes, or out-of-round or worn stud holes
curide wheels with unlubricated threads.
may be caused by loose wheel nuts. See
Fig. 11.6 and Fig. 11.7. Use the tightening pattern in Fig. 11.8 for
10-hole wheels, and the tightening pattern
21.2 Examine the rim and wheel assembly
in Fig. 11.9 for 8-hole wheels. See Group
components (including rims, rings, flanges,
40 of the Century Class Trucks Workshop
studs, and nuts) for cracks, or other dam-
Manual for more information.
age.
11.9
02/09/95 f400001
Fig. 11.7, Worn Stud Holes
1 CAUTION
10 8 Insufficient wheel nut torque can cause wheel
shimmy, resulting in wheel damage, stud break-
3 6 age, and extreme tire tread wear. Excessive
wheel nut torque can break studs, damage
threads, and crack discs in the stud hole area.
Use the recommended torque values and follow
5 4 the proper tightening sequence.
22. Inspect the outboard side of all wheel hubs and
7 9 the hub oil seal area on the inboard side of each
2 wheel for signs of oil leakage. If any oil is found
08/23/93 f400081a on wheel and tire or brake components, remove
the vehicle from service until the leak has been
Fig. 11.8, Tightening Pattern, 10-Hole Wheels repaired.
If needed, fill the hubs to the level indicated on
A the hub cap. See Group 35 of the Century Class
1 2
Trucks Maintenance Manual for recommended
lubricants.
7 4 23. Inspect the air brake chamber and the air brake
chamber pushrods. See Fig. 11.10 .
DANGER
5 6 Do not loosen or remove the parking brake clamp
ring for any purpose. The parking/emergency
brake section of the brake chamber is not in-
3
tended to be serviced. Serious injury or death
8
08/20/93 f400052a may result from sudden release of the power
spring.
Fig. 11.9, Tightening Pattern, 8-Hole Wheels
11.10
pressure chamber and cause a dragging

brake. See Group 42 of the Century
1 Class Trucks Workshop Manual.
A
CAUTION
If the external breather tube or breather cap is
missing or incorrectly installed, road dirt and de-
bris can adversely affect the operation of the
brake chamber. Once inside of the chamber, dirt
and debris can cause the internal parts of the
chamber to deteriorate faster.
23.4 Inspect the exterior surfaces of the cham-
ber for damage. Make sure that breather
holes in the non-pressure section(s) are
open and free of debris. See Group 42 of
the Century Class Trucks Workshop
Manual to replace any damaged parts.
02/22/2000 f421352
23.5 On all parking brake installations, make
A. Do not remove this clamp ring.
sure the end cover cap or dust plug is se-
1. MGM TR–T (TR Series) Brake Chamber shown
curely snapped into place.
Fig. 11.10, Parking Brake Chamber Clamp
NOTE: On most MGM parking brake cham-
Before doing any repairs or adjustments on a bers equipped with an integral release bolt,
service/parking brake chamber, read the appli- an end cover cap is installed over the re-
cable warnings and instructions in Group 42 of lease bolt.
the Century Class Trucks Workshop Manual. 23.6 Check for rusted connections, missing
snap rings, and damaged camshaft
WARNING grease seals. Have damaged or missing
parts repaired or replaced.
Do not operate the vehicle with the front brakes
backed off or disconnected. Backing off or dis- 24. Inspect the air brake lines.
connecting the front brakes will not improve ve- 24.1 Check the clearance between the hoses
hicle handling and may lead to loss of vehicle and the exhaust manifold or other hot
control, resulting in property damage or personal spots. Excessive heat will cause material
injury. in the hoses to deteriorate rapidly or be-
23.1 Check that the air brake chamber is come brittle. Provide at least 6 inches
mounted securely on its mounting bracket, (150 mm) of clearance. More clearance is
and that there are no loose or missing recommended if the hose is located above
bolts. the heat source.
23.2 Look for worn clevis pins on brake cham- 24.2 Check for kinks, dents, or swelling of the
ber pushrods, and missing or damaged hoses. If damaged, have the hose re-
cotter pins, on the brake chamber pushrod placed with the same size and type.
clevis pins. Replace worn clevis pins and NOTE: Do not route the hose on top of any-
install new cotter pins if necessary. thing likely to be stepped on.
23.3 See if the chamber piston rod is in line
with the slack adjuster. Misalignment can
cause the piston rod to rub on the non-
11.11
24.3 Check for damage to hoses located near higher than normal rotor corrosion. Tone
moving parts, such as drivelines, kingpins, rings should be routinely inspected for corro-
suspensions, and axles. If moving parts sion. Severe corrosion of the integral ABS
are catching or pinching the lines, correct tone ring may cause the ABS warning lamp
as needed. in the dash to illuminate due to false wheel
24.4 Check for hose damage caused by abra- speed readings. If the ABS warning lamp
sion. If abraded, have the hose replaced. illuminates at any time other than at vehicle
Check for the cause of abrasion, such as start-up, have the problem repaired immedi-
loose or damaged hose clamps. Have the ately.
clamps repaired or replaced as needed.
25. Inspect the slack adjusters.
24.5 Observe the hose cover condition, espe-
cially hoses exposed to water splash and 25.1 Meritor Slack Adjusters: Check the boot
ice. If dried out or ragged (the wire or liner for cuts, tears, or other damage. Have it
is showing through the cover), have the replaced if necessary.
hose(s) replaced. 25.2 Gunite Slack Adjusters: Inspect the slack
24.6 Inspect the air tubing, especially tubing adjuster for any signs of damage. If dam-
made of nylon. In cold weather, nylon tub- aged, have the slack adjuster replaced.
ing is sensitive to damage, such as nicks Inspect the slack adjuster boot for cuts or
or cuts. Have nicked or cut tubing re- tears. If the boot is damaged, have it re-
placed, even if it is not leaking. placed. See Fig. 11.11.
24.7 Check for kinked or twisted hoses. A
seven-percent twist in the hose can re-
duce its life by up to 90 percent. A twisted
hose under pressure tends to untwist, 4
5
which may loosen the fitting. Reconnect
6
hoses that are twisted.
7
NOTE: The front brake lines flex continu- 3 8
ously in vehicle operation, so they require
special examination. Give particular attention
2 9
to the areas near where they connect to the
front air brake chambers. This inspection
requires two people, one in the driver seat 1
and another to inspect the brake line con- 10
nections at the wheels.
24.8 Both wheel air lines must be inspected
with the emergency brake set, engine 06/17/2003 f421398
idling, air pressure at 80 to 90 psi (550 to 1. 7/16-inch Adjusting 6. Clevis
620 kPa), and the brake pedal held down. Nut 7. 1/2-inch Clevis Pin
2. Grease Fitting 8. 1/4-inch Clevis Pin
24.9 Turn the wheels to full lock in one direc- 3. Boot 9. Grease Relief
tion and inspect both air lines where they 4. Link Opening
connect to the air chambers, then turn the 5. Brake Chamber Piston 10. Slack Adjuster Spline
wheels to full lock in the other direction Rod
and inspect both lines. If a hose is leak-
Fig. 11.11, Gunite Automatic Slack Adjuster
ing, have it replaced.
IMPORTANT: ABS-equipped vehicles operat-
ing in regions where especially corrosive ice
removal chemicals are used may experience
11.12
25.3 Haldex Slack Adjusters: Inspect each 26.2 Check the air pressure buildup time as
slack adjuster and anchor strap for dam- follows.
age. See Fig. 11.12. Have any damaged
With the air system fully charged to 120
components replaced. psi (827 kPa), make one full brake appli-
Check that the control-arm nut is fully re- cation and note the air pressure reading
leased. If the control arm is in the wrong on the gauge. Continue to reduce the air
position, the brakes will drag. pressure by moderate brake applications
to a maximum of 90 psi (620 kPa), then
run the engine at governed rpm. If the
time required to raise the air pressure to
1 120 psi (827 kPa) (from the pressure
2 noted after one brake application) is more
than 30 seconds, eliminate any leaks or
3 replace the air compressor before operat-
ing the vehicle.
26.3 Check the air pressure reserve as follows.
With the air system fully charged to 120
psi (827 kPa), stop the engine and note
4 8 9
the air pressure. Then make one full brake
7 application and observe the pressure
6
drop. If it drops more than 25 psi (172
kPa), all areas of leakage must be elimi-
nated before operating the vehicle.
5 26.4 Check the air leakage in the system as
10/11/2005 A f421397 follows.
A. Rotate the control arm toward the brake chamber With the parking brake (spring brake) ap-
until you can feel it contacting the internal stop. plied, the transmission out of gear, and
1. Clevis 6. Control-Arm Washers the tires chocked, charge the air system
2. Slack Adjuster and Nut until cut-out pressure of 120 psi (827 kPa)
3. Clevis Pin 7. Anchor Strap Slot
4. Manual Adjusting Nut 8. Anchor Strap
is reached.
5. Control Arm 9. Brake Chamber With the service brakes released, shut
down the engine, wait one minute and
Fig. 11.12, Haldex Automatic Slack Adjuster
note the air pressure gauge reading. Ob-
26. Check the air brake system for proper operation. serve the air pressure drop in psi (kPa)
per minute.
26.1 Check the air governor cut-in and cut-out
pressures as follows. Charge the air system until cut-out pres-
sure of 120 psi (827 kPa) is reached. With
Run the engine at fast idle. The air gover- the parking brakes released and the ser-
nor should cut out the air compressor at vice brake applied, shut down the engine,
approximately 120 psi (827 kPa). With the wait one minute and note the air pressure
engine idling, apply the brake pedal sev- gauge reading. Observe the air pressure
eral times. The air governor should cut in drop in psi (kPa) per minute.
the air compressor at approximately 100
psi (689 kPa). If the air governor does not If leakage exceeds the limits shown in
cut in and out as described above, it must Table 11.5, repair all areas of leakage be-
be adjusted to these specifications. If the fore driving the vehicle.
air governor cannot be adjusted or re-
paired, replace it before operating the ve-
hicle.
11.13
Maximum Allowable Service Brake Air Leakage Weekly Post-Trip Inspection and
Air Leakage in psi Maintenance Procedures
Description (kPa) Per Minute
Released Applied
Truck or Tractor Only 2 (14) 3 (21)
WARNING
Truck or Tractor w/Single Trailer 3 (21) 4 (28) Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
Truck or Tractor w/Two Trailers 5 (35) 6 (42) contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
Table 11.5, Maximum Allowable Service Brake Air known to the State of California to cause cancer
Leakage and reproductive harm. To prevent possible per-
sonal injury, always wash your hands after han-
dling battery parts and related accessories.
27. Inspect the seat belts and tether belts.
1. Inspect the batteries and battery cables.
WARNING 1.1 Access the batteries. Be sure the battery
hold-down is secure. If it is loose, tighten
Inspect and maintain seat belts. When any part of the hold-down bolts; if it is broken, replace
a seat belt system needs replacement, the entire it.
seat belt must be replaced, both retractor and
buckle side. Any time a vehicle is involved in an 1.2 If the battery is equipped with a built-in
accident, and the seat belt system was in use, hydrometer, examine the hydrometer. If a
the entire vehicle seat belt system must be re- green dot shows in the sight glass, the
placed before operating the vehicle. Do not at- battery is sufficiently charged.
tempt to modify the seat belt system; doing so If the sight glass is dark, the charge is low
could change the effectiveness of the system. and the battery must be recharged.
Failure to replace worn or damaged seat belts, or
making any modifications to the system, may re- If the sight glass is clear, the battery has a
sult in personal injury or death. low level of electrolyte and must be re-
placed.
27.1 Check the web for fraying, cuts, extreme
dirt and dust, or for severe fading from 2. Check the level of the wheel bearing lubricant in
exposure to sunlight, especially near the the hub cap at each end of the front axle.
buckle latch plate and in the D-loop guide If needed, fill the hubs to the level indicated on
area. the hub cap. See Group 35 of the Century Class
27.2 Check operation of the buckle, latch, Kom-
Trucks Maintenance Manual, for recommended
lubricants.
fort Latch or Sliding Komfort Latch (if
equipped), web retractor, and upper seat IMPORTANT: Before removing the fill plug, al-
belt mount on the door pillar. Check all ways clean the hub cap and plug.
visible components for wear or damage.
3. Examine the steering components.
27.3 Check the seat belt and tether belt con-
nection points and tighten any that are See Fig. 11.13. If repairs are needed, see
loose. Group 46 of the Century Class Trucks Workshop
Manual for instructions, or take the vehicle to an
28. Test the service brakes. authorized Freightliner dealer.
When starting to move the vehicle and before 3.1 Check the mounting bolts and pitman arm
picking up speed, test the brakes with the foot nut for tightness.
pedal and parking brake control valve (yellow
knob) to be sure they will bring the vehicle to a 3.2 Check the drag link nuts for missing cotter
safe stop. pins.
11.14
A
1
B
1
10/31/94 f200036a
A. Deflection B. Belt Free-Span

2 1 Fig. 11.14, Checking Belt Tension
3
sion, have the belt tensioner replaced. See
3 Group 01 of the Century Class Trucks Workshop
Manual for instructions, or take the vehicle to an
authorized Freightliner dealer.
10/11/2001 f461916
1. Steering Gear Mounting Bolt

Monthly Post-Trip Inspection and
2. Pitman Arm Pinch Bolt Nut Maintenance Procedures
3. Drag Link Nut
Fig. 11.13, Steering Gear Fasteners WARNING
3.3 Inspect the steering drive shaft and steer- Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
ing linkage for excessive looseness, or contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
other damage. known to the State of California to cause cancer
3.4 Tighten loose nuts and have damaged and reproductive harm. To prevent possible per-
parts replaced as needed. sonal injury, always wash your hands after han-
dling battery parts and related accessories.
4. Check the condition of the serpentine drive belt.
1. Clean the batteries.
Look for signs of glazing, wear (frayed edges),
damage (breaks or cracks), or oil contamination. 1.1 Remove any corrosion from the hold-down
If a belt is glazed, worn, damaged, or oil soaked, and the top of the battery.
have the belt replaced, following the instructions
in Group 01 of the Century Class Trucks Work- CAUTION
shop Manual.
Take care to keep the vent plugs tight so that the
CAUTION neutralizing solution does not enter any of the
battery cells and damage the battery.
Do not drive with a serpentine belt that is visibly 1.2 Use a soda solution to neutralize the acid
worn or damaged. If it fails, the lack of coolant present, then rinse off the soda solution
flow could rapidly cause damage to engine com- with clean water.
ponents.
1.3 If the battery posts or cable terminals are
5. Check the drive belt for proper tension. corroded, disconnect the terminals from
Use your index finger to apply force at the center the posts. Clean them with a soda solution
of the belt free-span. See Fig. 11.14. There is no and a wire brush. After cleaning, connect
adjustment for belt tension on engines with auto- the terminals to the battery posts, then
matic belt tensioners. If there is not proper ten-
11.15
apply a thin coat of petroleum jelly to the 4. Check the brake lining wear on all vehicles, in-
posts and terminals to help retard corro- cluding those with automatic slack adjusters.
sion. Proper brake operation is dependent on periodic
maintenance and inspection of the brake linings.
2. Inspect the radiator and heater hoses, including
the clamps and support brackets. 4.1 Check that brake linings are free of oil and
grease.
2.1 Make sure the radiator inlet and outlet
hoses are pliable and are not cracking or 4.2 Inspect the thickness of the brake linings.
ballooning. Replace hoses that show signs If the axle assembly is equipped with a
of cracking, weakening, or ballooning. dust shield or backing plate, remove the
inspection plugs. If any brake linings are
2.2 Make sure the heater hoses are pliable worn to less than approximately 1/4 inch
and are not cracking or ballooning. Re- (6.4 mm) at the thinnest point, have the
place hoses that show signs of cracking, linings replaced on all brake assemblies
weakening, or ballooning.
on that axle. See Group 42 of the Century
2.3 Tighten hose clamps as necessary, but do Class Trucks Workshop Manual for lining
not overtighten, as hose life can be ad- replacement instructions and camshaft
versely affected. end-play inspection.
2.4 Be sure the hose support brackets are 4.3 Check the brake drums for wear and
securely fastened. Make sure the hoses cracks.
are not located near sources of wear, 4.4 Check that the inspection plugs in the dust
abrasion, or high heat. shields or backing plates, if so equipped,
IMPORTANT: Replace all hoses, including are installed.
heater hoses, at the same time. Service-type
knitted or braided yarn-reinforced neoprene
hose is acceptable. Silicone hoses having an
extended service life can be substituted for the
reinforced neoprene type. See the Freightliner
Service Parts Catalog or contact your Freight-
liner Dealer.
3. Check the steering wheel for excessive play.
3.1 With the front tires straight ahead, turn the
steering wheel until motion is observed at
the front wheels.
3.2 Align a reference mark on a ruler, then
slowly turn the steering wheel in the oppo-
site direction until motion is again detected
at the wheels.
3.3 Measure the lash (free play) at the rim of
the steering wheel. Excessive lash exists
if steering wheel movement exceeds 2-1/4
inches (57 mm) with an 18-inch (450-mm)
steering wheel.
If there is excessive lash, check the steer-
ing system for wear or incorrect adjust-
ment of the linkage and steering gear be-
fore operating the vehicle.
11.16
12
Cab Appearance
Cab Washing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Care of Fiberglass Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Care of Chrome Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Care of Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Dashboard Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Velour Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
Cab Appearance
Cab Washing and Polishing Care of Chrome Parts

To protect the finish of your new vehicle, follow these To prevent rust, keep chrome parts clean and pro-
guidelines carefully: tected at all times. This is especially important during
winter driving and in coastal areas where there is
• During the first 30 days, rinse your vehicle fre-
exposure to salt air.
quently with water. If the vehicle is dirty, use a
mild liquid soap. Do not use detergent. When cleaning chrome parts, use clean water and a
soft cloth or sponge. A mild detergent may also be
• During the first 30 days, do not use anything
used.
abrasive on your vehicle. Brushes, chemicals,
and cleaners may scratch the finish. Sponge gently, then rinse. If necessary, use a non-
abrasive chrome cleaner to remove stubborn rust or
• During the first 120 days, do not wax your
other material. Do not use steel wool.
vehicle.
To help protect the chrome after cleaning, apply a
To extend the life of your vehicle’s finish, follow these coat of polishing wax to the surface. Never use wax
guidelines: on parts that are exposed to high heat, such as ex-
• Avoid washing your vehicle in the hot sun. haust pipes.
• Always use water. After the cab is completely
washed, dry it with a towel or chamois. Care of Exterior Lights
• Do not dust painted surfaces with a dry cloth, Clean the headlight lenses by hand only, using a
as this will scratch the paint. flannel cloth with mild, non-caustic soap or detergent,
and water.
• Do not remove ice or snow from a painted sur-
face with a scraper of any sort.
CAUTION
• To prevent damage to the finish, wax it regu-
larly. Before waxing, if the finish has become Do not use a power buffer, paper towels, chemi-
dull, remove oxidized paint using a cleaner cal solvents, or abrasive cleaners on the head-
specifically designed for this purpose. Remove light lens, all of which can remove the UV coating
all road tar and tree sap before waxing. from the surface, and result in yellowing of the
Freightliner recommends that a quality brand of lens.
cleaner or cleaner-polish and polishing wax be
used.
Dashboard Care
• Do not let diesel fuel or antifreeze stand on a
painted surface. If either should occur, rinse Periodically wipe the dashboard with a water-
the surface off with water. dampened cloth. A mild detergent can be used, but
avoid using strong detergents.
• To prevent rust, have any nicks or other dam-
age on the finish touched up as soon as pos-
sible.
CAUTION
• Park your vehicle in a sheltered area whenever Do not use Armor-All Protectant®, STP Son-of-a-
possible. Gun®, or other equivalent treatments. These
cleaners contain vinyl plasticizers that can cause
stress crazing in the interior plastic panels,
Care of Fiberglass Parts which can result in cracking of the panels.
Wash unpainted fiberglass air fairings and shields
monthly with a mild detergent, such as dishwashing Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning
liquid. Avoid strong alkaline cleansers.
To prevent soiling, frequent vacuuming or light brush-
Apply a wax specifically designed for fiberglass. ing to remove dust and dirt is recommended. Harsh
cleaning agents can cause permanent damage to
12.1
Cab Appearance
vinyl upholstery. To preserve the upholstery and pre- drogen peroxide onto the cloth. Allow the saturated
vent damage, carefully review the following sections cloth to remain on the spot for 30 to 60 minutes. For
for recommended cleaning procedures. Waxing or stubborn spots, allow the hydrogen-peroxide satu-
refinishing improves soil resistance and cleanability rated cloth to remain on the area overnight. Use cau-
for all vinyls. Any hard wax, such as that used on tion to prevent the solution from seeping into the
automobiles, may be used. seams, or it will weaken the cotton thread.
Ordinary Dirt Nail Polish and Nail Polish Remover

Wash the upholstery with warm water and mild soap, Prolonged contact with these substances causes per-
such as saddle or oil soap. Apply soapy water to a manent damage to vinyl. Careful blotting immediately
large area and allow to soak for a few minutes, then after contact minimizes damage. Do not spread the
rub briskly with a cloth to remove the dirt. This can liquid during removal.
be repeated several times, as necessary.
If dirt is deeply imbedded, use a soft bristle brush Shoe Polish
after applying the soap. Most shoe polishes contain dyes which penetrate
If dirt is extremely difficult to remove, wall-washing vinyl and stain it permanently. Shoe polish should be
preparations normally found around the home can be wiped off as quickly as possible using naphtha or
used. Powdered cleaners, such as those used for lighter fluid. If staining occurs, try the procedure used
sinks and tiles, are abrasive and must be used with for sulfide stains.
caution as they can scratch the vinyl or give it a per-
manent dull appearance. Ball Point Ink
Ball point ink can sometimes be removed if rubbed
Chewing Gum immediately with a damp cloth, using water or rub-
Harden the gum with an ice cube wrapped in a plas- bing alcohol. If this does not work, try the procedure
tic bag, then scrape it off with a dull knife. Any re- used for sulfide stains.
maining traces of gum can be removed with an all-
purpose light oil (peanut butter will also work) and Miscellaneous
wiped off.
If stains do not respond to any of the treatments de-
scribed above, it is sometimes helpful to expose the
Tars, Asphalts, and Creosote vinyl to direct sunlight for up to 30 hours. Mustard,
Each of these items stains vinyl after prolonged con- ball point ink, certain shoe polishes, and dyes often
tact. They should be wiped off immediately and the bleach out in direct sunlight, leaving the vinyl undam-
area carefully cleaned, using a cloth dampened with aged.
naphtha.
Velour Upholstery Cleaning
Paint, Shoe Heel Marks
To prevent soiling, frequent vacuuming or light brush-
Paint should be removed immediately. Do not use ing to remove dust and dirt is recommended. Spot
paint remover or liquid-type brush cleaner on vinyl. clean with a mild solvent or an upholstery shampoo,
An unprinted cloth, dampened with naphtha or tur- or the foam from a mild detergent. When using a sol-
pentine may be used. Use care to prevent contact vent or a dry-cleaning product, follow the instructions
with parts of the upholstery that are not vinyl. carefully, and clean only in a well-ventilated area.
Avoid any product that contains carbon tetrachloride
Sulfide Stains or other toxic materials. With either method, pretest a
small area before proceeding. Use a professional
Sulfide compounds, such as those found in eggs and
upholstery cleaning service when extensive cleaning
some canned goods, can stain after prolonged con-
is needed.
tact with vinyl. These stains can be removed by plac-
ing a clean, unprinted piece of cloth over the spotted
area and pouring a liberal amount of 6 percent hy-
12.2
Cab Appearance
Grease and Oil-Based Stains

Dampen a small absorbent cloth with dry-cleaning
solvent or spot remover. Apply the cloth carefully to
the spot from the outer edge to the center. Pat and
blot the spot with a clean, dry cloth. Repeat several
times, as necessary, turning the cloths so that the
stain does not redeposit on the fabric.
Sugar and Water-Based Stains

Apply water-based detergent or cleaner, working in
circular motions. Pat and blot as dry as possible. Re-
peat, if necessary, before drying thoroughly.
Chewing Gum or Wax

Harden the gum or wax with an ice cube wrapped in
a plastic bag, then scrape it off with a dull knife. Ex-
cess wax can be absorbed by placing a thick white
blotter over the wax and heating with a warm (not
hot) iron. Remove the remainder by using the proce-
dure for grease and oil-based stains.
Mildew
Brush the dry fabric with a soft brush. Sponge with
detergent, and blot. If the fabric is colorfast, dilute a
teaspoon of bleach in one quart (one liter) of cool
water. Apply with a swab, directly on the mildew
stain. Dab repeatedly with clear, cool water, and blot
dry.
12.3
13
In an Emergency
Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Emergency Kit, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Emergency Starting With Jumper Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3
Fire in the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4
In an Emergency
Hazard Warning Lights WARNING

The hazard warning light switch tab is located on the
turn signal control lever. See Fig. 13.1.To operate the Use extreme care when placing flares in emer-
hazard lights, pull the tab out. All of the turn signal gency situations that involve exposure to flam-
lights and both of the indicator lights on the control mable substances such as fuel. An explosion or
panel will flash. fire could occur causing serious personal injury.
Towing
When it is necessary to tow the vehicle, make sure
the instructions below are closely followed to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
WARNING
Do not tow an unbraked vehicle if the combined
weight of both vehicles is more than the sum of
the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR) of the tow-
ing vehicle. Otherwise brake capacity will be in-
9/26/95 f541098
adequate, which could result in personal injury or
Fig. 13.1, Hazard Warning Light Switch Tab (left-hand
death.
drive shown)
CAUTION
To cancel the hazard warning lights, push the turn
signal control lever either up or down, then return the If the vehicle is equipped with the AirLiner front
lever to its neutral position. suspension or the Hendrickson STEERTEK axle,
it is required that tow straps be used when tow-
Fire Extinguisher ing the vehicle. A tow strap should be connected
to the tow hooks, if equipped, or wrapped around
A fire extinguisher is located in the cab by the driv- the front axle. Using a tow chain around the front
er’s door. axle will damage the axle.
Emergency Kit, Optional Front Towing Hookup

An optional emergency kit package is located be- 1. Disconnect the battery ground cables.
tween the seats, at the front of the center console, if
the vehicle does not have a sleeper compartment. If CAUTION
there is a sleeper compartment, the emergency kit is
located elsewhere, depending on vehicle configura- Failure to remove the axle shafts when towing
tion. The package includes one or more of each of the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground
the following: first aid kit, a reflective vest, and a tri- could result in damage to the transmission and
angular reflector and flare kit. other parts.
If there is an emergency while driving, cautiously pull 2. Remove both drive axle shafts. On dual drive
off the road, paying attention to other traffic. Turn on axles, if the vehicle is to be lifted and towed, re-
the hazard warning lights. Place the flares and reflec- move only the rearmost drive axle shafts.
tor along the side of the road, to alert other drivers
On vehicles equipped with an air fairing, remove
that an emergency situation exists.
both the forward and rearmost drive axle shafts if
there is insufficient towing clearance.
13.1
In an Emergency
3. Cover the ends of the hubs with metal plates or 10. On vehicles equipped with an air fairing, repeat
plywood cut to fit the axle opening, and drilled to the measurement taken in step 8. The difference
fit the axle shaft studs. This prevents lubricant between the two measurements must not exceed
from leaking out, and will keep contaminants 14 inches (36 cm). If necessary, lower the ve-
from getting into and damaging the wheel bear- hicle.
ings and axle lubricant.
11. Connect the clearance lights, taillights, and sig-
nal lights. Connect any special towing lights re-
CAUTION quired by local regulations.
Failure to protect the frame rails from the chains
could cause damage, leading to eventual frame WARNING
failure.
Failure to chock the tires or connect the tow
4. On dual drive axles, if the vehicle is to be lifted truck’s air brake system before releasing the
and towed, chain the forward rear-axle assembly spring parking brakes could allow the disabled
to the vehicle frame. Use protection to keep the vehicle to suddenly roll. This could cause prop-
chains from damaging the frame. erty damage or personal injury.
5. Remove the bumper extension and chrome 12. Chock the disabled vehicle’s tires, and connect
bumper, if so equipped. Remove the bumper fair- the towing vehicle’s air brake system to the ve-
ing, if so equipped. hicle being towed. Then, release the spring park-
ing brakes and remove the chocks.
6. On vehicles equipped with an air fairing, adjust
the trim tab to the lowest position.
Rear Towing Hookup
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not pass a sling (for example, a rope or chain)
from one tow hook to another to fasten for tow- Using a rear towing hookup on a vehicle
ing (see Fig. 13.2). Known as reeving, this prac- equipped with a cab-mounted aerodynamic de-
tice is not permissible in most industrial applica- vice could cause damage to the cab structure
tions of towing and hoisting. Reeving can because of the possibility of excessive wind
overload the hooks and result in damage to the force.
vehicle. 1. Place the front tires straight forward, and secure
7. Attach the towing device. Due to the many vari- the steering wheel in this position.
ables that exist in towing, positioning the lifting 2. Disconnect the battery ground cables.
and towing device is the sole responsibility of the
towing-vehicle operator.
CAUTION
8. On vehicles equipped with an air fairing, mea-
sure the distance from the ground to the bumper, Failure to protect the frame rails from the chains
or from the ground to a frame bracket. could cause damage, leading to eventual frame
failure.
9. Lift the vehicle, and secure the safety chains. If
extra towing clearance is needed, remove the 3. On dual drive axles, using protection to keep the
front wheels. chains from damaging the vehicle frame, chain
the forward-rear drive axle to the frame.
WARNING 4. Attach the towing device. Due to the many vari-
ables that exist in towing, positioning the lifting
Failure to lower the vehicle could result in the air and towing device is the sole responsibility of the
fairing striking an overhead obstruction, such as towing-vehicle operator.
a bridge or overpass, and causing vehicle dam-
age or personal injury.
13.2
In an Emergency
OK
2 1
1
OK
01/11/2006 f880694
IMPORTANT: Do not reeve when towing.

1. Tow Hook 2. Chain
Fig. 13.2, Reeving
5. Lift the vehicle, and secure the safety chains. If

extra clearance is needed, remove the bumper CAUTION
extension, if equipped.
Make sure both starting systems have the same
6. Connect the clearance lights, taillights, and sig- voltage outputs, and avoid making sparks. Other-
nal lights. Also connect any special towing lights wise the vehicle charging systems could be se-
required by local regulations. verely damaged. Also, do not attempt to charge
isolated, deep-cycle batteries with jumper cables.
Emergency Starting With Follow the battery manufacturer’s instructions
when charging deep-cycle batteries.
Jumper Cables
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with an optional
When using jumper cables, follow the instructions jump-start post, attach the positive cable clamp
below. to that post instead of to the battery.
1. Apply the parking brakes and turn off the lights
WARNING and all other electrical loads.
Batteries release explosive gas. Do not smoke 2. Connect an end of one jumper cable to the posi-
when working around batteries. Put out all flames tive terminal of the booster battery (or jump-start
and remove all sources of sparks or intense heat post, if equipped), and connect the other end of
in the vicinity of the battery. Do not allow the ve- the cable to the positive terminal of the dis-
hicles to touch each other. Do not lean over the charged battery (or jump-start post, if equipped).
batteries when making connections, and keep all See Fig. 13.3.
other persons away from the batteries. Failure to
follow these precautions could lead to severe
personal injury as a result of an explosion or
acid burns.
13.3
In an Emergency
C
WARNING
A
B D Do the next step exactly as instructed and do not
allow the clamps of one cable to touch the
+ − + clamps of the other cable. Otherwise, a spark
− could occur near a battery, possibly resulting in
E G
+ − − + severe personal injury from explosion and acid
E burns.
+ − + 7. Disconnect the grounded cable from the frame or
−
other non-battery location, then disconnect the
F other end of the cable.
A
1 2 8. Disconnect the remaining cable from the newly
10/18/94 f540027b
charged battery (or jump-start post, if equipped)
A. To Ground E. To Starter first, then disconnect the other end.
B. Connect 3rd F. Connect 2nd
C. To Frame (ground) G. Connect 1st
D. Connect Last Fire in the Cab
1. Booster Battery 2. Discharged Battery
The incidence of fire in heavy- and medium-duty
Fig. 13.3, Jumper Connections trucks is rare, according to data from the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration. Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard #302 limits the flammability
WARNING of specified materials used inside the cab, but de-
spite this, most materials will burn. The cab of this
Do the next step exactly as instructed and do not vehicle contains urethane foam, which is flammable.
allow the clamps of one cable to touch the
clamps of the other cable. Otherwise, a spark
could occur near a battery, possibly resulting in WARNING
severe personal injury from explosion and acid
burns. Urethane foam is flammable! Do not allow any
flames, sparks, or other heat sources such as
3. Connect one end of the second jumper cable to cigarettes or light bulbs to contact urethane
the negative terminal of the booster battery, and foam. Urethane foam in contact with such heat
connect the other end of the cable to a ground at sources could cause a serious, rapid fire, which
least 12 inches (300 mm) away from the batter- could result in death, severe burns, or gas poi-
ies of the vehicle needing the start. The vehicle soning, as well as damage to the vehicle.
frame is usually a good ground. Do not connect
the cable to or near the discharged batteries. In Case of a Cab Fire
4. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster As quickly as possible, bring the vehicle to a safe
batteries, and let the engine run a few minutes to stop, apply the parking brake, turn off the ignition,
charge the batteries of the other vehicle. and get out of the vehicle.
5. Attempt to start the engine of the vehicle with the
batteries receiving the charge. Do not operate
the starter longer than 30 seconds, and wait at
least two minutes between starting attempts to
allow the starter to cool.
6. When the engine starts, let it idle a few minutes.
13.4
Index
Subject Page Subject Page

A Cab-to-Sleeper Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Air Bag, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 Standard (CMVSS) Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Air Bag Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 Care of Chrome Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Allison Automatic Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.35 Care of Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
General Information, Allison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.35 Care of Fiberglass Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Operation, Allison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.35 Circuit Breaker/Relay Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
ASF Castloc II and Simplex Clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
Series Fifth Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6 Clutch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
Fifth Wheel Locking and General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7 Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.25
Fifth Wheel Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10 Cold-Weather Operation—CAT,
Fifth Wheel Slide Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9 Cummins, DDE S60, M-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6 Caterpillar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16
Cummins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
B DDE S60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
Mercedes-Benz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18
Back-of-Cab Grab Handles, Collision Warning System
Steps, and Deck Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 (CWS), Eaton VORAD EVT–
Back-of-Cab Access Points 300 (Stand Alone), Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.58
(typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 Driver Display Unit (DDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.58
Exiting Back-of-Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 Failure Display Mode/Fault
Baggage Compartment Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.62
Battery Box Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 In Case of Accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.62
Blend Air Heater and Air Maintenance and
Conditioner System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.62
Cab Climate Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Side Sensor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.60
Constant Discharge Special Road Situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.61
Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Collision Warning System
Sleeper Climate Control (CWS), Eaton VORAD EVT–
Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 300 (with ICU-Integrated
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 display), Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.62
Automatic Slack Adjusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 Dash Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.63
Brake System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Headway Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 Maintenance and
Meritor WABCO® Antilock Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.68
Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 Side Sensor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.67
Meritor WABCO® Electronic Special Road Situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.67
Braking System (EBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39
Air Suspension Dump Valve,
C Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50
Allison Automatic
Cab Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 Transmission Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51
Ash Tray and Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 Automatic Engine Idler/
Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 Timer, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50
Dash Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 Battery Isolator System,
Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.47
Footwell Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Caterpillar C–10, C–12, and
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 3406E Electronic Engine
Map Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 Operator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45
Overhead Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 CB Radio Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50
Waste Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50
Cab Door Locks and Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Cab Washing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
I-1
Index

Controlled Traction Turn Signal Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50
Differential Control Valve Utility Light Switch, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.47
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50 Windshield Wiper/Washer
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48
Cummins CELECT™ Plus
Electronic Engines
Operator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.46 D
Detroit Diesel Electronic Dashboard Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Engine Control (DDEC IV®)
Operator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41 DD15 Heavy-Duty Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
Detroit Diesel Electronic DDEC VI Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
Engine Control (DDEC VI®) Engine Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
Operator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43 Door Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Ether Start, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.46
Fifth Wheel Air Slide Control
Valve Switch, Optional Air- E
Operated Sliding Fifth Eaton 2-Speed Tandem Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49
Dual Range 2-Speed
Hazard Warning Light Switch Tandem Axle Operation
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51 with Multispeed
Headlight Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51 Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
Headlight Switch and Eaton Fuller AutoSelect
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.47 Automated Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.27
Heater/Air-Conditioner General Information,
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48 AutoSelect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.27
Ignition Switch and Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39 Operation, AutoSelect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.29
Interaxle Differential Lockout Eaton Fuller AutoShift
Control Valve Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49 Automated Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Interior Light Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52 General Information,
Interrupt Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48 AutoShift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Jacobs Engine Brake Operation, AutoShift (without
Switch, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49 SmartShift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
Lane Guidance™ System Operation, SmartShift With
Rocker Switch, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50 Eaton Fuller AutoShift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
Left and Right Windshield- Eaton Fuller Deep-Reduction
Fan Switches Optional Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.21
Ceiling-Mounted Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48 General Information, Deep
Low Voltage Disconnect, Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.21
Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.46 Operation, Deep Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.21
Mirror Heat Switch, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52 Eaton Fuller Range-Shift
Panel Lamp Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.47 Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15
Parking Brake Control Valve, General Information, Eaton
and Trailer Air Supply Range-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15
Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49 Operation, Eaton Range-
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52 Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.16
Power Takeoff (PTO) Eaton Fuller Splitter and
Governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.40 Range-Shift Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.18
Request/Inhibit Regen General Information, Eaton
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.46 Splitter and Range-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.18
Road Light Switch, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.47 Operation, Eaton Splitter and
Suspension Seat Adjustment Range-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.19
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52 Eaton Fuller Top 2 and
Tilt Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54 Lightning Semi-Automated
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.30
Trailer Brake Hand Control
Valve Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51 General Information, Top 2
and Lightning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.30
Transmission Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51
I-2
Index

Operation, Top 2/Lightning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.30 Battery Disconnect Switch,
Eaton Interaxle Differential Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57
Lockout Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
Eaton Single Reduction Axles
With Controlled Traction
F
Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Eaton UltraShift DM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6 Standard (FMVSS) Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
General Information, Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
UltraShift™ DM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6 Fire in the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4
Operation, UltraShift DM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 In Case of a Cab Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4
Ultrashift Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.11 Fontaine Fifth Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Emergency Kit, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1 Fifth Wheel Locking
Emergency Starting With Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.12
Jumper Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3 Fifth Wheel Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15
Engine Braking System—CAT, Fifth Wheel Slide Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.14
Cummins, DDE S60, M-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Constant-Throttle Valves Freightliner SmartShift Shift
(MBE4000 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Jacobs Engine Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20 General Information,
Turbo Brake (MBE4000 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21 SmartShift™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Engine Break-In—CAT,
Cummins, DDE S60, M-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
Caterpillar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10 G
Cummins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10 Grab Handles and Access
DDE S60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Mercedes-Benz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10 Entering the Driver’s Side for
Engine Operation—CAT, Right-Hand-Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
Cummins, DDE S60, M-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11 Entering the Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Caterpillar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11 Entering the Passenger’s
Cummins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12 Side for Right-Hand-Drive
DDE S60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13 Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Mercedes-Benz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15 Entering the Passenger’s
Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Engine Shutdown—CAT,
Cummins, DDE S60, M-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18 Exiting the Driver’s Side for
Right-Hand-Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
Caterpillar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18
Exiting the Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Cummins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.19
Exiting the Passenger’s Side
DDE S60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.19 for Right-Hand-Drive
Mercedes-Benz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.19 Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Engine Starting—CAT, Exiting the Passenger’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
Cummins, DDE S60, M-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
Cold-Weather Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 H
EPA Emission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
EPA07 Exhaust Emissions High-Altitude Operation—CAT,
Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Cummins, DDE S60, M-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18
Vehicle Noise Emission Holland Fifth Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Control Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Fifth Wheel Locking
EPA07 Aftertreatment System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
(ATS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Fifth Wheel Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6
Exhaust Braking System—CAT, Fifth Wheel Slide Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
Cummins, DDE S60, M-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22
Holland Trailer Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.17
Exterior Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.17
I-3
Index

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.17 The Message Display
Hood Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25
To Return the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 Truckweb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20
To Tilt the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 Warning and Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33
I Air-Weigh On-Board Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ammeter, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.38
2.37
Ignition and Lock Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Application Air Pressure
Instrument and Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Gauge, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36
Warning and Shutdown Borg Indak Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.37
Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34
Instrumentation Control Unit 3 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34
(ICU3/ICU3 ‘07), Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16 Engine Oil Temperature
ICU Ignition Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17 Gauge, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35
Warning and Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17 Forward and Rear Axle Oil
Instrumentation Control Unit 4M Temperature Gauges,
(ICU4M and ICU4M-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36
Alert Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36
Automated Manual Intake-Air Restriction Gauge,
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.37
Buzzer and Chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 Intake-Air Restriction
Direct Access Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.37
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 Kysor Digital Clock, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.38
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Pana-Pacific Digital Clock,
Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.37
Ignition Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
Primary and Secondary Air
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 Pressure Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36
Stationary Access Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 Pyrometer, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35
Instrumentation Control Unit, Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34
Level II, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33
Alert Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32
Transmission Oil
Level II ICU Ignition Temperature Gauge,
Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32 Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36
Setting the Units for the Turbocharger Boost
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32 Pressure Gauge, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35
Warning and Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35
Instrumentation Control Unit,
Level III (ICU2M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
Alert Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26 K
AMT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21 Keyless Security System,
Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22 Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Direct Access Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27 Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Fuel Use Efficiency Level Fob Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
(FUEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Instant Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20 How It Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23
Level III ICU Ignition
Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23 L
Level III ICU Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25 Lane Guidance System,
Level III ICU Roll Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25 Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.68
Stationary Access Screens—
Used With Parking Brake
Applied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28
Target MPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22
I-4
Index

M R
Meritor Drive Axles With Main Roll Stability Advisor and
Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54
Meritor Engine Synchro Shift Clearing Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56
(ESS) Automated Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.32 Hard Braking Advisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56
General Information, ESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.32 Roll Stability Advisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.55
Operation, ESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.33 Roll Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56
Meritor Interaxle Differential Trip/Leg Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56
Lockout Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
Meritor Main Differential Lock
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 S
Meritor Range-Shift Seat Belts and Tether Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.24
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
General Information, Meritor
Range-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.24 Seat Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
Operation, Meritor Range- Seat Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.24 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Meritor Single Drive Axles With Dura-Form Fleetcruiser Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
Traction Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 EzyRider® Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
Meritor Splitter and Range-Shift Freightliner/Bostrom Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.26 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
General Information, Meritor National 2000 Series Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
Splitter and Range-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.26
Sleeper Bunk Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Operation, Meritor Splitter
and Range-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.26 Sleeper Compartment
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
Meritor SureShift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.12
Bunk Restraint Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
Operation, Meritor SureShift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.12
Bunk Restraint Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
Meritor Tandem Drive Axles
With Interaxle Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
Meritor WABCO Antilock Sleeper Compartment Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57 Sleeper Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
SPACE System, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
P Safety Guidelines for the
SPACE System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
Parked HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 Starting After Extended
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 Shutdown or Oil Change—
CAT, Cummins, DDE S60,
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 M-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
Premier Trailer Couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15 Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16 Power Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Pretrip and Post-Trip Inspection Supplemental Restraint System,
and Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
Daily Pretrip Inspection and
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
Monthly Post-Trip Inspection T
and Maintenance
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15 Tire and Rim Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Weekly Post-Trip Inspection Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
and Maintenance Front Towing Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 Rear Towing Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2
Pretrip and Post-Trip Inspection
Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
V
Vehicle Specification Decal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
I-5
Index
Subject Page
Velour Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
Chewing Gum or Wax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3
Grease and Oil-Based Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3
Mildew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3
Sugar and Water-Based
Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3
Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Ball Point Ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
Chewing Gum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
Nail Polish and Nail Polish
Remover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
Ordinary Dirt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
Paint, Shoe Heel Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
Shoe Polish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
Sulfide Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
Tars, Asphalts, and Creosote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
W
Water-Valve-Controlled Heater
and Air Conditioner System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Air Conditioning, Sleeper
Heater and Air Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Defogging and Defrosting
Using Fresh Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Fresh Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Heating, Sleeper Heater and
Air Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Windshield Washer Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Z
ZF Meritor FreedomLine
Automated Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.13
General Information,
FreedomLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.13
Operation, FreedomLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.13
I-6

Century Class ST and Coronado Driver's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Century Class ST and Coronado Driver's Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Century Class ST and Coronado Driver's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What information is contained in the vehicle's workshop and maintenance manuals?

What information is contained in the vehicle's workshop and maintenance manuals?

What are some of the components that may be equipped on custom-built Freightliner vehicles?

What are some of the components that may be equipped on custom-built Freightliner vehicles?

Foreword

Introduction dination, or Fleetpack assistance. Our people are

Customer Assistance Center

Vehicle Specification Decal 1 2 3

1. Date of Manufacture: by month and year

Tire and Rim Labels

2 EPA Emission Control

11/01/95 f601086 VEHICLE NOISE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

Fig. 1.7, Vehicle Noise Emission Control Label

EPA07 Exhaust Emissions

EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM INFORMATION

See Engine Operator’s Manual for complete Regeneration Instructions.

Fig. 1.8, Sunvisor Warning Label

It is a violation of federal law to alter exhaust plumb-

OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT

0 100 100 250 0 160 0 160

100 8 E F 110 350

Warning and Indicator Lights

Warning and Indicator Lights

Indicates a problem with the ABS is detected. Repair the

Flashes on and off whenever the outside turn signal lights

Flashes on and off whenever the outside turn signal lights

High-Beam Indicator (blue) Indicates the headlights are on high beam.

Activates with a buzzer when air pressure in the primary or

Activates with a buzzer when the coolant temperature goes

Activates with a buzzer when engine oil pressure goes below

Warning and Indicator Lights

Illuminates for 15 seconds when the ignition key is turned to

Intake Heater (amber) Indicates the intake air heater is active.

The dash message center is the heart of the ICU4M/ • tachometer

• low air pressure NOTE: On vehicles with automated manual transmis-

More important messages take priority over less im-

"Parking Brake On" Screen "Low Voltage" Screen

S Push Once When in Setup, this brings up a screen where a

AMT= Current gear information for automated manual transmissions.

Fig. 2.11, Set/Reset Key Functions

IDLE HOURS 1234:56

12/01/2004 Go to Fuel Information Screens f040699

FUEL FUEL USED 12345.6 IDLE GALLONS 12.3

Go to Engine Information Screens

gallons and PTO gallons. This sequence completes Diagnostic Information

ENG OIL LEVEL

ENG OIL LEVEL

ENG OIL LEVEL

Hist Fault # 1 Hist Fault # n

LAST OCCUR 123456.7 LAST OCCUR 123456.7

FIRST OCCUR 123456.7 FIRST OCCUR 123456.7

12/17/2004 Go to Service Information Screens f040702

NOTE: If the service information screen is not Setup Information

Distance prior to reaching the Distance traveled beyond the

Go to Set−up Information Screens

Go to Setup Information Screens

AMT= Current gear information for automated manual transmissions.

• Language press the set/reset key to display a decision screen

PUSH SET KEY TO SERVICE INTERVAL

If Service Interval is set to HOURS